Merge branch 'master' into stephenwunrow-tc-create-1

en_tn_03-LEV.tsv

@@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ LEV	23	2	v493		מוֹעֲדֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	the appointed times of Yahweh
 LEV	23	3	vk4w		וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י שַׁבַּ֤ת שַׁבָּתוֹן֙	1	and on the seventh day is a sabbath of solemn rest	The people must **rest** habitually on the **seventh day**. After every six days in which they can work, they must rest on the seventh day.
 LEV	23	3	t53y	figs-metonymy	מִקְרָא־ קֹ֔דֶשׁ	1	a holy assembly	The requirement that people assemble to worship God on that day is spoken of as if that day were the **assembly**. Alternate translation: “a holy day, when you must assemble together to worship me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LEV	23	4	l6ez		בְּ⁠מוֹעֲדָֽ⁠ם	1	at their appointed times	Alternate translation: “at their proper times”
-LEV	23	5	nv3g	translate-hebrewmonths	בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ	1	In the first month, on day 14 of the month	The **first month** of the Hebrew calendar marks when Yahweh brought the Israelites out of Egypt. The fourteenth day is around the beginning of April on the Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]])
+LEV	23	5	nv3g	translate-hebrewmonths	בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ	1	In the first month, on day 14 of the month	The **first month** of the Hebrew calendar marks when Yahweh brought the Israelites out of Egypt. The fourteenth day is around the beginning of April on the Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 LEV	23	5	p2bw	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן	1	In the first month	The word **first** is the ordinal form of “one”. Alternate translation: “In month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LEV	23	5	bbn4		בֵּ֣ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּ֑יִם	1	between the evenings	Alternate translation: “at sunset”
 LEV	23	6	b47g	translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	And on day 15 of this month	Here, **this month** is the first month of the Hebrew calendar (verse 5). It was in the first month that Yahweh brought the Israelites out of Egypt. The fifteenth day is around the beginning of April on the Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])

en_tn_04-NUM.tsv

@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ NUM	7	29	m62d			0	Eliab son of Helon	See how you translated this man’s name in
 NUM	7	30	g7np	translate-ordinal		0	the fourth day	Alternate translation: “day 4” or “day number 4” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	30	i4g9			0	Elizur son of Shedeur	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:5](../01/05.md).
 NUM	7	31	z13a	translate-bweight	שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-NUM	7	31	x59n	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	<br>See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	31	x59n	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	31	ccm9	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	31	xme1	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	32	ce94	translate-bweight		0	one gold dish weighing ten shekels	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
@@ -476,8 +476,8 @@ NUM	7	35	axj1			0	This was the sacrifice of Elizur son of Shedeur	Alternate tran
 NUM	7	35	dp1x			0	Elizur son of Shedeur	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:5](../01/05.md).
 NUM	7	36	t1iw	translate-ordinal		0	the fifth day	Alternate translation: “day 5” or “day number 5” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	36	vd7n			0	Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:6](../01/06.md).
-NUM	7	37	l2gt	translate-bweight	ֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-NUM	7	37	ui86	translate-bweight	בְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	37	l2gt	translate-bweight	וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	37	ui86	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	37	kj44	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	37	ekt1	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	38	d1vh	translate-bweight		0	one gold dish weighing ten shekels	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ NUM	7	41	p15a	translate-names		0	This was the sacrifice of Shelumiel son of Zuri
 NUM	7	41	xhm1			0	Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:6](../01/06.md).
 NUM	7	42	uxi5	translate-ordinal		0	the sixth day	Alternate translation: “day 6” or “day number 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	42	h5ih			0	Eliasaph son of Deuel	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:14](../01/14.md).
-NUM	7	43	e7hj	translate-bweight	ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	43	e7hj	translate-bweight	וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	43	dv3m	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	43	ms6n	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	43	b9rg	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ NUM	7	47	xa33			0	This was the sacrifice of Eliasaph son of Deuel	Alternate tran
 NUM	7	47	ypc1			0	Eliasaph son of Deuel	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:14](../01/14.md).
 NUM	7	48	s1nr	translate-ordinal		0	the seventh day	Alternate translation: “day 7” or “day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	48	v3m7			0	Elishama son of Ammihud	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:10](../01/10.md).
-NUM	7	49	kx1k	translate-bweight	ִ֣ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	49	kx1k	translate-bweight	וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	49	rk8e	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	49	jyg2	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	49	is9v	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ NUM	7	53	f8vp			0	This was the sacrifice of Elishama son of Ammihud	Alternate tr
 NUM	7	53	e3cx			0	Elishama son of Ammihud	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:10](../01/10.md).
 NUM	7	54	n5zk	translate-ordinal		0	the eighth day	Alternate translation: “day 8” or “day number 8” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	54	qnm9			0	Gamaliel son of Pedahzur	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:10](../01/10.md).
-NUM	7	55	guv1	translate-bweight	ם וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	55	guv1	translate-bweight	וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	55	acb7	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	55	qj3k	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	55	w1s9	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mixed with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ NUM	7	59	ixg3			0	Gamaliel son of Pedahzur	See how you translated this man’s n
 NUM	7	60	d8hi	translate-ordinal		0	the ninth day	Alternate translation: “day 9” or “day number 9” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	60	h4gl			0	Abidan son of Gideoni	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:11](../01/11.md).
 NUM	7	61	wl2g	translate-bweight	שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-NUM	7	61	gv7x	translate-bweight	ְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	61	gv7x	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	61	r94v	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	61	aq7k	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mingled with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	62	c8nr	translate-bweight		0	one gold dish weighing ten shekels	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
@@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ NUM	7	71	k6u1			0	Ahiezer son of Ammishaddai	See how you translated this man’s
 NUM	7	72	k86c	translate-ordinal		0	the eleventh day	Alternate translation: “day 11” or “day number 11” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NUM	7	72	sk51			0	Pagiel son of Okran	See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:13](../01/13.md).
 NUM	7	73	tj2a	translate-bweight	וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒	1	its weight was 130	See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-NUM	7	73	jnf2	translate-bweight	ִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+NUM	7	73	jnf2	translate-bweight	שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל	1	70 shekels	See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	73	bxh3	translate-bweight		0	by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel	There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 NUM	7	73	vra2	figs-activepassive		0	fine flour mingled with oil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	7	74	s3qc	translate-bweight		0	one gold dish weighing ten shekels	If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
@@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ NUM	19	15	aj43	figs-doublenegatives		0	Every open container with no cover become
 NUM	19	16	kwe8	figs-activepassive		0	someone who has been killed with a sword	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone whom someone else has killed with a sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	19	17	j1j3	figs-metaphor		0	General Information:	The idea of “unclean” represents not being acceptable to God or fit for use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	19	17	j1j4	figs-metaphor		0	General Information:	The ideas of “clean” and “purify” here represent being acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NUM	19	20	d5l6	figs-metaphor		0	General Information:	The ideas of “clean” and “purify” represent being acceptable to God and making something acceptable to God. The ideas of “unclean,” “defile,” and “impurity,” represent not being acceptable to God, making something unacceptable to God, and the state of being unacceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]))
+NUM	19	20	d5l6	figs-metaphor		0	General Information:	The ideas of “clean” and “purify” represent being acceptable to God and making something acceptable to God. The ideas of “unclean,” “defile,” and “impurity,” represent not being acceptable to God, making something unacceptable to God, and the state of being unacceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	19	20	mz5q	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה הַ⁠נֶּ֥פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִ֖וא	1	that person shall be cut off	Here the phrase **be cut off** means to be disowned and sent away. See how you translated this in [Numbers 9:13](../09/13.md). Alternate translation: “that person must be sent away” or “you must send that person away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	19	20	u7dz	figs-activepassive		0	The water for impurity has not been sprinkled on him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one has sprinkled the water for impurity on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	19	21	bs1a			0	the water for impurity	See how you translated this in [Numbers 19:13](../19/13.md). Alternate translation: “the water that is sprinkled on impure things to make them pure” or “the water for making things pure”
@@ -1158,8 +1158,8 @@ NUM	21	26	v9rj			0	Sihon had taken all his land	Here “his” refers to the kin
 NUM	21	27	bf5s	figs-parallelism		0	Heshbon … city of Sihon	These are two names that refer to the same city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	21	27	pw7i	figs-activepassive		0	Let the city of Sihon be rebuilt and established again	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let someone rebuild and establish again the city of Sihon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	21	27	a4ni	figs-doublet		0	rebuilt and established	These two terms are very similar and emphasize that the city will be fully rebuilt. Alternate translation: “completely rebuilt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-NUM	21	28	hxh1	figs-parallelism	כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן	1	For fire went out from Heshbon,<br>a flame from the city of Sihon	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that destruction will begin at Heshbon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-NUM	21	28	qha8	figs-metaphor	כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן	1	For fire went out from Heshbon,<br>a flame from the city of Sihon	Here the destroying army is spoken of as if it were a fire. Alternate translation: “King Sihon led a strong army from the city of Heshbon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	21	28	hxh1	figs-parallelism	כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן	1	For fire went out from Heshbon, a flame from the city of Sihon	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that destruction will begin at Heshbon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+NUM	21	28	qha8	figs-metaphor	כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן	1	For fire went out from Heshbon, a flame from the city of Sihon	Here the destroying army is spoken of as if it were a fire. Alternate translation: “King Sihon led a strong army from the city of Heshbon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	21	28	di4e	figs-metaphor		0	devoured Ar of Moab	The army of Sihon is spoken of as if it was an animal that ate up the city of Ar. Alternate translation: “destroyed the town of Ar in the land of Moab” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NUM	21	29	cu3d	figs-parallelism		0	Moab … people of Chemosh	These two phrases refer to the same people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	21	29	r97r			0	people of Chemosh	Alternate translation: “Chemosh” was the name of the false god whom the Moabites worshiped. Alternate translation: “the people who worship Chemosh”
@@ -1255,8 +1255,8 @@ NUM	23	9	hq42	figs-parallelism		0	from the top of the rocks I see him … from t
 NUM	23	9	a551	figs-metonymy		0	I see him … I look at him	Here “him” is a metonym that refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	23	9	mm7u			0	there is a people	Alternate translation: “there is a group of people”
 NUM	23	9	ni8f	figs-litotes		0	do not consider themselves as just an ordinary nation	This negative statement is used to stress that the opposite is true. Alternate translation: “they consider themselves to be a special nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-NUM	23	10	hr4v	figs-metaphor	מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Who can count the dust of Jacob<br>or number the fourth part of Israel?	Here **dust of Jacob** is a metaphor that speaks of the number of Israelites as if they were as numerous as the specks of dust. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NUM	23	10	x7sy	figs-rquestion	מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Who can count the dust of Jacob<br>or number the fourth part of Israel?	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “There are too many Israelites to count. No one could count even a fourth of them because there are so many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+NUM	23	10	hr4v	figs-metaphor	מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Who can count the dust of Jacob or number the fourth part of Israel?	Here **dust of Jacob** is a metaphor that speaks of the number of Israelites as if they were as numerous as the specks of dust. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NUM	23	10	x7sy	figs-rquestion	מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Who can count the dust of Jacob or number the fourth part of Israel?	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “There are too many Israelites to count. No one could count even a fourth of them because there are so many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NUM	23	10	uxp9	figs-explicit		0	the death of a righteous person	It is understood that this will be a peaceful death. This can be stated. Alternate translation: “the peaceful death of a righteous person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NUM	23	10	am5i	figs-metonymy		0	a righteous person … like his	These are metonymies that refer to the people of Israel as a single person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	23	11	x2xr			0	Balak	This is the king of Moab. See how you translated this in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md).
@@ -1271,14 +1271,14 @@ NUM	23	16	fc1n	figs-metaphor		0	put a message in his mouth	The message is spoken
 NUM	23	16	yn5x			0	He said	Alternate translation: “Then Yahweh said”
 NUM	23	18	kka5	figs-parallelism		0	Balak, and hear … Listen to me, you son of Zippor	These two phrases mean the same thing and are repeated to emphasize how important it was for Balak to pay attention. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	23	18	d6y8			0	Balak … son of Zippor	See how you translated these names in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md).
-NUM	23	19	q4wm	figs-parallelism	הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	Has he said and not done,<br>Or spoken and not made it arise?	Both of these clauses mean the same thing and emphasize that God does what he says he will. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-NUM	23	19	cqsi	figs-rquestion	הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	Has he said and not done,<br>Or spoken and not made it arise?	These rhetorical questions can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “He has never promised a thing without fulfilling what he promised. He has always done exactly what he said he would do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+NUM	23	19	q4wm	figs-parallelism	הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	Has he said and not done, Or spoken and not made it arise?	Both of these clauses mean the same thing and emphasize that God does what he says he will. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+NUM	23	19	cqsi	figs-rquestion	הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	Has he said and not done, Or spoken and not made it arise?	These rhetorical questions can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “He has never promised a thing without fulfilling what he promised. He has always done exactly what he said he would do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NUM	23	20	tga7	figs-activepassive		0	I have been commanded to bless	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has commanded me to bless the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	23	21	w1xp	figs-parallelism		0	hardship in Jacob … trouble in Israel	These two phrases mean the same thing. This could mean: (1) God has given Israel only good things or (2) there is no sin in Israel that would cause him to judge them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NUM	23	21	i4xz			0	shouts for their king are among them	Alternate translation: “they shout with joy because Yahweh is their king”
 NUM	23	22	bnk6	figs-simile		0	with strength like that of a wild ox	This simile says that Yahweh’s great strength is equal to an ox. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-NUM	23	23	q3q1	figs-parallelism	כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	For there is no omen against Jacob,<br>and no divination against Israel	These two lines mean the same thing, that no curse that anyone puts on the nation of **Israel** will be effective. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-NUM	23	23	rriu	figs-metonymy	כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	For there is no omen against Jacob,<br>and no divination against Israel	Here **Jacob** is a metonym that refers to **Israel**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NUM	23	23	q3q1	figs-parallelism	כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	For there is no omen against Jacob, and no divination against Israel	These two lines mean the same thing, that no curse that anyone puts on the nation of **Israel** will be effective. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+NUM	23	23	rriu	figs-metonymy	כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	For there is no omen against Jacob, and no divination against Israel	Here **Jacob** is a metonym that refers to **Israel**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NUM	23	23	xhg8	figs-activepassive		0	it must be said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “people must say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NUM	23	23	yvh5			0	Look what God has done!	It is implied that what God did for them was good. Alternate translation: “Look at the good things God has done for them!”
 NUM	23	24	jm1j	figs-metaphor		0	the people rise like a lioness … he has killed	This verse is a long metaphor that speaks of Israel defeating her enemies as if Israel was a lion devouring its prey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

en_tn_05-DEU.tsv

@@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ DEU	23	2	j67e			0	illegitimate child	This could mean: (1) a child born to parent
 DEU	23	2	eh16	translate-ordinal		0	as far as to the tenth generation of his descendants	This “tenth” is the ordinal number for ten. Alternate translation: “even after ten generations of the illegitimate child’s descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 DEU	23	2	i3u2			0	none of them	Alternate translation: “none of these descendants”
 DEU	23	3	zk3j	figs-idiom		0	may not belong to the assembly of Yahweh	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “may not be a full member of the Israelite community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-DEU	23	3	upu4	translate-ordinal		0	as far as to the tenth generation of his descendants	This “tenth”is the ordinal number for ten. Alternate translation: “even after ten generations of his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+DEU	23	3	upu4	translate-ordinal		0	as far as to the tenth generation of his descendants	This “tenth” is the ordinal number for ten. Alternate translation: “even after ten generations of his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 DEU	23	4	sk15	figs-explicit		0	they did not meet you with bread and with water	The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they did not welcome you by bringing you food and drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 DEU	23	4	l814	figs-you		0	against you … curse you	Moses speaks to the Israelites as if they were one man, so the word “you” here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 DEU	23	5	nd5k	figs-you		0	General Information:	Moses speaks to the Israelites as if they were one man, so the words “you” and “your” here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

en_tn_06-JOS.tsv

@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ JOS	2	7	p4sx		הַֽ⁠מַּעְבְּר֑וֹת	1	fords	places where a river o
 JOS	2	8	ds5e	figs-idiom	טֶ֣רֶם יִשְׁכָּב֑וּ⁠ן	1	not yet lain down	This refers to going to sleep for the night. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JOS	2	9	t8zy	figs-you	יָדַ֕עְתִּי כִּֽי־נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	I know that Yahweh has given you the land	The word “you” refers to the all the Israelite people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JOS	2	9	xr6a	figs-metaphor	נָפְלָ֤ה אֵֽימַתְ⁠כֶם֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	fear of you has come upon us	Becoming afraid is spoken of as if feat came and attacked them. Alternate translation: “we have become afraid of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JOS	2	9	u74z	figs-metaphor	נָמֹ֛גוּ…מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	will melt away before you	This compares the fearful people to ice melting and flowing away. Possible meanings are 1) they will be weak in the Israelites’ presence or 2) they will be scattered. Alternate translation: “will be so afraid that they will not resist you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JOS	2	9	u74z	figs-metaphor	נָמֹ֛גוּ…מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	will melt away before you	This compares the fearful people to ice melting and flowing away. This could mean: (1) they will be weak in the Israelites’ presence or (2) they will be scattered. Alternate translation: “will be so afraid that they will not resist you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JOS	2	10	bcm2		יַם־סוּף֙	1	the Sea of Reeds	This is another name for the Red Sea.
 JOS	2	10	c6i6	translate-names	לְ⁠סִיחֹ֣ן וּ⁠לְ⁠ע֔וֹג	1	Sihon … Og	These are the names of the Amorite kings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JOS	2	11	qx6v	figs-doublet	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבֵ֔⁠נוּ וְ⁠לֹא־קָ֨מָה ע֥וֹד ר֛וּחַ בְּ⁠אִ֖ישׁ	1	our hearts melted and there was no courage left in anyone	These two phrases share similar meanings, combined for emphasis. The phrase “our hearts melted” compares the hearts of the fearful people of Jericho to ice melting and flowing away. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ JOS	2	13	m6i6	figs-euphemism	וְ⁠הַחֲיִתֶ֞ם אֶת־…וְ⁠הִ
 JOS	2	14	ji8q			0	General Information:	The Israelite spies make the promise which Rahab asked for in [Joshua 2:12](../02/12.md)
 JOS	2	14	yb7i	figs-idiom	נַפְשֵׁ֤⁠נוּ תַחְתֵּי⁠כֶם֙ לָ⁠מ֔וּת	1	Our life for yours, even to death	This idiom is a way of swearing and asking God to curse them if they do not keep their promise. Alternate translation: “If we do not do what we promise, may Yahweh cause us to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JOS	2	15	b3dr			0	General Information:	The Israelite spies continue to talk to Rahab.
-JOS	2	17	dmh8	figs-hypo		1		This expresses a condition for the promise the spies had made to Rahab. The word, “this,” refers to “tie this scarlet rope in the window” in [Joshua 2:18](../02/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+JOS	2	17	dmh8	figs-hypo	נְקִיִּ֣ם אֲנַ֔חְנוּ מִ⁠שְּׁבֻעָתֵ֥⁠ךְ הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הִשְׁבַּעְתָּֽ⁠נוּ	1		This expresses a condition for the promise the spies had made to Rahab. The word, “this,” refers to “tie this scarlet rope in the window” in [Joshua 2:18](../02/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 JOS	2	18	e4iw			0	General Information:	The Israelite spies continue talking to Rahab.
 JOS	2	18	x2n8			0	Connecting Statement:	The Israelite spies clarify the condition they expressed in [Joshua 2:15](../02/15.md).
 JOS	2	19	vdc9	figs-hypo	כֹּ֣ל אֲשֶׁר־יֵצֵא֩ מִ⁠דַּלְתֵ֨י	1	Whoever goes out of the doors of your house	This phrase expresses a condition, creating a hypothetical situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ JOS	6	5	d5rg		בִּ⁠מְשֹׁ֣ךְ׀ בְּ⁠קֶ֣רֶן הַ⁠יּוֹ
 JOS	6	5	g97v		חוֹמַ֤ת הָ⁠עִיר֙	1	the wall of the city	Alternate translation: “the outer wall of the city” or “the wall surrounding the city”
 JOS	6	6	h9cn	translate-names	נוּן֙	1	Nun	This is Joshua’s father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JOS	6	6	s5ne		שְׂא֖וּ אֶת־אֲר֣וֹן הַ⁠בְּרִ֑ית	1	Take up the ark of the covenant	Alternate translation: “Pick up the ark of the covenant”
-JOS	6	8	l35d	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	before Yahweh	Possible meanings are 1) “in obedience to Yahweh” or 2) “in front of Yahweh’s ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JOS	6	8	l35d	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	before Yahweh	This could mean: (1) “in obedience to Yahweh” or (2) “in front of Yahweh’s ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JOS	6	8	vk7j		וְ⁠תָקְע֖וּ בַּ⁠שּֽׁוֹפָר֑וֹת	1	they gave a blast on the trumpets	Alternate translation: “they sounded the trumpets loudly” or “the priests blew into the ram’s horn trumpets”
 JOS	6	8	ayf9	figs-explicit	וַֽ⁠אֲרוֹן֙ בְּרִ֣ית יְהוָ֔ה הֹלֵ֖ךְ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	The ark of the covenant of Yahweh followed after them	It can be stated clearly that there were people carrying the ark. Alternate translation: “The priests who were carrying the ark of the covenant of Yahweh followed after them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JOS	6	10	ls5v	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַשְׁמִ֣יעוּ אֶת־קוֹלְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠לֹא־יֵצֵ֥א מִ⁠פִּי⁠כֶ֖ם דָּבָ֑ר	1	No sound must leave your mouths	Sound leaving someone’s mouth refers to that person’s speaking or shouting. Alternate translation: “Do not yell or speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ JOS	7	21	xw3j	figs-activepassive	טְמוּנִ֥ים בָּ⁠אָ֛רֶץ	1	Th
 JOS	7	23	vh7i		וַ⁠יַּצִּקֻ֖⁠ם	1	poured them out	Use the word in your language for pouring many small solid things out of a large bag onto the ground.
 JOS	7	24	ta3l	translate-names	עֵ֥מֶק עָכֽוֹר	1	the Valley of Achor	The name means “Valley of Trouble,” but it is best to translate Achor the way it sounds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JOS	7	25	vd6n	figs-rquestion	מֶ֣ה עֲכַרְתָּ֔⁠נוּ	1	Why have you troubled us?	Joshua uses this question to rebuke Achan. Alternate translation: “You have troubled us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JOS	7	25	i3rq		וַ⁠יִּשְׂרְפ֤וּ אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וַ⁠יִּסְקְל֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בָּ⁠אֲבָנִֽים	1	Then they stoned the rest with stones and burned them with fire.	Possible meanings are 1) the Israelites burned Achan’s family to death and then covered them with stones or 2) the Israelites stoned Achan’s family to death and then burned the dead bodies or 3) that Achan and his possessions were stoned and then burned.
+JOS	7	25	i3rq		וַ⁠יִּשְׂרְפ֤וּ אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וַ⁠יִּסְקְל֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בָּ⁠אֲבָנִֽים	1	Then they stoned the rest with stones and burned them with fire.	This could mean: (1) the Israelites burned Achan’s family to death and then covered them with stones or (2) the Israelites stoned Achan’s family to death and then burned the dead bodies or (3) that Achan and his possessions were stoned and then burned.
 JOS	7	26	zcp9	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יָּ֥שָׁב יְהוָ֖ה מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפּ֑⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh turned away his burning anger	Turning away his anger represents stopping being angry. Burning anger represents strong anger. Alternate translation: “Yahweh stopped being angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JOS	7	26	hfq5		עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	until this present day	It was still called the valley of Achor at the time the author wrote this. Alternate translation: “even today” or “even now”
 JOS	8	intro	f3jc			0		# Joshua 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sin brought defeat<br>It was great sin to take what was to be destroyed. Because of their sin, Yahweh withheld victory from the Israelites. Sin resulted in defeat in battle. Because they repented, Yahweh brought victory to Israel in Ai. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])<br><br>### Built an altar<br>Altars were commonly built in the Ancient Near East to commemorate important events. Several altars were built in the Book of Joshua.
@@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ JOS	14	10	m9sn		הִנֵּה֩	1	look	Alternate translation: “pay attention, b
 JOS	14	10	c4ma		אֲשֶׁר־הָלַ֥ךְ יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר	1	while Israel walked in the wilderness	Alternate translation: “while the people of Israel traveled in the wilderness”
 JOS	14	11	q443		כְּ⁠כֹ֥חִ⁠י אָ֖ז וּ⁠כְ⁠כֹ֣חִ⁠י עָ֑תָּה	1	My strength is now as my strength was then	Alternate translation: “I am still as strong now as I was then”
 JOS	14	11	y4nf	figs-idiom	וְ⁠לָ⁠צֵ֥את וְ⁠לָ⁠בֽוֹא	1	for going and coming	This is an idiom that refers to daily activities. Alternate translation: “for the things I do every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JOS	14	12	r8ka		אֶת־הָ⁠הָ֣ר	1	hill country	Possible meanings are 1) many large hills or small mountains or 2) one mountain.
+JOS	14	12	r8ka		אֶת־הָ⁠הָ֣ר	1	hill country	This could mean: (1) many large hills or small mountains or (2) one mountain.
 JOS	14	12	ner3	translate-names	עֲנָקִ֣ים	1	Anakim	This is the name of a people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JOS	14	13	q6ae	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֧ן אֶת־חֶבְר֛וֹן לְ⁠כָלֵ֥ב	1	gave Hebron as an inheritance to Caleb	Hebron is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that Caleb received as a permanent possession. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JOS	14	14	gji6		עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	to this day	This refers to the period of time in which the author wrote this book.
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ JOS	17	3	u2e9	translate-names	וְ⁠לִ⁠צְלָפְחָד֩…חֵ֨פֶ	1
 JOS	17	3	k5z5	translate-names	מַחְלָ֣ה וְ⁠נֹעָ֔ה חָגְלָ֥ה מִלְכָּ֖ה וְ⁠תִרְצָֽה	1	Mahlah, Noah, Hoglah, Milkah, and Tirzah	These are women’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JOS	17	4	x2q2	translate-names	אֶלְעָזָ֨ר	1	Eleazar	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JOS	17	4	q55m	figs-metaphor	לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֥⁠נוּ נַחֲלָ֖ה	1	to give to us an inheritance	The land is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that the people received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “to give to us some land as an inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JOS	17	4	s6fd		וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֨ן לָ⁠הֶ֜ם…נַֽחֲלָ֔ה	1	he gave those women an inheritance	Possible meanings are 1) “Joshua gave those women an inheritance” or 2) “Eleazar gave those women an inheritance.”
+JOS	17	4	s6fd		וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֨ן לָ⁠הֶ֜ם…נַֽחֲלָ֔ה	1	he gave those women an inheritance	This could mean: (1) “Joshua gave those women an inheritance” or (2) “Eleazar gave those women an inheritance.”
 JOS	17	5	d1c3	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ חַבְלֵֽי־מְנַשֶּׁ֖ה עֲשָׂרָ֑ה	1	Ten parcels of land were assigned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joshua assigned ten parcels of land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JOS	17	5	z7zr		חַבְלֵֽי…עֲשָׂרָ֑ה	1	Ten parcels	Alternate translation: “Ten portions”
 JOS	17	6	d9gb	figs-metaphor	נָחֲל֥וּ נַחֲלָ֖ה	1	received an inheritance	The land is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that they received as a permanent possession. Alternate translation: “received land as an inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ JOS	17	7	dfe9	translate-names	הַֽ⁠מִּכְמְתָ֔ת…תַּפּֽוּ
 JOS	17	9	k7gp		הַ⁠גְּבוּל֩	1	The border	Alternate translation: “The border of Manasseh’s land”
 JOS	17	9	l2af		נַ֨חַל	1	brook	a very small river
 JOS	17	9	qvi8	translate-names	קָנָ֜ה	1	Kanah	name of a brook (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JOS	17	10	mi9b	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בְ⁠אָשֵׁר֙ יִפְגְּע֣וּ⁠ן מִ⁠צָּפ֔וֹן	1	On the north side Asher can be reached	Possible meanings are 1) that the border of Manasseh’s land on the north side touched the land that belonged to the tribe of Asher or 2) that one can travel north to reach Asher. Alternate translation: “Asher was on the north side” or “One can travel north to reach Asher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JOS	17	10	mi9b	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בְ⁠אָשֵׁר֙ יִפְגְּע֣וּ⁠ן מִ⁠צָּפ֔וֹן	1	On the north side Asher can be reached	This could mean: (1) that the border of Manasseh’s land on the north side touched the land that belonged to the tribe of Asher or (2) that one can travel north to reach Asher. Alternate translation: “Asher was on the north side” or “One can travel north to reach Asher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JOS	17	10	fj36	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בְ⁠יִשָּׂשכָ֖ר מִ⁠מִּזְרָֽח	1	to the east, Issachar	The verb may be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “to the east, one can reach Issachar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JOS	17	11	s1sn	translate-names	בֵּית־שְׁאָ֣ן…וְ⁠יִבְלְעָ֨ם…דֹ֣אר…עֵֽין־דֹּר֙…תַעְנַךְ֙…מְגִדּ֖וֹ…הַ⁠נָּֽפֶת	1	Beth Shan … Ibleam … Dor … Endor … Taanach … Megiddo … Napheth	These are the names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JOS	17	14	b4j6	figs-explicit	בְּנֵ֣י יוֹסֵ֔ף	1	the descendants of Joseph	This refers to the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ JOS	23	2	vyz9	figs-doublet	זָקַ֔נְתִּי בָּ֖אתִי בַּ⁠יּ
 JOS	23	4	t22f		הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֗ן	1	the Jordan	This is a short name for the Jordan River.
 JOS	23	4	bf99		מְב֥וֹא הַ⁠שָּֽׁמֶשׁ	1	in the west	This indicates the direction of the setting sun.
 JOS	23	6	w84i	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י סוּר־מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ יָמִ֥ין וּ⁠שְׂמֹֽאול	1	turning aside from it neither to the right hand nor to the left	Disobeying the commands of the law of Moses is spoken of as turning to the right or to the left away from a path. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JOS	23	7	mc72		לְ⁠בִלְתִּי־בוֹא֙ בַּ⁠גּוֹיִ֣ם הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	you may not mix	Possible meanings are 1) having close friendship with them or 2) intermarrying with them.
+JOS	23	7	mc72		לְ⁠בִלְתִּי־בוֹא֙ בַּ⁠גּוֹיִ֣ם הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	you may not mix	This could mean: (1) having close friendship with them or (2) intermarrying with them.
 JOS	23	7	vkw6		תַזְכִּ֨ירוּ֙	1	mention	to speak of
 JOS	23	7	wbj7		אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶ֤ם	1	their gods	This refers to the gods of the remaining nations.
 JOS	23	8	k6my	figs-metaphor	בַּ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם תִּדְבָּ֑קוּ	1	cling to Yahweh	“hold tightly to Yahweh.” Believing in Yahweh is spoken of as if they were holding tightly onto him. Alternate translation: “continue to believe in Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

en_tn_08-RUT.tsv

@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ RUT	1	10	bq4j	figs-you	אִתָּ֥⁠ךְ	1	with you	Here **you** is the singul
 RUT	1	11	ggi3	figs-rquestion	לָ֥⁠מָּה תֵלַ֖כְנָה עִמִּ֑⁠י	1	Why would you go with me?	This is a rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “It does not make sense for you to go with me.” or “You should not go with me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 RUT	1	11	q2hn	figs-rquestion	הַֽ⁠עֽוֹד־לִ֤⁠י בָנִים֙ בְּֽ⁠מֵעַ֔⁠י וְ⁠הָי֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם לַ⁠אֲנָשִֽׁים	1	Do I still have sons in my womb, that they may become your husbands?	This is a rhetorical question. Naomi uses this question to say that she cannot have other sons for them to marry. Alternate translation: “Obviously it is not possible for me to have any more sons who could become your husbands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 RUT	1	12	dyc4	figs-explicit	זָקַ֖נְתִּי מִ⁠הְי֣וֹת לְ⁠אִ֑ישׁ	1	I am too old to belong to a husband	The reason a husband would be important can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “I am too old to marry again and bear more children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-RUT	1	12	abc1	figs-rquestion	כִּ֤י אָמַ֨רְתִּי֙ יֶשׁ־לִ֣⁠י תִקְוָ֔ה גַּ֣ם הָיִ֤יתִי הַ⁠לַּ֨יְלָה֙ לְ⁠אִ֔ישׁ וְ⁠גַ֖ם יָלַ֥דְתִּי בָנִֽים	1	If I said I have hope, if I belonged to a husband even tonight, and even if I would give birth to sons,	This rhetorical question begins here and continues into the next verse. Naomi uses this question to say that she cannot have other sons for them to marry. Alternate translation: “Even if it were possible that I could expect to marry right away and also give birth to sons right away,…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+RUT	1	12	abc1	figs-rquestion	כִּ֤י אָמַ֨רְתִּי֙ יֶשׁ־לִ֣⁠י תִקְוָ֔ה גַּ֣ם הָיִ֤יתִי הַ⁠לַּ֨יְלָה֙ לְ⁠אִ֔ישׁ וְ⁠גַ֖ם יָלַ֥דְתִּי בָנִֽים	1	If I said I have hope, if I belonged to a husband even tonight, and even if I would give birth to sons,	This rhetorical question begins here and continues into the next verse. Naomi uses this question to say that she cannot have other sons for them to marry. Alternate translation: “Even if it were possible that I could expect to marry right away and also give birth to sons right away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 RUT	1	12	kh9g		יָלַ֥דְתִּי בָנִֽים	1	would give birth to sons	**bear children** or **deliver baby boys**
 RUT	1	13	gmc2	figs-rquestion	אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִגְדָּ֔לוּ הֲ⁠לָהֵן֙ תֵּֽעָגֵ֔נָה לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֖י הֱי֣וֹת לְ⁠אִ֑ישׁ	1	would you therefore wait until the time when they are grown? Would you for this reason keep yourselves from belonging a husband?	Naomi completes the rhetorical question she began in the previous verse, and asks a second rhetorical question which emphasizes the same meaning. Alternate translation: “…you would not wait until they were grown up so that you could marry them. You would need to marry a husband before then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 RUT	1	13	ab04		אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִגְדָּ֔לוּ הֲ⁠לָהֵן֙ תֵּֽעָגֵ֔נָה לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֖י הֱי֣וֹת לְ⁠אִ֑ישׁ	1	would you therefore wait until the time when they are grown? Would you for this reason keep yourselves from belonging a husband?	This refers to the practice of levirate marriage, in which it is expected that, if a married man dies, one of his brothers will marry the man’s widow. See the introduction for more explanation.
@@ -267,4 +267,4 @@ RUT	4	17	ab51		ה֥וּא אֲבִי־יִשַׁ֖י	1	He was the father of Jess
 RUT	4	17	f9ha	figs-explicit	אֲבִ֥י דָוִֽד	1	the father of David	**father of King David**. Though **King** is not stated, it was clear to the original audience that this David was King David. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 RUT	4	18	mzm1		תּוֹלְד֣וֹת פָּ֔רֶץ	1	the generations of Perez	**the successive descendants of our clan, starting with Perez**. Because it was mentioned earlier that Perez was the son of Judah, the writer continues listing the family line that came from Perez. Verse 17 was the end of the story about Naomi and Ruth, and verse 18 begins a final section that lists the family line of the clan of Ephrathah, showing how important Obed was as the grandfather of King David. Use a connecting word that signals that this is a new section. You may also need to make it clear that this verse refers to a much earlier time than the time period of the story.
 RUT	4	19	rl3k	translate-names	וְ⁠חֶצְרוֹן֙…עַמִּֽינָדָֽב׃	1	Hezron … Amminadab	Use forms of these names that are natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-RUT	4	22	abcd	figs-explicit	דָּוִֽד	1	David	**King David**. See the note about **David** on [4:17](../04/17/f9ha). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+RUT	4	22	abcd	figs-explicit	דָּוִֽד	1	David	**King David**. See the note about **David** on [4:17](../04/17/f9ha). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

en_tn_09-1SA.tsv

@@ -7,10 +7,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1SA	1	1	cjl8	translate-names	אֶ֠לְקָנָה…יְרֹחָ֧ם…אֱלִיה֛וּא…תֹּ֥חוּ…צ֖וּף	1	was Elkanah … Jeroham … Elihu … Tohu … Zuph	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1SA	1	1	x8xp	translate-names	אֶפְרָתִֽי	1	an Ephraimite	Here, **Ephraimite** refers to anyone living in the territory of Ephraim. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1SA	1	2	roc0	writing-pronouns	וְ⁠ל⁠וֹ֙	1	And for him	The pronoun **him** refers to Elkanah. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1SA	1	2	g5tk	translate-names		1	Hannah ... Peninnah	These are the names of two women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1SA	1	2	g5tk	translate-names	חַנָּ֔ה…פְּנִנָּ֑ה	1	Hannah ... Peninnah	These are the names of two women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1SA	1	3	zzb5	writing-pronouns	הָ⁠אִ֨ישׁ הַ⁠ה֤וּא	1	that man	The word **that** in the phrase **that man** is a demonstrative pronoun which refers to Elkanah. Alternate translation: “the man Elkanah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1SA	1	3	kws9	figs-go	וְ⁠עָלָה֩	1	And…went up	Here, **went up** indicates that in order to reach Shiloh, Elkanah had to travel from a lower location to a higher location because Shiloh was located in a mountainous region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-1SA	1	3	j91i		מִ⁠יָּמִ֣ים׀ יָמִ֔ימָ⁠ה	1	from days to days	The expression **days to days** is a Hebrew idiom. Alternate translation: “year by year” or “annually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1SA	1	3	j91i	figs-idiom	מִ⁠יָּמִ֣ים׀ יָמִ֔ימָ⁠ה	1	from days to days	The expression **days to days** is a Hebrew idiom. Alternate translation: “year by year” or “annually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1SA	1	3	w8se	translate-names	עֵלִ֗י…חָפְנִי֙…וּ⁠פִ֣נְחָ֔ס	1	Eli, Hophni and Phinehas	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1SA	1	4	imlh		מָנֽוֹת	1	portions	Here, **portions** refers to portions of meat. See UST. <br>Alternate translation: “meat portions” or “portions of meat”
 1SA	1	4	emtw	writing-background	וְ⁠נָתַ֞ן	1	that he gave	Beginning here and continuing until the middle of verse 7, the author provides background information and explains what took place repeatedly year after year. The author does this to help readers better understand the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -20,9 +20,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1SA	1	5	cg80	translate-unknown	מָנָ֥ה	1	portion	Here, **portion** refers to the portion of meat that God let the people eat from the animal which they sacrificed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1SA	1	6	f5cg	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠כִֽעֲסַ֤תָּ⁠ה צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙ גַּם־כַּ֔עַס בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְּעִמָ֑⁠הּ	1	And her rival would provoke her, even with provocation in order to cause her to thunder	This means that Peninnah would intentionally seek ways to humiliate and mock Hannah so that she would feel emotionally disturbed and be greatly troubled in spirit. you could translate this in a way that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Peninnah would intentionally provoke Hannah severely, for the purpose of hurting her feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1SA	1	6	lrs0	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠כִֽעֲסַ֤תָּ⁠ה צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙ גַּם־כַּ֔עַס	1	And her rival would provoke her, even with provocation	The word **provocation** is an abstract noun. If it would be more natural in your language you may translate this word using a verb phrase or adjective. Alternate translation: “And Peninnah would intentionally provoke Hannah severely” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
-1SA	1	6	mw8a		צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙	1	her rival	Here, **her rival** refers to Hannah’s rival Peninnah. It is probable that Elkanah took Peninnah as his second wife after Hannah was unable to bear children so that he could have offspring by Penninah. This would result in Hannah and Peninnah viewing each other as rivals. you could use a word or phrase that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his second wife” or“her co-wife”
+1SA	1	6	mw8a		צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙	1	her rival	Here, **her rival** refers to Hannah’s rival Peninnah. It is probable that Elkanah took Peninnah as his second wife after Hannah was unable to bear children so that he could have offspring by Penninah. This would result in Hannah and Peninnah viewing each other as rivals. you could use a word or phrase that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his second wife” or “her co-wife”
 1SA	1	6	gq73	figs-simile	הַרְּעִמָ֑⁠הּ	1	cause her to thunder	The phrase **cause her to thunder** is a figurative way of saying that Peninnah’s actions caused Hannah to be greatly irritated or troubled. The point of this comparison is that Peninnah would cause Hannah to be greatly bothered and disrupted in a way that is similar to the sky being disrupted to the point of thundering. you could communicate this in a way which would be most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-1SA	1	6	wy2z		בְּעַ֥ד רַחְמָֽ⁠הּ	1	shut up her womb	The phrase **shut up her womb** is a used figuratively to mean that Yahweh had not allowed Hannah to become pregnant. You can use a phrase that would be most natural in your language.<br>Alternative translation: “made her barren” or “prevented her from becoming pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+1SA	1	6	wy2z	figs-euphemism	בְּעַ֥ד רַחְמָֽ⁠הּ	1	shut up her womb	The phrase **shut up her womb** is a used figuratively to mean that Yahweh had not allowed Hannah to become pregnant. You can use a phrase that would be most natural in your language.<br>Alternative translation: “made her barren” or “prevented her from becoming pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1SA	1	7	bzk3	figs-go	עֲלֹתָ⁠הּ֙	1	she went up	Here, **went up** indicates that in order to reach Shiloh, Elkanah had to travel from a lower location to a higher location because Shiloh was located in a mountainous region. See how you translated this in [1 Samuel 1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1SA	1	7	x38f	writing-pronouns	עֲלֹתָ⁠הּ֙	1	she went up	Here, **she** refers to Hannah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1SA	1	8	nz4v	figs-rquestion	לָ֣⁠מֶה תִבְכִּ֗י וְ⁠לָ֨⁠מֶה֙ לֹ֣א תֹֽאכְלִ֔י וְ⁠לָ֖⁠מֶה יֵרַ֣ע לְבָבֵ֑⁠ךְ הֲ⁠ל֤וֹא אָֽנֹכִי֙ ט֣וֹב לָ֔⁠ךְ מֵ⁠עֲשָׂרָ֖ה בָּנִֽים	1	why do you weep? And why do you not eat? And why is your heart displeased? Am I not better to you than ten sons	These rhetorical questions can be translated as statements, if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “you should not weep. You should eat, and your heart should be glad because I am better to you than ten sons!” or “you have little reason for sadness. I favor you and that should be enough.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1476,4 +1476,4 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1SA	31	11	e9d6	translate-names		0	Jabesh	This is the name of a town. See how you translated this in [1 Samuel 11:1](../11/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1SA	31	11	e2e5			0	what the Philistines had done to Saul	Alternate translation: “how the Philistines had dishonored Saul”
 1SA	31	12	myv9			0	all night	Alternate translation: “throughout the whole night”
-1SA	31	13	enk8	translate-unknown		0	a tamarisk tree	This is a type of tree. See how you translated this in [1 Samuel 22:6](../22/06.md). Alternate translation: “a large shade tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1SA	31	13	enk8	translate-unknown		0	a tamarisk tree	This is a type of tree. See how you translated this in [1 Samuel 22:6](../22/06.md). Alternate translation: “a large shade tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])

en_tn_12-2KI.tsv

@@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2KI	13	3	sii1	figs-metaphor		0	The anger of Yahweh burned against Israel	Yahweh becoming angry with Israel is spoken of as if his anger was a fire that burned. Alternate translation: “Then Yahweh became very angry with Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2KI	13	3	u4tp	figs-metonymy		0	gave them continually into the hand of Hazael king of Aram and into the hand of Ben Hadad son of Hazael	Here “them” refers to Israel and “hand” refers to the power to control them. Alternate translation: “allowed Hazael the king of Aram, and Ben Hadad, his son, to repeatedly defeat the Israelites in battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2KI	13	4	hcy2			0	implored Yahweh	Alternate translation: “prayed to Yahweh”
-2KI	13	4	gh67					you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “the king of Aram was oppressing them.” Alternate translation: “he saw how severely the king of Aram was oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2KI	13	4	gh67	figs-abstractnouns	רָאָה֙ אֶת־לַ֣חַץ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּֽי־לָחַ֥ץ אֹתָ֖⁠ם מֶ֥לֶךְ אֲרָֽם	1		You could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “the king of Aram was oppressing them.” Alternate translation: “he saw how severely the king of Aram was oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2KI	13	5	n7zw			0	a rescuer	Alternate translation: “someone to rescue them”
 2KI	13	5	lp9p	figs-metonymy		0	they escaped from the hand of the Arameans	Here “hand” refers to the power to control them. Alternate translation: “he enabled them to be free from Aram’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2KI	13	6	jts3	figs-metaphor		0	they did not depart from the sins of the house of Jeroboam	To stop sinning is spoken of as if they departed from the sins. This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “Israel did not stop doing the same sins as Jeroboam had done” or “Israel continued to commit the same sins as Jeroboam had committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

en_tn_15-EZR.tsv

@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ EZR	3	8	wwz8	translate-names	זְרֻבָּבֶ֣ל בֶּן־שְׁ֠אַלְת
 EZR	3	8	fa38	translate-names	וְ⁠יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בֶּן־יֽוֹצָדָ֜ק	1	Jeshua … Jozadak	**Jeshua** is the name of a man, and **Jozadak** is the name of his father. See how you translated these names in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	3	8	bzi5	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠שְׁאָ֥ר אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֣ם ׀ הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֗ם	1		Here, **brothers** seems to be a figurative way of saying fellow leaders, since the priests and Levites were also leaders in the community like Zerubbabel, the governor, and Jeshua, the high priest. Alternate translation: “and their fellow leaders, the priests and Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	3	8	hy61	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠בָּאִים֙ מֵ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֣י יְרֽוּשָׁלִַ֔ם	1		The abstract noun **captivity** refers to the way the Babylonians had transported many of the Jews away from their homeland when they conquered Jerusalem. (These included many of the parents or grandparents of the people here, but also some of these people themselves, as [3:12](../03/12.md) indicates.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea behind this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “and the rest of the people who had returned to Jerusalem from where their enemies had taken them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EZR	3	8	uyam	figs-ellipsis	הֵחֵ֡לּוּ	1		Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete because they were understood by the original readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply them from the context, or you could use a term such as “so” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “so they appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+EZR	3	8	uyam	figs-ellipsis	הֵחֵ֡לּוּ	1		Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete because they were understood by the original readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply them from the context, or you could use a term such as “so” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “so they appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	3	8	hf5n	figs-idiom	אֶת־הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֗ם מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָ⁠מַ֔עְלָ⁠ה	1	from twenty years old	Here, **son of 20 years and above** is an idiom that indicates a person’s age. Alternate translation: “the Levites who were at least 20 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	3	8	vyhg	figs-ellipsis	לְ⁠נַצֵּ֖חַ עַל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת בֵּית־יְהוָֽה	1		In this context, **the work of the house** is an abbreviated way of referring to the project of constructing a temple. Alternate translation: “to supervise the construction of the temple for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	3	8	jfho	figs-metaphor	בֵּית־יְהוָֽה	1		See how you translated this expression in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “the temple for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ EZR	5	3	zz1b		מַן־שָׂ֨ם לְ⁠כֹ֜ם טְעֵ֗ם	1	the Province Bey
 EZR	5	3	a23k	figs-parallelism	בַּיְתָ֤⁠א דְנָה֙ לִ⁠בְּנֵ֔א וְ⁠אֻשַּׁרְנָ֥⁠א דְנָ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁכְלָלָֽה	1	the Province Beyond the River	These two phrases mean essentially the same thing. As noted in [4:12](../04/12.md), **complete** is another way of saying **build** when the terms are paired like this. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. If that would be confusing for your readers, you could say it once and provide emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “to build a large temple such as this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EZR	5	3	rp2r	figs-metaphor	בַּיְתָ֤⁠א דְנָה֙	1	the Province Beyond the River	“this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	5	4	jznw	grammar-connect-time-sequential	אֱדַ֥יִן	1	the Province Beyond the River	Here, the word **Then** is indicating that the enemies asked the question in this verse right after the question they asked in the previous verse. (The word is not indicating that the two questions were asked on separate occasions.) Alternate translation: “In addition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-EZR	5	4	tp1s	translate-textvariants	אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א	1		Here, the Aramaic text reads **we said**. The pronoun does not seem to fit the context here, because of the sudden, unexplained shift from third person “they” in verse 3 to first person “we” here. In [5:10](../05/10.md), in their letter to Darius, Tattenai and his associates use “we” when they report that they were the ones who asked this question. So the word “we” could have been mistakenly copied into this verse from that one. Other ancient versions say “they,” and it will likely be clearest for your readers if you translate the phrase in that way. Alternate translation: “they said to them, 'What are the men's names” or “they said to them, “Who are the men” It is also possible that the verse is not reporting a question in direct speech, but is simply describing what was said as a statement. In that case, **we** would refer to the Jews. Alternate translation: “we told them who the men were” or “we told them the names of the men [who were building this building.”] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+EZR	5	4	tp1s	translate-textvariants	אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א	1		Here, the Aramaic text reads **we said**. The pronoun does not seem to fit the context here, because of the sudden, unexplained shift from third person “they” in verse 3 to first person “we” here. In [5:10](../05/10.md), in their letter to Darius, Tattenai and his associates use “we” when they report that they were the ones who asked this question. So the word “we” could have been mistakenly copied into this verse from that one. Other ancient versions say “they,” and it will likely be clearest for your readers if you translate the phrase in that way. Alternate translation: “they said to them, ‘What are the men's names’” or “they said to them, ‘Who are the men’” It is also possible that the verse is not reporting a question in direct speech, but is simply describing what was said as a statement. In that case, **we** would refer to the Jews. Alternate translation: “we told them who the men were” or “we told them the names of the men [who were building this building.”] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 EZR	5	4	cwgj	figs-quotations	אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א דִּֽי־דְנָ֥ה בִנְיָנָ֖⁠א בָּנַֽיִן	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could present this sentence as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EZR	5	5	ewqj	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וְ⁠עֵ֣ין	1	the Province Beyond the River	Here, the word **But** indicates that the sentence it introduces draws a contrast between what Tattenai and his associates were trying to accomplish, which was an immediate end to the rebuilding of the temple, and what actually happened. You could begin the sentence with a word such as “however” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EZR	5	5	gv23	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עֵ֣ין אֱלָהֲ⁠הֹ֗ם הֲוָת֙ עַל־שָׂבֵ֣י יְהוּדָיֵ֔⁠א	1	the eye of God was on	Here, **eye** stands for seeing, and in this context, seeing figuratively means giving care, protection, and favor. Alternate translation: “God was making sure that the Jewish leaders would be alright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ EZR	6	5	wl8e	figs-parallelism	וִ֠⁠יהָךְ לְ⁠הֵיכְלָ֤⁠א
 EZR	6	5	dwxb	figs-123person	וְ⁠תַחֵ֖ת בְּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָהָֽ⁠א	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	It may be that the sudden change to second person singular **you** here is because the document is quoting Cyrus's words, which may have been spoken to Sheshbazzar (See [5:14](../05/14.md)). If this is confusing in your language, you can use the third person. Alternate translation: “So these things must be returned to the house of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	6	5	vo0d	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠תַחֵ֖ת בְּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָהָֽ⁠א	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	Here the scroll ends its quotation from the decree of Cyrus. If you decided in the middle of [6:3](../06/03.md) to mark these words as a quotation within a quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	6	5	xrzz	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠תַחֵ֖ת בְּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָהָֽ⁠א	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	Here, the text also ends its quotation from the scroll. If you decided at the start of [6:3](../06/03.md) to mark its words as a quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing primary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EZR	6	6	f9x5	figs-ellipsis	כְּעַ֡ן תַּ֠תְּנַי	1	General Information:	Here the book leaves out some of the material that a story would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Rather than repeating the same information from the scroll, but now as a letter to the officials, it jumps right from its quotation from the scroll that was discovered at Ecbatana and into the letter that King Darius wrote to Tattenai and his associates in response to what the scroll said. You could say this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “When King Darius learned from the scroll that Cyrus had ordered the temple to be rebuilt, he sent Tattenai and his associates a letter in answer to their inquiry. He told them what he had learned from the scroll and then warned them, “Now Tattenai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+EZR	6	6	f9x5	figs-ellipsis	כְּעַ֡ן תַּ֠תְּנַי	1	General Information:	Here the book leaves out some of the material that a story would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Rather than repeating the same information from the scroll, but now as a letter to the officials, it jumps right from its quotation from the scroll that was discovered at Ecbatana and into the letter that King Darius wrote to Tattenai and his associates in response to what the scroll said. You could say this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “When King Darius learned from the scroll that Cyrus had ordered the temple to be rebuilt, he sent Tattenai and his associates a letter in answer to their inquiry. He told them what he had learned from the scroll and then warned them, ‘Now Tattenai’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	6	6	ks97	figs-quotemarks	כְּעַ֡ן	1	General Information:	Since the book here begins to quote the letter that King Darius sent in reply to Tattenai and his associates, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	6	6	wtim	grammar-connect-words-phrases	כְּעַ֡ן	1	General Information:	As in [4:13](../04/13.md), [4:14](../04/14.md), and [4:21](../04/21.md), **now** introduces an important point within a letter. (It is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md), [4:11](../04/11.md), [4:17](../04/17.md), and [5:17](../05/17.md).) If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 EZR	6	6	qpqv	figs-123person	תַּ֠תְּנַי פַּחַ֨ת עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֜⁠ה שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ וּ⁠כְנָוָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן אֲפַרְסְכָיֵ֔⁠א דִּ֖י בַּ⁠עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑⁠ה רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה	1	General Information:	Since Darius addresses these men directly at the end of the sentence, instead of **their companions**, in the third person, we would expect him to say “your companions,” in the second person. So it seems that the book is compressing the letter as it quotes it. Based on the other letters that the book quotes in [4:11–16](../04/11.md), [4:17–22](../04/17.md), and [5:7–17](../05/07.md), the full letter probably said something like “To Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and their companions, the officials who are in Beyond-the-River. Peace. And now,” followed by an explanation that the court officials had discovered a scroll that recorded the decree of Cyrus. Then would follow instructions to these men, beginning “Be far away from there!” But since the quotation from this letter in the book jumps from the list of the recipients’ names right to these instructions, If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person throughout. Alternate translation: “Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and your associates, you officials who are in Beyond-the-River: Be far away from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -938,7 +938,7 @@ EZR	8	17	akq5	translate-names	אִדּ֣וֹ	1	Next I sent them	**Iddo** is the
 EZR	8	17	ggi9	translate-names	בְּ⁠כָסִפְיָ֖א	1	Kasiphia	**Kasiphia** is the name of a place. Its exact location can no longer be identified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	8	17	nq66	figs-metaphor	וָ⁠אָשִׂימָ⁠ה֩ בְּ⁠פִי⁠הֶ֨ם דְּבָרִ֜ים לְ֠⁠דַבֵּר אֶל־אִדּ֨וֹ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	Putting words in someone’s mouth figuratively means telling them what to say. Alternate translation: “And I told them what to say to Iddo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	17	y2wd	figs-metaphor	אִדּ֨וֹ אָחִ֤י⁠ו הַנְּתִינִים֙ בְּ⁠כָסִפְיָ֣א הַ⁠מָּק֔וֹם	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of referring to people who belonged to groups that could serve in the temple, as Iddo did. (It is possible that some of his biological brothers are also included in this term.) In context, Iddo is a Levite leader, while the **brothers** are said to include **temple servants**, so the term indicates both groups. Alternate translation: “Iddo and his fellow Levites and the temple servants who were also living in Kasiphia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	8	17	p5pg	figs-quotations	לְ⁠הָֽבִיא־לָ֥⁠נוּ מְשָׁרְתִ֖ים לְ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	This is the purpose for which Ezra sent the messengers to Iddo. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that in your translation, or you could present this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “so that he would send us more people who could serve in the temple of our God” or, as a direct quotation, “to say, “Please send us some people who can serve in the temple of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+EZR	8	17	p5pg	figs-quotations	לְ⁠הָֽבִיא־לָ֥⁠נוּ מְשָׁרְתִ֖ים לְ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	This is the purpose for which Ezra sent the messengers to Iddo. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that in your translation, or you could present this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “so that he would send us more people who could serve in the temple of our God” or, as a direct quotation, “to say, ‘Please send us some people who can serve in the temple of our God’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EZR	8	17	f8xf	figs-exclusive	לָ֥⁠נוּ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	As Ezra tells his story, he uses **us** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	8	18	kbq4	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יָּבִ֨יאּוּ	1	Sherebiah … Mahli	This word indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result … they brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	8	18	a7cr	figs-metaphor	כְּ⁠יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֨י⁠נוּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֤ה עָלֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙	1	So they sent to us by the good hand of our God a man	As in the expression **according to the good hand of his God upon him** in [7:6](../07/06.md), **hand** figuratively represents action, and the expression indicates that God showed Ezra favor and helped him on this occasion. Alternate translation: “because our God was helping us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

en_tn_16-NEH.tsv

@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ NEH	1	11	kr99	figs-123person	וּ⁠תְנֵ֣⁠הוּ לְ⁠רַחֲמִ֔י
 NEH	1	11	r7af	figs-metaphor	לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	before the face of this man	Here, **face** is a figurative way of referring to the action of seeing, and seeing is a figurative way of describing knowledge, perception, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, Nehemiah is asking God to cause the king to make a favorable decision in response to a request he plans to make. Alternate translation: “Please grant that the king will agree to the request that I am going to make.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	1	11	a21b	figs-explicit	הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	this man	As we will discover in the next chapter, **this man** refers to Artaxerxes, the king of Persia. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	1	11	h9hl	writing-background	וַ⁠אֲנִ֛י הָיִ֥יתִי מַשְׁקֶ֖ה לַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Now as for me, I was a cupbearer for the king	This is background information about Nehemiah’s role in the king’s court. Your language may have a special way to mark background information. As a “cupbearer,” it was Nehemiah’s duty to serve the wine at the king’s table, but he was much more than a waiter or butler. When the king gave him this assignment, this showed that he trusted Nehemiah completely to protect him from being poisoned. Nehemiah’s work also allowed him to see the king frequently and get to know him. So this was an important office. Alternate translation: “At that time, I was an important official who served the wine at the king’s table.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-NEH	2	intro	mj1d			0		# Nehemiah 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins the account of the construction of the wall. Many scholars believe these chapters teach valuable lessons on leadership ([Nehemiah 2-6](./01.md)).<br><br>### Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Nehemiah’s character<br>Apparently, Nehemiah’s character made an impression on the king. It was very unusual for a king to be so concerned with one of his servants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Cultural Customs<br>In ancient Persia, people thought it was important for their conquered peoples to retain and practice their own cultural customs. It was thought that this independence promoted peace in their vast kingdom. The rebuilding of Jerusalem may have been seen as a way to allow for the Jewish cultural practices.<br><br>### Yahweh’s control<br>Yahweh is seen as very powerful. He is able to provide for his people even through a foreign king. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])
+NEH	2	intro	mj1d			0		# Nehemiah 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins the account of the construction of the wall. Many scholars believe these chapters teach valuable lessons on leadership ([Nehemiah 2-6](../02/01.md)).\n\n### Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Nehemiah’s character\n\nApparently, Nehemiah’s character made an impression on the king. It was very unusual for a king to be so concerned with one of his servants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Cultural Customs\n\nIn ancient Persia, people thought it was important for their conquered peoples to retain and practice their own cultural customs. It was thought that this independence promoted peace in their vast kingdom. The rebuilding of Jerusalem may have been seen as a way to allow for the Jewish cultural practices.\n\n### Yahweh’s control\n\nYahweh is seen as very powerful. He is able to provide for his people even through a foreign king. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])
 NEH	2	1	a23b	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י	1	Then it happened that	Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. Alternate translation: “Then one day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 NEH	2	1	a25b	figs-explicit	בְּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן שְׁנַ֥ת עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לְ⁠אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	in the month of Nisan, in year twenty of Artaxerxes the King	Since there were twelve months in the Hebrew calendar, and it was still the same year in the reign of Artaxerxes, this means that four months had gone by since Hanani came and spoke with Nehemiah. The implication is that Nehemiah had been praying all this time in the way described in chapter 1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I prayed like this for four months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	2	1	h3hu	translate-hebrewmonths	בְּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן	1	In the month of Nisan	**Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ NEH	2	20	a33c	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠אֲנַ֥חְנוּ עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו נ
 NEH	2	20	iv9x	figs-idiom	נָק֣וּם וּ⁠בָנִ֑ינוּ	1	will arise and build	As in [2:18](../02/18.md), **rise up** means to begin something. Alternate translation: “going to begin rebuilding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	2	20	a4e6	figs-doublet	וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּ⁠צְדָקָ֛ה וְ⁠זִכָּר֖וֹן בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם	1	But you have no share, no right, and no historic claim in Jerusalem	The terms **share**, **right**, and **memorial** all mean something similar. Nehemiah uses them together for emphasis. The meanings are not entirely certain. “Share” may suggest that the Samaritans are not part of the community. “Right” may mean that they have no legal basis to say what should happen in Jerusalem. “Memorial” could mean that they had have no role in the city’s history, or that there is no record of their Israelite ancestry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (Note: A doublet can involve the use of more than two terms.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 NEH	2	20	a35c	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּ⁠צְדָקָ֛ה וְ⁠זִכָּר֖וֹן בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם	1	But you have no share, no right, and no historic claim in Jerusalem	Depending on their meaning, the terms “share,” “right,” and “memorial” may be abstract nouns. If so, you could translate the idea behind them with a phrase that expresses their overall meaning. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-NEH	3	intro	dfw6			0		# Nehemiah 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Priests<br>The priests worked on rebuilding the city. Normally, the priests were exempt from this type of work. Because they helped, it emphasizes that this is a holy work and something done for Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Cooperation<br>Everyone worked on this project. Many names are mentioned to emphasize the cooperation between the different families. Each was given a section of the wall to rebuild.
+NEH	3	intro	dfw6			0		# Nehemiah 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Priests\n\nThe priests worked on rebuilding the city. Normally, the priests were exempt from this type of work. Because they helped, it emphasizes that this is a holy work and something done for Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Cooperation\n\nEveryone worked on this project. Many names are mentioned to emphasize the cooperation between the different families. Each was given a section of the wall to rebuild.
 NEH	3	1	ald8	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יָּ֡קָם אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩ הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֨ן הַ⁠גָּד֜וֹל	1	And Eliashib the high priest rose up	This chapter records the names of the people who repaired the wall of Jerusalem, and it describes what parts of the wall they worked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly at the start of the chapter. (In this book Nehemiah records everything he did to help the people of Judah, and he prays that God will remember him and bless him for what he did. We see in this chapter that he also wants God to remember and bless everyone else who helped.) Alternate translation: “These are the names of the people who helped to rebuild the wall around Jerusalem. Now Eliashib the high priest rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	3	1	a37c	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יָּ֡קָם	1	And … rose up	As in [2:18](../02/18.md), **rise up** here means to begin something. Alternate translation: “began to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	3	1	g9az	translate-names	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩	1	Eliashib	This is the name of a man. It occurs about a dozen times in the book of Nehemiah. It will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ NEH	3	31	r6sv		וְ⁠עַ֖ד עֲלִיַּ֥ת הַ⁠פִּנָּֽה	1	even
 NEH	3	32	x1tq	figs-explicit	וּ⁠בֵ֨ין עֲלִיַּ֤ת הַ⁠פִּנָּה֙ לְ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠צֹּ֔אן הֶחֱזִ֥יקוּ	1	strengthened between the upper chamber of the corner to the gate of sheep	This brings the description of the repairs back around to where they started. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly by saying “the last section.” Alternate translation: “repaired the last section of the wall, from the corner apartments to the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	3	32	p1kr	figs-synecdoche	הַ⁠צֹּרְפִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רֹכְלִֽים	1	the goldsmiths and the merchants	This does not mean all the goldsmiths and all the merchants. Nehemiah is once again using the names of whole groups to refer to parts of them. Alternate translation: “some of the other goldsmiths, along with some traders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 NEH	3	32	a69c	translate-names	לְ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠צֹּ֔אן	1	the gate of sheep	This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NEH	4	intro	tlj9			0		# Nehemiah 4 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Dedication<br>The people were so dedicated to rebuilding the walls that they worked with their weapons ready for battle right next to them. Even when they were threatened with an attack, they continued to trust in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical Questions<br><br>Sanballat uses a series of rhetorical questions. These are intended to show his intense anger against the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+NEH	4	intro	tlj9			0		# Nehemiah 4 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Dedication\n\nThe people were so dedicated to rebuilding the walls that they worked with their weapons ready for battle right next to them. Even when they were threatened with an attack, they continued to trust in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nSanballat uses a series of rhetorical questions. These are intended to show his intense anger against the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 NEH	4	1	rnw3	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֞י	1	And it happened that	Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 NEH	4	1	vfu4	translate-names	סַנְבַלַּ֗ט	1	Sanballat	This is a man’s name. See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	4	1	a71c	figs-parallelism	וַ⁠יִּ֣חַר ל֔⁠וֹ וַ⁠יִּכְעַ֖ס הַרְבֵּ֑ה	1	And it burned him, and he was very angry	These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how angry Sanballat was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “he became furiously angry” or “he became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ NEH	4	23	vfv3	figs-idiom	וּ⁠נְעָרַ֗⁠י	1		As in [4:16](../04/16.md)
 NEH	4	23	flyg	translate-unknown	וְ⁠אַנְשֵׁ֤י הַ⁠מִּשְׁמָר֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַחֲרַ֔⁠י	1		This likely refers to the personal bodyguard that the king would have assigned to Nehemiah when he appointed him to be the governor of Judah. (Nehemiah describes this appointment in [5:14](../05/14.md).) Alternate translation: “my personal bodyguard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 NEH	4	23	upc5	figs-ellipsis	אִ֖ישׁ שִׁלְח֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מָּֽיִם	1		Here the specific meaning of the Hebrew text is unknown, but Nehemiah is almost certainly leaving out some of the words that a sentence would normally have to have in order to be complete. He says that he and his relatives, servants, and bodyguards did not take off their clothes, **or anyone his weapon at the water.** This could mean that “no one took his weapon off even when he was washing himself” or that “no one took his weapon off even when going to get water.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what “at the water” might mean, you could choose one of these possibilities. Alternate translation: “Each of us always had our weapons with us, even when we were washing ourselves.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NEH	4	23	v2e1	figs-idiom	פֹשְׁטִ֖ים בְּגָדֵ֑י⁠נוּ אִ֖ישׁ שִׁלְח֥⁠וֹ	1		In this context, **a man** means **anyone.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-NEH	5	intro	k7pb			0		# Nehemiah 5 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Equality<br><br>The rich made money from the poor. The rich oppressed the poor by charging interest on loans. Because Nehemiah wanted to treat everyone fairly, he did not collect any taxes from them. This chapter also emphasizes that it was wrong to enslave a fellow Jew. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oppress]])<br><br>### Governor<br>Nehemiah was a governmental leader in Jerusalem, but he was not a king. Jerusalem had a great deal of independence, but it was under the authority of the Persian king. The term “governor” reflects this idea, but a different term may be used in translation.
+NEH	5	intro	k7pb			0		# Nehemiah 5 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Equality\n\nThe rich made money from the poor. The rich oppressed the poor by charging interest on loans. Because Nehemiah wanted to treat everyone fairly, he did not collect any taxes from them. This chapter also emphasizes that it was wrong to enslave a fellow Jew. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oppress]])\n\n### Governor\n\nNehemiah was a governmental leader in Jerusalem, but he was not a king. Jerusalem had a great deal of independence, but it was under the authority of the Persian king. The term “governor” reflects this idea, but a different term may be used in translation.
 NEH	5	1	za4u	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	וַ⁠תְּהִ֨י	1		Nehemiah now relates something else that was happening even while the Jews were trying to rebuild the wall and defend themselves against their enemies. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Around this same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 NEH	5	1	zmb8	figs-abstractnouns	צַעֲקַ֥ת הָ⁠עָ֛ם וּ⁠נְשֵׁי⁠הֶ֖ם גְּדוֹלָ֑ה	1		**Outcry** is an abstract noun that refers to the complaints that the poorer Jews made to Nehemiah about how the wealthier and more powerful Jews were treating them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “complain.” Since Nehemiah says this was a “great” outcry, involving many serious grievances, you could intensify the verb with an adverb such as “bitterly.” Alternate translation: “many of the men and their wives complained bitterly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NEH	5	1	czx5		הָ⁠עָ֛ם וּ⁠נְשֵׁי⁠הֶ֖ם	1		Here, **the people** seems to indicate certain men who lived in Jerusalem, since Nehemiah also mentions their wives. Alternate translation: “many of the men and their wives”
@@ -726,10 +726,10 @@ NEH	6	18	y3lg	translate-names	מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם בֶּ֥ן בֶּֽרֶכְי
 NEH	6	19	mj72	figs-metaphor	טוֹבֹתָ֗י⁠ו הָי֤וּ אֹמְרִים֙ לְ⁠פָנַ֔⁠י	1		Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “told me personally about Tobiah’s good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	6	19	c1n3		הָי֤וּ	1		**They** means the people who were loyal to Tobiah.
 NEH	6	19	e3zt	figs-idiom	וּ⁠דְבָרַ֕⁠י הָי֥וּ מוֹצִיאִ֖ים ל֑⁠וֹ	1		**Taking out** here is an idiom that means these people were “reporting” Nehemiah’s responses to Tobiah. Alternate translation: “and then told him about my responses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-NEH	7	intro	qk4v			0		# Nehemiah 7 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogy<br><br>The people who returned from Persia were counted according to their families. Nehemiah ensured that those who lived in Jerusalem had a completely Jewish ancestry.<br><br>### Different lists<br>This list is paralleled in [Ezra 2](../../ezr/02/01.md). The lists do contain some differences in numbers. This is probably due to the timing of their counting. They were likely counted at different times.
+NEH	7	intro	qk4v			0		# Nehemiah 7 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Genealogy\n\nThe people who returned from Persia were counted according to their families. Nehemiah ensured that those who lived in Jerusalem had a completely Jewish ancestry.\n\n### Different lists\n\nThis list is paralleled in [Ezra 2](../ezr/02/01.md). The lists do contain some differences in numbers. This is probably due to the timing of their counting. They were likely counted at different times.
 NEH	7	1	d1a1	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1		This expression introduces a new event in the story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 NEH	7	1	g3zz	figs-activepassive	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר נִבְנְתָה֙ הַ⁠חוֹמָ֔ה	1		You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when we had finished the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NEH	7	1	fk6l	figs-synecdoche	וָ⁠אַעֲמִ֖יד הַ⁠דְּלָת֑וֹת	1		As in [4:14](../04/14.md) and [6:1,](../06/01.md), Nehemiah is using himself to represent the entire community that he is a part of. Alternate translation: “and we had put the doors in the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+NEH	7	1	fk6l	figs-synecdoche	וָ⁠אַעֲמִ֖יד הַ⁠דְּלָת֑וֹת	1		As in [4:14](../04/14.md) and [6:1](../06/01.md), Nehemiah is using himself to represent the entire community that he is a part of. Alternate translation: “and we had put the doors in the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 NEH	7	1	wkp3	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּפָּֽקְד֛וּ הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִ֥ים וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּֽם	1		You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Nehemiah may have done this personally, or the people in charge of each of these groups may have done it. Because of the uncertainly, a good approach might be to say “we” to indicate the community. Alternate translation: “we assigned the gatekeepers and singers and Levites to their tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NEH	7	1	lk9v	translate-unknown	הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִ֥ים	1		These were people who were assigned to each gate of Jerusalem. They were responsible for controlling access to the city. They would open and close the gates at times and for reasons set by the city administrators. For example, Shemaiah the son of Shecaniah is named in 3:29 as the keeper of the East Gate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 NEH	7	1	f8ks	translate-unknown	וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים	1		This means vocal musicians who led in worship, in processions, and ceremonies, producing music and chants that emphasized and enhanced the occasion. Alternate translation: “singers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ NEH	8	1	e1a5	translate-unknown	אֶל־הָ֣⁠רְח֔וֹב	1		This means a
 NEH	8	1	f6t8	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מָּ֑יִם	1		Here, **face** figuratively means the front of an object. Alternate translation: “in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NEH	8	1	e1a7	translate-names	שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מָּ֑יִם	1		This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	8	1	e1a9	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֔ר לְ⁠הָבִ֗יא אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		**They** means the crowd, though they likely made this request to Ezra through their leaders. The implication is that they wanted him not just to bring the book forward, but to read to them from it out loud (as [8:3](../08/03.md) indicates he did). This was because they wanted to learn what was in it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The crowd had asked Ezra the scribe to read to them from a scroll that contained the Law of Moses because they wanted to know what it commanded.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NEH	8	1	e1b1	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א  	1		Since the rest of the chapter describes arrangements that the leaders must have made in advance, the crowd, once it gathered, did not start shouting spontaneously for Ezra to come forward and read. Rather, they had made this request in advance. Alternate translation: “And the crowd had asked Ezra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NEH	8	1	e1b1	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א	1		Since the rest of the chapter describes arrangements that the leaders must have made in advance, the crowd, once it gathered, did not start shouting spontaneously for Ezra to come forward and read. Rather, they had made this request in advance. Alternate translation: “And the crowd had asked Ezra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	1	e1b3	writing-participants	לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֔ר	1		This introduces Ezra as a new character in the story. The expression “the scribe” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the Law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “a man named Ezra, who was a teacher of the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 NEH	8	1	e1b5	figs-explicit	לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֔ר	1		The biblical book of Ezra indicates that this man returned to Jerusalem from exile in Babylon 13 years before Nehemiah did. He led many reforms in the community. But in this book, Nehemiah does not say whether Ezra had remained in the city all that time, or whether he had gone back to Babylon and had recently returned to Jerusalem again. Even if your language, in telling a story, ordinarily accounts for how a person came to be on the scene, it might be best not to try to address that question here in your translation. Even though Nehemiah seems to expect that his readers will know where Ezra had been, Nehemiah does not say specifically where he was, and so the answer is unknown. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	1	fdh4	translate-unknown	אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		This **book** was most likely a scroll, and it most likely contained what is now known as the Torah or the “five books of Moses.” Alternate translation: “a scroll that contained the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ NEH	8	11	e1k3	grammar-connect-logic-result	הַ֔סּוּ כִּ֥י הַ⁠יּ
 NEH	8	11	sxx6		הַ֔סּוּ	1		This is a word that signals to a person that they should be quiet. If your language has a similar expression, you can use it in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could also give the meaning in this context. Alternate translation: “Shhh” or “Stop crying now”
 NEH	8	11	fjz6	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠אַל־תֵּעָצֵֽבוּ	1	Do not be grieved	If you expressed the idea behind this phrase with an active form in [8:10](../08/10.md) and you said there what was causing the action, you would not need to repeat that information here. Alternate translation: “do not be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 NEH	8	12	e1k5	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יֵּלְכ֨וּ כָל־הָ⁠עָ֜ם לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙ וּ⁠לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֣ח מָנ֔וֹת וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the last phrase at the beginning of the sentence since it gives the reason for the rest of the actions. Alternate translation: “So the people celebrated by eating and drinking and sharing with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-NEH	8	12	e1k7	figs-explicit	לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙	1		The implication is that they enjoyed the special food and drink described in [8:10](.//08/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating rich foods and drinking sweet drinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NEH	8	12	e1k7	figs-explicit	לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙	1		The implication is that they enjoyed the special food and drink described in [8:10](../08/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating rich foods and drinking sweet drinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	12	e1k9	figs-doublet	לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙	1		Eating and drinking are used together here to convey a single idea, celebrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “celebrating with festive meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 NEH	8	12	e1l3	figs-explicit	וּ⁠לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֣ח מָנ֔וֹת	1		The implication is that they sent these portions to the poor, who would not have been able to afford rich food and drink, as described in [8:10](../08/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sharing with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	12	z1gc	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה	1		The abstract noun **rejoicing** can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “and to rejoice greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1030,12 +1030,12 @@ NEH	8	17	e1q7	figs-idiom	מִ⁠ימֵי֩ יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בִּן־נ֥וּ
 NEH	8	17	e32u	translate-names	יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בִּן־נ֥וּן	1		Joshua is the name of a man, and Nun is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	8	17	cey3	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1		**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” In this context it includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	8	17	wyd6	figs-abstractnouns	וַ⁠תְּהִ֥י שִׂמְחָ֖ה גְּדוֹלָ֥ה מְאֹֽד	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **rejoicing** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the people were very joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-NEH	8	18	sfx7	figs-explicit	וַ֠⁠יִּקְרָא בְּ⁠סֵ֨פֶר תּוֹרַ֤ת הָ⁠אֱלֹהִים֙	1		**He** means Ezra, as stated explicitly in [8:3](../08/03.md) and [8:13](../-8/13.md). The implication is that Ezra continued to read to the family and religious leaders who had asked him to keep teaching them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Each day throughout the festival, Ezra continued to read to the leaders from the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NEH	8	18	sfx7	figs-explicit	וַ֠⁠יִּקְרָא בְּ⁠סֵ֨פֶר תּוֹרַ֤ת הָ⁠אֱלֹהִים֙	1		**He** means Ezra, as stated explicitly in [8:3](../08/03.md) and [8:13](../08/13.md). The implication is that Ezra continued to read to the family and religious leaders who had asked him to keep teaching them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Each day throughout the festival, Ezra continued to read to the leaders from the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	18	g9rl	figs-idiom	י֣וֹם ׀ בְּ⁠י֔וֹם	1		This is an idiom that means **each day** or **every single day.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	8	18	j9aj	figs-merism	מִן־הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הָֽ⁠רִאשׁ֔וֹן עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הָ⁠אַחֲר֑וֹן	1		The story is describing the entire festival by speaking of two extreme parts of it, its first day and its last day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “throughout the entire festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 NEH	8	18	c1cp	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂוּ־חָג֙ שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֔ים וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֛י עֲצֶ֖רֶת כַּ⁠מִּשְׁפָּֽט	1		**They** means the people of Judah. The **ordinance** refers to the command in the Law of Moses to end the Festival of Tabernacles by gathering all of the Israelites together for a closing ceremony after seven days. Alternate translation: “The people of Judah celebrated the Festival of Tabernacles for seven days, and on the eighth day they held a closing ceremony together, as the Law of Moses commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	18	er1u	translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֛י	1		Alternate translation: “on day 8” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-NEH	9	intro	sj1h			0		# Nehemiah 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter and the next one form a single section.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Prayer to God<br><br>The people prayed and thanked God for his care for them and the blessings he gave to them. They also confessed their sin of disobeying him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bless]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/confess]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>### Learning from their ancestor’s mistakes<br>This chapter teaches that the Jews learned from the mistakes of their ancestors. They became determined to worship Yahweh alone, to not intermarry with other peoples, and to worship Yahweh as the law of Moses instructed them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Recalling the great power of God<br>It was common to recall the great things God did for Israel. This is a reminder to Israel of God’s power. It is intended to bring the people to repentance and proper worship of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
+NEH	9	intro	sj1h			0		# Nehemiah 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter and the next one form a single section.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Prayer to God\n\nThe people prayed and thanked God for his care for them and the blessings he gave to them. They also confessed their sin of disobeying him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bless]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/confess]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Learning from their ancestor’s mistakes\n\nThis chapter teaches that the Jews learned from the mistakes of their ancestors. They became determined to worship Yahweh alone, to not intermarry with other peoples, and to worship Yahweh as the law of Moses instructed them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Recalling the great power of God\n\nIt was common to recall the great things God did for Israel. This is a reminder to Israel of God’s power. It is intended to bring the people to repentance and proper worship of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
 NEH	9	1	w8w8	translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בְ⁠יוֹם֩ עֶשְׂרִ֨ים וְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֜ה לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֗ה	1		**This month** means the seventh month of that year according to the Hebrew calendar, as specified in [8:2](../08/02.md) and [8:14](../08/14.md). The Law of Moses said to observe the Festival of Tabernacles from the fifteenth through the twenty-second days of that month. The implication is that after that joyful celebration, the people were given one full day to rest and prepare for the gathering that this chapter describes. It had a different and more solemn purpose. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “On the twenty-fourth day of the seventh month of that year, two days after the joyful Festival of Tabernacles had ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 NEH	9	1	f1a1	translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בְ⁠יוֹם֩ עֶשְׂרִ֨ים וְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֜ה לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֗ה	1		Alternate translation: “On day 24 of month 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 NEH	9	1	lm7m	figs-activepassive	נֶאֶסְפ֤וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1233,8 +1233,8 @@ NEH	9	34	w8h1	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠אֲבֹתֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1		**Fathers** here
 NEH	9	34	fh22	figs-parallelism	לֹ֥א עָשׂ֖וּ תּוֹרָתֶ֑⁠ךָ וְ⁠לֹ֤א הִקְשִׁ֨יבוּ֙ אֶל־מִצְוֺתֶ֔י⁠ךָ וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵ֣דְוֺתֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1		These two phrases mean similar things. The Levites use the repetition to confess how completely the people have disobeyed what God told them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “have completely disobeyed everything you told them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NEH	9	34	z9gd	figs-idiom	וְ⁠לֹ֤א הִקְשִׁ֨יבוּ֙ אֶל	1		Not paying attention to a command, like not listening to it, is a figurative way of saying not obeying it. Alternate translation: “have disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	9	34	x4lc	figs-doublet	מִצְוֺתֶ֔י⁠ךָ וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵ֣דְוֺתֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1		These two terms mean similar things. You do not need to repeat both of them in your translation if that would make the meaning less clear for your readers. Alternate translation: “everything you told them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-NEH	9	34	z9wl		וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵ֣דְוֺתֶ֔י⁠ךָ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַעִידֹ֖תָ בָּ⁠הֶֽם	1		As in [9:26](../09/26.md), [9:29](../09/29.md), and [9:30](../09/30), this expression means to warn someone about what they are doing. So here it is referring to “the warnings that you gave them to warn them.” You do not need to repeat the idea of “warn” twice in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the many warnings you gave them”
-NEH	9	35	af8m	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הֵ֣ם בְּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠ם֩…לֹ֣א עֲבָד֑וּ⁠ךָ	1		**Them** means the people and their leaders, as listed in [9:32](../09/32/.md) and [9:34](../09/34.md). **Serve** is another way of saying “obey.” The implied meaning is that the Israelites did not obey Yahweh even when they had a kingdom of their own, before other nations conquered them. Alternate translation: “They did not obey you even while they had a kingdom of their own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NEH	9	34	z9wl		וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵ֣דְוֺתֶ֔י⁠ךָ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַעִידֹ֖תָ בָּ⁠הֶֽם	1		As in [9:26](../09/26.md), [9:29](../09/29.md), and [9:30](../09/30.md), this expression means to warn someone about what they are doing. So here it is referring to “the warnings that you gave them to warn them.” You do not need to repeat the idea of “warn” twice in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the many warnings you gave them”
+NEH	9	35	af8m	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הֵ֣ם בְּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠ם֩…לֹ֣א עֲבָד֑וּ⁠ךָ	1		**Them** means the people and their leaders, as listed in [9:32](../09/32.md) and [9:34](../09/34.md). **Serve** is another way of saying “obey.” The implied meaning is that the Israelites did not obey Yahweh even when they had a kingdom of their own, before other nations conquered them. Alternate translation: “They did not obey you even while they had a kingdom of their own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	9	35	nxv9	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בְ⁠טוּבְ⁠ךָ֨ הָ⁠רָ֜ב אֲשֶׁר־נָתַ֣תָּ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם	1		**Goodness** is an abstract noun that refers to all the good things that God gave to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with an adjective such as “good.” Alternate translation: “even while they enjoyed the good things you gave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NEH	9	35	ibf9	figs-doublet	וּ⁠בְ⁠אֶ֨רֶץ הָ⁠רְחָבָ֧ה וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁמֵנָ֛ה	1		These two terms mean similar things. They both indicate that the land God gave to the Israelites was good for growing crops. There was a lot of room in it, and the soil was good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “the fertile land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 NEH	9	35	h9n5	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בְ⁠אֶ֨רֶץ…וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁמֵנָ֛ה	1		As in [9:25](../09/25.md), “fat” means land that can produce abundantly and feed its inhabitants well. The rich character of the soil is being described figuratively by something associated with it, the well-fed character of the people it sustains. Alternate translation: “fertile land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1336,7 +1336,7 @@ NEH	10	33	ehf4	translate-unknown	לְ⁠לֶ֣חֶם הַֽ⁠מַּעֲרֶ֡כ
 NEH	10	33	xu3y	translate-unknown	וּ⁠מִנְחַ֣ת הַ⁠תָּמִ֣יד וּ⁠לְ⁠עוֹלַ֣ת הַ֠⁠תָּמִיד	1		This likely refers to a grain offering and an animal offering that were burned on the temple altar each day. Alternate translation: “the daily grain and animal offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 NEH	10	33	g1c9	figs-metonymy	הַ⁠שַּׁבָּת֨וֹת הֶ⁠חֳדָשִׁ֜ים לַ⁠מּוֹעֲדִ֗ים	1		This actually refers to the offerings that would be made at these times. The offerings are being described figuratively by something associated with them, the occasions on which they are offered. Alternate translation: “offerings made on the Sabbath, on the new moon festival, and during other festivals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NEH	10	33	g1d1	translate-unknown	וְ⁠לַ⁠קֳּדָשִׁים֙	1		This likely refers to offerings that would be dedicated and offered to God on behalf of the people on other occasions. Alternate translation: “and offerings needed for any other occasion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-NEH	10	33	g1d3	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠לַ֣⁠חַטָּא֔וֹת לְ⁠כַפֵּ֖ר עַל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1		As Nehemiah does in [4:5](.//04/05.md), the covenant speaks here of sins as if they were an object that could be physically hidden. Alternate translation: “offerings made to ask God to forgive the sins of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	10	33	g1d3	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠לַ֣⁠חַטָּא֔וֹת לְ⁠כַפֵּ֖ר עַל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1		As Nehemiah does in [4:5](../04/05.md), the covenant speaks here of sins as if they were an object that could be physically hidden. Alternate translation: “offerings made to ask God to forgive the sins of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	10	33	g1d5	translate-unknown	וְ⁠כֹ֖ל מְלֶ֥אכֶת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1		This seems to refer to the ongoing work of cleaning, maintaining, and repairing all of the furnishings and equipment used in the temple worship. Alternate translation: “and anything else needed to maintain worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 NEH	10	33	g1d7	figs-metaphor	בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1		Here again the covenant speaks of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	10	34	s6yz		וְ⁠הַ⁠גּוֹרָל֨וֹת הִפַּ֜לְנוּ עַל־קֻרְבַּ֣ן הָ⁠עֵצִ֗ים הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים הַ⁠לְוִיִּם֮ וְ⁠הָ⁠עָם֒ לְ֠⁠הָבִיא לְ⁠בֵ֨ית אֱלֹהֵ֧י⁠נוּ לְ⁠בֵית־אֲבֹתֵ֛י⁠נוּ	1		Alternate translation: “We agree to determine by lot what time each year the various extended families among the priests, the Levites, and the people will be responsible for bringing an offering of wood to the temple.”
@@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ NEH	10	38	eb51	translate-fraction	בַּ⁠עְשֵׂ֣ר…מַעֲשַׂ֤ר
 NEH	10	38	zl4a	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֞ם יַעֲל֨וּ אֶת־מַעֲשַׂ֤ר הַֽ⁠מַּעֲשֵׂר֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1		The implication is that in the way the Levites will help support the priests, in the same way the people will support the priests through the tithes described in verse 37. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Levites will bring one tenth of the tithes they receive to the temple, to help support the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	10	38	g1g9	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠בֵ֣ית אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1		The covenant continues to speak of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	10	38	g1h1	translate-unknown	אֶל־הַ⁠לְּשָׁכ֖וֹת לְ⁠בֵ֥ית הָ⁠אוֹצָֽר	1		Like the similar phrase in [10:37](../10/37.md), this phrase explains where the Levites are to deliver the ten percent of the tithes that they will contribute. Alternate translation: “to the rooms where things are stored in the temple” or “the rooms in the temple treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-NEH	10	39	g1h3	figs-ellipsis	הַ֠⁠לְּשָׁכוֹת	1		This is an abbreviated way of saying “the chambers of the house of the treasury” as in [10:38](../10/38). Alternate translation: “the rooms where things are stored in the temple” or “the rooms in the temple treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NEH	10	39	g1h3	figs-ellipsis	הַ֠⁠לְּשָׁכוֹת	1		This is an abbreviated way of saying “the chambers of the house of the treasury” as in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “the rooms where things are stored in the temple” or “the rooms in the temple treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NEH	10	39	qzf8	figs-metaphor	בְנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל וּ⁠בְנֵ֣י הַ⁠לֵּוִ֗י	1		**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” The term is referring to the groups that were descended from the men named Israel and Levi. Alternate translation: “the Israelites and the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	10	39	ss5h	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠שָׁם֙ כְּלֵ֣י הַ⁠מִּקְדָּ֔שׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִים֙ הַ⁠מְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִ֖ים וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֑ים	1		**There** means in those same storerooms. The phrase **the vessels for** at the start of this list applies to every item on the list. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could repeat that idea throughout the list. Alternate translation: “In those same rooms we will also store equipment for the temple, equipment that the priests use when they are on duty, tools that the gatekeepers use, and instruments for the musicians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NEH	10	39	g1h5	figs-synecdoche	כְּלֵ֣י	1		Here the covenant uses one type of equipment that the storerooms would hold, **vessels** or “jars” or “containers,” to refer figuratively to all the different types of equipment on the list in this verse. Alternate translation: “equipment” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -1400,7 +1400,7 @@ NEH	11	5	h1c3	figs-explicit	וּ⁠מַעֲשֵׂיָ֣ה	1		The implication is
 NEH	11	5	dxb8	figs-metaphor	בֶּן־הַ⁠שִּׁלֹנִֽי	1		Most likely, the Shiloni were the clan descended from Judah’s son Shelah. Here the phrase **son of** indicates that Maaseiah shared in the quality of belonging to this clan. Alternate translation: “one of the descendants of Shelah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	6	h1c5		כָּל־בְּנֵי־פֶ֕רֶץ הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֖ים בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֛וֹת שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֖ה אַנְשֵׁי־חָֽיִל	1		Alternate translation: “The total number of the descendants of Perez who settled in Jerusalem who were able to fight in the army was 468”
 NEH	11	6	y8t2	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵי־פֶ֕רֶץ הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֖ים בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם	1		**Sons** here figuratively means **descendants.** Alternate translation: “the descendants of Perez who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NEH	11	6	ej3g	figs-abstractnouns	אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֛וֹת שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֖ה אַנְשֵׁי־חָֽיִל	1		The abstract noun **strength** refers to the way these men were able to use weapons and fight to defend the city if necessary. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as *fight.** Alternate translation: “468 men who were able to fight in the army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+NEH	11	6	ej3g	figs-abstractnouns	אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֛וֹת שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֖ה אַנְשֵׁי־חָֽיִל	1		The abstract noun **strength** refers to the way these men were able to use weapons and fight to defend the city if necessary. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as **fight**. Alternate translation: “468 men who were able to fight in the army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NEH	11	6	hcr6	translate-numbers	אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֛וֹת שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֖ה	1		Alternate translation: “four hundred and sixty-eight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NEH	11	7	m8mp	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֣י בִנְיָמִ֑ן	1		**Sons** here figuratively means **descendants.** Alternate translation: “the people from the tribe of Benjamin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	7	md67	figs-ellipsis	בְּנֵ֣י בִנְיָמִ֑ן	1		This means specifically the people from the tribe of Benjamin who lived in Jerusalem. The list is speaking in abbreviated form here. Alternate translation: “the people from the tribe of Benjamin who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1483,9 +1483,9 @@ NEH	11	23	h1k9	figs-idiom	דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ	1
 NEH	11	24	aee9	translate-names	וּ⁠פְתַֽחְיָ֨ה בֶּן־מְשֵֽׁיזַבְאֵ֜ל	1		Pethahiah is the name of a man, and Meshezabel is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	11	24	h1l1	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵי־זֶ֤רַח	1		**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “one of the descendants of Zerah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	24	h1l3	translate-names	זֶ֤רַח בֶּן־יְהוּדָה֙	1		Zerah is the name of a man, and Judah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NEH	11	24	h1l5	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1		Here, **hand** figuratively means **side** and figuratively describing Zerah as the king’s advisor by reference to something associated with that role, the place that he would usually occupy next to the king. Alternate translation: “was an advisor to the king”  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NEH	11	24	h1l5	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1		Here, **hand** figuratively means **side** and figuratively describing Zerah as the king’s advisor by reference to something associated with that role, the place that he would usually occupy next to the king. Alternate translation: “was an advisor to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NEH	11	24	dqa4	figs-explicit	לְ⁠כָל־דָּבָ֖ר לָ⁠עָֽם	1		**People** here means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “for all matters concerning the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NEH	11	25	h1l9		וְ⁠אֶל	1		After describing the various groups that settled in Jerusalem and their leaders, the list said in [11:20](../11/20.md) that all the other the Israelites continued to live in the other cities of Judah. In [11:21–24](../11/21-24.md) the list gave additional details about some other things, but it is now returning to speak about those cities and towns outside of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this with a phrase such as “and as for”
+NEH	11	25	h1l9		וְ⁠אֶל	1		After describing the various groups that settled in Jerusalem and their leaders, the list said in [11:20](../11/20.md) that all the other the Israelites continued to live in the other cities of Judah. In [11:21–24](../11/21.md) the list gave additional details about some other things, but it is now returning to speak about those cities and towns outside of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this with a phrase such as “and as for”
 NEH	11	25	h1m1	figs-metaphor	הַ⁠חֲצֵרִ֖ים בִּ⁠שְׂדֹתָ֑⁠ם	1		This refers to settlements and the adjacent agricultural land. It is as if the villages are **in** the fields because the fields surround the villages. Alternate translation: “the towns where there was farmland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	25	h1m3	figs-explicit	הַ⁠חֲצֵרִ֖ים בִּ⁠שְׂדֹתָ֑⁠ם	1		The implication is that these are the places where people lived who did not settle in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the towns outside Jerusalem where there was farmland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	11	25	h1m5	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֗ה	1		**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “some of the descendants of Judah” or “some of the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ NEH	11	31	h1n3	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וּ⁠בְנֵ֥י	1		This phrase
 NEH	11	31	n61t	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠בְנֵ֥י בִנְיָמִ֖ן	1		**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the people of the tribe of Benjamin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	31	h1n5	figs-ellipsis	מִ⁠גָּ֑בַע	1		Here the list is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is that the people of the tribe of Benjamin lived in different towns, beginning with Geba and including the rest of the towns that the list names afterwards. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “lived in other towns, including Geba” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NEH	11	31	uha3	translate-names	מִ⁠גָּ֑בַע מִכְמָ֣שׂ וְ⁠עַיָּ֔ה וּ⁠בֵֽית־אֵ֖ל	1		These are the names of four towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NEH	11	31	lm1q	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠בֵֽית־אֵ֖ל וּ⁠בְנֹתֶֽי⁠הָ	1		As in [11:25](../11/25.md) (and also in verses [27](../11/27.md), [28](../11/28.md), [30](../11/30.md), and [31](../11/31.d)), **daughters** is a figurative way of speaking of the small communities that grow up around a town. Review the note to [11:25](../11/25.md) if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “Bethel and its villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	11	31	lm1q	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠בֵֽית־אֵ֖ל וּ⁠בְנֹתֶֽי⁠הָ	1		As in [11:25](../11/25.md) (and also in verses [27](../11/27.md), [28](../11/28.md), [30](../11/30.md), and [31](../11/31.md)), **daughters** is a figurative way of speaking of the small communities that grow up around a town. Review the note to [11:25](../11/25.md) if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “Bethel and its villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	32	ucv8	translate-names	עֲנָת֥וֹת נֹ֖ב עֲנָֽנְיָֽה	1		These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	11	33	jwf8	translate-names	חָצ֥וֹר ׀ רָמָ֖ה גִּתָּֽיִם	1		These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	11	34	zi08	translate-names	חָדִ֥יד צְבֹעִ֖ים נְבַלָּֽט	1		These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1797,7 +1797,7 @@ NEH	13	16	yvh1	translate-names	וְ⁠הַ⁠צֹּרִים֙	1		Tyrians were pe
 NEH	13	16	k1p9	figs-metaphor	לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יְהוּדָ֖ה	1		**Son of** is a figurative expression that indicates that a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, Nehemiah is describing people who share the quality of being residents of the province of Judah. (In context, this does not seem to be limited to actual descendants of Judah, that is, Israelites from that tribe, since the Tyrians seem to have been eager to sell to anyone living in the area.) Alternate translation: “the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	13	16	k1q1	figs-explicit	וּ⁠בִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם	1		The implication is that Jerusalem was the last place where anyone should have broken the Sabbath by doing work and engaging in commerce because it was the place from which God had chosen to start making himself famous throughout the world and the city where God had chosen to put his temple. (The concept is the same here as in [11:1](../11/01.md) and [11:18](../11/18.md), where Nehemiah calls Jerusalem “the holy city.”) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even in Jerusalem, the special city that God chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	13	17	k1q3	grammar-connect-logic-result	וָ⁠אָרִ֕יבָ⁠ה	1		In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains something that happened as a result of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-NEH	13	17	k1q5	figs-idiom	וָ⁠אָרִ֕יבָ⁠ה אֵ֖ת חֹרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֑ה	1		As in [5:7](.//05/07.md) and [13:11](../13/11.md), **contended** is a technical term that describes a public accusation that requires the defendants to answer for themselves in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I called the leading citizens of Judah to account publicly for what they had allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NEH	13	17	k1q5	figs-idiom	וָ⁠אָרִ֕יבָ⁠ה אֵ֖ת חֹרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֑ה	1		As in [5:7](../05/07.md) and [13:11](../13/11.md), **contended** is a technical term that describes a public accusation that requires the defendants to answer for themselves in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I called the leading citizens of Judah to account publicly for what they had allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	13	17	k1q7		חֹרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֑ה	1		See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens of Judah”
 NEH	13	17	k1q9	figs-explicit	וָ⁠אֹמְרָ֣⁠ה לָ⁠הֶ֗ם	1		The implication in context is that what Nehemiah said was an accusation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates this. Alternate translation: “I demanded to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	13	17	w5nr	figs-rquestion	מָֽה־הַ⁠דָּבָ֨ר הָ⁠רָ֤ע הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים וּֽ⁠מְחַלְּלִ֖ים אֶת־י֥וֹם הַ⁠שַּׁבָּֽת	1		Nehemiah is using the question form for emphasis in order to scold the leaders of Judah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate what he says as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are doing an evil thing by treating the Sabbath day like any other day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

en_tn_17-EST.tsv

@@ -81,13 +81,13 @@ EST	1	12	bsd5	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ
 EST	1	13	asf9		לַ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים	1	to the wise men	This means the king’s advisors. You could call them “his advisors” or “the royal advisors.”
 EST	1	13	g9fe		יֹדְעֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִתִּ֑ים	1	who were knowers of the times	This means something like “who knew the right way to do things” or “who understood the culture.”
 EST	1	13	x2u7	writing-background	כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	for thus was the manner of the king	This means that it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. This is background information that explains why the king called upon these men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-EST	1	13	adf1	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	for thus was the manner of the king	If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse  to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EST	1	13	adf1	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	for thus was the manner of the king	If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EST	1	13	jd11	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י	1	before the face of	Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would personally ask his wise men for advice in matters like these. Alternate translation: “to consult personally with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EST	1	13	adf3		יֹדְעֵ֖י דָּ֥ת וָ⁠דִֽין	1	knowers of law and judgment	This means that these advisors knew the law and knew how to make good decisions in light of it.
 EST	1	14	adf5		וְ⁠הַ⁠קָּרֹ֣ב אֵלָ֗י⁠ו	1	and the ones near to him	Alternate translation: “the king’s closest advisors”
 EST	1	14	cc44	translate-names	כַּרְשְׁנָ֤א שֵׁתָר֙ אַדְמָ֣תָא תַרְשִׁ֔ישׁ מֶ֥רֶס מַרְסְנָ֖א מְמוּכָ֑ן	1	Karshena, Shethar, Admatha, Tarshish, Meres, Mersena, Memukan	These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EST	1	14	jd13	figs-idiom	רֹאֵי֙ פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	seers of the face of the king	**To see the face of** is an idiom that means to be in the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would regularly and personally consult with these seven advisors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EST	1	14	adf7	figs-metaphor	הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת	1	the ones who sat first in the kingdom	Here, **sitting** represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire. (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EST	1	14	adf7	figs-metaphor	הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת	1	the ones who sat first in the kingdom	Here, **sitting** represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EST	1	15	j6sh	figs-explicit	כְּ⁠דָת֙ מַֽה־לַּ⁠עֲשׂ֔וֹת בַּ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה וַשְׁתִּ֑י עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־עָשְׂתָ֗ה אֶֽת־מַאֲמַר֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים	1	According to law, what is to be done with the queen Vashti on account of that she did not perform the command of King Ahasuerus by the hand of the eunuchs?	This verse presents the question that the king asked the wise men. It may be helpful to indicate this by saying something like “The king asked them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	1	15	ics9		כְּ⁠דָת֙…עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר	1	According to law … on account of that	Alternate translation: “What does the law say we should do … because…?”
 EST	1	15	adf9	figs-events	בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים	1	by the hand of the eunuchs	To present the events in chronological order, you can begin with the information that these men brought the command. Alternate translation: “Queen Vashti did not do what I told my servants to command her to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ EST	2	1	xpt9	figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֔תָה וְ⁠אֵ֥ת אֲ
 EST	2	1	agk1	figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ	1	what had been decided	You can say this with an active form, and you can say that the king performed the action. Alternate translation: “what he had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EST	2	2	agk3	translate-unknown	נַעֲרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מְשָׁרְתָ֑י⁠ו	1	the young men of the king who serve him	These were not the older, wiser royal advisors whom Ahasuerus consulted in [1:13](../01/13.md), but younger men who stood nearby the king ready to help with any practical needs. You could call them his personal servants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EST	2	2	agk5	figs-explicit	יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ נְעָר֥וֹת	1	Let them seek for the king young women	Implicit in this suggestion is the idea, “You should get a new wife for yourself.” You can say that explicitly at the beginning of the advice that the young men gave to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EST	2	2	s4hv	writing-participants	יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ	1	Let them seek	**Them** refers to the servants that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you could say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men Alternate translation: “to look for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+EST	2	2	s4hv	writing-participants	יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ	1	Let them seek	**Them** refers to the servants that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you could say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men.” Alternate translation: “to look for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 EST	2	2	zi03	figs-123person	לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ	1	for the king	The young men speak to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “for yourself” or “on your behalf” if that would be clear but also respectful in your language (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EST	2	2	jd45	figs-idiom	טוֹב֥וֹת מַרְאֶֽה	1	pleasing of appearance	As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EST	2	3	g9vp	figs-123person	וְ⁠יַפְקֵ֨ד הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ	1	And let the king appoint	The young men speak to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “you could appoint” in a respectful way (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ EST	2	13	abd0		וּ⁠בָ⁠זֶ֕ה	1	Then at this	Alternate translation: “a
 EST	2	13	abe0	figs-explicit	הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֖ה בָּאָ֣ה אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	the young woman would go to the king	This means that the young woman would go and have sexual relations with the king and thereby become one of his concubines. If your readers need this information to understand the story, you could explain that here, if you did not do so in verse 12. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	2	13	abe1	figs-explicit	כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙	1	Anything that she said would be given to her	**Anything** most likely refers to clothing and jewelry. This phrase probably means that a woman could take any of those that she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly by saying, “A young woman could take whatever clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	2	13	v133	figs-activepassive	כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙	1	Anything that she said would be given to her	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she could take whatever she wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EST	2	13	xx9x		בֵּ֥ית	2	the house of	Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
+EST	2	13	xx9x		בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	the house of	Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
 EST	2	13	abe3		בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	the house of the king	Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
 EST	2	14	abe4	figs-explicit	הִ֣יא בָאָ֗ה	1	she would go	She would not walk over on her own. Rather, the king’s servants would come and bring her to the king’s private quarters, in the way that they were told to bring Vashti to the banquet in [1:11](../01/11.md). you could say this explicitly if it would help your readers to understand the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	2	14	ded5	figs-explicit	וּ֠⁠בַ⁠בֹּקֶר הִ֣יא שָׁבָ֞ה	1	and in the morning she would return to	It is implied that this is the following morning. This information can be made clear. Once again, she would not go on her own. Alternate translation: “the next morning the king’s servants would bring her to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ EST	4	16	abs3		אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־כַ⁠דָּ֔ת	1	which is not accordi
 EST	4	16	abs4		וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָבַ֖דְתִּי אָבָֽדְתִּי	1	and if I perish, I perish	Alternate translation: “then if they kill me, they kill me”
 EST	4	17	abs5	figs-explicit	וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֖ר מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	So Mordecai went	The implication is that Mordecai did this after Hathak brought Esther’s reply back to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so after Hathak told this to Mordecai, he went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	4	17	abs6		כְּ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוְּתָ֥ה עָלָ֖י⁠ו אֶסְתֵּֽר	1	according to the whole charge that Esther had laid upon him	Alternate translation: “everything that Esther had told him to do”
-EST	5	intro	k5ff			0		# Esther 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5-7).<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Esther’s respect<br>Esther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EST	5	intro	k5ff			0		# Esther 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5-7).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Esther’s respect\n\nEsther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	5	1	j53r	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֗י	1	Now it happened on the third day	This introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “three days later” or “when Esther had been fasting for three days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EST	5	1	abs7	figs-abstractnouns	וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת	1	Esther put on royalty	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **royalty**, you can express the same idea with an adjective and a concrete noun. Alternate translation: “Esther put on the robes that showed that she was the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EST	5	1	abs8	figs-explicit	וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת	1	Esther put on royalty	It is clear from the story that before she went to see the king, Esther got a banquet ready so that she could invite him and Haman to come to it right away. If it is confusing to leave that out, you can explain that here. Alternate translation, add: “Esther prepared a grand banquet and then put on her royal robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ EST	5	14	abw8	grammar-connect-logic-result	וּ⁠בֹֽא…אֶל הַ⁠מּ
 EST	5	14	bbs9	figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן	1	And the word was good before the face of Haman	The **word** was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, **face** figuratively represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EST	5	14	i8is		וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הָ⁠עֵֽץ	1	and he made the tree	Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”
 EST	5	14	j83r	translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵֽץ	1	the tree	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EST	6	intro	i9x7			0		# Esther 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Approaching the king<br>It was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.
+EST	6	intro	i9x7			0		# Esther 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Approaching the king\n\nIt was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.
 EST	6	1	j85r	writing-newevent	בַּ⁠לַּ֣יְלָה הַ⁠ה֔וּא	1	That night	This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way of introducing a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EST	6	1	abw9	figs-personification	נָדְדָ֖ה שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	the sleep of the king fled away	Here, **sleep** is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could flee away. Alternate translation: “the king could not sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EST	6	1	abx1	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר לְ⁠הָבִ֞יא	1	And he said to bring	**He** means the king. The implication is that he told the young men who attended him to do this. Verses 3 and 5 indicate this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so he commanded his servants to fetch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -714,7 +714,7 @@ EST	7	9	a7ic	translate-names	חַ֠רְבוֹנָה	1	Harbona	This is a man’s
 EST	7	9	j7d1	figs-metonymy	אֶחָ֨ד מִן־הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	one from the eunuchs before the face of the king	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Harbona was one of the eunuchs who served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EST	7	9	acc4	translate-unknown	הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	the eunuchs before the face of the king	See how you translated this term and this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “the guardians who served the king personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EST	7	9	j7d3		הִנֵּה	1	behold	**Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, it can be omitted from your translation. But consider using an expression that is natural in your language for someone to address the king directly to get his attention. For example, you could say, “O king!”
-EST	7	9	acc5		גַּ֣ם…הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י…עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן	1	Also … the tree that Haman made for Mordecai … is standing at the house of Haman	Alternate translation:“Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”
+EST	7	9	acc5		גַּ֣ם…הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י…עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן	1	Also … the tree that Haman made for Mordecai … is standing at the house of Haman	Alternate translation: “Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”
 EST	7	9	j7d5	translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ	1	the tree	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EST	7	9	j7d7	figs-idiom	לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁ֧ר דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	for Mordecai, who spoke good for the king	This expression means that Mordecai said something that benefitted the king. Specifically, Mordecai reported an assassination plot and saved the king’s life. Alternate translation: “Mordecai, who saved the king’s life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EST	7	9	j7d9	figs-123person	דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	spoke good for the king	Harbona addresses the king in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “saved your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ EST	7	9	sre1	translate-bdistance	גָּבֹ֖הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַ
 EST	7	9	acc7	figs-explicit	תְּלֻ֥⁠הוּ עָלָֽי⁠ו	1	Hang him on it	**Him** means Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “hang [or impale] Haman on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	7	10	j8d3	translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ	1	the tree	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EST	7	10	umd4	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠חֲמַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שָׁכָֽכָה	1	and the rage of the king subsided	Here the story figuratively compares the king’s anger to floodwaters, which can cause great destruction. “Subside” means for waters to drain away and for their level to go down. You could express the meaning by saying something like “Then the king’s rage lessened,” or “Then the king was not so angry.” Or you could use a different metaphor that would be meaningful in your language, such as, “Then the king cooled off.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EST	8	intro	z6j7			0		# Esther 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### God’s protection<br>Yahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
+EST	8	intro	z6j7			0		# Esther 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### God’s protection\n\nYahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
 EST	8	1	j8d5	writing-newevent	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא	1	On that day	This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used figuratively to mean around the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EST	8	1	j8d7	figs-synecdoche	נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן	1	the king Ahasuerus gave to Esther the queen the house of Haman	Here, **house** figuratively represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EST	8	1	nm3u	figs-distinguish	צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים	1	the adversary of the Jews	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
@@ -819,7 +819,7 @@ EST	8	12	ach1		בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ א
 EST	8	12	j6r3	translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר	1	on the thirteenth	Alternate translation: “on day 13” or “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EST	8	12	hi2y	translate-ordinal	לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר	1	of the twelfth month	Alternate translation: “of month 12” or “of the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EST	8	12	ach2	figs-explicit	לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר	1	of the twelfth month	Implicitly, this means “the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EST	8	12	j6r4	translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר	1	which is the month of Adar	This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:07](../03/07.md) and [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
+EST	8	12	j6r4	translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר	1	which is the month of Adar	This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md) and [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 EST	8	13	j6r5	figs-activepassive	פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙	1	was to be given as a law	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to proclaim this as a law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EST	8	13	j6r7	figs-idiom	בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה	1	in every province by province	This expression means “in each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EST	8	13	ach4	figs-activepassive	גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עַמִּ֑ים	1	being uncovered for all the peoples	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials in every single province to post copies where everyone could see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

en_tn_23-ISA.tsv

@@ -1870,7 +1870,7 @@ ISA	33	20	z75i	figs-metaphor		0	whose stakes will never be pulled up nor will an
 ISA	33	21	js4c	figs-exclusive		0	Yahweh in majesty will be with us, in a place of broad rivers and streams	Here “us” refers to Isaiah and includes the people of Judah. This speaks of the safety of living with Yahweh as if it were a place that has rivers around it so that enemies cannot attack it. Alternate translation: “Yahweh who is majestic will be with us, and we will be safe as if we were in a place surrounded by broad rivers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ISA	33	21	z6si			0	will travel it	Alternate translation: “will travel the river”
 ISA	33	22	x9zc	figs-exclusive		0	our … us	This refers to Isaiah and includes the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ISA	33	23	er96	figs-metaphor		0	Your riggings are slack; they cannot hold the mast in place; they cannot spread the sail	This could mean: (1) The Assyrian army is like a boat that is unable to move through the water: the ropes that support the mast and sail have come loose and no longer support the mast, so the sail is useless ([Isaiah 33:1](../33/01.md)) or (2) the people of Judah are no longer at war: “You have loosened the cords that supported your flagpole; the flag no longer flies” ([Isaiah 33:17](./17.md)-[Isaiah 22](./22.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ISA	33	23	er96	figs-metaphor		0	Your riggings are slack; they cannot hold the mast in place; they cannot spread the sail	This could mean: (1) The Assyrian army is like a boat that is unable to move through the water: the ropes that support the mast and sail have come loose and no longer support the mast, so the sail is useless ([Isaiah 33:1](../33/01.md)) or (2) the people of Judah are no longer at war: “You have loosened the cords that supported your flagpole; the flag no longer flies” ([Isaiah 33:17-22](./17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ISA	33	23	b3bn			0	mast	tall poles that support the sail
 ISA	33	23	l3q9			0	sail	a large cloth that fills with wind and moves a boat through the water
 ISA	33	23	a64j	figs-activepassive		0	when the great spoil is divided	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when they divide the treasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

en_tn_24-JER.tsv

@@ -2289,7 +2289,7 @@ JER	34	8	pb27			0	word	message
 JER	34	8	us2n	writing-background		0	after King Zedekiah had made a covenant … freedom to them	These words begin to provide background information to events that will be described later. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JER	34	9	ka4p	writing-background		0	that each man … his brother	The background information that begins with the words “after King Zedekiah had made a covenant” in verse 8 ends here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JER	34	10	l3j5			0	Connecting Statement:	Jeremiah continues giving the background information that began in [Jeremiah 34:8](../34/08.md).
-JER	34	12	jbq2			0	Connecting Statement:	Jeremiah resumes the story from [Jeremiah 34:8](../34/08.md) after the background information of [Jeremiah 34:8](../34/08.md)-[Jeremiah 11](./10.md).
+JER	34	12	jbq2			0	Connecting Statement:	Jeremiah resumes the story from [Jeremiah 34:8](../34/08.md) after the background information of [Jeremiah 34:8-11](../34/08.md).
 JER	34	12	pf6k	figs-idiom		0	the word of Yahweh came to Jeremiah, saying,	This idiom is used to introduce a special message from God. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Jeremiah 1:4](../01/04.md). Alternate translation: “Yahweh gave a message to Jeremiah. He said, ‘Yahweh” or “Yahweh spoke this message to Jeremiah: ‘Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JER	34	13	b8wy	figs-idiom		0	house of slavery	This is an idiom. “place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JER	34	14	x834			0	each man must send away his brother, his fellow Hebrew who had sold himself to you and served you	Alternate translation: “each of you must free any fellow Hebrews who sold themselves to you and have been your slaves”

en_tn_26-EZK.tsv

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-EZK	front	intro	wb5b			0		# Introduction to Ezekiel<br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Ezekiel<br><br>1. Yahweh calls Ezekiel to speak his words (1:1–3:27)<br>1. Yahweh judges Judah and Jerusalem (4:1-24:27)<br>1. Ezekiel prophesies against nearby nations (25:1–32:32)<br>1. Yahweh explains the fall of Jerusalem (33:1–33)<br>1. Ezekiel brings messages of hope (34:1–48:35)<br>    * A new shepherd (34:1–31)<br>    * Edom destroyed (35:1–15)<br>    * Israel restored (36:1–37:28)<br>    * Gog and Magog (38:1–39:29)<br>    * Jerusalem and the temple restored (40:1–48:35)<br><br><br>### What is Ezekiel about?<br><br>The Book of Ezekiel contains words that Ezekiel prophesied between 592 B.C. and 573 B.C. The Jewish people were exiled in Babylonia. Ezekiel told them that God had punished them because they sinned against him. However, Ezekiel assured them that God would restore them. God was using Babylon to punish them. But eventually another nation would defeat the Babylonians. Ezekiel also prophesied about how God will restore Jerusalem and the temple so that the people can worship and sacrifice to him again. Ezekiel then described how the land will be divided again among the tribes of Israel.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>“Ezekiel” or “The Book of Ezekiel” is the traditional name for this book. Translators may also call it “The Messages from God Brought by Ezekiel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Ezekiel?<br><br>Ezekiel wrote the prophecies in the Book of Ezekiel. He was a prophet and priest who lived near Babylon in the time of the exile.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was Ezekiel’s temple?<br><br>Several chapters of the Book of Ezekiel give instructions about building a new temple. However, this temple is not the same as the temple the people would build after going back to Jerusalem. Because Ezekiel’s temple has never been built, some scholars think that this temple is to be built in the future. Other scholars think that Ezekiel’s temple is symbolic of the Church.<br><br>### Do the sacrifices in Ezekiel follow the law of Moses?<br><br>The sacrifices in Ezekiel 46 are somewhat different than the required sacrifices in Numbers 28. This may be because Ezekiel prophesied about a new temple with new sacrifices.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### How should one represent Ezekiel’s visions in translation?<br><br>The Book of Ezekiel has many complicated visions. Some are similar to passages in other Scripture books that describe future events. Some of these visions are about God rescuing Israel in the distant future. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>It is unclear whether Ezekiel actually traveled to the particular places named in the visions, or whether what he described were mental ideas. For this reason, Ezekiel’s viewpoint is sometimes difficult to understand, even though the meanings of the visions may be clear.<br><br>Translators should avoid trying to explain these visions in their translations. Instead, they should present the visions just as they are in the source text.<br><br>### What does “and you will know that I am Yahweh” mean?<br><br>This is a common phrase in the Book of Ezekiel. It is meant to assure the reader that these messages truly came from God, and that he will do what he has promised. The translator may also use the phrase “and you will understand that I am Yahweh and what I say will happen.” The UST translates it as “then you will know that I, Yahweh, have the power to do what I say that I will do.”
+EZK	front	intro	wb5b			0		# Introduction to Ezekiel<br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Ezekiel<br><br>1. Yahweh calls Ezekiel to speak his words (1:1–3:27)<br>1. Yahweh judges Judah and Jerusalem (4:1-24:27)<br>1. Ezekiel prophesies against nearby nations (25:1–32:32)<br>1. Yahweh explains the fall of Jerusalem (33:1–33)<br>1. Ezekiel brings messages of hope (34:1–48:35)<br>    * A new shepherd (34:1–31)<br>    * Edom destroyed (35:1–15)<br>    * Israel restored (36:1–37:28)<br>    * Gog and Magog (38:1–39:29)<br>    * Jerusalem and the temple restored (40:1–48:35)<br><br><br>### What is Ezekiel about?<br><br>The Book of Ezekiel contains words that Ezekiel prophesied between 592 B.C. and 573 B.C. The Jewish people were exiled in Babylonia. Ezekiel told them that God had punished them because they sinned against him. However, Ezekiel assured them that God would restore them. God was using Babylon to punish them. But eventually another nation would defeat the Babylonians. Ezekiel also prophesied about how God will restore Jerusalem and the temple so that the people can worship and sacrifice to him again. Ezekiel then described how the land will be divided again among the tribes of Israel.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>“Ezekiel” or “The Book of Ezekiel” is the traditional name for this book. Translators may also call it “The Messages from God Brought by Ezekiel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Ezekiel?<br><br>Ezekiel wrote the prophecies in the Book of Ezekiel. He was a prophet and priest who lived near Babylon in the time of the exile.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was Ezekiel’s temple?<br><br>Several chapters of the Book of Ezekiel give instructions about building a new temple. However, this temple is not the same as the temple the people would build after going back to Jerusalem. Because Ezekiel’s temple has never been built, some scholars think that this temple is to be built in the future. Other scholars think that Ezekiel’s temple is symbolic of the Church.<br><br>### Do the sacrifices in Ezekiel follow the law of Moses?<br><br>The sacrifices in Ezekiel 46 are somewhat different than the required sacrifices in Numbers 28. This may be because Ezekiel prophesied about a new temple with new sacrifices.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### How should one represent Ezekiel’s visions in translation?<br><br>The Book of Ezekiel has many complicated visions. Some are similar to passages in other Scripture books that describe future events. Some of these visions are about God rescuing Israel in the distant future. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalyptic]])<br><br>It is unclear whether Ezekiel actually traveled to the particular places named in the visions, or whether what he described were mental ideas. For this reason, Ezekiel’s viewpoint is sometimes difficult to understand, even though the meanings of the visions may be clear.<br><br>Translators should avoid trying to explain these visions in their translations. Instead, they should present the visions just as they are in the source text.<br><br>### What does “and you will know that I am Yahweh” mean?<br><br>This is a common phrase in the Book of Ezekiel. It is meant to assure the reader that these messages truly came from God, and that he will do what he has promised. The translator may also use the phrase “and you will understand that I am Yahweh and what I say will happen.” The UST translates it as “then you will know that I, Yahweh, have the power to do what I say that I will do.”
 EZK	1	intro	j5rn			0		# Ezekiel 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Ezekiel’s call<br><br>Ezekiel had a vision of God calling him to prophetic ministry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/call]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
 EZK	1	1	xqf6	translate-ordinal		0	In the thirtieth year	This is the thirtieth year of Ezekiel’s life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EZK	1	1	ad2n	translate-hebrewmonths		0	the fourth month, and the fifth day of the month	“the fifth day of the fourth month.” This is the fourth month of the Hebrew calendar. The fifth day is around the end of June on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])

en_tn_27-DAN.tsv

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-DAN	front	intro	txw3			0		# Introduction to Daniel<br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Daniel<br><br>1. Daniel and his friends in the court of Nebuchadnezzar (1:1–21)<br>1. Daniel interprets Nebuchadnezzar’s first dream (2:1–49)<br>1. Daniel’s friends delivered from the fiery furnace (3:1–30)<br>1. Daniel interprets Nebuchadnezzar’s second dream (4:1–37)<br>1. Belshazzar’s feast and the writing on the wall (5:1-31)<br>1. Daniel in the den of lions (6:1–28)<br>1. Daniel’s vision of four beasts (7:1–28)<br>1. Daniel’s vision of a ram and a goat (8:1–27)<br>1. Daniel prays and Gabriel answers (9:1–23)<br>1. Daniel’s vision of seventy weeks (9:24–27)<br>1. Daniel’s vision of a man (10:1–11:1)<br>1. The kings of the south and north (11:2–20)<br>1. An evil king exalts himself (11:21-39)<br>1. The time of the end (11:40–12:13)<br><br>### What is the Book of Daniel about?<br><br>The first part of the Book of Daniel (chapters 1–6) is a narrative about Daniel and his friends. They were young men from Jerusalem who were taken to Babylon as prisoners. These chapters tell how they were faithful to Yahweh while living in a pagan land serving a pagan king. And it tells how God rewarded them because they were faithful.<br><br>The rest of the Book of Daniel is a series of prophetic visions. Chapters 7 and 8 deal with images representing the kingdoms and kings of the major nations. Chapters 9–11 are prophecies and visions about wars and a type of the great enemy of God appearing. Chapter 12 is a vision that describes end times.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>The traditional title of this book is “The Book of Daniel” or just “Daniel.” Translators may call it “The Book About Daniel” or “The Book About the Deeds and Visions of Daniel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Daniel?<br><br>Daniel was a Jew who became a Babylonian government official during the exile. He may have written the book himself. Or he may have written the parts of the book and someone else put the parts together at a later time.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Is there a missing week in Daniel’s prophecy?<br><br>Scholars disagree about what may appear to be a missing week in 9:24-27. It is best for translators to allow apparent mysteries such as this to remain in the text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### When did the seventy weeks begin?<br><br>The seventy weeks in 9:24-27 began when a decree was issued to rebuild the city of Jerusalem. But there were several decrees that allowed this to happen. Translators do not need to understand how prophecies were or will be fulfilled to translate the text.<br><br>### Who was Darius the Mede?<br><br>Darius the Mede was a Babylonian king who sent Daniel into a den of lions. People have not found his name in history outside of the Book of Daniel. Scholars have tried to explain who Darius was, but they are not certain.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### How does Daniel use the word “king”?<br><br>Many kings are in the Book of Daniel, but not all of the kings ruled over all of Babylon or Persia. Some of the kings may have ruled over regions or cities.<br><br>### How many chapters does Daniel have?<br><br>Daniel has twelve chapters. Some Bible versions include stories called “Bel and the Dragon” and “The Prayer of Azariah.” However, few people think that these stories have the same authority as the rest of scripture. Therefore, there is no need to translate them.
+DAN	front	intro	txw3			0		# Introduction to Daniel\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Daniel\n\n1. Daniel and his friends in the court of Nebuchadnezzar (1:1–21)\n1. Daniel interprets Nebuchadnezzar’s first dream (2:1–49)\n1. Daniel’s friends delivered from the fiery furnace (3:1–30)\n1. Daniel interprets Nebuchadnezzar’s second dream (4:1–37)\n1. Belshazzar’s feast and the writing on the wall (5:1-31)\n1. Daniel in the den of lions (6:1–28)\n1. Daniel’s vision of four beasts (7:1–28)\n1. Daniel’s vision of a ram and a goat (8:1–27)\n1. Daniel prays and Gabriel answers (9:1–23)\n1. Daniel’s vision of seventy weeks (9:24–27)\n1. Daniel’s vision of a man (10:1–11:1)\n1. The kings of the south and north (11:2–20)\n1. An evil king exalts himself (11:21-39)\n1. The time of the end (11:40–12:13)\n\n### What is the Book of Daniel about?\n\nThe first part of the Book of Daniel (chapters 1–6) is a narrative about Daniel and his friends. They were young men from Jerusalem who were taken to Babylon as prisoners. These chapters tell how they were faithful to Yahweh while living in a pagan land serving a pagan king. And it tells how God rewarded them because they were faithful.\n\nThe rest of the Book of Daniel is a series of prophetic visions. Chapters 7 and 8 deal with images representing the kingdoms and kings of the major nations. Chapters 9–11 are prophecies and visions about wars and a type of the great enemy of God appearing. Chapter 12 is a vision that describes end times.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nThe traditional title of this book is “The Book of Daniel” or just “Daniel.” Translators may call it “The Book About Daniel” or “The Book About the Deeds and Visions of Daniel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Daniel?\n\nDaniel was a Jew who became a Babylonian government official during the exile. He may have written the book himself. Or he may have written the parts of the book and someone else put the parts together at a later time.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Is there a missing week in Daniel’s prophecy?\n\nScholars disagree about what may appear to be a missing week in 9:24-27. It is best for translators to allow apparent mysteries such as this to remain in the text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalyptic]])\n\n### When did the seventy weeks begin?\n\nThe seventy weeks in 9:24-27 began when a decree was issued to rebuild the city of Jerusalem. But there were several decrees that allowed this to happen. Translators do not need to understand how prophecies were or will be fulfilled to translate the text.\n\n### Who was Darius the Mede?\n\nDarius the Mede was a Babylonian king who sent Daniel into a den of lions. People have not found his name in history outside of the Book of Daniel. Scholars have tried to explain who Darius was, but they are not certain.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How does Daniel use the word “king”?\n\nMany kings are in the Book of Daniel, but not all of the kings ruled over all of Babylon or Persia. Some of the kings may have ruled over regions or cities.\n\n### How many chapters does Daniel have?\n\nDaniel has twelve chapters. Some Bible versions include stories called “Bel and the Dragon” and “The Prayer of Azariah.” However, few people think that these stories have the same authority as the rest of scripture. Therefore, there is no need to translate them.
 DAN	1	intro	p1ev			0		# Daniel 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Training for government jobs<br><br>Daniel, Shadrach, Meshach, and Abednego were chosen to be trained for service in the Babylonian kingdom. It was not unusual for foreigners to be given positions in the Babylonian government as advisors or cultural ambassadors.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Food laws<br><br>The food from the king included things the Jews were not allowed to eat according to the law of Moses. Daniel requested permission not to eat the king’s food. He proved to the king that this food was not necessary for good health. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
 DAN	1	1	x9t9	figs-synecdoche		0	Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylonia	This refers to Nebuchadnezzar and his soldiers, not only to Nebuchadnezzar. Alternate translation: “Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylonia and his soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 DAN	1	1	cps4			0	to cut off all supplies to it	Alternate translation: “to stop the people from receiving any supplies”

en_tn_28-HOS.tsv

@@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ HOS	12	14	ay94	figs-metaphor		0	will turn back on him his disgrace	The idea of m
 HOS	13	intro	la1r			0		# Hosea 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter uses poetry to communicate Yahweh’s disgust and anger with the northern kingdom of Israel.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>“Israel” and “Ephraim” are terms used to speak about the people of the northern kingdom. Samaria was the capital of the northern kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>This chapter makes it clear that the northern kingdom is going to be nearly decimated as a people. They will no longer exist as a nation.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical question<br><br>Hosea uses rhetorical questions throughout this chapter. They are not questions requesting information but rather questions indicating some emotion like anger or dissatisfaction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HOS	13	1	u92j			0	General Information:	Yahweh is speaking.
 HOS	13	1	aw8s	figs-synecdoche		0	When Ephraim spoke	Hosea uses the term “Ephraim” to refer to the entire northern kingdom, although it was also the name of one of the ten tribes. Hosea seems to be speaking of a long-past time, when the northern kingdom was strong and honored, unlike at the present time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-HOS	13	1	hyz3			0	there was trembling	It is understood that people were trembling because they were afraid of Ephraim. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “there was trembling among the people” or “people trembled in fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HOS	13	1	hyz3	figs-explicit		0	there was trembling	It is understood that people were trembling because they were afraid of Ephraim. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “there was trembling among the people” or “people trembled in fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HOS	13	1	lw4y	figs-metaphor		0	He exalted himself in Israel	Here “exalting” means to make oneself important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HOS	13	1	nqg7	figs-metaphor		0	but he became guilty because of Baal worship, and he died	When the people of Ephraim began worshiping Baal, they grew weak, and their enemies defeated them. Here “died” refers to the nation growing weak. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HOS	13	2	rtl5			0	Now they sin more and more	Here “they” refers to the tribe of Ephraim and the entire nation of Israel, who followed Ephraim’s example.

en_tn_29-JOL.tsv

@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ JOL	2	32	w6nv		וְ⁠הָיָ֗ה כֹּ֧ל	1	It will be that everyone	Alterna
 JOL	2	32	t1vg	figs-metonymy	כֹּ֧ל אֲשֶׁר־יִקְרָ֛א בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם יְהוָ֖ה יִמָּלֵ֑ט	1	everyone who calls on the name of Yahweh will be saved	The name is a metonym for the person. This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JOL	2	32	k5zj	figs-doublet	בְּ⁠הַר־צִיּ֨וֹן וּ⁠בִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֜ם	1	on Mount Zion and in Jerusalem	These refer to the same place. Alternate translation: “on Mount Zion in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JOL	2	32	j194	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בַ֨⁠שְּׂרִידִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה קֹרֵֽא	1	among the survivors, those whom Yahweh calls	The phrase “there will be” is understood from earlier in the sentence. It can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “among the survivors there will be those whom Yahweh calls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JOL	2	32	e73u			1	survivors	people who live through a terrible event like a war or a disaster
+JOL	2	32	e73u		וּ⁠בַ֨⁠שְּׂרִידִ֔ים	1	survivors	These **survivors** are people who live through a terrible event like a war or a disaster.
 JOL	3	intro	jcn7			0		# Joel 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>There is a change in focus in this chapter from the people of Israel to her enemies. The events of this chapters also contain many prophecies about the events of the end of this world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Israel<br>The mention of Israel in this chapter is probably a reference to the people of Judah and not the northern kingdom of Israel. It is also possible this is a reference to the people of Israel as a whole.
 JOL	3	1	nha5		כִּ֗י הִנֵּ֛ה	1	Behold	Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Pay attention”
 JOL	3	1	zy3s	figs-doublet	בַּ⁠יָּמִ֥ים הָ⁠הֵ֖מָּה וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵ֣ת הַ⁠הִ֑יא	1	in those days and at that time	The phrase “at that time” means the same thing as and intensifies the phrase “in those days.” Alternate translation: “in those very days” or “at that very time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ JOL	3	13	haw5	figs-metaphor	הֵשִׁ֨יקוּ֙ הַ⁠יְקָבִ֔ים כ
 JOL	3	14	y2ge		הֲמוֹנִ֣ים הֲמוֹנִ֔ים	1	a tumult, a tumult	A tumult is noise caused by a large crowd. This is repeated to show that it will be very noisy from all the people.
 JOL	3	14	r3ir		בְּ⁠עֵ֖מֶק הֶֽ⁠חָר֑וּץ…בְּ⁠עֵ֖מֶק הֶ⁠חָרֽוּץ	1	Valley of Judgment … Valley of Judgment	This phrase is repeated to show that the judgment will certainly happen.
 JOL	3	14	fq2i	figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠עֵ֖מֶק הֶֽ⁠חָר֑וּץ	1	Valley of Judgment	There is no known place with this name. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **judgment**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “judge.” Alternate translation: “Valley Where Yahweh Judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JOL	3	16	fj29			1	General Information:	Yahweh begins speaking in verse 17.
+JOL	3	16	fj29			0	General Information:	Yahweh begins speaking in verse 17.
 JOL	3	16	fe1r	figs-parallelism	וַ⁠יהוָ֞ה מִ⁠צִּיּ֣וֹן יִשְׁאָ֗ג וּ⁠מִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ יִתֵּ֣ן קוֹל֔⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh will roar from Zion, and raise his voice from Jerusalem	Both phrases mean Yahweh will shout with a loud, clear and powerful voice from Jerusalem. If your language only has one word for speaking very loudly, this can be used as one phrase. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will shout from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 JOL	3	16	yr8u	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יהוָ֞ה…יִשְׁאָ֗ג	1	Yahweh will roar	This could mean: (1) “Yahweh will roar like a lion” or (2) “Yahweh will roar like thunder.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JOL	3	16	lf34	figs-hyperbole	וְ⁠רָעֲשׁ֖וּ שָׁמַ֣יִם וָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	The heavens and earth will shake	Joel speaks of the heavens and earth as if they were people who are shaking with fear. This can be translated as either a hyperbole, that Yahweh’s roar is so frightening that even things that are not alive are afraid, or as metonymy, that the heavens and earth are metonyms for the beings who live there. Alternate translation: “Everyone in the heavens and on the earth is very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

en_tn_31-OBA.tsv

@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ OBA	1	11	s38y	figs-parallelism	שְׁב֥וֹת זָרִ֖ים חֵיל֑⁠וֹ
 OBA	1	11	rtj8	figs-personification	חֵיל֑⁠וֹ…שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	his wealth … his gates	Here, **his** refers to **your brother Jacob** in [verse 10](../01/10.md), meaning the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 OBA	1	11	jd46		חֵיל֑⁠וֹ	1	his wealth	In this context, the term translated **wealth** could also mean “army.” But since it clearly means “wealth” in [verse 13](../01/13.md), it seems best to translate it as “wealth” here, as well.
 OBA	1	11	jd47	figs-synecdoche	שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	his gates	Here, **gates** stands for “city.” The gates, the part of a city through which people would come and go, are being used to represent the whole city. Alternate translation: “all the cities of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-OBA	1	11	i8sr	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עַל־יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ יַדּ֣וּ גוֹרָ֔ל	1	and cast lots for Jerusalem	There are two possibilities for what this could mean:  (1) This is a figurative way of saying that the **foreigners** had complete control of **Jerusalem**, with Jerusalem pictured as something that everybody wants to have, but it cannot be divided, so they cast lots to see who will get it. Alternate translation: “they even plundered Jerusalem” or (2) The name of the city may be standing for the wealth of the city. Alternate translation: “and they divided the wealth of Jerusalem among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+OBA	1	11	i8sr	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עַל־יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ יַדּ֣וּ גוֹרָ֔ל	1	and cast lots for Jerusalem	There are two possibilities for what this could mean: (1) This is a figurative way of saying that the **foreigners** had complete control of **Jerusalem**, with Jerusalem pictured as something that everybody wants to have, but it cannot be divided, so they cast lots to see who will get it. Alternate translation: “they even plundered Jerusalem” or (2) The name of the city may be standing for the wealth of the city. Alternate translation: “and they divided the wealth of Jerusalem among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 OBA	1	11	s4y1	figs-explicit	גַּם־אַתָּ֖ה כְּ⁠אַחַ֥ד מֵ⁠הֶֽם	1	you also were like one of them	The people of Edom did not do exactly the same things as the **strangers** and **foreigners** did, but they were like them because they did not help the people of Judah, who were a related people group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include this information, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 OBA	1	12	crs1	figs-litany	וְ⁠אַל…וְ⁠אַל…וְ⁠אַל	1	But [you should] not	Yahweh uses a repetitive series of sentences in verses 12–14 to show how badly the people of Edom have treated the people of Judah. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the charges against the people of Edom. Yahweh goes on to say in verses 15 and 16 that he has found them guilty of all of these charges and that he will punish them. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
 OBA	1	12	e7cd	figs-explicit	וְ⁠אַל־תֵּ֤רֶא	1	But you should not have looked	Here, **you should not have looked** implies that the people of Edom were looking on the disaster in Judah with pleasure. To make this clear, you could include this information in the way that you translate. Alternate translation: “you should not have enjoyed looking” or “it was very bad that you enjoyed looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

en_tn_32-JON.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 JON	front	intro	hk4p			0		# Introduction to Jonah<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Jonah<br><br>1. Jonah tries to run away from Yahweh. (1:1-2:10)<br>* Jonah disobeys Yahweh’s first call to go to Nineveh. (1:1–3)<br>* Jonah and the Gentile sailors. (1:4–16)<br>* Yahweh provides a large fish to swallow Jonah, and he prays and is rescued. (1:17–2:10)<br>2. Jonah in Nineveh (3:1-4:11)<br>* Yahweh again calls Jonah to go to Nineveh, and Jonah proclaims Yahweh’s message. (3:1–4)<br>* Nineveh repents. (3:5-9)<br>* Yahweh decides not to destroy Nineveh. (3:10)<br>* Jonah is very angry with Yahweh. (4:1–3)<br>* Yahweh teaches Jonah about grace and mercy. (4:4–11)<br><br>### What is the Book of Jonah about?<br><br>Jonah, son of Amittai, was a prophet from Gath Hepher (2 Kings 14:25). This book tells about what happened to Jonah. It tells how Yahweh shows mercy and grace to Gentiles. It also tells how the Ninevites repented and called out to Yahweh for mercy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])<br><br>Yahweh sent Jonah to warn the people of Nineveh that he was ready to punish them. Yahweh said that if they would repent he would not harm them. However, Jonah was an Israelite and he did not want the Ninevites to repent. So Jonah tried to sail away in the opposite direction instead of doing what Yahweh told him to do. But Yahweh stopped him by sending a storm and a large fish to swallow him.<br><br>Jonah repented and warned the Ninevites. As a result, Yahweh taught him that he is concerned about all people, not just the Israelites.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>This book is traditionally titled “The Book of Jonah” or just “Jonah.” Translators may decide to use a clearer title such as “The Book about Jonah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Jonah?<br><br>Jonah was probably involved in the writing of this book. However, scholars do not know who actually wrote it.<br><br>Jonah lived in the northern kingdom of Israel. He prophesied sometime between 800 and 750 B.C., during the reign of King Jeroboam II.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the nation of Assyria?<br><br>During the time of Jonah, Assyria was the most powerful kingdom in the ancient Near East. Nineveh was the capital city of Assyria.<br><br>Assyria was cruel to its enemies. Eventually, Yahweh punished the Assyrians for the wicked things they did.<br><br>### Did Assyria convert to Judaism?<br><br>Some scholars think that the Assyrians started worshiping Yahweh alone. However, most scholars think they continued to worship other false gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
-JON	1	intro	xvp2			0		# Jonah 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The narrative of this chapter starts abruptly. This could cause difficulty for the translator. The translator should not attempt to smooth this introduction unless absolutely necessary.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Miracle<br><br>In verse [Jonah 17](./17.md), there is the mention of “a great fish.” It may be difficult to imagine a sea creature big enough to swallow a man whole; he then survives for three days and nights inside. Translators should not try to explain miraculous events in an attempt to make it easier to understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Situational irony<br><br>There is an ironic situation in this chapter. This means that people do or say things that are the opposite of what one would expect them to do. Jonah is a prophet of God and should endeavor to do God’s will. Instead, he runs away from God. Although the Gentile sailors are not Israelites, they act out of faith and fear of Yahweh when sending Jonah to an almost certain death by throwing him overboard. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/willofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>### Sea<br><br>People in the ancient Near East also saw the sea as chaotic and did not trust it. Some of the gods they worshiped were gods of the sea. Jonah’s people, the Hebrews, feared the sea greatly. However, Jonah’s fear of Yahweh was not enough to keep him from sailing on a ship to get away from Yahweh. His actions are contrasted to the actions of the Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Implicit information<br><br>Even though no one knows for sure where Tarshish was, the writer assumes that the reader knows that Jonah had to face away from Nineveh to go there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JON	1	intro	xvp2			0		# Jonah 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe narrative of this chapter starts abruptly. This could cause difficulty for the translator. The translator should not attempt to smooth this introduction unless absolutely necessary.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Miracle\n\nIn verse [Jonah 1:17](../01/17.md), there is the mention of “a great fish.” It may be difficult to imagine a sea creature big enough to swallow a man whole; he then survives for three days and nights inside. Translators should not try to explain miraculous events in an attempt to make it easier to understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Situational irony\n\nThere is an ironic situation in this chapter. This means that people do or say things that are the opposite of what one would expect them to do. Jonah is a prophet of God and should endeavor to do God’s will. Instead, he runs away from God. Although the Gentile sailors are not Israelites, they act out of faith and fear of Yahweh when sending Jonah to an almost certain death by throwing him overboard. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/willofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Sea\n\nPeople in the ancient Near East also saw the sea as chaotic and did not trust it. Some of the gods they worshiped were gods of the sea. Jonah’s people, the Hebrews, feared the sea greatly. However, Jonah’s fear of Yahweh was not enough to keep him from sailing on a ship to get away from Yahweh. His actions are contrasted to the actions of the Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Implicit information\n\nEven though no one knows for sure where Tarshish was, the writer assumes that the reader knows that Jonah had to face away from Nineveh to go there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JON	1	1	jdr1	writing-newevent	וַֽ⁠יְהִי֙ דְּבַר־יְהוָ֔ה	1	Now the word of Yahweh came	This phrase introduces the first half of the story of Jonah. The same phrase introduces the second half of the story (3:1). This is a common way of beginning a historical story about a prophet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JON	1	1	ll6c	figs-idiom	וַֽ⁠יְהִי֙ דְּבַר־יְהוָ֔ה	1	Now the word of Yahweh came	This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh spoke or communicated his message in some way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh spoke his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	1	1	qa3z		דְּבַר־יְהוָ֔ה	1	the word of Yahweh	Alternate translation: “the message of Yahweh”
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ JON	1	2	jqz9	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠קְרָ֣א עָלֶ֑י⁠הָ	1	call out ag
 JON	1	2	rki2		עָלְתָ֥ה רָעָתָ֖⁠ם לְ⁠פָנָֽ⁠י	1	their wickedness has risen up before my face	Alternate translation: “I know they have been continually sinning” or “I know that their sin has been getting worse and worse”
 JON	1	2	jd9r	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָֽ⁠י	1	before my face	This is an expression that refers to the face of Yahweh to represent his presence. The idea of Yahweh’s presence also includes his knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Yahweh is saying that he can has noticed how wicked the people of Nineveh have become. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JON	1	3	f5sr	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יָּ֤קָם יוֹנָה֙ לִ⁠בְרֹ֣חַ	1	But Jonah got up to run away	Here the words **got up** mean that Jonah took action in response to God’s command, but his action was to disobey instead of to obey. See how you translated this idiom in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “but Jonah ran away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JON	1	3	n96t	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֖י יְהוָ֑ה	-1	from before the face of Yahweh	This is an expression that refers to the face of Yahweh to represent his presence. The idea of Yahweh’s presence also includes his knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. By running away, Jonah is hoping that Yahweh will not notice that he is disobeying. Alternate translation: “from the presence of Yahweh” or “from Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JON	1	3	n96t	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֖י יְהוָ֑ה…מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֖י יְהוָֽה	1	from before the face of Yahweh	This is an expression that refers to the face of Yahweh to represent his presence. The idea of Yahweh’s presence also includes his knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. By running away, Jonah is hoping that Yahweh will not notice that he is disobeying. Alternate translation: “from the presence of Yahweh” or “from Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JON	1	3	g66v	figs-explicit	לִ⁠בְרֹ֣חַ תַּרְשִׁ֔ישָׁ⁠ה	1	to run away to Tarshish	“to flee to Tarshish” This city named Tarshish was in the opposite direction to Nineveh. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and went in the opposite direction, toward Tarshish, away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JON	1	3	djv1		וַ⁠יֵּ֨רֶד יָפ֜וֹ	1	And he went down to Joppa	Alternate translation: “Jonah went to Joppa”
 JON	1	3	w3uc		אָנִיָּ֣ה	1	ship	A **ship** is a very large type of boat that can travel on the sea and carry many passengers or heavy cargo.
@@ -36,10 +36,10 @@ JON	1	6	bd4f	figs-idiom	ק֚וּם	1	Get up!	This is a command to begin some act
 JON	1	6	k7a5	figs-idiom	קְרָ֣א אֶל־אֱלֹהֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	Cry out to your god!	“pray to your god” To **cry out to** someone means to loudly ask him for help. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	1	6	sk7i	figs-explicit	אוּלַ֞י יִתְעַשֵּׁ֧ת הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֛ים לָ֖⁠נוּ וְ⁠לֹ֥א נֹאבֵֽד	1	Maybe that god will notice us and we will not perish	The implicit information that Jonah’s god might save them could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “maybe your god will hear and save us so that we will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JON	1	6	zi04	figs-doublenegatives	וְ⁠לֹ֥א נֹאבֵֽד	1	and we will not perish	This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “and he will save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JON	1	7	sc57		וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶל־רֵעֵ֗⁠הוּ	1	Then every man said to his friend	The phrase **each man … to his friend** is an idiom expressing reciprocal action. This means that all the men in the group were saying this to each other. Alternate translation: “the sailors all said to each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JON	1	7	sc57	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶל־רֵעֵ֗⁠הוּ	1	Then every man said to his friend	The phrase **each man … to his friend** is an idiom expressing reciprocal action. This means that all the men in the group were saying this to each other. Alternate translation: “the sailors all said to each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	1	7	l5xq		לְכוּ֙ וְ⁠נַפִּ֣ילָה גֽוֹרָל֔וֹת וְ⁠נֵ֣דְעָ֔ה בְּ⁠שֶׁ⁠לְּ⁠מִ֛י הָ⁠רָעָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את לָ֑⁠נוּ	1	Come, and let us cast lots, so that we may know on whose account this evil is happening to us	“we should cast lots to know who has caused this trouble” The men believed that the gods would control how the lots fell in order to tell them what they wanted to know. This was a form of divination.
 JON	1	7	d726		הָ⁠רָעָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את	1	this evil	This refers to the terrible storm.
-JON	1	7	at67		וַ⁠יִּפֹּ֥ל הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֖ל עַל־יוֹנָֽה	1	the lot fell on Jonah	The expression **the lot fell on Jonah** is an idiom meaning that, when the men cast lots, the result indicated Jonah. This does not mean that the lot literally fell down on top of Jonah. Alternate translation: “the lot showed that Jonah was the guilty person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JON	1	7	at67	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּפֹּ֥ל הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֖ל עַל־יוֹנָֽה	1	the lot fell on Jonah	The expression **the lot fell on Jonah** is an idiom meaning that, when the men cast lots, the result indicated Jonah. This does not mean that the lot literally fell down on top of Jonah. Alternate translation: “the lot showed that Jonah was the guilty person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	1	8	wkh6		וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֔י⁠ו	1	Then they said to him	Alternate translation: “then the men who were working on the ship said to Jonah”
 JON	1	8	e7wb		הַגִּידָ⁠ה־נָּ֣א לָ֔⁠נוּ בַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר לְ⁠מִי־הָ⁠רָעָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את לָ֑⁠נוּ	1	Please tell us on whose account this evil is happening to us	Alternate translation: “who caused this bad thing that is happening to us”
 JON	1	9	wav5		יְהוָ֞ה אֱלֹהֵ֤י הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ אֲנִ֣י יָרֵ֔א	1	I fear Yahweh, the God of heaven	Here the word **fear** means that Jonah worshiped Yahweh and not any other god.
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ JON	1	14	jdr3	figs-exclamations	אָנָּ֤ה	1	Ah!	In this context, the word *
 JON	1	14	wz6z		אָנָּ֤ה יְהוָה֙ אַל־נָ֣א נֹאבְדָ֗ה בְּ⁠נֶ֨פֶשׁ֙ הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	O Yahweh, please do not let us perish on account of the life of this man	Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, please do not kill us because we caused this man to die” or “O Yahweh, even though we are going to cause this man to die, please do not kill us”
 JON	1	14	vv5t	figs-idiom	וְ⁠אַל־תִּתֵּ֥ן עָלֵ֖י⁠נוּ דָּ֣ם נָקִ֑יא	1	and do not put innocent blood upon us	This is an idiom that means “do not consider us guilty of killing an innocent person.” Alternate translation: “and please do not blame us for his death” or “and do not hold us accountable for having killed someone who did not deserve to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	1	14	ab73		אַתָּ֣ה יְהוָ֔ה כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר חָפַ֖צְתָּ עָשִֽׂיתָ	1	you, Yahweh, have done just as you desired	Alternate translation: “you, Yahweh, have chosen to do things in this way” or “you, Yahweh, have caused all this to happen”
-JON	1	15	l9cf		וַ⁠יַּעֲמֹ֥ד הַ⁠יָּ֖ם מִ⁠זַּעְפּֽ⁠וֹ	1	the sea ceased from its raging	“the sea stopped moving violently:
+JON	1	15	l9cf		וַ⁠יַּעֲמֹ֥ד הַ⁠יָּ֖ם מִ⁠זַּעְפּֽ⁠וֹ	1	the sea ceased from its raging	Alternate translation: “the sea stopped moving violently”
 JON	1	15	ab89		וַ⁠יַּעֲמֹ֥ד הַ⁠יָּ֖ם מִ⁠זַּעְפּֽ⁠וֹ	1	the sea ceased from its raging	This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “the sea became calm”
 JON	1	16	r3gs		וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֧וּ הָ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֛ים יִרְאָ֥ה גְדוֹלָ֖ה אֶת־יְהוָ֑ה	1	Then the men feared Yahweh with great fear	Alternate translation: “then the men became greatly awed at Yahweh’s power” or “then the men worshiped Yahweh with great awe”
 JON	1	17	q87y			0	General Information:	Some versions number this verse as the first verse of chapter 2. You may want to number the verses according to the main version that your language group uses.
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ JON	2	2	wdr4		וַֽ⁠יַּעֲנֵ֑⁠נִי	1	he answered me	Alternate tran
 JON	2	2	w8wn	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בֶּ֧טֶן שְׁא֛וֹל	1	from the belly of Sheol	“from the center of Sheol” or “from the deep part of Sheol” Possible meanings include: (1) Jonah was speaking of being in the belly of the fish as being in Sheol; or (2) Jonah believed that he was about to die and go to Sheol; or (3) He was speaking as if he already had died and gone to Sheol. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JON	2	2	ab77	translate-names	שְׁא֛וֹל	1	Sheol	**Sheol** was the name of the place where people went after they died. It was thought to be a shadowy world located somewhere under the ground. The New Testament equivalent seems to be “Hades,” where the dead wait for judgment (see Rev. 20:13). If your language has a word for this place, you may want to use it here, or borrow the word “Sheol.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JON	2	2	jdrd	figs-idiom	שָׁמַ֥עְתָּ קוֹלִֽ⁠י	1	you heard my voice	This phrase probably has both a literal and a figurative meaning. The phrase probably means literally that Yahweh heard Jonah’s voice while he was praying inside the belly of the fish. However, the phrase “to hear someone’s voice” in the Old Testament often means “to listen and obey (comply).” In this context, Jonah is expressing that Yahweh both heard him and acted to save him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JON	2	3	glp2		בִּ⁠לְבַ֣ב יַמִּ֔ים	1	into the heart of the seas	Here the term **heart** is a metaphor for “being inside” something. The phrase “in the heart of” means to be “in the middle of” or “completely surrounded by” sea water. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JON	2	3	glp2	figs-metaphor	בִּ⁠לְבַ֣ב יַמִּ֔ים	1	into the heart of the seas	Here the term **heart** is a metaphor for “being inside” something. The phrase “in the heart of” means to be “in the middle of” or “completely surrounded by” sea water. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JON	2	3	p8fd		וְ⁠נָהָ֖ר יְסֹבְבֵ֑⁠נִי	1	a current surrounded me	Alternate translation: “the sea water closed in around me”
 JON	2	3	c6jx	figs-doublet	מִשְׁבָּרֶ֥י⁠ךָ וְ⁠גַלֶּ֖י⁠ךָ	1	your billows and your waves	Both of these are disturbances on the surface of the ocean. They could be combined into one term, such as “waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JON	2	4	jdr5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠אֲנִ֣י	1	But as for me,	This expression shows that there is a contrast between the actions of Yahweh, which Jonah had just talked about, and his own response. Alternate translation: “then I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ JON	3	2	ve4i		ק֛וּם לֵ֥ךְ אֶל־נִֽינְוֵ֖ה הָ⁠עִ֣י
 JON	3	2	cl3b	figs-idiom	ק֛וּם	1	Get up	**Get up** here is an idiom intended to motivate Jonah to obey the next command, which is “go.” See how you translated this in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	3	2	ir79		וִּ⁠קְרָ֤א אֵלֶ֨י⁠הָ֙ אֶת־הַ⁠קְּרִיאָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָנֹכִ֖י דֹּבֵ֥ר אֵלֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	call out to it the proclamation that I tell to you	Alternate translation: “tell the people there what I tell you to tell them”
 JON	3	3	k7k9	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יָּ֣קָם יוֹנָ֗ה וַ⁠יֵּ֛לֶךְ אֶל־נִֽינְוֶ֖ה כִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה	1	So Jonah got up and went to Nineveh, according to the word of Yahweh	Here the words **got up** mean that Jonah took action in response to God’s command to go, and this time he obeyed instead of disobeying. Alternate translation: “his time Jonah obeyed Yahweh and went to Nineveh” or “so Jonah left the beach and went to Nineveh, as Yahweh had commanded him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JON	3	3	g4nk	figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה	1	the word of Yahweh	Alternate translation: “the message of Yahweh” or “the command of Yahweh”
+JON	3	3	g4nk	figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה	1	the word of Yahweh	Alternate translation: “the message of Yahweh” or “the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JON	3	3	dt1b	writing-background	וְ⁠נִֽינְוֵ֗ה הָיְתָ֤ה עִיר־גְּדוֹלָה֙ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהִ֔ים מַהֲלַ֖ךְ שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת יָמִֽים	1	Now Nineveh was a great city to Gpd, a journey of three days	This sentence gives background information about the city of Nineveh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JON	3	3	jd8r	figs-idiom	עִיר־גְּדוֹלָה֙ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהִ֔ים	1	a great city to God	This is an idiom meaning that the city is both extremely large and one of the largest cities in the world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	3	3	ye82	figs-idiom	מַהֲלַ֖ךְ שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת יָמִֽים	1	a journey of three days	This appears to mean that a person had to walk for three days to completely go through it from one side of the city to the opposite side. It could also mean that it took three days to see the whole city. Alternate translation: “a city so large that it would take a person three days to walk through it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ JON	3	7	xw6c		הַ⁠בָּקָ֣ר וְ⁠הַ⁠צֹּ֗אן	1	herd or flock	T
 JON	3	7	fw18	figs-explicit	אַ֨ל־יִרְע֔וּ וּ⁠מַ֖יִם אַל־יִשְׁתּֽוּ	1	they must not graze, and they must not drink water	“they must not eat or drink anything” The reason they were not to eat or drink anything can be made explicit by adding “in order to show that they are sorry for their sins.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JON	3	8	mzx6		וְ⁠הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֔ה	1	every animal	Here the word **animal** refers to animals that people own.
 JON	3	8	jh7e	figs-explicit	וְ⁠יִקְרְא֥וּ אֶל־אֱלֹהִ֖ים בְּ⁠חָזְקָ֑ה	1	and they must cry out to God with strength	“and they must pray earnestly to God” What the people were to pray for can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and they must cry out loudly to God and ask for mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JON	3	8	n3ls		הֶ⁠חָמָ֖ס אֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּ⁠כַפֵּי⁠הֶֽם	1	the violence that is in his hands	Here, **hands** is a metonym meaning doing. This refers to the violence that the people of Nineveh were doing. Alternate translation: “the violent things that he has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JON	3	8	n3ls	figs-explicit	הֶ⁠חָמָ֖ס אֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּ⁠כַפֵּי⁠הֶֽם	1	the violence that is in his hands	Here, **hands** is a metonym meaning doing. This refers to the violence that the people of Nineveh were doing. Alternate translation: “the violent things that he has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JON	3	9	wbt6	figs-rquestion	מִֽי־יוֹדֵ֣עַ	1	Who knows?	The king used this rhetorical question to get the people to think about something that is possible, but uncertain: that if they would stop sinning, God might not kill them. It could be translated as a statement: “We do not know.” Or it could be stated as a word and be part of the next sentence: “Perhaps.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JON	3	9	z3jj	figs-metaphor	יָשׁ֔וּב וְ⁠נִחַ֖ם הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	This god might turn back and have compassion	Here the author speaks of God changing his mind about bringing judgment as if God were turning around and walking in the opposite direction. Alternate translation: “God may decide instead to have compassion” or “God may do the opposite of what he said and be merciful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JON	3	9	jdrg	figs-idiom	מֵ⁠חֲר֥וֹן אַפּ֖⁠וֹ	1	from the burning of his nose	Here **the burning of his nose** is an idiom meaning that the person is angry. Alternate translation: “from his anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ JON	4	8	eln6		ט֥וֹב מוֹתִ֖⁠י מֵ⁠חַיָּֽ⁠י	1	My death i
 JON	4	9	w24z	figs-explicit	הַ⁠הֵיטֵ֥ב חָרָֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠קִּֽיקָי֑וֹן	1	Is it right that it burns to you about the plant?	In this context, God’s question is intended to lead Jonah to draw a conclusion about his selfish attitude. This implicit information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “is it right that you should be so angry about the plant that only gave shade to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JON	4	9	h43a		הֵיטֵ֥ב חָֽרָה־לִ֖⁠י עַד־מָֽוֶת	1	It is right that it burns to me, even as far as death.	Alternate translation: “I am right to be angry. I am angry enough to die”
 JON	4	10	gkz7	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה	1	Yahweh said	Here Yahweh is speaking to Jonah. This implicit information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “Yahweh said to Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JON	4	10	ab88	figs-idiom	שֶׁ⁠בִּן־ לַ֥יְלָה הָיָ֖ה וּ⁠בִן־ לַ֥יְלָה אָבָֽד־ לַ֥יְלָה	1	it came as a son of a night, and it perished as a son of a night	This idiom means that the plant existed only briefly. Alternate translation: “it grew in one night and died the next” or “it grew quickly and died just as quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JON	4	10	ab88	figs-idiom	שֶׁ⁠בִּן־לַ֥יְלָה הָיָ֖ה וּ⁠בִן־לַ֥יְלָה אָבָֽד	1	it came as a son of a night, and it perished as a son of a night	This idiom means that the plant existed only briefly. Alternate translation: “it grew in one night and died the next” or “it grew quickly and died just as quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JON	4	11	jdr0	grammar-connect-words-phrases	וַֽ⁠אֲנִי֙	1	So as for me,	This expression, paired with **As for you** in verse 10, shows a comparison between Jonah’s attitude toward the plant and Yahweh’s attitude toward the people of Nineveh. Express this comparison in a natural way in your language.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 JON	4	11	ecl1	figs-rquestion	וַֽ⁠אֲנִי֙ לֹ֣א אָח֔וּס עַל־נִינְוֵ֖ה הָ⁠עִ֣יר הַ⁠גְּדוֹלָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר יֶשׁ־בָּ֡⁠הּ הַרְבֵּה֩ מִֽ⁠שְׁתֵּים־עֶשְׂרֵ֨ה רִבּ֜וֹ אָדָ֗ם אֲשֶׁ֤ר לֹֽא־יָדַע֙ בֵּין־יְמִינ֣⁠וֹ לִ⁠שְׂמֹאל֔⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְהֵמָ֖ה רַבָּֽה	1	So as for me, should I not feel troubled about Nineveh, the great city, in which there are more than 120,000 people who cannot distinguish between their right hand and their left hand, and many animals?	God used this rhetorical question to emphasize his claim that he should have compassion on Nineveh. Alternate translation: “I certainly should have compassion for Nineveh, that great city, in which there are more than 120,000 people who cannot distinguish between their right hand and their left hand, and also many cattle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JON	4	11	dqi1		אֲשֶׁ֣ר יֶשׁ־בָּ֡⁠הּ הַרְבֵּה֩	1	in which there are more than	This can also be translated as the beginning of a new sentence. Alternate translation: “There are more than” or “it has more than”

en_tn_42-MRK.tsv

@@ -13,9 +13,9 @@ MRK	1	2	kl12	figs-metaphor	ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σο
 MRK	1	3	lkm3	writing-quotations	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ,	1	The voice of one crying out in the wilderness	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, he is saying,” or “a voice crying out in the wilderness, hear him saying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 MRK	1	3	dqi9	figs-quotesinquotes	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1		Here there is a direct quotation nested inside a direct quotation as Mark quotes Isaiah, who quotes the messenger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, telling people to make ready the way of the Lord and to make his paths straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	1	3	cf0e	figs-synecdoche	φωνὴ βοῶντος	1		Here, **a voice** refers to the messenger who uses his voice to cry out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “people will hear his voice as he cries out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	1	3	v3n3	figs-parallelism	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1	Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight	**Make ready the way of {the} Lord** and **make his paths straight** mean the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two. See the next note for alternate translations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+MRK	1	3	v3n3	figs-parallelism	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1	Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight	**Make ready the way of the Lord** and **make his paths straight** mean the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two. See the next note for alternate translations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	1	3	peh5	figs-metaphor	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1	Make ready the way of the Lord	Here Isaiah uses the metaphor of preparing **paths** or **the way** on which someone will travel to make them walkable. If a person in high authority were coming, the people would clear the roads of any hazards. So this metaphor means that the people should prepare themselves to receive the Lord’s message when he comes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain speech. Alternate translation: “Prepare to hear and obey the Lord’s message when he comes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
-MRK	1	3	yyk3	figs-extrainfo	Κυρίου	1		In this quotation from Isaiah, **{the} Lord** refers to God, but Mark is showing how it also refers to Jesus the Messiah. However, do not translate this as “Jesus” here, because this double reference must be maintained. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo)
+MRK	1	3	yyk3	figs-extrainfo	Κυρίου	1		In this quotation from Isaiah, **the Lord** refers to God, but Mark is showing how it also refers to Jesus the Messiah. However, do not translate this as “Jesus” here, because this double reference must be maintained. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo)
 MRK	1	3	h8rt	figs-idiom	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν	1		The imagery of a path, or **the way**, is used here to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message. If someone prepares a path for someone else, the preparer makes the path walkable. If someone in high authority was coming, others would make sure the roads were cleared of any hazards. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an alternate translation: “Prepare the people for the arrival of the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
 MRK	1	3	wltl	figs-yousingular	ἑτοιμάσατε…ποιεῖτε	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, both occurrences of the word **Make** are plural and are commands addressing a group of people. Use the natural forms in your language to express this meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	1	4	s05n	figs-explicit	καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1		The **baptism of repentance** proclaimed by John the Baptizer likely had its origin in baptisms done by Gentiles who were converting to Judaism. This baptism was done one time and showed that these people were converting from their former way of life to the new way of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have turned from their former evil ways, accepted God’s forgiveness for their sins, and were now following God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ MRK	1	22	e9gf	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων α
 MRK	1	22	kmxf		ἐξεπλήσσοντο	1		Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue were amazed”
 MRK	1	23	w7z2	figs-explicit	καὶ εὐθὺς ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ	1		The person with the **unclean spirit** is in the **synagogue** while Jesus is preaching. If it would be helpful in your langauge, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was teaching, a man who was controlled by an evil spirit was also in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	1	24	ra8g	figs-rquestion	τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ?	1	What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth?	The demons ask the rhetorical question, **What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth** in order to tell let Jesus know that they do not want him to interfere with them and that they desire him to leave them alone. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth, leave us alone! There is no reason for you to interfere with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	1	24	m8gz	figs-rquestion	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς	1	Have you come to destroy us?	The demons ask the rhetorical question **Have you come to destroy us** in order to urge Jesus not to harm them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not destroy us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	1	24	m8gz	figs-rquestion	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς?	1	Have you come to destroy us?	The demons ask the rhetorical question **Have you come to destroy us** in order to urge Jesus not to harm them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not destroy us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	1	24	qsig	figs-explicit	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς	1		Here, **us** refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1–20). If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	1	28	hrbh	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1		The phrase **went out everywhere** means that the story of what just happened in the synagogue spread from person to person until many heard about it throughout the region of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “The story about Jesus quickly spread from person to person throughout all of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	1	29	ybs7	figs-go	ἦλθον	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -108,13 +108,13 @@ MRK	2	4	ouxr	translate-unknown	κράβαττον	1		A **mat** was a portable be
 MRK	2	5	trg9	figs-explicit	ἰδὼν…τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	having seen their faith	The implication is that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Jesus recognized that the man’s friends were convinced that he could heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	5	hzg6	translate-kinship	τέκνον	1	Child	The word **Child** here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. This man was not actually Jesus’ son. If your language has a term like this that would be appropriate in this context, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “Beloved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 MRK	2	6	le6v	figs-metonymy	διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	reasoning in their hearts	Here, **hearts** is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “thinking to themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	2	7	yr5a	figs-rquestion	τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ	1	Why does this man speak this way?	These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means that Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view he would be speaking blasphemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man should not be speaking this way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	7	yr5a	figs-rquestion	τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ?	1	Why does this man speak this way?	These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means that Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view he would be speaking blasphemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man should not be speaking this way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	7	sj6j	figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός?	1	Who is able to forgive sins except God alone?	The scribes used this question to say that since no one **is able to forgive sins except God alone**, then Jesus should not say “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Only God can forgive sins, not a man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	8	niy6	figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	in his spirit	Here, **spirit** means Jesus’ inner thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his inner being” or “within himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	2	8	h3zp	figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1		This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful in your language, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having become aware though no one told him” or “Jesus, without hearing them, knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	2	8	wga7	figs-rquestion	τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	Why are you thinking these things in your hearts?	Jesus uses this question to tell the scribes that what they are thinking is wrong. It also shows that He knows what they are thinking without them saying it out loud. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “What you are thinking is wrong.” or “Do not think that I am blaspheming.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	8	wga7	figs-rquestion	τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν?	1	Why are you thinking these things in your hearts?	Jesus uses this question to tell the scribes that what they are thinking is wrong. It also shows that He knows what they are thinking without them saying it out loud. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “What you are thinking is wrong.” or “Do not think that I am blaspheming.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	8	s3m6	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	these things in your hearts	The word **hearts** means their inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this inside yourselves” or “these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	2	9	wv5d	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει	1	Which is easier to say to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins have been forgiven’ or to say ‘Get up and take up your bed, and walk’?	Jesus is not asking for information but is using the question form here to prepare the scribes and Pharisees for the miracle he is about to perform. It is easier to say, “Your sins are forgiven you,” because there is no visible proof when someone’s sins are forgiven. However, if someone says to a paralyzed person, “Get up and take up your mat, and walk,” but the person does not do so, then it is obvious that the person speaking lacks God’s authority. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is surely easier to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ than to say, ‘Get up and walk!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	9	wv5d	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει?	1	Which is easier to say to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins have been forgiven’ or to say ‘Get up and take up your bed, and walk’?	Jesus is not asking for information but is using the question form here to prepare the scribes and Pharisees for the miracle he is about to perform. It is easier to say, “Your sins are forgiven you,” because there is no visible proof when someone’s sins are forgiven. However, if someone says to a paralyzed person, “Get up and take up your mat, and walk,” but the person does not do so, then it is obvious that the person speaking lacks God’s authority. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is surely easier to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ than to say, ‘Get up and walk!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	9	q905	figs-quotesinquotes	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven, or to tell him to get up, take his mat, and walk?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	2	10	g4jn	figs-explicit	εἰδῆτε	1	But in order that you may know	The word **you** refers to the scribes and the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	10	jsyp	figs-123person	ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “God has given me, the Son of Man, authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ MRK	2	22	fk15	figs-explicit	ἀσκοὺς	1	wineskins	The word **wineskins** re
 MRK	2	22	dgcz	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς	1		In this phrase, it is assumed that **new wine** is being poured **into fresh wineskins**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that clear. Alternate translation: “but you should pour new wine into new wineskins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	2	23	jya1	figs-explicit	τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας	1	picking the heads of grain	Plucking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. It was actually a commandment of the Law to leave the grain on the edges of your field standing so that those who were hungry could eat it. The question was whether it was lawful to do this on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify. Alternate translation: “plucking heads of grain, as the Law permitted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	23	k3pa	figs-explicit	τοὺς στάχυας	1	the heads of grain	The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were **picking the heads of grain** to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. Alternate translation: “the heads of grain and eating the seeds”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food from which you have to remove a shell or casing and use it in your translation in place of the word **grain**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	2	24	h41a	figs-rquestion	ἴδε, τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν	1	Look, why are they doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths?	The Pharisees are not asking Jesus for information, but rather, they are using the question form here to make a statement and emphatically condemn him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look! They are breaking the Jewish law concerning the Sabbaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	2	24	h41a	figs-rquestion	ἴδε, τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν?	1	Look, why are they doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths?	The Pharisees are not asking Jesus for information, but rather, they are using the question form here to make a statement and emphatically condemn him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look! They are breaking the Jewish law concerning the Sabbaths!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	24	ec3u	figs-explicit	τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν	1		The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	24	bf8w	figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Look	**Look** is a word used to get the attention of someone to show them something. If there is a word in your language that is used to draw a person’s attention to something, you could use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 MRK	2	25	g8sf	figs-rquestion	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ	1	Have you never read what David did	Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the Scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could state this (1) as a command. Alternate translation: “Remember what you read about what David did” or (2) as a statement. Alternate translation: “You have read that David did the same thing when he and those with him were hungry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ MRK	3	1	ye6d	translate-unknown	ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖ
 MRK	3	2	vr25	figs-explicit	ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1	so that they might accuse him	The Pharisees wanted Jesus to heal the man so that they could **accuse him** of breaking the law by doing work on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they could accuse him of wrongdoing” or “so that they could accuse him of breaking the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	3	2	q35x	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1		This phrase tells the reader why the Pharisees were watching Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. You might also want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “They were doing this so that they could accuse him of working on the Jewish day of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	3	3	nm6w	figs-explicit	ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον	1	in our midst	Here, **in the midst** is referring to the group of people who were gathered inside of the synagogue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Stand up in front of all of those meeting here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	3	4	mh3z	figs-rquestion	ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι?	1	Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good, or to do harm; to save a life, or to kill?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to challenge them. He wanted them to acknowledge that it is **lawful** to obey God and do good on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is allowed that people do good on the Sabbaths, but not do evil. Likewise it is allowed that a person save someone on the Sabbaths, but not kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	3	4	mh3z	figs-rquestion	ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι?	1	Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good, or to do harm; to save a life, or to kill?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to challenge them. He wanted them to acknowledge that it is **lawful** to obey God and do good on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is allowed that people do good on the Sabbaths, but not do evil. Likewise it is allowed that a person save someone on the Sabbaths, but not kill.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	3	4	vz6c	figs-ellipsis	ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι	1	to save a life, or to kill	The phrase **Is it lawful** is assumed here. If it would be helpful in your language, you may clarify and add it again to the second phrase. Alternate translation: “Is it lawful to save a life or to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	3	4	nut4	figs-metonymy	ψυχὴν	1	a life	The phrase **a life** refers to physical life and means “a person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “someone from dying” or “someone’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	3	5	n4ep	figs-metaphor	τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1		The phrase **hardness of heart** is a common metaphor which describes stubbornness towards God’s will. The Pharisees were stubborn about their unwillingness that anyone would do anything on the Sabbath—whether good or evil. They therefore leave this man to suffer with his crippled hand. If your readers would not understand what it means to have **hardness of heart** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “their stubbornness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ MRK	3	28	gp6g	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπ
 MRK	3	29	ips3	figs-genericnoun	ὃς δ’ ἂν βλασφημήσῃ	1		Here, **whoever** does not refer to anyone in particular but is a generic word for any person. Alternate translation: “but the person who has blasphemed” or “but whichever person might have blasphemed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	3	30	sfa2	figs-idiom	πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει	1	He has an unclean spirit	This is an idiom that means to be possessed by **an unclean spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “An unclean spirit is controlling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	3	31	gef8		καὶ ἔρχονται ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Then his mother and his brothers come	Alternate translation: “Then Jesus’ mother and brothers arrived”
-MRK	3	33	qe8c	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου?	1	Who are my mother and my brothers?	Jesus uses this question to teach the people that he considers those who follow God to be his beloved ones. He has not forgotten who his physical family members are, but these are people who belong to his spiritual family. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you whom I consider to be my mother and brothers” or “I will tell you whom I love as a mother or brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	3	33	qe8c	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου?	1	Who are my mother and my brothers?	Jesus uses this question to teach the people that he considers those who follow God to be his beloved ones. He has not forgotten who his physical family members are, but these are people who belong to his spiritual family. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you whom I consider to be my mother and brothers.” or “I will tell you whom I love as a mother or brother.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	3	33	iu9r	translate-kinship	ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου	1		Jesus uses the words **mother** and **brothers** here not to refer to biological relatives but to those whom he loves and who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 MRK	3	35	dr45	figs-genericnoun	ὃς…ἂν ποιήσῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	whoever may do … this is	Here, **whoever** does not refer to any specific person but to any person who does **the will of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whichever person may do the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	3	35	yr9i	figs-metaphor	οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν	1	this is my brother, and sister, and mother	This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ MRK	4	11	q2az	figs-explicit	ἐκείνοις…τοῖς ἔξω	1	to those who
 MRK	4	12	p4fv	figs-metaphor	ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν	1	they may look, but may not see	Here, **but may not see** means being spiritually blind and not understanding the significance of what Jesus is doing. If your readers would not understand what it means to “not see” in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “so that looking, they may not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	12	e33y	figs-quotesinquotes	ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν	1		Mark is quoting Jesus, who is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. For clarity, you could also indicate the source of the words that Jesus is quoting. Alternate translation: “so that as the prophet Isaiah said, though they see, they will not perceive, and though they hear, they will not understand” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes)
 MRK	4	12	p9yr	figs-metaphor	μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	so that they would not turn	Here, **turn** means to “repent.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state it in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that they would not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	4	13	fs1v	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε?	1	Do you not understand this parable? And how will you understand all the parables?	Jesus used **Do you not understand this parable?** and **how will you understand all the parables?** to show how disappointed he was that his disciples could not understand his parable. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “If you cannot understand this parable, think about how hard it will be for you to understand all of the other parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	4	13	fs1v	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε?	1	Do you not understand this parable? And how will you understand all the parables?	Jesus used **Do you not understand this parable?** and **how will you understand all the parables?** to show how disappointed he was that his disciples could not understand his parable. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “If you cannot understand this parable, think about how hard it will be for you to understand all of the other parables.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	4	14	m72p	figs-metaphor	ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “The one sowing the seed represents a person who proclaims God’s message to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	14	rp6h	figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1	sows the word	Here, **the word** means the message which Jesus was proclaiming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sows the message which Jesus was proclaiming” or “sows the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	4	14	xdaj	figs-metaphor	ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1	sows the word	Here, sowing **the word** means teaching Jesus’ words to others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The sower teaches people God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -277,18 +277,18 @@ MRK	4	28	cew8	grammar-connect-time-sequential	πρῶτον χόρτον, εἶ
 MRK	4	29	ah9d	figs-metonymy	εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέπανον	1	he immediately sends forth the sickle	Here, **the sickle** is a metonym that stands for the farmer or the people whom the farmer sends out to harvest the grain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “he immediately goes into the field with a sickle to harvest the grain” or “he immediately sends people with sickles into the field to harvest the grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	4	29	yd1d		δρέπανον	1	sickle	A **sickle** is a handle with a curved blade or a sharp hook used to cut tall crops down to the ground to be harvested. If it would be helpful in your language, use a tool that is used to do this job in your culture.
 MRK	4	29	hx6v	figs-idiom	ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός	1	because the harvest has come	Here, the phrase **the harvest has come** is an idiom for the grain being ripe for harvest. Alternate translation: “because it was time for the farmers to harvest the grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	4	30	ivk2	figs-rquestion	πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν?	1	How might we compare the kingdom of God, or in what parable might we present it?	Jesus asked this question to cause his hearers to get the listeners attention, as he was about to speak another parable about **the kingdom of God**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “With this parable I can explain what the kingdom of God is like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	4	30	ivk2	figs-rquestion	πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν?	1	How might we compare the kingdom of God, or in what parable might we present it?	Jesus asked this question to cause his hearers to get the listeners attention, as he was about to speak another parable about **the kingdom of God**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “With this parable I can explain what the kingdom of God is like.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	4	31	w4l5	figs-activepassive	ὅταν σπαρῇ	1	when it may have been sown	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone sows it” or “when someone plants it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	4	32	x1xh	figs-personification	καὶ ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους	1	and it forms large branches	The mustard tree is described as causing its **branches** to grow **large**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with large branches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 MRK	4	33	y7i2	writing-endofstory	καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν	1		This verse marks the end of this section of Jesus’ parables. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 MRK	4	34	oo4t	figs-litotes	χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς	1		Mark uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 MRK	4	34	gp99	figs-hyperbole	ἐπέλυεν πάντα	1	he was explaining everything	Here, **everything** does not actually mean everything, but rather, all of his parables which he had spoken. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this clearly. Alternate translation: “he explained all his parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-MRK	4	38	b4xb	figs-rquestion	οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα	1	do you not care that we are perishing?	The disciples asked this question to convey their fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you need to pay attention to what is happening; we are all about to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	4	38	b4xb	figs-rquestion	οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα?	1	do you not care that we are perishing?	The disciples asked this question to convey their fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you need to pay attention to what is happening; we are all about to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	4	38	phc3		Διδάσκαλε	1		**Teacher** is a respectful title. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
 MRK	4	38	qtb3	figs-exclusive	ἀπολλύμεθα	1	we are perishing	The word **we** includes the disciples and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 MRK	4	39	yym6	figs-doublet	σιώπα, πεφίμωσο	1	Be silent! Be still!	These two phrases are similar and used to emphasize what Jesus wanted **the wind** and **the sea** to do. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be calm!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-MRK	4	40	w5n4	figs-rquestion	τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν	1	Why are you afraid? Do you not yet have faith?	Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are **afraid** when he is with them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	4	41	u8e1	figs-rquestion	τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ	1	Who then is this, for even the wind and the sea obey him?	The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	4	40	w5n4	figs-rquestion	τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν?	1	Why are you afraid? Do you not yet have faith?	Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are **afraid** when he is with them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	4	41	u8e1	figs-rquestion	τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ?	1	Who then is this, for even the wind and the sea obey him?	The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	5	intro	lh25			0		# Mark 5 General Notes<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Talitha, koum”<br><br>The words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The historic present<br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 19, 22, 23, 31, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	5	1	fix1	writing-newevent	καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	This verse acts as an introduction to the next story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this, they came to the other side of the Sea of Galilee, to the region where the Gerasenes lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	5	1	gt8a	figs-go	ἦλθον	1	They came	Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ MRK	5	20	g8ed	translate-names	τῇ Δεκαπόλει	1	the Decapolis	**Decapol
 MRK	5	20	y8vn	figs-ellipsis	πάντες ἐθαύμαζον	1	everyone was marvelling	It may be helpful to state who the people were who were **marveling**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	5	22	v1dm	translate-names	Ἰάειρος	1	Jairus	The word **Jairus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	5	22	u1rx	figs-go	ἔρχεται	1		Your language may say “goes” or “went” rather than “comes” or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-MRK	5	23	jd27	figs-idiom	ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας	1	you may lay your hands	The expression **lay {our} hands** often refers to a prophet or teacher placing his hand or hands on someone and imparting either healing or a blessing. In this case, Jarius is asking Jesus to heal his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you might heal her” or “you might lay your hands on her to heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	5	23	jd27	figs-idiom	ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας	1	you may lay your hands	The expression **lay our hands** often refers to a prophet or teacher placing his hand or hands on someone and imparting either healing or a blessing. In this case, Jarius is asking Jesus to heal his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you might heal her” or “you might lay your hands on her to heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	5	23	kzz8	figs-activepassive	ἵνα σωθῇ	1	in order that she may be healed and she may live	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that you might heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	5	25	e2cz	writing-participants	καὶ γυνὴ οὖσα	1	And a woman, being	This phrase introduces the woman as a new character in the story. Consider how new people are introduced into a story in your language and use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 MRK	5	25	h58w	figs-euphemism	ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ἔτη	1	with a flow of blood for 12 years	The woman did not have an open wound. Rather, her monthly flow of blood would not stop. Your language may have a polite way to refer to this condition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@@ -324,13 +324,13 @@ MRK	5	27	z2hg	figs-explicit	τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	the things ab
 MRK	5	28	alc9	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔλεγεν γὰρ	1		This verse tells the reader that the woman had determined to **touch his clothes** in her mind before she actually touched Jesus’ cloak. Think of a way in your language which makes it apparent that this is the reason why she touches Jesus’ cloak. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 MRK	5	28	wge2	figs-activepassive	σωθήσομαι	1	I will be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	5	29	c1vz	figs-activepassive	ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος	1	she had been healed from the disease	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sickness had left her” or “she was no longer sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	5	30	ma2b	figs-explicit	τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν	1	his power had gone out from him	When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt **{his} power** healing her. Jesus himself did not lose any of his power to heal people when he healed her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “power from his body had healed someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	5	30	ma2b	figs-explicit	τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν	1	his power had gone out from him	When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt **his power** healing her. Jesus himself did not lose any of his power to heal people when he healed her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “power from his body had healed someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	5	33	r3a0	figs-doublet	ἡ δὲ γυνὴ, φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα	1		Both the words **afraid** and **trembling** are similar words which are used to show that the woman was very fearful. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these two words into one expression. Alternate translation: “The woman was very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	5	33	b6kz	figs-ellipsis	εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	told him the whole truth	The phrase **the whole truth** refers to how she had touched him and became well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “told him the whole truth about how she had touched him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	5	34	gbk8	translate-kinship	θυγάτηρ	1	Daughter	Jesus used the term **Daughter** to refer to the woman as a believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is clear to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-MRK	5	35	t2wd	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον	1	Why trouble the teacher any longer?	The rhetorical question **Why trouble the teacher any longer** is a statement used to express that they should not bother Jesus anymore. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer!” or “There is no need to bother the teacher any longer!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	5	35	t2wd	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον?	1	Why trouble the teacher any longer?	The rhetorical question **Why trouble the teacher any longer** is a statement used to express that they should not bother Jesus anymore. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer!” or “There is no need to bother the teacher any longer!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	5	35	vqt0	figs-infostructure	ἡ θυγάτηρ σου ἀπέθανεν; τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον?	1		The statement **Your daughter died** explains why he asks the question here. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Why trouble the teacher any longer? For your daughter died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-MRK	5	39	a3ih	figs-rquestion	τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε	1	Why are you upset and weeping?	Jesus asked this question to help them see their lack of faith. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is not a time to be upset and crying!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	5	39	a3ih	figs-rquestion	τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε?	1	Why are you upset and weeping?	Jesus asked this question to help them see their lack of faith. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is not a time to be upset and crying!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	5	39	dzrk	figs-ellipsis	τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1		The words **The child** are assumed in the second phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The child is not dead, but the child is sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	5	39	g83c	figs-explicit	τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1	The child has not died, but is sleeping	Jesus is using **is sleeping** to indicate that the death of child is only temporary. That is, although the child had died, Jesus intends to make her alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “The child will not remain dead, but she has died for a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	5	41	hx3c	translate-transliterate	ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ!	1	Talitha, koum!	This is an Aramaic phrase which Jesus spoke to the little girl in her language. In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ MRK	6	4	l436	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμ
 MRK	6	4	b42w	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ	1		If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only place that a prophet is not honored is” or “A prophet is honored everywhere except” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 MRK	6	4	y2oa	figs-parallelism	ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1		These three phrases mean basically the same thing. The second and third emphasize the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. In this case, the second and third phrases are more precise, smaller groups of people. If the repetition might confuse your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “among the people with whom he grew up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	6	4	mutm		τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν	1		Here, **relatives** refers to people who are related to Jesus, but are not his siblings, mother, or father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural way in your language to express this.
-MRK	6	4	mgbp	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus uses the phrase **in {his} own house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, and siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	6	4	mgbp	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus uses the phrase **in his own house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, and siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	6	7	d6sx	translate-numbers	δύο δύο	1	two by two	Alternate translation: “2 by 2” or “in pairs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 MRK	6	7	ldbv	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:15](../03/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	6	8	k5hl	grammar-connect-exceptions	μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον	1		If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they should only bring a staff on their journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
@@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ MRK	6	26	c1gn	figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς σ
 MRK	6	34	j1td	figs-simile	ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα	1	they were like sheep not having a shepherd	Jesus compares the people to **sheep**, which are confused and vulnerable when they do not have their **shepherd** to lead them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were confused when they did not have someone to lead them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 MRK	6	35	sei9	figs-idiom	ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης	1	And the hour already having become late	This phrase means it was the day was nearly ended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “near the end of the day” or “toward evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	6	35	hz4h		ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τόπος	1	This place is desolate	The phrase **This place is desolate** means that there were no people or very few people in that place. See how you translated the similar phrase in [Mark 6:31](../06/31.md).
-MRK	6	37	cts5	figs-rquestion	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν	1	Having gone away, might we buy 200 denarii of loaves of bread and give it to them to eat?	The disciples ask this question to say that there is no way they could afford to buy enough food for this crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not buy enough bread to feed this crowd even if we had two hundred denarii!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	6	37	cts5	figs-rquestion	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν?	1	Having gone away, might we buy 200 denarii of loaves of bread and give it to them to eat?	The disciples ask this question to say that there is no way they could afford to buy enough food for this crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not buy enough bread to feed this crowd even if we had two hundred denarii!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	6	37	wowk	figs-hypo	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν	1		The disciples are using a hypothetical situation to express how expensive it would be to buy enough food for all of the people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we had 200 denarii. Even that amount of money would not be sufficient to buy enough food from the market to feed all of these people” or “Suppose we go out to the market, how could we afford to spend 200 denarii on food to feed all of these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 MRK	6	37	hs21	translate-bmoney	δηναρίων διακοσίων	1	200 denarii	The singular form of the word **denarii** is “denarius.” A denarius was a Roman silver coin worth one day’s wages for a laborer. Alternate translation: “200 days’ wages worth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	6	37	c65w	translate-numbers	δηναρίων διακοσίων	1	200 denarii	Alternate translation: “two hundred denarii” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -414,9 +414,9 @@ MRK	7	11	cd57	translate-transliterate	κορβᾶν	1	is Corban	**Corban** is a
 MRK	7	11	ev2r	grammar-connect-time-background	ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον	1	that is, a gift	The author says **that is, a gift** to provide background information to his audience, who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “meaning ‘a gift’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	7	14	u3nk	figs-doublet	ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε	1	Listen to me, all of you, and understand	The words **Listen** and **understand** are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “All of you, take heed to what I am about to say to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	7	15	gk5i	figs-explicit	οὐδέν…ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	nothing from outside the man	Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person can eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	7	15	ms5c	figs-metonymy	τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά	1	the things that come out from the man	By using the phrase **the {things} {that} come out from the man**, Jesus is speaking about the thoughts and desires of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the things which a person thinks and does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	7	15	ms5c	figs-metonymy	τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά	1	the things that come out from the man	By using the phrase **the things that come out from the man**, Jesus is speaking about the thoughts and desires of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the things which a person thinks and does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	17	l7d7	writing-endofstory	καὶ ὅτε	1	And	Here, the phrase **And when** is being used as a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-MRK	7	18	z8w1	figs-rquestion	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε?	1	Are you also thus without understanding?	Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	7	18	z8w1	figs-rquestion	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε?	1	Are you also thus without understanding?	Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	7	18	yqve	figs-metonymy	πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὐ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι	1		See the note in [7:15](../07/15.md) regarding the similar expression. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	19	y2cr	figs-metonymy	οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν	1	it does not go into his heart	Here, **heart** means a person’s inner being or mind. Here, Jesus means that food does not affect a person’s character. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “it cannot go into his inner being” or “it cannot go into his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	19	hm98	writing-background	καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα	1	making all foods clean	The phrase **making all foods clean** explains to the reader the significance of Jesus’ saying. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ MRK	7	35	yg15	figs-idiom	ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί	1	hi
 MRK	7	35	yj4j	figs-activepassive	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1	the band of his tongue was released	The phrase **his tongue was released** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus took away what prevented his tongue from speaking” or “Jesus loosened his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	7	35	gssm	figs-idiom	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **the band of his tongue was released** means he became able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was freed and he was able to speak” or “he was able to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	7	36	eb2y	figs-ellipsis	ὅσον…αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ	1	as much as he ordered them	This refers to Jesus ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	7	37	dh17	figs-metonymy	τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους	1	the deaf … the mute	The phrase **the deaf** and the phrase **{the} mute** both refer to groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	7	37	dh17	figs-metonymy	τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους	1	the deaf … the mute	The phrase **the deaf** and the phrase **the mute** both refer to groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	8	intro	ry56			0		# Mark 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Bread<br><br>When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.<br><br>Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to expand before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### “Adulterous generation”<br><br>When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The historic present<br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples [Mark 8:17–21](./17.md) and rebuking the people [Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” [Mark 8:35–37](../08/35.md)
 MRK	8	1	rmd8	writing-newevent	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	In those days	The phrase **In those days** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events in the story that Mark has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	8	1	sgv6	figs-extrainfo	μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν	1	Connecting Statement:	Following this, Jesus explains why the crowd did not have **anything to eat**. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ MRK	8	10	x33a	translate-names	Δαλμανουθά	1	of Dalmanutha	The word **Da
 MRK	8	11	zi91	figs-metonymy	σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	a sign from heaven	Here, **heaven** refers to where God dwells and is an indirect way of referring to “God” himself. If your readers would not understand the use of the word **heaven** in this context, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	8	12	sn5a		ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	having sighed deeply in his spirit	The phrase **sighed greatly in his spirit** means that Jesus groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated the word “sighed” in [Mark 7:34](../07/34.md).
 MRK	8	12	s8xl	figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	in his spirit	The phrase **in his spirit** means “within himself” or “to himself.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	8	12	g4lz	figs-rquestion	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον?	1	Why does this generation seek for a sign?	Jesus asks **Why does this generation seek for a sign** to show that they have not understood the miracles that he has done up until this point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	8	12	g4lz	figs-rquestion	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον?	1	Why does this generation seek for a sign?	Jesus asks **Why does this generation seek for a sign** to show that they have not understood the miracles that he has done up until this point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	12	l335	figs-synecdoche	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον	1	Why does this generation seek for	When Jesus speaks of **this generation**, he is referring to some of the people who lived at that time and who were not following God. He was not speaking of every single person alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Why do you Pharisees ask for a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	8	12	a2x2	figs-activepassive	εἰ δοθήσεται…σημεῖον	1	if a sign will be given	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	8	12	q4wh	figs-idiom	εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον	1		The phrase **if a sign will be given to this generation …** is an idiom which means that a sign certainly will not be given. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -465,9 +465,9 @@ MRK	8	14	gtg6	grammar-connect-exceptions	καὶ ἐπελάθοντο λαβε
 MRK	8	15	bd2x	figs-doublet	ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε	1	Keep watch! Be on guard	The warning phrases **Keep watch** and **Be on guard** both have very similar meanings and are repeated here for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Make sure you keep watch” or “Be sure to guard yourselves against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	8	15	nszl	figs-extrainfo	βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου	1		Jesus is comparing the Pharisees’ and Herod’s teachings to **yeast**. When yeast is put into bread, it affects the entire batch of bread which is made. You should not explain this when you translate it, for the disciples themselves did not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 MRK	8	16	zfw3	figs-hyperbole	ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν	1	they have no bread	The word **no** is an exaggeration. The disciples did have one loaf of bread ([Mark 8:14](../08/14.md)), but that was not enough for all of them. Alternate translation: “they have very little bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-MRK	8	17	hnh6	figs-rquestion	τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε	1	Why are you reasoning that you do not have bread?	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from the disciples. but rather. he is rebuking his disciples because they should have understood what he had been talking about. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not think that I am speaking of actual bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	8	17	hnh6	figs-rquestion	τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε?	1	Why are you reasoning that you do not have bread?	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from the disciples. but rather. he is rebuking his disciples because they should have understood what he had been talking about. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not think that I am speaking of actual bread!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	17	dmt2	figs-parallelism	οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε	1	Do you not yet perceive, nor understand?	The phrase **Do you not yet perceive** and the phrase **nor understand** have the same meaning. Jesus uses these phrases together here to emphasize the fact that they do not understand. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet understand?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-MRK	8	17	wf6j	figs-rquestion	οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε	1	Do you not yet perceive, nor understand?	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “By now, you should perceive and understand the things I say and do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	8	17	wf6j	figs-rquestion	οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε?	1	Do you not yet perceive, nor understand?	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “By now, you should perceive and understand the things I say and do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	17	fn31	figs-metonymy	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	Have your hearts become hardened?	Here, the word **hearts** refers to a person’s mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Have you become resistant to understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	8	17	rq8c	figs-metaphor	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	Have your hearts become hardened?	The phrase **hearts become hardened** is a metaphor for not being able or willing to understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	8	17	mihv	figs-rquestion	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	Have your hearts become hardened?	Here, Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your thinking has become so dull!” or “You are so slow to understand what I mean!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ MRK	8	18	u1gh	figs-rquestion	ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέ
 MRK	8	18	qt58	figs-idiom	ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε	1		The phrases **do you not see** and **do you not hear** are both idioms meaning that the disciples did not understand. They heard and saw everything Jesus did, but they did not understand what it meant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do you not understand the things which I have said and done the whole time you have been with me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	8	19	t7ig	translate-numbers	τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους	1	the 5,000	Alternate translation: “the five thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 MRK	8	20	lip5	translate-numbers	τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους	1	the 4,000	Alternate translation: “the four thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-MRK	8	21	kh42	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὔπω συνίετε?	1	How do you not yet understand?	Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke his disciples for not understanding what he has done in front of their eyes. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should understand by now the things I have said and done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	8	21	kh42	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὔπω συνίετε?	1	How do you not yet understand?	Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke his disciples for not understanding what he has done in front of their eyes. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should understand by now the things I have said and done!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	22	c92c	figs-go	ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	8	22	mj78	figs-explicit	ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν	1		Jesus and his disciples traveled to Bethsaida in a boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they came to Bethsaida in a boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	8	22	mul4	translate-names	Βηθσαϊδάν	1	Bethsaida	The word **Bethsaida** is the name of a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated the name of this town in [Mark 6:45](../06/45.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -498,10 +498,10 @@ MRK	8	34	m732	figs-metaphor	ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν	1	to follo
 MRK	8	34	c6ll	figs-metonymy	ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι	1	take up his cross, and follow me	The **cross** here represents suffering and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “be willing to suffer and die for my sake and follow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	8	35	d5rj	figs-genericnoun	ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ	1	For whoever wants	By using the word **whoever**, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	8	35	nn0a	figs-euphemism	ἀπολέσει αὐτήν	1		Here, **lose it** is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will forfeit his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-MRK	8	36	ua46	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ	1	For what does it profit a man to gain the whole world and to forfeit his soul?	Jesus is not seeking information here, but rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	8	36	ua46	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ?	1	For what does it profit a man to gain the whole world and to forfeit his soul?	Jesus is not seeking information here, but rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	36	mxuj	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Mark is using the phrase **a man** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 MRK	8	36	jde6	figs-hyperbole	κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον	1	to gain the whole world	The phrase **the whole world** is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches and fame. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-MRK	8	37	wua4	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ?	1	For what might a man give as an exchange for his soul?	Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	8	37	wua4	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ?	1	For what might a man give as an exchange for his soul?	Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life!” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	38	c53y	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ	1	in this adulterous and sinful generation	Jesus speaks of this **generation** as **adulterous**, meaning that they are unfaithful in their relationship with God. If your readers would not understand what **adulterous** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this generation of people who have committed adultery and sinned against God” or “in this generation of people who are unfaithful to God and are very sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	8	38	ov1d	figs-synecdoche	τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1		See how you translated “this generation” in [8:12](../08/12.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	8	38	s5tm	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -514,21 +514,18 @@ MRK	9	1	kg4x	figs-idiom	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανά
 MRK	9	1	qloy	figs-abstractnouns	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	1	ymou	figs-abstractnouns	ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God come powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	1	yjf6	figs-explicit	τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει	1	the kingdom of God come with power	The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** represents God showing himself as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in [9:2–10](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	9	2	uf5f	figs-rpronouns	κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους	1	by themselves, alone	Mark uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+MRK	9	2	uf5f	figs-rpronouns	κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους	1	by themselves, alone	Mark uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were **alone** and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 MRK	9	2	krt6	translate-unknown	μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν	1	he was transfigured before them	The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	9	2	b3bb	figs-activepassive	μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν	1	he was transfigured	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase **he was transfigured before them** with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	3	gp48	translate-unknown	οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι	1	as no bleacher on earth is able thus to make them white	The word **launderer** refers to a person who worked with cloth to clean and bleach cloth and clothing. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of the word **launderer**, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who bleached cloth could make them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	9	4	f2d6	translate-names	Ἠλείας	1	Elijah with Moses appeared	The word **Elijah** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Mark 6:15](../mrk/06/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MRK	9	4	j83a	translate-names	Μωϋσεῖ	1		The word **Moses** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Mark 1:44](../mrk/01/44.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	9	4	r3uu	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	4	pj3i	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες	1	they were talking with	Here, the word **they** refers to Elijah and Moses. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	4	sh7s	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the passive phrase **were seen** with an active form. Alternate translation: “And they saw Elijah and Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	4	y9r3	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		The word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	5	w6vs	writing-participants	ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	answering, Peter says to Jesus	Here, the word **answering** is used to introduce Peter into the conversation. Peter was not answering a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 MRK	9	5	iqc9	figs-exclusive	καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι	1	it is good for us to be here	Here, the pronoun **us** could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case **us** would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-MRK	9	5	k3y1	translate-unknown	σκηνάς	1	shelters	**Shelters** are simple, temporary places with roofs under which to sit or sleep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-MRK	9	5	ou1t	translate-names	Μωϋσεῖ	1		The word **Moses** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Mark 1:44](../mrk/01/44.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MRK	9	5	u7di	translate-names	Ἠλείᾳ	1		The word **Elijah** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Mark 6:15](../mrk/06/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MRK	9	5	k3y1	translate-unknown	σκηνάς	1	shelters	These **shelters** were simple, temporary places with roofs under which to sit or sleep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	9	6	r3bn	writing-background	οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο	1	For he did not know what to say, for they were terrified	This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	9	6	f8hn		ἔκφοβοι…ἐγένοντο	1	they were terrified	Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”
 MRK	9	7	e3id		ἐγένετο…ἐπισκιάζουσα αὐτοῖς	1	came, overshadowing them	Alternate translation: “appeared and covered them”
@@ -548,9 +545,8 @@ MRK	9	10	to7w	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Mark is describing something J
 MRK	9	10	wfu9		ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	to rise from the dead	See how you translated the phrase “risen from the dead” in [9:9](../09/09.md).
 MRK	9	11	s9zn	writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες	1	they were questioning him	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning Jesus, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	11	je29	writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν	1		Here, the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were questioning Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-MRK	9	11	wgsr	translate-names	Ἠλείαν	1		See how you translated the name **Elijah** in [Mark 6:15](../mrk/06/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	9	12	o8hf	writing-pronouns	ἔφη	1		Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-MRK	9	12	s3q3	figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ?	1	And how is it written about the Son of Man that he would suffer many things and would be despised?	Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the **Son of Man** must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	9	12	s3q3	figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ?	1	And how is it written about the Son of Man that he would suffer many things and would be despised?	Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the **Son of Man** must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	9	12	xazj	figs-explicit	ἐξουδενηθῇ	1		Here, it is implied that those who would despise the **Son of Man** would be people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “would be despised by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	12	toik	figs-activepassive	καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning behind the phrase **been written** with an active form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	12	i3j7	figs-activepassive	ἐξουδενηθῇ	1	would be despised	If it would be more natural in your language, you could state the phrase **would be despised** in active form. Alternate translation: “that people would hate him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -566,7 +562,7 @@ MRK	9	18	zre6	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἴσχυσαν	1	they could not	The phrase
 MRK	9	19	tb67	figs-extrainfo	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει	1	answering them, he says	Here, the pronoun **them** is plural, so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly to whom **them** refers. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here,**them** probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “But answering all of them, Jesus said” or “Addressing them all, Jesus said” or “Addressing everyone present, Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 MRK	9	19	azc9	figs-abstractnouns	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος	1	You unbelieving generation	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **generation**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **generation** in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	19	nbw0	figs-metonymy	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος	1		Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean all the people who were alive at that time in history, and specifically, to refer to all the people who were present with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy)
-MRK	9	19	c88a	figs-rquestion	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν	1	until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you?	Here, Jesus uses two rhetorical questions, **until when will I be with you** and **Until when will I bear with you**, to show his frustration and disappointment with their unbelief. If you do not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You unbelieving generation. You test my patience” or “You unbelieving generation. Your unbelief tires me! I wonder how long I must bear with you” or “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you much longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	9	19	c88a	figs-rquestion	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?	1	until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you?	Here, Jesus uses two rhetorical questions, **until when will I be with you** and **Until when will I bear with you**, to show his frustration and disappointment with their unbelief. If you do not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You unbelieving generation. You test my patience” or “You unbelieving generation. Your unbelief tires me! I wonder how long I must bear with you!” or “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you much longer!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	9	19	n4dq	figs-parallelism	ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?	1	until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you?	The question **until when will I be with you** and the question **Until when will I bear with you** have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “how long must I be with you and endure your unbelief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	9	19	b7u5		ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν	1	will I bear with you	Alternate translation: “Until when should I endure you” or “Until when must I put up with you” or “How long must I endure you”
 MRK	9	19	nrya	figs-yousingular	φέρετε αὐτὸν πρός με	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the word **Bring** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -574,14 +570,14 @@ MRK	9	20	bw3l		πνεῦμα	1	the spirit	See how you translated the word **spir
 MRK	9	20	l4r5	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν	1	threw him into a convulsion	In this verse the first and fourth occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the man’s “son”, who was possessed by a mute **spirit** and was mentioned in [Mark 9:17](../mrk/09/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately threw the boy into a convulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	20	vdj4	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν	1		In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately threw the boy into a convulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	21	f5zm		καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν	1	From childhood	Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the boy’s father, ‘How long of a time has this been happening to him?’ And the father said, ‘This has been happening to him since childhood’”
-MRK	9	22	f5yu	figs-infostructure	βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	having had compassion	In the sentence **help us, having had compassion on us**, Mark records the father using a figure of speech in which the logical flow of events is altered in order to put what is most important in the mind of the speaker first (here the speaker is the father). The normal way of saying this would be, “having had compassion on us, help us”, because it shows the natural order of events, since **having had compassion** on someone normally precedes helping them. Mark records the father saying **help us** first because receiving help was what was most important to the father. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “have compassion on us and help us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+MRK	9	22	f5yu	figs-infostructure	βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	having had compassion	In the sentence **help us, having compassion on us**, Mark records the father using a figure of speech in which the logical flow of events is altered in order to put what is most important in the mind of the speaker first (here the speaker is the father). The normal way of saying this would be, “having compassion on us, help us”, because it shows the natural order of events, since **having compassion** on someone normally precedes helping them. Mark records the father saying **help us** first because receiving help was what was most important to the father. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “have compassion on us and help us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 MRK	9	22	fbup	figs-abstractnouns	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **compassion** in another way, such as by using the verb “pity,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	23	vh6c		εἰ δύνῃ	1	‘If you are able’?	The phrase **If you are able** is Jesus repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be more helpful in your language, you could express this as a statement or in some other way that is natural. Alternate translation: “You should not say to me, ‘If you are able’” or “You ask me if I am able. Of course I am able” or “Why do you say, ‘If you are able’”
 MRK	9	23	kp1x		πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	All things are possible for the one believing	Alternate translation: “Everything is possible for the person who believes” or “Anything is possible for the person believing in God”
 MRK	9	23	e5kk	figs-explicit	τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	for the one believing	The word **believing** refers to belief in God, and here it specifically refers to belief in Jesus and his power. The phrase **the one** means “any person” or “any one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “for anyone who believes that God is able to do them” or “for any person who believes in God’s power” or “for anyone one who believes in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	24	h4y6	figs-explicit	βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	Help me in my unbelief	The sentence **Help my unbelief** does not mean that the man had no belief in Jesus or his power, but rather, these words express that the man realized he did not believe fully or believe to the extent that he should. The man is asking Jesus to help him overcome his unbelief and increase his faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Help me to have more faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	24	wssi	figs-abstractnouns	βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unbelief**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **unbelief** in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	9	25	qaw4	figs-explicit	ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος	1	the crowd is running to them	The phrase **the crowd is running to them** means that more people were **running** toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	9	25	qaw4	figs-explicit	ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος	1	the crowd is running to them	The phrase **the crowd is running to {them}** means that more people were **running** toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	25	b54j	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in this way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people was running to them” or “many people were running to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 MRK	9	25	ul8k	figs-explicit	τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα	1	You mute and deaf spirit	The words **mute** and **deaf** can be explained if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “You unclean spirit who are causing this boy to be unable to speak and unable to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	25	zd5c	figs-go	ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1		Your language may say “go out” rather than **come out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “go out from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -598,8 +594,8 @@ MRK	9	29	kh4w	figs-go	τοῦτο τὸ γένος…δύναται ἐξελθ
 MRK	9	29	yrzf	figs-abstractnouns	προσευχῇ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **prayer** by using a verb form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	29	l6ok	figs-abstractnouns	νηστείᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fasting**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **fasting** in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	31	f4gm		ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
-MRK	9	31	vpj9	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν, καὶ ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται	1		By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-MRK	9	31	w75k	figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	The Son of Man is being delivered	If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **is being delivered** with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Evil men will deliver the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	9	31	vpj9	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν, καὶ ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται	1		By calling himself **The Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+MRK	9	31	w75k	figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	The Son of Man is being delivered	If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **is being handed over** with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Evil men will hand over the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	31	y5cw		ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	The Son of Man is being delivered	Alternate translation: “The Son of Man is being betrayed”
 MRK	9	31	z8ud	figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων	1	into the hands of men	Here, **hands** means control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “into the control of men” or “into the custody of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	9	31	s1n2	figs-activepassive	ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται	1	having been killed, he will rise again after three days	If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **having been killed** with an active form and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “once they kill him, he will rise again after three days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -614,10 +610,10 @@ MRK	9	35	um58	translate-ordinal	πρῶτος	1		If your language does not use o
 MRK	9	35	jqo3	figs-ellipsis	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	9	35	z9x2	figs-declarative	ἔσται…ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 MRK	9	35	t526		πάντων…πάντων	1	of all … of all	Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”
-MRK	9	36	qqcu	writing-pronouns	ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	9	36	qqcu	writing-pronouns	ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **their** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	37	h242		ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων	1	one of these little children	Alternate translation: “a child such as this one”
 MRK	9	37	ul12	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	in my name	Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person. Alternate translation: “on my behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	9	37	uik3	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1		The phrase **does not receive me but the one who sent me** means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	9	37	uik3	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1		The phrase **does not receive me but the one having sent me** means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	37	y24n	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	the one who has sent me	Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who has sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	38	dxq5	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου	1	in your name	Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. The expression **in your name** means that the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	9	38	a3d3		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md).
@@ -635,7 +631,7 @@ MRK	9	41	wnb2	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθ
 MRK	9	41	jjq5	figs-gendernotations	οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ	1		Although the pronouns **he** and **his** are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose their reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 MRK	9	42	cj0l	figs-metaphor	ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων	1		The phrase **these little ones** could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically little compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (2) a reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these new believers” or (3) a reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these common people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 MRK	9	42	gef5	figs-hypo	καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ	1		Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Here, Jesus is making a comparison to the punishment that people will receive from God for causing other people to sin. Jesus means that the person’s punishment from God for causing people to sin will be worse than if that person had drowned in the sea. He is not saying that someone would actually put a stone around a person’s neck and throw them into the sea as an alternative to being punished by God. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “The punishment he will receive will be worse than if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-MRK	9	42	z6k5	translate-unknown	μύλος ὀνικὸς	1	a large millstone	These **large millstones** were round stones used for grinding grain into flour. They were so heavy that they required a donkey or an ox to turn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of an object in your area that is very heavy, or you could use a general expression such as “a very heavy stone,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MRK	9	42	z6k5	translate-unknown	μύλος ὀνικὸς	1	a large millstone	A **large millstone** was a round stone used for grinding grain into flour. It was so heavy that it required a donkey or an ox to turn it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of an object in your area that is very heavy, or you could use a general expression such as “a very heavy stone,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	9	42	bx6c	figs-explicit	περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ	1		The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone around his neck” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
 MRK	9	43	g8dv	figs-metonymy	ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου	1	if your hand may cause you to stumble	Here, **hand** is a metonym for doing, or desiring to do, something sinful with your hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful with one of your hands” or “if you are doing something sinful with one of your hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	9	43	ifcv	figs-hyperbole	ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν	1		When Jesus says, **if your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off**, he is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the seriousness of sin and the importance of avoiding it. Jesus is not being literal when he says to cut off **your hand**, because Judaism taught against harming one’s body, and Jesus taught in [Mark 7:14–23](../mrk/07/14.md), and elsewhere that the human heart is what causes people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -654,10 +650,10 @@ MRK	9	47	r2gn	figs-activepassive	βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέεννα
 MRK	9	49	mr5y	figs-activepassive	πᾶς…πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	everyone will be salted with fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase **will be salted** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	49	ma3s	figs-metaphor	πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	will be salted with fire	Here, **fire** is a metaphor for suffering, and putting salt on people is a metaphor for purifying them, so **will be salted with fire** is a metaphor for being purified through suffering. Alternate translation: “will be made pure in the fire of suffering” or “will suffer in order to be purified, as a sacrifice is purified with salt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	9	50	rb7r		ἄναλον γένηται	1	may become unsalty	Alternate translation: “loses its salty taste”
-MRK	9	50	fqb8	figs-rquestion	ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε	1	with what will you season it?	By using the phrase **with what will you season it**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form to emphasize a truth that he wants his listeners to understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	9	50	fqb8	figs-rquestion	ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε?	1	with what will you season it?	By using the question **with what will you season it?**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form to emphasize a truth that he wants his listeners to understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	9	50	t76n		αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε	1	will you season it	Alternate translation: “will you make it taste salty again”
 MRK	9	50	f34y	figs-metaphor	ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα	1	Have salt in yourselves	Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were **salt**. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what **salt** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	9	50	syc9	figs-rpronouns	ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα	1		The plural reflexive pronoun **yourselves** is used here to emphasize that Jesus wanted his 12 disciples to apply what he was saying to themselves. Use a form that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “make sure that each of you has salt within yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+MRK	9	50	syc9	figs-rpronouns	ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα	1		The plural reflexive pronoun **yourselves** is used here to emphasize that Jesus wanted his 12 disciples to apply what he was saying to themselves. Use a form that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “Make sure that each of you has salt within yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 MRK	9	50	tind	figs-yousingular	εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις	1		The command, **be at peace with one another**, is an instruction to all of Jesus’ 12 disciples. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	10	intro	bq25			0		# Mark 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in [Mark10:7–8](../mrk/10/07.md).<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Jesus’ teaching about divorce<br><br>The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. As Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage, he shows that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Metaphors are mental pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” ([Mark 10:43](../mrk/10/43.md)).
 MRK	10	1	qq93	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς, ἔρχεται	1	having gotten up, he goes from that place	Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him, and they were leaving Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “getting up, Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum and went from that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -689,7 +685,7 @@ MRK	10	16	jq4f		ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὰ	1	having taken them i
 MRK	10	17	fpp6	figs-metaphor	ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω	1	in order that I might inherit everlasting life	Here, the word **inherit** means “be given” or “receive” and is being used to mean “receive eternal life” or “be given eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to receive eternal life” or “in order to obtain eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	10	17	d0iy		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	10	17	h45i	figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind **life** by using a verbal form like “live,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	10	18	lw1f	figs-rquestion	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν	1	Why are you calling me good?	Jesus’ statement “Why are you calling me good” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using in order to make a point and not to obtain information. If you would not use a rhetorical question to make a point in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	10	18	lw1f	figs-rquestion	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν?	1	Why are you calling me good?	Jesus’ statement “Why are you calling me good?” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using in order to make a point and not to obtain information. If you would not use a rhetorical question to make a point in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	10	18	gyod	figs-explicit	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1		By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one is good except God alone**, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and about what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher,” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life,” a person simply needs to know the right things and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God, a person must focus on God and put their trust in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	19	qs3e	figs-quotesinquotes	τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1		In the previous verse Jesus begins directly addressing the man who came to him. This verse continues Jesus’ direct speech to the man. However, in this verse, beginning with the phrase **Do not kill**, Jesus begins quoting several Old Testament passages. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation of the Old Testament as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “You know that the Scriptures tell us that we should not kill, commit adultery, steal, testify falsely, or defraud others, and that each person must honor their father and mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	10	19	hj3v		μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς	1	do not testify falsely	Alternate translation: “do not testify falsely against anyone” or “do not lie about someone in court”
@@ -702,7 +698,7 @@ MRK	10	22	afu7	figs-synecdoche	τῷ λόγῳ	1		Although the term **word** is
 MRK	10	22	v58f		ἔχων κτήματα πολλά	1	one having many possessions	Alternate translation: “someone who owned many things”
 MRK	10	24	z9z1		ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς	1	but again answering, Jesus says to them	Alternate translation: “but Jesus said to his disciples again”
 MRK	10	24	fh1q	figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	Children, how	Here Jesus is using the term **Children** to describe the disciples. They are under his spiritual care and Jesus teaches them as a father would instruct his children, and he regards them in that sense. If your readers would not understand the use of the term **Children** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could translate this plainly, as UST does. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
-MRK	10	25	f15k	figs-hyperbole	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	It is easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God	This entire verse is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize how difficult it is for **rich** people **to enter into the kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses the difficulty of something happening. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	10	25	f15k	figs-hyperbole	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	It is easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God	This entire verse is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize how difficult it is for a **rich** person **to enter into the kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses the difficulty of something happening. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	10	25	t4y8	translate-unknown	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	the eye of a needle	This phrase, **the eye of a needle**, refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing **needle** through which the thread passes. If your readers are not familiar with camels and/or needles, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could state this in plain language without using hyperbole and express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “It is extremely difficult for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	10	27	vfyb	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Here, although the term **men** is masculine, it is used with a generic sense to refer to people in general, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 MRK	10	28	hcv3	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@@ -711,7 +707,7 @@ MRK	10	30	sjhg	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ	1	who may not recei
 MRK	10	30	heb4		ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ	1	in this time	Alternate translation: “in this present age”
 MRK	10	31	y2lu	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ…ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1		Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words **first** and **last** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
 MRK	10	31	ym7t	figs-metaphor	ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	who are first will be last, and the last first	Here, Jesus is using the words **first** and **last** metaphorically. See how you translated these words in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	32	hq7y	figs-explicit	οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those who are following behind	Some people were walking behind Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	32	hq7y	figs-explicit	οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those who are following behind	Some people were walking **behind** Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	32	k1nn	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	10	33	pv4w	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 MRK	10	33	qkq9	figs-exclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1		When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -737,7 +733,7 @@ MRK	10	39	r3pm	writing-pronouns	οἱ…αὐτοῖς	1	We are able	Here, the p
 MRK	10	39	hc1g	figs-idiom	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε	1	you will drink	**The cup that I drink** is an idiom. See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	10	39	c15v	figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1		In this verse Jesus continues to use **baptism** to mean something more. See how you translated Jesus’ symbolic use of baptism in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	10	39	humc	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1		The phrase **I am being baptized** and the phrase **you will be baptized** are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state these two phrases in active form as modeled by the UST or you can express the meaning in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	10	40	pdc1	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται	1	but it is for those for whom it has been prepared	The word **it** refers to the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	40	pdc1	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται	1	but it is for those for whom it has been prepared	The word **{it}** refers to the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	40	eu9v	figs-activepassive	ἡτοίμασται	1	it has been prepared	The phrase **it has been prepared** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says in [Matthew 20:23](../mat/20/23.md) that God the Father is the one who will prepare these places. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	10	41	ad19	figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες	1	When heard about this	The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	41	i48d	figs-explicit	οἱ δέκα	1		Here, **the ten** refers to the other ten disciples of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -818,7 +814,7 @@ MRK	11	15	hoym		ἐκβάλλειν	1		Alternate translation: “to throw out”
 MRK	11	15	s4m2		τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας	1	those selling and those buying	Alternate translation: “the people who were buying and selling”
 MRK	11	15	ve56	figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	General Information:	See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	11	16	ohxg	figs-synecdoche	ἱεροῦ	1		See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	11	17	xrz2	figs-rquestion	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?	1	Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’?	**Has it not been written** is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple, as recorded in the Old Testament Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have paid closer attention to the scripture which says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	11	17	xrz2	figs-rquestion	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?	1	Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’?	**Has it not been written** is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple, as recorded in the Old Testament Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have paid closer attention to the scripture which says.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	11	17	dxwe	figs-quotesinquotes	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that his temple would be a place of prayer for all nations, but you have made it a den of robbers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	11	17	t9x9	figs-activepassive	οὐ γέγραπται	1		If your readers might not understand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	11	17	qeix	figs-metaphor	οἶκός μου	1		God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as his **house** because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -832,7 +828,7 @@ MRK	11	20	s8ki	figs-explicit	τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ
 MRK	11	20	a83v	figs-activepassive	ἐξηραμμένην	1	had been withered	The phrase **had been withered** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was withered” or “had dried up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	11	21	jt3h	figs-activepassive	ἀναμνησθεὶς	1	having remembered, Peter	The phrase **having been reminded** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	11	21	na1k	figs-activepassive	ἐξήρανται	1		The phrase **has been withered away** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has withered away” or “has dried up” or “has died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	11	22	ry5v	figs-yousingular	ἔχετε πίστιν	1	answering, Jesus says to them	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **have faith** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you should have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	22	ry5v	figs-yousingular	ἔχετε πίστιν	1	answering, Jesus says to them	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Have faith** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you should have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	11	22	x8k7	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχετε πίστιν Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “Trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	23	sy61		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	See how you translated the statement **Truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
 MRK	11	23	mred	figs-hyperbole	ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1		Jesus is using hyperbole to teach. He is using an extreme example to emphasize to his disciples that God can do anything in response to believing prayer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “that whoever prays to God and says, ‘God please take up this mountain and cast it into the sea,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -855,7 +851,7 @@ MRK	11	25	swa3	figs-yousingular	ἀφίετε	1		In the original language in whi
 MRK	11	25	jjs9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says **forgive** with the goal that **your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses.** Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	11	25	omze	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “sinned” or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the times you have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	27	alh5	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ	1	as he is walking around in the temple	The phrase, **he is walking around in the temple** means that Jesus was walking around in the temple courtyard. Jesus was not walking in the temple, since only priests were allowed inside the temple building. See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	11	28	se9b	figs-parallelism	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς	1	By what authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do them?	The question **By what authority do you do these {things}**, and the question **who gave you this authority** could: (1) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) (2) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things?”
+MRK	11	28	se9b	figs-parallelism	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς	1	By what authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do them?	The question **By what authority do you do these things**, and the question **who gave you this authority** could: (1) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) (2) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things?”
 MRK	11	28	ooxp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ…ἐξουσίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	29	erqp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	29	aak2		ἕνα λόγον	1		Here, Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question”
@@ -895,12 +891,12 @@ MRK	12	7	m63e	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸ
 MRK	12	7	kefz		γεωργοὶ	1		See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md).
 MRK	12	7	s5dc	figs-metonymy	ἡ κληρονομία	1	the inheritance	By **inheritance**, the farmers mean “the vineyard”, which the son would inherit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this vineyard, which he would inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	8	gx6l	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	having seized him	Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described, specifically that the farmers carried out the plan that they had decided on. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-and-result relationship. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-MRK	12	9	r4md	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος?	1	Therefore, what will the lord of the vineyard do?	Jesus does not want the people to tell him what the owner of the vineyard will do. Rather, he is using the question form to get his listeners to pay attention to what he says the owner will do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do to them” or “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	9	r4md	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος?	1	Therefore, what will the lord of the vineyard do?	Jesus does not want the people to tell him what the owner of the vineyard will do. Rather, he is using the question form to get his listeners to pay attention to what he says the owner will do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do to them” or “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	12	9	tlji		γεωργούς	1		See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md).
 MRK	12	9	g4ce	translate-unknown	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	destroy	See how you translated the similar expression in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “allow different grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	12	9	mc5y	figs-explicit	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	will give the vineyard to others	The word **others** refers to other vine dressers who will care for the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other farmers to care for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	10	v6ta	figs-quotesinquotes	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	General Information:	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read the scripture that says that the stone which the builders rejected became the cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-MRK	12	10	xj9j	figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε	1	And have you not read this scripture?	Jesus does not want the Jewish leaders to tell him whether or not they have read the scripture he quotes to them. He knows that they have read the scripture. He is using the question form for emphasis and to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture” or “And you should remember this scripture” or “And you should pay attention to this scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	10	xj9j	figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε:	1	And have you not read this scripture?	Jesus does not want the Jewish leaders to tell him whether or not they have read the scripture he quotes to them. He knows that they have read the scripture. He is using the question form for emphasis and to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture!” or “And you should remember this scripture!” or “And you should pay attention to this scripture!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	12	10	mzr2	figs-metaphor	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1		This quotation from Psalm 118 is a metaphor. It speaks of the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject the Messiah. The Psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, which is the most important stone in the building. This means that God will make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing an explicit explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	10	kv7t	figs-explicit	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες	1		This Psalm refers implicitly to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. Alternate translation: “The stone which the builders thought was not good enough to use for building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	10	l5ma	figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1		The phrase the **head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -926,8 +922,8 @@ MRK	12	14	ap2q	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἀληθείας	1		If your language
 MRK	12	14	k0tw	figs-explicit	ἔξεστιν	1		The Jewish leaders are asking about God’s law, not the law of the Roman government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Does God’s law permit us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	14	gtsk	figs-metonymy	Καίσαρι	1		The Jewish leaders were referring to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	15	g48w	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ δὲ εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν, εἶπεν	1	he, knowing their hypocrisy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “But Jesus knew that they were not being sincere, so he said” or “But Jesus realized that they were trying to trick him, and so he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	12	15	c7nj	figs-rquestion	τί με πειράζετε	1	Why do you test me?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as a rebuke and for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for these purposes in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I know that you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	15	wl34	translate-bmoney	δηνάριον	1	a denarius	A denarius was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage for a laborer. Alternate translation: “a Roman coin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+MRK	12	15	c7nj	figs-rquestion	τί με πειράζετε?	1	Why do you test me?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as a rebuke and for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for these purposes in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I know that you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	15	wl34	translate-bmoney	δηνάριον	1	a denarius	A **denarius** was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage for a laborer. Alternate translation: “a Roman coin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	12	16	ev6s		οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1	And they brought one	Alternate translation: “So the Pharisees and the Herodians brought a denarius”
 MRK	12	16	gi96	figs-explicit	Καίσαρος	1	they said to him, “Caesar’s.”	Here, **Caesar’s** refers to Caesar’s likeness and inscription. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	17	fl4l	figs-metonymy	τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι	1	The things of Caesar, give back to Caesar	See how you translated **Caesar** in [12:14](../12/14.md). Alternate translation: “The things that belong to the Roman government, give back to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -936,7 +932,7 @@ MRK	12	18	edcn	writing-background	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστα
 MRK	12	18	y8yo	writing-participants	καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		Mark uses the words **Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, come to him** to introduce these new characters into the story. It may be helpful to introduce them more fully in your translation. Alternate translation: “Some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, then came to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 MRK	12	18	ss09	figs-distinguish	Σαδδουκαῖοι…οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “Sadducees, men who believe that no one will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 MRK	12	18	rdl7	figs-explicit	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	who say there is no resurrection	The word **resurrection** refers to becoming alive again after being dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	18	ax25	figs-synecdoche	λέγοντες	1		Mark could mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group. You could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	12	18	ax25	figs-synecdoche	λέγοντες	1		Mark may be using the singular **saying** to mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group. You could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	12	19	w3ev		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	12	19	e8x2	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	Moses wrote to us, ‘If someone’s brother may die	These Sadducees are referring to the law that Moses wrote as if Moses had written directly to them. Alternate translation: “Moses instructed us in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	19	m8fh	figs-exclusive	ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	wrote to us	Here, the word **us** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducees mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -957,9 +953,9 @@ MRK	12	21	l1ds	figs-nominaladj	ὁ τρίτος	1	the third likewise	Jesus is us
 MRK	12	21	hx1q	translate-ordinal	ὁ τρίτος	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	12	22	wjq8	figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	the seven	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	22	l3dg	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	the seven did not leave offspring	See how you translated this sense of the word **seed** in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	23	w4wu		ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife?	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
+MRK	12	23	w4wu		ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife?	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a **resurrection**. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
 MRK	12	23	c4p5	figs-ellipsis	οἱ…ἑπτὰ	1		The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	24	zp2p	figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the Scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the Scriptures or the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	12	24	zp2p	figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the Scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the Scriptures or the power of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	12	24	sie3	figs-activepassive	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the Scriptures or God’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	12	24	i8il		τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the power of God	Alternate translation: “how powerful God is”
 MRK	12	25	nvh6	writing-pronouns	ὅταν γὰρ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	For when they may rise	Both uses of the pronoun **they** refer to men and women in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “For when men and women rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” or “For when people rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -971,7 +967,7 @@ MRK	12	25	pi8l	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	the heavens	What foll
 MRK	12	26	mffe	figs-nominaladj	τῶν νεκρῶν	1		Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the phrase **the dead** in [12:25](../12/25.md). Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	12	26	z36n	figs-activepassive	τῶν νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται	1	that are raised	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who does the action. Alternate translation: “the matter of God bringing back to life people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	12	26	eod4	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1		Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here for emphasis in order to rebuke the Sadducees for not correctly understanding the Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have surely read in the book of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	12	26	jc5a	figs-possession	τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1	the book of Moses	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the book that Moses wrote, the Pentateuch. Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify this in your translation, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+MRK	12	26	jc5a	figs-possession	τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1	the book of Moses	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **the book** that **Moses** wrote, the Pentateuch. Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify this in your translation, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 MRK	12	26	w2lj	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου	1	the bush	Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that he means the **bush** in the desert that was burning without being consumed, the place at which Moses first encountered God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the burning bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	26	y35v	figs-verbs	λέγων	1	how God spoke to him	In many languages, it is conventional to use the present tense to describe what a writer does within a composition. However, if that would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense here. Alternate translation: “and he called out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 MRK	12	26	re82	figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ	1	I am the God of Abraham and the God of Isaac and the God of Jacob	The implication is that God would not have identified himself as the God of these men if they were not alive. This must mean that God brought them back to life after they died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -982,9 +978,9 @@ MRK	12	28	zqy4	writing-participants	καὶ…εἷς τῶν γραμματέω
 MRK	12	28	b3yh	figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν	1		Here, Mark is using the word **seen** to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	28	q1u5	figs-metaphor	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1	he asked him	Here, the scribe is using the word **first** to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of **first** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	28	kftz	translate-ordinal	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-MRK	12	29	ztyh	figs-metaphor	πρώτη	1		Here, Jesus continues the use of the word **first**. See how you translated the phrase **The first** in [12:28](../12/28.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	29	ztyh	figs-metaphor	πρώτη	1		Here, Jesus continues the use of the word **first**. See how you translated the phrase **the first** in [12:28](../12/28.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	29	euim	figs-ellipsis	πρώτη	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The first commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	29	n74y	figs-nominaladj	πρώτη	1	The first is	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase **The first** in [12:28](../12/28.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+MRK	12	29	n74y	figs-nominaladj	πρώτη	1	The first is	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase **the first** in [12:28](../12/28.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	12	29	mq92	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1	Hear, O Israel, the Lord our God, the Lord is one	Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God addresses all of the people of Israel by the name of their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “O Israelites” or “descendants of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	29	mmtb		Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν	1		The phrase **the Lord our God, the Lord is one** could be: (1) an affirmation of the exclusiveness of the Lord as Israel’s God for the purpose of reminding Israel that the Lord was to be the only God they should worship. Alternate translation: “the Lord alone is our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of the Lord. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is special”
 MRK	12	30	thj7	figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1		Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
@@ -1048,7 +1044,7 @@ MRK	12	41	p2kp	figs-metonymy	τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου…τὸ γαζοφ
 MRK	12	41	w4xc	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 MRK	12	41	jgkw	figs-nominaladj	πλούσιοι	1		Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people,” as the UST does. Alternate translation: “wealthy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	12	41	rl1l	figs-ellipsis	πολλά	1		Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	12	42	g6ry	translate-bmoney	λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	two mites	The word lepta is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+MRK	12	42	g6ry	translate-bmoney	λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	two mites	The word **lepta** is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	12	42	n29e	translate-bmoney	ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	are a quadrans	A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their own currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	12	43	ipl1	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
 MRK	12	43	q124		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	See how you translated the statement **Truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
@@ -1063,19 +1059,19 @@ MRK	12	44	p3as		τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	of her livelihood	Alternate tran
 MRK	13	intro	ti7d			0		# Mark 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24–25, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The return of Christ<br><br>Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6–37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
 MRK	13	1	rrv1		Διδάσκαλε	1	General Information:	See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	13	1	ql81	figs-explicit	ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί	1	What wonderful stones and wonderful buildings	Here, **stones** refers to the very large stones with which the temple walls were built. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How wonderful these huge stones are and how wonderful these buildings are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	2	rez6	figs-rquestion	βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς	1	Do you see these great buildings? Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to draw attention to the buildings and to emphasize what he is about to say. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	13	2	rez6	figs-rquestion	βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς?	1	Do you see these great buildings? Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to draw attention to the buildings and to emphasize what he is about to say. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	13	2	xdhj	figs-activepassive	οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Your enemies will not leave one stone upon another here, but will tear them down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	3	izt8	writing-pronouns	καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν κατ’ ἰδίαν Πέτρος, καὶ Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωάννης, καὶ Ἀνδρέας	1	And as he was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter	Here, the pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as Jesus was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew were privately asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	13	3	u7ju		κατ’ ἰδίαν	1	by himself	Alternate translation: “when they were alone with him” or “privately”
-MRK	13	4	uf37	figs-explicit	πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled	Both occurrences of the phrase **these {things}** refer to what Jesus said in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase **these {things}** refers to, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	4	uf37	figs-explicit	πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled	Both occurrences of the phrase **these things** refer to what Jesus said in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase **these things** refers to, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	4	lw1n	figs-activepassive	ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	when all these things	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “when God is about to fulfill all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	5	fe42	writing-pronouns	λέγειν αὐτοῖς	1	to say to them	The pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, John, and Andrew, who are mentioned in [13:3](../13/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to say to these four disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	13	5	qekc	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Be careful** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	13	6	z63u	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	in my name	Here Jesus uses the word **name** to mean identity and the authority that comes with the identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	13	6	cee7	figs-quotesinquotes	πολλοὶ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Many will come in my name claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-MRK	13	6	pbz4	figs-explicit	πολλοὶ…πολλοὺς	1		Here both uses of the word **many** refer to “many people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	6	pbz4	figs-explicit	πολλοὶ…πολλοὺς	1		Here both uses of the word **Many** refer to “many people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	6	wv12	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	they will lead many astray	The implication is that **he** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	7	fl5h		πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	you may hear of wars and rumors of wars	The phrase “wars and rumors of wars” could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”
+MRK	13	7	fl5h		πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	you may hear of wars and rumors of wars	The phrase **wars and rumors of wars** could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”
 MRK	13	7	d1k9	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος	1	but the end is not yet	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	7	mi4d	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	the end	Here, **the end** implicitly means “the end of the world.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	8	ydrb	figs-parallelism	ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -1085,12 +1081,12 @@ MRK	13	8	xln4	figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’	1	will rise against
 MRK	13	8	e2ln	figs-ellipsis	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	kingdom against kingdom	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	8	hz6g	figs-genericnoun	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	13	8	wpd3	figs-metonymy	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		The term **kingdom** represents the people of a kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	13	8	pcyi	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **These {things}** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	8	pcyi	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **These things** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	8	dz8g	figs-metaphor	ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα	1	These are the beginnings of birth pains	Jesus uses the metaphor of **birth pains** because, in the same way that the pain of childbirth is eventually replaced by joy when the child is born, so the suffering that is experienced by true believers will eventually be replaced by joy when Christ returns. Because childbirth occurs in all cultures, you should retain this metaphor in your translation. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” or “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to give birth to a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	13	9	nuti	figs-metaphor	βλέπετε…ἑαυτούς	1		Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to **watch yourselves** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “beware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	13	9	c2cl	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε…ἑαυτούς	1	But you, watch yourselves	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **watch yourselves** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “all of you, watch yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	13	9	ulws	figs-rpronouns	βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς	1		Jesus uses the word **yourselves** to draw the disciples’ attention to themselves, because he now transitions away from telling them about general signs and begins telling them about specific trials that they will personally encounter. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “But give heed to yourselves personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-MRK	13	9	mbr5	writing-pronouns	παραδώσουσιν	1		The pronoun **They** refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will deliver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	13	9	mbr5	writing-pronouns	παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς	1		The pronoun **They** refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will deliver you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	13	9	voih	figs-activepassive	δαρήσεσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will beat you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	9	zdp8	figs-activepassive	σταθήσεσθε	1	you will be beaten	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	9	gbb4	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ…σταθήσεσθε	1	you will be made to stand before	Here, **made to stand before** means to be put on trial and judged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1100,10 +1096,10 @@ MRK	13	9	y6p6	writing-pronouns	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	for a
 MRK	13	10	ruk9	translate-ordinal	πρῶτον	1	But first, it is necessary for the gospel to be proclaimed to all the nations	Here, Jesus uses the ordinal number **first** in order to indicate position in an order of events. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can express this same idea in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “before the end comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	13	10	sfjc	figs-activepassive	κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that believers will be the ones who proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “believers to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	10	e6ad	figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1		The term **nations** refers to the people within each nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all nations” or “people within each nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	13	11	uy91	figs-idiom	παραδιδόντες	1	handing you over	Here, **handing you over** means to deliver you to the control of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	13	11	uy91	figs-idiom	παραδιδόντες	1	handing you over	Here, **handing {you} over** means to deliver you to the control of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	11	m0xq	figs-activepassive	δοθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says later in this verse that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. Alternate translation: “whatever the Holy Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	11	nr2r	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1		Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	13	11	q2o3	figs-explicit	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1		The phrase **for you will not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit** implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	11	q2o3	figs-explicit	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1		The phrase **for you are not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit** implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	11	a9b6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	but the Holy Spirit	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	12	toqp	figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1		Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me, they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	12	py9u	figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς	1	brother will deliver brother to death	Here, Jesus is explaining to his disciples what “some” brothers and “some” fathers and “some” children will do to their family members. He is speaking in general terms and is not saying that “all” brothers or fathers or children will do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1121,12 +1117,12 @@ MRK	13	13	c33n	figs-explicit	ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος	1	the
 MRK	13	13	vcz4		ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος	1	to the end	The phrase **to the end** could mean: (1) to the end of one’s life. Alternate translation: “who endures to the point of death” or “who endures till death” (2) until the end of time. This meaning means that believers must endure and keep on enduring until the time when Christ returns. Alternate translation: “who keeps on enduring to the very end” (3) to the end of that time of hardship and persecution. Alternate translation: “who endures until the time of testing is over”
 MRK	13	14	d4nw	figs-explicit	τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως	1	the abomination of desolation	The phrase **the abomination of desolation** is from the book of Daniel. Jesus’ audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about **the abomination** entering the temple and defiling it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	14	vx3c	figs-explicit	ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ	1	standing where it should not be	Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where it should not be standing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	14	ck7a		ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω	1	let the reader understand	The phrase **let the reader understand** is not Jesus speaking. Mark added this to get the readers’ attention so that they would pay attention to this warning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show that this is not part of Jesus’ direct speech by putting brackets around this phrase, as the UST and ULT do, or you could show your readers in some other way that is natural in your language.
+MRK	13	14	ck7a		ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω	1	let the reader understand	The phrase **Let the one reading understand** is not Jesus speaking. Mark added this to get the readers’ attention so that they would pay attention to this warning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show that this is not part of Jesus’ direct speech by putting brackets around this phrase, as the UST and ULT do, or you could show your readers in some other way that is natural in your language.
 MRK	13	15	m1hq	figs-explicit	ὁ…ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ	1	on the housetop	Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his hearers know this and that they know that the roofs were accessed by an exterior staircase at the back of the house, distant from the entry at the front. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the person who is on top of their roof should escape immediately and not enter their house to get anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	16	y1e9	translate-unknown	ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω	1	let the one in the field not turn back to the things behind	The word **cloak** refers to an outer garment. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coat” or “outer garment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	13	17	bi8n	figs-idiom	ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις	1	to those having in the womb	The phrase **having in the womb** is an idiom meaning the woman is with child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	17	bv9z	figs-explicit	ταῖς θηλαζούσαις	1		This does not mean babies who are nursing but rather refers to women who provide their milk for their babies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “mothers who are nursing their babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	17	u8kk	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1		Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	13	17	u8kk	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1		Jesus is using the term **those days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	18	w47v	translate-versebridge	προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένηται χειμῶνος	1	pray that	If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving all of this verse to the end of the next verse, since in the next verse Jesus gives the reason for praying this prayer. You would then present the combined verses as 18–19. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
 MRK	13	18	w91r	translate-unknown	χειμῶνος	1	in winter	In the location to which Jesus is referring, **winter** is the time of year when it is cold, and travel is difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which it would be difficult to travel or you could translate **winter** with a general expression such as “in the cold season.” Alternate translation: “in the cold season” or “in the rainy season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	13	19	zs4g	figs-idiom	ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι	1		See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md), where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1171,7 +1167,7 @@ MRK	13	28	ti6e		τῆς συκῆς	1		See how you translated the phrase **fig t
 MRK	13	28	u8ha	figs-genericnoun	τῆς συκῆς	1	tender	Jesus is speaking of these trees in general, not one particular **fig tree**. Alternate translation: “fig trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	13	28	z417		ἐγγὺς τὸ θέρος ἐστίν	1	summer	Alternate translation: “summer is about to begin” or “the warm season is about to start”
 MRK	13	29	q53b		ταῦτα	1	these things	Alternate translation: “the signs I have just described” or “the things I have just described”
-MRK	13	29	w1k7		ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1		The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as **he is near** could also be translated as “it is near.” If the phrase **these {things}** refers to the destruction of Jerusalem, then the translation “it is near” is the preferred choice. The phrase “it is near” then refers to the abomination of desolation and the other events related to Jerusalem’s destruction rather than to Christ’s second coming, which the translation **he is near** would indicate. Alternate translation: “it is almost here”
+MRK	13	29	w1k7		ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1		The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as **he is near** could also be translated as “it is near.” If the phrase **these things** refers to the destruction of Jerusalem, then the translation “it is near” is the preferred choice. The phrase “it is near” then refers to the abomination of desolation and the other events related to Jerusalem’s destruction rather than to Christ’s second coming, which the translation **he is near** would indicate. Alternate translation: “it is almost here”
 MRK	13	29	aul8	writing-pronouns	ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1	he is near	The pronoun **he** refers to “the Son of Man”, which is the title Jesus used for himself in [13:26](../13/26.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man is near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	13	29	ini9	figs-123person	ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I am near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 MRK	13	29	iavl		γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἐπὶ θύραις.	1		The phrase **at the doors** adds further detail to the phrase **he is near**. The phrase **at the doors** explains how **near** he is.
@@ -1213,21 +1209,21 @@ MRK	14	3	bf84	translate-names	Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ	1	of Simon th
 MRK	14	3	hh81		λεπροῦ	1		See how you translated the term “leper” in [1:40](../1/40.md).
 MRK	14	3	sh4s	translate-unknown	κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ	1	as he is reclining at table	In this culture, the manner of eating at a feast or dinner party was to lie on a couch and prop oneself up with the left arm on some pillows. Alternate translation: “while he is lying on a banqueting couch to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	3	nl8f	translate-unknown	ἀλάβαστρον	1		The word **alabaster** is the name of a soft, white stone. People stored precious and valuable items in jars made from alabaster. Alternate translation: “a jar made of soft, white stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-MRK	14	3	hk2p	translate-unknown	μύρου	1	an alabaster jar	This **oil** had fragrant additives. To make a themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Alternate translation: “oil with perfume in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MRK	14	3	hk2p	translate-unknown	μύρου…πολυτελοῦς	1	an alabaster jar	This **oil** had fragrant additives. To make a themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Alternate translation: “of expensive oil with perfume in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	3	fqa9	translate-unknown	μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1	of very costly anointing-oil of pure nard	The **perfumed oil** was made from the roots of a **nard** plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” If your readers would not be familiar with **nard** plants, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of highly valued scented oil made from spikenard roots” or “containing costly perfumed oil distilled from the nard roots” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	3	rw4f	figs-possession	μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1		In this phrase, the second occurrence of the word **of** is used to describe **perfumed oil** that is “made from” **very precious pure nard**. If this use of the possessive **of** would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “containing very precious perfumed oil of pure nard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 MRK	14	3	yb3w		πολυτελοῦς	1		Alternate translation: “very precious”
-MRK	14	4	v57p	figs-rquestion	εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν	1	For what has this waste of the anointing-oil happened?	These people are using a rhetorical question to emphasize that they thought the perfumed oil should not have been poured on Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This woman wasted that perfumed oil!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	14	4	v57p	figs-rquestion	εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν?	1	For what has this waste of the anointing-oil happened?	These people are using a rhetorical question to emphasize that they thought the perfumed oil should not have been poured on Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This woman wasted that perfumed oil!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	14	4	g9qw	figs-ellipsis	εἰς τί	1		Mark’s quotation is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For what reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	14	4	gjmg	translate-unknown	μύρου	1		See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	5	xfzs	translate-unknown	τὸ μύρον	1		See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	5	y113	figs-activepassive	ἠδύνατο…τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι	1	this perfume was able to be sold	Mark wants to show his readers that those present were mainly concerned about money. If your readers would not understand this use of the passive form here, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we could have sold this perfume” or “she could have sold this perfume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	14	5	t4p8	translate-bmoney	δηναρίων τριακοσίων	1	300 denarii	See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [6:37](../06/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+MRK	14	5	t4p8	translate-bmoney	δηναρίων τριακοσίων	1	300 denarii	See how you translated the word **denarii** in [6:37](../06/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	14	5	h62k	figs-nominaladj	δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	given to the poor	Here, the adjective **poor** is being used as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the money given to people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	5	k83q	figs-explicit	δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	given to the poor	Here, the word **given** refers to giving the money which could be made from the sale of the perfumed oil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	5	kmpd		καὶ ἐνεβριμῶντο αὐτῇ	1		Alternate translation: “And then they spoke harshly to her because of what she had done”
-MRK	14	6	r9wt	figs-rquestion	τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε	1	Why are you troubling her?	With the statement **Why are you causing trouble for her**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form here to rebuke the guests who are troubling this woman regarding what she has done for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not trouble her!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	14	6	f4yj	figs-abstractnouns	ἔργον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **work**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	14	6	r9wt	figs-rquestion	τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε?	1	Why are you troubling her?	With the question **Why are you causing trouble for her?**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form here to rebuke the guests who are troubling this woman regarding what she has done for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not trouble her!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	14	6	f4yj	figs-abstractnouns	καλὸν ἔργον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **work**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	14	7	tc3j	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πτωχοὺς	1	the poor	See how you translated the phrase **the poor** in [14:5](../14/05.md). Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	9	vr3w		ἀμὴν…λέγω ὑμῖν	1	truly I say to you	See how you translated the statement **truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
 MRK	14	9	ysc5	figs-activepassive	ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	wherever the gospel may be preached	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “his followers” will be the ones doing it. Alternate translation: “wherever my followers preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1243,7 +1239,7 @@ MRK	14	11	kzk1	figs-explicit	οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες	1	But when they h
 MRK	14	11	m4il	figs-metonymy	αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι	1		Mark is speaking of money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives money its value. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to pay money to Judas for doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	11	f7ek	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτει	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Judas Iscariot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Judas Iscariot was seeking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	14	11	jrym	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1		The second occurrence of the pronoun **him** in this verse refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-MRK	14	12	vxax	figs-explicit	τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν Ἀζύμων	1		This was the first day of the seven-day festival described in [14:1](../14/01.md). You could translate this as either a description or as a name, depending on what you did there. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread” or “on the day when the Jews removed all bread made with yeast from their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	12	vxax	figs-explicit	τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν Ἀζύμων	1		This was the **first day** of the seven-day festival described in [14:1](../14/01.md). You could translate this as either a description or as a name, depending on what you did there. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread” or “on the day when the Jews removed all bread made with yeast from their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	12	bel5	figs-metonymy	φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα	1	you may eat the Passover	Jesus’ disciples are using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover** to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	13	suny	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς…ὑμῖν	1		Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 MRK	14	13	cijy		καὶ ἀπαντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρωπος κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων	1		Alternate translation: “and you will see a man carrying a jug of water”
@@ -1251,12 +1247,12 @@ MRK	14	13	a7xg	translate-unknown	κεράμιον ὕδατος	1	bearing a pitc
 MRK	14	14	i344	figs-quotesinquotes	εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅτι ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω	1	The Teacher says, “Where is my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?”	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “tell the owner of the house that the Teacher wants to know where the guest room is where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	14	14	yhtm		διδάσκαλος	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md).
 MRK	14	14	imqg		τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ	1		Alternate translation: “to the owner of that house”
-MRK	14	14	q3pn	figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	guest room	Jesus is telling these two disciples to use the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	14	15	jlci	translate-unknown	ἀνάγαιον	1		In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MRK	14	14	q3pn	figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	guest room	Jesus is telling these two disciples to use the name of this part of the festival, **the Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	14	15	jlci	translate-unknown	ἀνάγαιον μέγα	1		In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	15	x3zk	figs-activepassive	ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον	1	make the preparations for us there	The word **furnished** is a passive verbal form. If your language does not use such forms, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “one he has furnished and made ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	15	k4t7	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here, when Jesus says **us**, he is referring to himself and his disciples, including the two he is addressing here, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 MRK	14	16	sb35		ἐξῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ	1	the disciples left	Alternate translation: “the two disciples departed”
-MRK	14	16	wkh9	figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1		Mark is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	14	16	wkh9	figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1		Mark is using the name of this part of the festival, **the Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	17	i1q1	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα	1	he came with the Twelve	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express explicitly to where Jesus and his disciples came. Alternate translation: “he came with the Twelve to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	17	t0q5	figs-go	ἔρχεται	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	14	17	bheu	figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -1267,7 +1263,7 @@ MRK	14	19	layt	writing-pronouns	ἤρξαντο λυπεῖσθαι	1		The prono
 MRK	14	19	v3a1	figs-idiom	εἷς κατὰ εἷς	1	one by one	The phrase **one by one** is an idiom meaning “one at a time.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one at a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	14	19	f13p	figs-doublenegatives	μήτι	1	Surely not I?	The phrase **Surely not** is the ULT’s translation of the negative Greek word that Mark used. The Greek word that Mark used is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 MRK	14	20	n1tv	figs-nominaladj	εἷς τῶν δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). Alternate translation: “He is one of the twelve of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MRK	14	20	htn4	figs-explicit	ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον	1	who is dipping with me into the bowl	Part of the Passover meal involved dipping bread into a flavored sauce called haroseth sauce. Mark assumes that his readers will know this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “dipping his bread into the bowl with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	20	htn4	figs-explicit	ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον	1	who is dipping with me into the bowl	Part of the Passover meal involved **dipping** bread into a flavored sauce called haroseth sauce. Mark assumes that his readers will know this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “dipping his bread into the bowl with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	21	cif4	figs-123person	ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ; οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “For I, the Son of Man, am going away just as Scripture says about me, but woe to that man by whom I will be betrayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 MRK	14	21	h35q		Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../2/10.md).
 MRK	14	21	q5l3	figs-euphemism	ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	For the Son of Man is going away just as it has been written about him	Jesus uses the phrase **going away** to refer to his death. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die just as the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@@ -1276,14 +1272,14 @@ MRK	14	21	b13q	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does no
 MRK	14	21	f51n	figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who betrays him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “who betrays me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	21	ct78	figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	through whom the Son of Man is being betrayed	You can state this more directly. Alternate translation: “who is betraying the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	22	ne53	translate-unknown	ἄρτον	1		The term **bread** refers to a loaf of bread, which is a lump of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. The **bread** referred to here was a flat loaf of unleavened **bread** that was eaten as part of the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “a loaf of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-MRK	14	22	ukuc	figs-explicit	ἄρτον	1		Since Jews did not eat bread made with yeast during this festival, this bread would not have had any yeast in it and it would have been flat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a loaf of unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	14	22	oqv3	figs-explicit	εὐλογήσας	1		Mark assumes that his readers will know that the phrase **having blessed it** means that Jesus prayed to God before they ate the bread. Jewish people would have known that at the beginning of the Passover meal the host would begin the meal by praying a prayer of praise to God for the bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and having prayed and given thanks to God for it” or “and having prayed a prayer of praise to God for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	22	ukuc	figs-explicit	ἄρτον	1		Since Jews did not eat **bread** made with yeast during this festival, this bread would not have had any yeast in it and it would have been flat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a loaf of unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	22	oqv3	figs-explicit	εὐλογήσας	1		Mark assumes that his readers will know that the phrase **having blessed {it}** means that Jesus prayed to God before they ate the bread. Jewish people would have known that at the beginning of the Passover meal the host would begin the meal by praying a prayer of praise to God for the bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and having prayed and given thanks to God for it” or “and having prayed a prayer of praise to God for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	22	ula2		ἔκλασεν	1	he broke it	Jesus may have divided the loaf of **bread** into many pieces, as the UST says, or he may have divided it into two pieces and given those to the apostles to divide among themselves. If possible, use an expression in your language that would apply to either situation.
-MRK	14	22	amg7	figs-explicit	καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς	1		The implication of the phrase **and gave it to them** is that Jesus **gave** the bread to the disciples to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and gave it to them to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	22	amg7	figs-explicit	καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς	1		The implication of the phrase **and gave {it} to them** is that Jesus **gave** the bread to the disciples to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and gave it to them to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	22	adb2	figs-metaphor	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου	1	Take this. This is my body	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate the phrase **This is my body**. Christians understand this phrase to be: (1) a metaphor. Alternate translation: “This represents my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) literal. Alternate translation: “My body is really present in this bread”
 MRK	14	23	u6rc	figs-synecdoche	λαβὼν ποτήριον	1	having taken a cup	Here, **cup** is a metonym for wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken the cup of wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	14	23	whqj		εὐχαριστήσας	1		Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “when he had given thanks to God”
-MRK	14	24	q5hn	figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1	This is my blood of the covenant, that is being poured out for many	In the Hebrew culture, covenants were customarily ratified through animal sacrifices that involved shedding the blood of the animals. Here Jesus is likely alluding to that practice in light of his impending sacrificial death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is my blood which ratifies the covenant, and my blood is being poured out for many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	24	q5hn	figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1	This is my blood of the covenant, that is being poured out for many	In the Hebrew culture, covenants were customarily ratified through animal sacrifices that involved shedding the **blood** of the animals. Here Jesus is likely alluding to that practice in light of his impending sacrificial death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is my blood which ratifies the covenant, and my blood is being poured out for many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	24	nj85	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1		The phrase **of the** introduces the purpose for Jesus shedding his **blood**. Jesus is stating that the purpose for him shedding his blood is to establish the new **covenant**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose. Alternate translation: “This is my blood which is being poured out for many for the purpose of establishing God’s covenant” or “This is my blood which is being poured out for many for the purpose of making God’s covenant with his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	14	24	hs24	figs-metaphor	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1	This is my blood	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate the phrase **This is my blood**. Christians understand this phrase to be: (1) a metaphor. Alternate translation: “This wine represents my blood which establishes the covenant, and it is my blood which I will pour out for many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) literal. Alternate translation: “My blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many, is really present in this wine”
 MRK	14	24	pt5q	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν	1		Jesus is referring to the way his **blood** is going to be **poured out** when he dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which I will pour out for many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1311,9 +1307,9 @@ MRK	14	30	i4g3	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	the rooster
 MRK	14	31	z9le	figs-explicit	ὡσαύτως…καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον	1	they all also were speaking in the same manner	The phrase **they all also were speaking in the same manner** means that all of the disciples were saying the same thing that Peter said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	32	deg7	writing-pronouns	ἔρχονται	1	they come to a place	The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus and his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	14	32	ni66	figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” or “they go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-MRK	14	34	eyw3	figs-synecdoche	ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου	1	My soul is	By using the phrase **my soul**, Jesus is speaking of his entire self by referring to one part of himself, his **soul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	14	34	eyw3	figs-synecdoche	ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου	1	My soul is	By using the phrase **My soul**, Jesus is speaking of his entire self by referring to one part of himself, his **soul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	14	34	krj1	figs-abstractnouns	ψυχή μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	14	34	ic1g	figs-hyperbole	ἕως θανάτου	1	even to the point of death	Jesus is using the phrase **even unto death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even unto death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	14	34	ic1g	figs-hyperbole	ἕως θανάτου	1	even to the point of death	Jesus is using the phrase **even to death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even to death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	14	35	nk8l	figs-explicit	εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν	1	if it is possible	Alternate translation: “if possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	35	wc6d	figs-idiom	παρέλθῃ…ἡ ὥρα	1	the hour might pass	Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	14	35	gj74	figs-metonymy	παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα	1		Here, Jesus is referring to the events that would take place during the upcoming hours as if they were the **hour** itself. Because Jesus is associating the upcoming events with the time of the events themselves, by asking that **the hour might pass**, Jesus is actually asking that the events themselves would not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the upcoming events would pass from him” or “he would not have to experience the upcoming things which he knew he was going to have to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1393,7 +1389,7 @@ MRK	14	62	yhhk	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		By
 MRK	14	62	d5qm	translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως	1	sitting at the right hand of power	To sit **at the right hand** of God is a symbolic act of receiving great honor and authority from God. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what **sitting at the right hand** of someone meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “sitting in a place of honor beside the all-powerful God” or “sitting in a place of honor next to the all-powerful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 MRK	14	62	e1xd	figs-metonymy	ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως	1	sitting at the right hand of power	By using the phrase **of power**, Jesus is referring to God by association with his **power**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture that expresses power, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “sitting at the right hand of God” or “sitting at the right hand of God who is powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	63	jz48	translate-symaction	διαρρήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ	1	having torn his garments	In Jesus’ culture the act of tearing one’s clothes was a symbolic act done to show outrage or grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what tearing one’s clothes meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “having torn his garments in outrage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-MRK	14	63	afd3	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων	1	What need do we still have of witnesses?	By saying **What need do we still have of witnesses**, the high priest is not asking for information but is using the question form here for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need any more people who will testify against this man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK	14	63	afd3	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων?	1	What need do we still have of witnesses?	By saying **What need do we still have of witnesses?**, the high priest is not asking for information but is using the question form here for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need any more people who will testify against this man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	14	64	zwf9	figs-explicit	ἠκούσατε τῆς βλασφημίας	1	You heard the blasphemy	This refers to what Jesus had said, which the high priest labelled as blasphemy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have heard the blasphemy he has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	64	fu4g	figs-abstractnouns	ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου	1	they all	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “and said he deserved to be executed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	14	65	y1s4		ἤρξαντό τινες	1	certain ones began	Alternate translation: “some of those present” or “some of the people there”
@@ -1411,13 +1407,13 @@ MRK	14	72	cfno	figs-metonymy	ῥῆμα	1		Mark is using the term **word** to de
 MRK	14	72	trxc		τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ	1		Alternate translation: “you will say three times that you do not know me”
 MRK	14	72	zr4p	figs-idiom	ἐπιβαλὼν, ἔκλαιεν	1	having broken down	The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as **having broken down** could (1) be an idiom which means that Peter became overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having become overwhelmed with grief” or “having lost control of his emotions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (2) also be translated as “having thought of it” or “having reflected on it.” Alternate translation: “having thought of it, he was weeping” or “having reflected on it, he was weeping” or “having thought about what he had just done, he was weeping” (3) also be translated as “he began.” Alternate translation: “he began weeping” or “he started crying”
 MRK	15	intro	d823			0		# Mark 15 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”<br><br>The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly, because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.<br><br>### The tomb<br><br>The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Sarcasm<br><br>The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they put a “purple robe” on him and placed a “crown of thorns” on his head (See Mark 15:17) and said, “Hail, King of the Jews” (See Mark 15:18) and bent their knees and bowed down to him (See Mark 15:19). These actions were symbolic of things that people would do to a king, but the soldiers did not really believe that Jesus was a king. By pretending that they thought Jesus was a king, and by putting a “crown of thorns” on Jesus’ head instead of a regular crown, and by “striking his head with a staff and spitting on him” (See Mark 15:19) the soldiers showed that they did not believe that Jesus was the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Golgotha<br><br>The word “Golgotha” is an Aramaic word. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them it meant “Place of a Skull.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])<br><br>### Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?<br><br>This is an Aramaic phrase. Mark transliterates the sounds of this phrase by writing them with Greek letters. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant “My God, my God, why have you forsaken me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-MRK	15	1	xz7c	figs-explicit	δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν	1	having bound Jesus, led him away	The Jewish religious leaders commanded that Jesus should be **bound** but did not bind him themselves. It would have been the guards who actually bound Jesus and **led him away**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this in your translation, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then the guards bound him and led him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	15	1	xz7c	figs-explicit	δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν	1	having bound Jesus, led him away	The Jewish religious leaders commanded that Jesus should be **bound** but did not bind him themselves. It would have been the guards who actually bound Jesus and **led {him} away**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this in your translation, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then the guards bound him and led him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	15	1	v2yf		παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ	1	handed him over to Pilate	Alternate translation: “delivered him over to Pilate” or “transferred control of Jesus to Pilate”
 MRK	15	2	kn7i	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ λέγει	1		Together the two words **answering** and **says** mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “responding to him, says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 MRK	15	2	dh6n	figs-idiom	σὺ λέγεις	1	You say so	**You say so** is an idiom. Jesus is using it to acknowledge that what Pilate has said is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yes, it is as you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	15	3	b9sj	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς πολλά	1		Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the chief priests were accusing Jesus of many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	15	3	ue18		κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ…πολλά	1	were accusing him of many things	Alternate translation: “were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many wrong things”
-MRK	15	4	s2as		οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν?	1	Do you not answer at all?	Alternate translation: “Are you not going to respond to anything they have said”
+MRK	15	4	s2as		οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν?	1	Do you not answer at all?	Alternate translation: “Are you not going to respond to anything they have said?”
 MRK	15	5	way9		ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη	1	so that Pilate was amazed	Alternate translation: “But Jesus made no further reply”
 MRK	15	6	ul19	writing-background	κατὰ δὲ ἑορτὴν, ἀπέλυεν αὐτοῖς ἕνα δέσμιον, ὃν παρῃτοῦντο	1	Now	The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line as Mark shifts to telling background information about Pilate’s tradition of releasing a prisoner at feasts. Mark is providing background information in this verse to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “It was Pilate’s custom to release to them a prisoner of their choice during the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	15	7	pdy3	writing-background	δὲ	1		The word **Now** is used here to mark a continuation of the break in the main story line which began in the preceding verse. Mark introduces more background information, this time about Barabbas, to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -1428,8 +1424,8 @@ MRK	15	8	a4xb	figs-go	ἀναβὰς	1	to request of him just as he usually did
 MRK	15	9	o3j4	figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς λέγων	1		When translating the phrase **answered them, saying** see how you translated the similar phrase “answering him, says” in [15:2](../15/02.md). Alternate translation: “responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 MRK	15	10	i4ib	writing-background	ἐγίνωσκεν γὰρ ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1	For he knew that the chief priests had handed him over because of envy	Mark provides this background information about why Jesus was **handed over** in order to help readers understand why Pilate asked the question in [15:9](../15/09.md). Mark introduces the background information in this verse with the word **For**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	15	10	u647	figs-explicit	διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1	the chief priests had handed him over because of envy	The **chief priests** envied Jesus because so many people were following him and becoming his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. If you decide to express this information explicitly, consider beginning a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the chief priests were envious of Jesus because so many people were becoming his disciples. Pilate knew that this was why they had handed him over” or “the chief priests were envious of Jesus’ popularity among the people. This is why they had handed him over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	15	10	yjp3		παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν	1		Alternate translation: “had delivered him over”
-MRK	15	11	y5w3	figs-metaphor	ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον	1	stirred up the crowd	Mark speaks of the **chief priests** as if they had **stirred** a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the **high priests** encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If your readers would not understand what **stirred up** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “encouraged the crowd” or “incited the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	15	10	yjp3		παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν	1		Alternate translation: “had handed Jesus over”
+MRK	15	11	y5w3	figs-metaphor	ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον	1	stirred up the crowd	Mark speaks of the **chief priests** as if they had **stirred** a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the **chief priests** encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If your readers would not understand what **stirred up** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “encouraged the crowd” or “incited the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	15	11	pvu6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	he would release Barabbas to them instead	The phrase **so that** introduces what the **chief priests stirred up the crowd** to request of Pilate. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	15	12	keq2	figs-hendiadys	Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the similar statement in [15:9](../15/09.md). Alternate translation: “Pilate again responded to them, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 MRK	15	12	p94y		πάλιν	1		Mark uses the word **again** here because Pilate had already spoken to them regarding this matter in [15:9](../15/09.md). Use a natural form in your language for expressing the meaning of **again** as it is used here.
@@ -1443,7 +1439,7 @@ MRK	15	15	fwg6	figs-explicit	τὸν Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας	1	Jes
 MRK	15	15	yzn5	translate-unknown	φραγελλώσας	1	having flogged him	If your readers would not be familiar with this form of punishment, you could explain explicitly what flogging was. Flogging was a Roman penalty in in which they whipped a person with a whip to which were attached pieces of bone and metal to increase the whip’s capacity to do harm to the person being flogged. Alternate translation: “having whipped Jesus with a whip with pieces of bone and metal attached to it” or “having whipped Jesus with a whip to which was attached pieces of bone and metal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	15	15	w1sl	grammar-connect-logic-goal	καὶ παρέδωκεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. With the phrase **so that he might be crucified**, Mark is stating the purpose for which Pilate** handed over Jesus**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and after having Jesus flogged, he handed Jesus over to them in order that they might crucify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	15	15	r9id	figs-activepassive	σταυρωθῇ	1	handed over Jesus, having flogged him, so that he might be crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that Pilate’s “soldiers” did it. Alternate translation: “his soldiers might take him away and crucify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	15	16	eg6x	writing-background	ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον	1	the palace (that is, the Praetorium)	By clarifying **(that is, {the} Praetorium)**, Mark explains that **the palace** is the official residence of the Roman governor. This background information is given to help his readers understand exactly what he means by using the word **palace**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “which is, the Praetorium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+MRK	15	16	eg6x	writing-background	ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον	1	the palace (that is, the Praetorium)	By clarifying **(that is, the Praetorium)**, Mark explains that **the palace** is the official residence of the Roman governor. This background information is given to help his readers understand exactly what he means by using the word **palace**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “which is, the Praetorium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	15	16	lb2x	figs-explicit	πραιτώριον	1		The **Praetorium** was where the Roman governor stayed when he was in Jerusalem and where the soldiers in Jerusalem lived. Mark assumes that his readers will know what the **Praetorium** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the palace where the governor and his soldiers lived” or “the Roman governor’s residence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	15	16	b5gs	figs-explicit	ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν	1	the whole cohort of soldiers	Mark assumes that his readers will know that a **cohort** was a unit of Roman soldiers. A **cohort** normally numbered around 600 men but could sometimes refer to a number as small as 200 men. Here, by saying **the whole cohort**, Mark most likely means all the soldiers from the **cohort** who were on duty at that time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly that a **cohort** was a unit of Roman soldiers. Additionally, you could also say explicitly that it was only the soldiers who were on duty who were called together, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the whole unit of soldiers” or “the whole unit of soldiers who were on duty there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	15	17	tn33	figs-explicit	ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν πορφύραν, καὶ περιτιθέασιν αὐτῷ πλέξαντες ἀκάνθινον στέφανον	1	They put a purple robe on him	In Roman culture, a **purple robe** and a **crown** were worn by kings. The soldiers put a **crown** made from **thorns** and a **purple robe** on Jesus in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. It may be helpful to your readers to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “they put a purple robe on him and placed on his head a crown that they had made by twisting thorns together. They did these things in order to mock him by pretending that they believed he really was a king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1455,7 +1451,7 @@ MRK	15	19	muvw	translate-symaction	ἐνέπτυον αὐτῷ	1		In this cultu
 MRK	15	19	a8a9	figs-irony	τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ	1	They knelt down	The acts of **bending the knee** and **bowing down** were things normally done as a way of honoring kings. The soldiers actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their actions. These soldiers do not really believe that Jesus is a king, but rather, they are doing these things to express mockery. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Also see the discussion about this idea in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “bending the knee, they were bowing down to him in order to mock him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 MRK	15	20	styv		πορφύραν	1		See how you translated the word **purple** in [15:17](../15/17.md).
 MRK	15	20	dp33		ἐξάγουσιν αὐτὸν	1		Alternate translation: “then they led him out of the city” or “required Jesus to carry his cross and then led Jesus out of the city” or “made Jesus carry his cross and led Jesus out of the city”
-MRK	15	20	euk7	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus was **lead out**, namely that **they might crucify him**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+MRK	15	20	euk7	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus was **led out**, namely that **they might crucify him**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	15	21	cj4l		ἀγγαρεύουσιν…ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ	1	they forced him to carry his cross	According to Roman law, a solider could force a man he came upon along the road to carry a load. In this case, they forced Simon to carry Jesus’ cross.
 MRK	15	21	s4j3		ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ	1	from the country	Alternate translation: “from outside the city”
 MRK	15	21	rtz2	translate-names	Σίμωνα…Ἀλεξάνδρου…Ῥούφου	1	Simon … Alexander … Rufus	The words **Simon**, **Alexander**, and **Rufus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1491,15 +1487,13 @@ MRK	15	32	f8yw	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** intr
 MRK	15	32	r6c4	figs-explicit	πιστεύσωμεν	1	might believe	The phrase **might believe** means to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	15	32	dcb9	figs-activepassive	συνεσταυρωμένοι	1	were taunting	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies in [15:20](../15/20.md) that “soldiers” are the ones who are crucifying Jesus and the two other men. Alternate translation: “who the soldiers had crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	15	33	q1gh	translate-ordinal	ὥρας ἕκτης	1	the sixth hour	The Jews and the Romans divided the day into a 12-hour time period and the night into a 12-hour period. Here, the phrase **the sixth hour** refers to the sixth hour of the day, often called “twelve o’clock” or “noon” in some parts of the world. The **the sixth hour** of the day was approximately six hours after sunrise. The term **sixth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the sixth hour** as “noon”, as modeled by the UST, or as “twelve o’clock.” Alternately, you can translate it in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in [15:25](../15/25.md). Alternate translation: “the hour of twelve o’clock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-MRK	15	33	m67d	translate-ordinal	ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης	1		The phrase **the ninth hour** refers to “three o’clock in the afternoon”, approximately nine hours after sunrise. The term **ninth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the ninth hour** as “three o’clock in the afternoon,” as modeled by the UST, or in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in [15:25](../15/25.md), and the phrase **the sixth hour** earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “until three hours after noon” or “for three hours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+MRK	15	33	m67d	translate-ordinal	ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης	1		The phrase **the ninth hour** refers to “three o’clock in the afternoon”, approximately nine hours after sunrise. The term **ninth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the ninth hour** as “three o’clock in the afternoon,” as modeled by the UST, or in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in [15:25](../15/25.md), and the phrase “the sixth hour” earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “until three hours after noon” or “for three hours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	15	33	jvf0	figs-go	ἐγένετο	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	15	34	r6tj	translate-ordinal	τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ	1	at the ninth hour	See how you translated the phrase **the ninth hour** in [15:33](../15/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	15	34	azt0	figs-idiom	ἐβόησεν…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		The expression **cried out with a loud voice** is an idiom that means Jesus raised the volume of his **voice**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	15	34	ls1n	translate-transliterate	Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει? ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, ὁ Θεός μου, ὁ Θεός μου, εἰς τί ἐγκατέλιπές με	1	Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani	Jesus statement **Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani** is an Aramaic phrase. Jesus is quoting from [Psalm 22:1](../psa/22/01.md). Mark uses Greek letters to express the sounds of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant **My God, my God, why have you forsaken me**. In your translation you could spell this phrase the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 MRK	15	34	qw71		ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	is translated	See how you translated the phrase **which is translated** in [15:22](../15/22.md).
 MRK	15	35	apg3	figs-explicit	καί τινες τῶν παρεστηκότων, ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον	1	And some of those who had been standing by, having heard him, were saying	If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly that some of the people standing by misunderstood what Jesus said, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	15	35	awtf	translate-names	Ἠλείαν	1		See how you translated the name **Elijah** in [6:15](../06/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MRK	15	36	pj44	translate-names	Ἠλείας	1		See how you translated the name **Elijah** in [6:15](../06/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	15	37	xkpk	figs-idiom	ἀφεὶς φωνὴν μεγάλην	1		See how you translated the phrase **cried out with a loud voice** in [15:34](../15/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	15	37	puak	figs-euphemism	ἐξέπνευσεν	1		Mark is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **breathed his last**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “he stopped breathing” or “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 MRK	15	38	sk3r	translate-symaction	τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη εἰς δύο	1		See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of the symbolic significance of this action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -1508,7 +1502,6 @@ MRK	15	38	ni8j	figs-activepassive	ἐσχίσθη	1	the curtain of the temple wa
 MRK	15	39	hue4		ἐξέπνευσεν	1		See how you translated the phrase **breathed his last** in [15:37](../15/37.md).
 MRK	15	39	ariw		ἀληθῶς	1		See how you translated the word **Truly** in [3:28](../03/28.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly”
 MRK	15	39	nqv8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	The title **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-MRK	15	40	i1ee	translate-names	Μαρία	1	looking on from a distance	The word **Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	15	40	gkgi	translate-versebridge	ἐν αἷς καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη	1		If it would be more natural in your language to first give background information about these women before listing individual names, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to the end of verse 41. You would then present the combined verses as 40–41, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
 MRK	15	40	zc9b	writing-background	Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ…Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ	1	(the mother of James the younger and of Joses)	Because **Mary** was a very common name at this time and because Mark refers to two different women with the name **Mary** in this verse, he provides this background information to help readers know to which **Mary** he is referring in each case. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	15	40	z5ra	translate-names	Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ	1		The word **James** is the name a man. This man is probably referred to as **the younger** here to distinguish him from other men named **James**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

en_tn_46-ROM.tsv

@@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ ROM	1	17	qr31	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul is u
 ROM	1	17	gsl5	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** in another way. Alternate translation: “how God causes people to become righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	17	ii3m	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1	For in it	The pronoun **it** here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	1	17	jl9i	figs-idiom	ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν	1		Here, **from faith to faith** describes how **the righteousness of God is revealed**. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, like how the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	1	17	igg9	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it has been written	Here Paul uses **just as it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Habakkuk 2:4](../../hab/02/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	1	17	igg9	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it has been written	Here Paul uses **just as it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Habakkuk 2:4](../hab/02/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	1	17	bgvh	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Habakkuk. Alternate translation: “just as the prophet Habakkuk wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	1	17	oih2	figs-quotemarks	ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Habakkuk 2:4](../../hab/02/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	1	17	oih2	figs-quotemarks	ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Habakkuk 2:4](../hab/02/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	1	17	a9y7	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		Here, **live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	1	17	e7eu	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	2		See how you translated this word in [verse 5](../01/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	18	c69s	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ ROM	2	23	grr3	figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι	1	You who bo
 ROM	2	23	ob98	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgression**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	24	yp4l	figs-infostructure	τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	2	24	z54i	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things I have said about you are true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	24	lk5n	figs-quotemarks	τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		In this clause Paul quotes part of [Isaiah 52:5](../../isa/52/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	2	24	lk5n	figs-quotemarks	τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		In this clause Paul quotes part of [Isaiah 52:5](../isa/52/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	2	24	c4sk	figs-possession	τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the **name** that belongs to **God**. Paul does not mean that **God** is a **name**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	2	24	mvwq	figs-synecdoche	τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses **the name of God** figuratively to refer to**God** himself. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ROM	2	24	ccm9	figs-activepassive	τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -367,12 +367,12 @@ ROM	2	27	q795	figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην νόμου	1		If your langua
 ROM	2	28	g2vh	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in [verses 25–27](../02/25.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	2	28	lfuj	figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖός	1		Here Paul uses **Jew** to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, like Abraham did. **Jew** here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	28	rohy	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ φανερῷ	1		Here, **visibly** refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	2	28	n34i	figs-metonymy	ἡ…περιτομή	1	flesh	Here Paul uses **circumcision** figuratively to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../../jer/04/04.md)). Here, **circumcision** does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	2	28	n34i	figs-metonymy	ἡ…περιτομή	1	flesh	Here Paul uses **circumcision** figuratively to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../jer/04/04.md)). Here, **circumcision** does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	28	s44m	figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	flesh	Paul uses **the flesh** figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of **flesh**. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ROM	2	29	b6ag	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος	1		The word translated **secretly** refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	29	u7b6	figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖος	1		Here Paul uses **Jew** figuratively in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	29	d1go	figs-possession	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **circumcision** that is performed in **the heart**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	2	29	hbiv	figs-idiom	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1		The phrase **circumcision of the heart** is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../../jer/04/04.md)).If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belonging to God’s people is by removal of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	2	29	hbiv	figs-idiom	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1		The phrase **circumcision of the heart** is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../jer/04/04.md)).If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belonging to God’s people is by removal of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	2	29	n4pp	figs-metonymy	καρδίας	1		See how you translated this word in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	29	ffa3	figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι	1		Here, both occurrences of **in** indicate the means by which something happened. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit, not by means of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	29	kjc9	figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι	1		Here, **the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, who changes a person’s thoughts and attitude when God saves that person, as in the UST. (2) a person’s spirit, which would require interpreting **in** to refer to a place. Alternate translation: “in one’s spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -410,8 +410,8 @@ ROM	3	4	fesk	figs-ellipsis	πᾶς…ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1		Paul is
 ROM	3	4	hfdf	figs-gendernotations	πᾶς…ἄνθρωπος	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	3	4	te39	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	As it has been written	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	3	4	b8gv	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	As it has been written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David, a king of Israel. Alternate translation: “just as King David wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	3	4	f0oq	figs-quotemarks	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	As it has been written	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 51:4](../../psa/51/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	3	4	xli0	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅπως	1		**So that** indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in [Psalm 51:4](../../psa/51/04.md), which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	3	4	f0oq	figs-quotemarks	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	As it has been written	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 51:4](../psa/051/004.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	4	xli0	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅπως	1		**So that** indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in [Psalm 51:4](../psa/051/004.md), which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	3	4	h0ne	figs-yousingular	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1		In this sentence, **you** and **your** refer to God and are singular. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	3	4	lnnr	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῇς…ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	4	tj8g	figs-metonymy	ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου	1		Paul records David using **words** figuratively to describe the things that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -464,30 +464,30 @@ ROM	3	9	hgs3	figs-explicit	Ἕλληνας	1	Not at all	Here, **Greeks** refers
 ROM	3	9	x4eb	figs-idiom	ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν	1		The phrase **under sin** is an idiom that means “under the power of sin” or “controlled by one’s desire to sin.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlled by sin” or “ruled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	3	10	u88n	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	This is as it is written	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	3	10	zkzr	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	This is as it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	3	10	ju1k	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	This is as it is written	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:3](../../psa/14/03.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	10	ju1k	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	This is as it is written	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:3](../psa/014/003.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	10	yt5d	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not** even one type of person is **righteous**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	3	10	bscu	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1		Paul is using the singular adjectives **none righteous** and **one** as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ROM	3	11	b0m7	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1		This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:2](../../psa/14/02.md) and [Psalm 53:3](../../psa/53/03.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	11	b0m7	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1		This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:2](../psa/014/002.md) and [Psalm 53:3](../psa/053/003.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	11	kqs5	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν…οὐκ ἔστιν	1		Paul is using the adjectives **none** as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no people … There are no people” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	3	11	h9e9	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων	1	There is no one who understands	Here, **who understands** refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	11	mn84	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1		Her, Paul quotes David using**seeks** figuratively to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	3	12	lg0i	figs-quotemarks	πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	They have all turned away	This sentence is quotation of [Psalm 14:3](../../psa/14/03.md) and [Psalm 53:4](../../psa/53/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	12	lg0i	figs-quotemarks	πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	They have all turned away	This sentence is quotation of [Psalm 14:3](../psa/014/003.md) and [Psalm 53:4](../psa/053/004.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	12	cen3	figs-metaphor	ἐξέκλιναν	1	They have all turned away	Paul quotes David using **turned away** figuratively to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refuse to live the way God requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	3	12	a72h	figs-explicit	ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν	1	They have all turned away	Here, **useless** implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they do not benefit God or humankind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	12	na87	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not even one** type of person can continually do **kindness**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one who is doing kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	3	12	v9ed	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ…ἑνός	1		See how you translated **none** and **one** in [verse 10](../03/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	3	12	b3g1	figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kindness**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	3	13	xr4g	figs-quotemarks	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν	1		These two sentences are a quotation from [Psalm 5:10](../../psa/05/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	13	xr4g	figs-quotemarks	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν	1		These two sentences are a quotation from [Psalm 5:10](../psa/005/010.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	13	c7rh	figs-parallelism	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1		These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If saying the same thing three times might confuse your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	3	13	nmrs	figs-genericnoun	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1		Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s throats in general, not of one particular **throat**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “throats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	3	13	sx6y	figs-metonymy	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1		Here Paul quotes David using **throat** figuratively to describe something people would say by using their throats to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	13	bbq5	figs-metaphor	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Their throat is an open grave	Paul quotes David using **opened grave** figuratively to describe these people’s **throat** as if it were a deep hole containing rotting corpses. He means that the things these people say are morally corrupt and offend God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Their throats express moral corruption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	3	13	pemg	figs-metonymy	ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν	1		Here Paul quotes David using **tongues** figuratively to describe something people would say to deceive someone by using their tongues to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	3	13	d82g	figs-quotemarks	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 140:3](../../psa/140/03.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	13	d82g	figs-quotemarks	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 140:3](../psa/140/003.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	13	b4bp	figs-possession	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **poison** that comes from **asps**, which are venomous snakes. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	13	qk16	figs-metaphor	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1	The poison of snakes is under their lips	Paul quotes David using **poison of asps** figuratively to refer to what people say as if what they say contained **poison**. He means that the things they say harm people like deadly venom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “What hurts people like a poisonous snake bite” or “Speech that hurts people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	3	13	u40o	figs-metonymy	ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	The poison of snakes is under their lips	Here Paul quotes David using **lips** figuratively to describe something people would say to harm someone by using their **lips** to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	3	14	ucnr	figs-quotemarks	ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 10:7](../../psa/10/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	14	ucnr	figs-quotemarks	ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 10:7](../psa/010/007.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	14	ujjd	figs-genericnoun	τὸ στόμα	1		Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s mouths in general, not of one particular **mouth**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “mouths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	3	14	sqr5	figs-metonymy	ὧν τὸ στόμα	1	Their mouths are full of cursing and bitterness	Here Paul quotes David using **mouth** figuratively to describe people speaking curses and bitter things by using their **mouth** to say them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	14	j0sg	figs-metaphor	ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1		Paul quotes David using **cursing and bitterness** figuratively as if these concepts were thins with which people could fill or load their **mouth**. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “habitually curses and says bitter things against others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ ROM	3	16	bc96	figs-abstractnouns	σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία
 ROM	3	16	rrgr	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1		Here, **ways** is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they behave.” It refers to a person’s daily life. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	3	17	zbrd	figs-idiom	ὁδὸν	1		See how you translated “ways” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	3	17	jb6b	figs-possession	ὁδὸν εἰρήνης	1	a way of peace	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a way** that is characterized by **peace**. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	3	18	wr0x	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 36:1](../../psa/36/01.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	3	18	wr0x	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 36:1](../psa/036/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	18	bx27	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ	1	There is no fear of God before their eyes	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fear**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “They are not afraid of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	18	frt1	figs-possession	φόβος Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **fear** that people should feel toward for **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “fear for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	18	m89o	figs-idiom	ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1		Here,**before their eyes** is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ ROM	4	3	w9i5	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For what does the scripture
 ROM	4	3	hih3	figs-rquestion	τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	4	3	g1wz	figs-personification	τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses **say** figuratively as if **the scripture** were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	4	3	r9te	writing-quotations	τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?	1		Here Paul uses **what does the scripture say** to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:6](gen/15/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	4	3	xdtx	figs-explicit	ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Here, **the scripture** refers specifically to the quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md) that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	4	3	xdtx	figs-explicit	ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Here, **the scripture** refers specifically to the quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md) that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	3	smc6	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	it was counted to him as righteousness	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God counted it to him as righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	3	az65	writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη	1	it was counted to him as righteousness	The pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that **Abraham believed God**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was counted” or “his trust in God was counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	3	qked	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -648,13 +648,13 @@ ROM	4	6	x40j	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1		Paul is speaking of p
 ROM	4	6	c6zs	figs-distinguish	ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων	1		This phrase gives us further information about the **the man**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God counts as righteous apart from works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	4	6	lilj	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	6	o260	figs-possession	χωρὶς ἔργων	1		See how you translated this phrase in [3:28](../03/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	4	7	zqwl	figs-quotemarks	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		This verse is the beginning of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	4	7	zqwl	figs-quotemarks	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		This verse is the beginning of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	7	dur6	figs-parallelism	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	whose lawless deeds are forgiven … whose sins are covered	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how **Blessed** these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	4	7	lq4w	figs-abstractnouns	ὧν…αἱ ἀνομίαι…ὧν…αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **lawless deeds** and **sins**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	7	d4f4	figs-activepassive	ἀφέθησαν…ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	7	hj2w	figs-ellipsis	ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	4	7	hqfm	figs-metaphor	ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1		Paul quotes David using **covered** figuratively to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	4	8	jjov	figs-quotemarks	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1		The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	4	8	jjov	figs-quotemarks	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1		The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	8	yox7	figs-parallelism	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1		This verse means the same thing as the two clauses in the previous verse. Paul the same thing here, in a slightly different way, to emphasize how **Blessed** people are home God forgives for their sins. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “How truly blessed is a man whose sin the Lord does certainly not count!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	4	8	kpfe	figs-genericnoun	ἀνὴρ	1		Paul quotes David speaking of people in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	4	8	y21b	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sinful deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ ROM	4	9	jmym	figs-metaphor	ὁ μακαρισμὸς…οὗτος ἐπὶ τ
 ROM	4	9	dn7v	grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν περιτομὴν…τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1		See how you translated these words in [3:30](../03/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	4	9	mrsm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	4	9	w2xt	figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1		Here Paul uses **we** exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	4	9	o51f	writing-quotations	λέγομεν	1		Paul uses **we say** here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md), which Moses wrote. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	4	9	o51f	writing-quotations	λέγομεν	1		Paul uses **we say** here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md), which Moses wrote. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	4	9	m3uh	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Faith was counted to Abraham as righteousness	See how you translated the similar clauses in [verses 3](../04/03.md) and [5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	10	trz4	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ?	1		In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was counted to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was counted to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	4	10	unuf	grammar-connect-logic-result	πῶς οὖν	1		Here, **then** introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “How as a result” or “So then how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ ROM	4	17	nuj8	figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατ
 ROM	4	17	ibwm	figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here Paul uses a quotation from the Old Testament in order to support the statement in the previous verse that Abraham “is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the relationship between this verse and the previous verse clearer. Alternate translation: “The fact that Abraham is the father of us all is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	17	iju4	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it is written	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	4	17	sjm0	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	4	17	peaf	figs-quotemarks	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	I have made you	In this clause Paul quotes [Genesis 17:5](../../gen/17/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	4	17	peaf	figs-quotemarks	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	I have made you	In this clause Paul quotes [Genesis 17:5](../gen/17/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	17	mxm5	writing-pronouns	τέθεικά σε…ἐπίστευσεν	1	I have made you	The pronoun **I** refers to **God**, and **you** and **he** refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	17	n6l7	figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1		Paul quotes God using **father** figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise **many nations**. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large amount of people from **many nations** who trust in God like Abraham. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	17	ph37	figs-explicit	κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ,	1	in the presence of God whom he trusted, who gives life to the dead	Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -746,9 +746,9 @@ ROM	4	18	auah	figs-abstractnouns	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπ
 ROM	4	18	n62i	figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	4	18	bs6y	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν	1		Here, **so that** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the result of Abraham believing **on the basis of hope**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “which resulted in him becoming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	4	18	qbdq	figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 17](../04/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	4	18	b92q	writing-quotations	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	according to what he had been told	Here Paul uses **what was said** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:5](../../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	4	18	b92q	writing-quotations	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	according to what he had been told	Here Paul uses **what was said** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:5](../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	4	18	cryi	figs-activepassive	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	according to what he had been told	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was spoken by God. Alternate translation: “what God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	4	18	p5el	figs-explicit	οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου	1	So will your descendants be	Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting ([Genesis 15:5](../../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	4	18	p5el	figs-explicit	οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου	1	So will your descendants be	Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting ([Genesis 15:5](../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	18	i2ev	figs-metaphor	τὸ σπέρμα	1		See how you translated **seed** in [verse 16](../04/16.md).(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	19	ycte	figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, κατενόησεν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα ἤδη νενεκρωμένον, ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων, καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “He considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—but he was not weakening in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	4	19	m9gq	figs-litotes	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει	1	Without becoming weak in faith,	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “And being strengthened in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -774,13 +774,13 @@ ROM	4	21	y2sh	figs-activepassive	πληροφορηθεὶς	1	He was fully conv
 ROM	4	21	plbf	writing-pronouns	ἐπήγγελται…ἐστιν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to God, not Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	21	j12r	writing-pronouns	ὃ ἐπήγγελται	1		Here, **what he had promised** refers to the promise Paul describes in [verse 13](../04/13.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	22	ympp	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ καὶ	1		Here, **therefore** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	4	22	wlnh	figs-quotemarks	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1		This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	4	22	wlnh	figs-quotemarks	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1		This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	22	i56a	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Therefore this was also counted to him as righteousness	See how you translated this in [verse 3](../04/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	23	zdc0	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐγράφη…δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	Therefore this was also counted to him as righteousness	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was counted to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	4	23	r65c	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ	1	only for his benefit	The pronouns **his** and **him** refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	23	bfiw	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγράφη…δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	23	bmlm		δι’ αὐτὸν	1		Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him”
-ROM	4	23	ae1u	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,	1		This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	4	23	ae1u	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,	1		This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	23	jft0	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1		See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	24	pfc9	figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	for us	Here, **our** and **whom** refer to all **those who believe** in **Jesus**. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us believers who are about to be counted, to we who believe in the one who raised from the dead ones Jesus, the Lord of us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	4	24	ffdm		δι’ ἡμᾶς	1		See how you translated “for his sake” in the previous verse.
@@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ ROM	4	25	op41	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν
 ROM	4	25	imvc	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν	1		Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in [verses 23–24](../04/23.md). Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus **was given up**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	4	25	gmbd	figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη	1		See how you translated **raised** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	4	25	hzop	grammar-connect-logic-goal	διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1		Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being **raised**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	5	intro	i1dt			0		# Romans 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)<br>    * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)<br>    * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)<br>    * The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)<br>    * The blessings of justification (5:1–11)<br>    * Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The second Adam<br><br>Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	5	intro	i1dt			0		# Romans 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)<br>    * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)<br>    * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)<br>    * The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)<br>    * The blessings of justification (5:1–11)<br>    * Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The second Adam<br><br>Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	5	1	age4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		**Therefore**, here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the blessed results of a person becoming righteous by trusting in Jesus, which Paul just discussed in [1:18](../01/18.md)–[4:25](../04/25.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	5	1	xmp3	grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες…ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “We can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	1	xott	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous” or “since God makes us right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ ROM	5	2	slyh	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγ
 ROM	5	2	tsbo	writing-pronouns	οὗ	1		The pronoun **whom** refers to “our Lord Jesus Christ,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	5	2	i50u	figs-exclusive	καὶ…ἐσχήκαμεν…ἑστήκαμεν…καυχώμεθα	1		The pronoun **we** in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	5	2	af0n	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1		Paul speaks figuratively of **grace** as if it were a location that someone could access and stand within. He means that trusting in Jesus allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If your readers would not understand this, you express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	5	2	dxcu	figs-abstractnouns	καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	2	dxcu	figs-abstractnouns	καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	2	zp5p	figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using possessive forms to describe how **glory** relates to **God**. This could refer to: (1) the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in [3:23](../03/23.md). Alternate translation: “of sharing in the glory God has” or “of the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	3	q5p7	writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	Not only this	The pronoun **this** here refers to boasting about “the hope of the glory of God,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And we not only boast on the basis of the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	5	3	c644	figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν	1		Here, **in our sufferings** could mean: (1) believers can **boast** about their **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast about our sufferings” (2) believers can boast while they are experiencing **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we are distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ ROM	5	18	e7cq	figs-ellipsis	ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπ
 ROM	5	18	mccf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		**So then** indicates that what follows in [verses 18–21](../05/18.md) summarizes the ideas of [verses 12–17](../05/12.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	5	18	sfwg	grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’…δι’	1		See how you translated **through** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	18	z0jq	figs-abstractnouns	παραπτώματος…κατάκριμα…δικαίωσιν	1		See how you translated these abstracts nouns in [verse 16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	5	18	n8pr	figs-gendernotations	πάντας ἀνθρώπους…πάντας ἀνθρώπους	2		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated **all men** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ROM	5	18	n8pr	figs-gendernotations	πάντας ἀνθρώπους	-1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated **all men** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	5	18	bcm2	figs-possession	δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **justification** relates to **life**. This could mean: (1) **justification** that leads to **life**. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” (2) **justification** that is **life**. Alternate translation: “justification, which is eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	18	bmey	figs-explicit	ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	19	hj69	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -940,12 +940,12 @@ ROM	5	19	rgji	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ…διὰ	1		See how you tran
 ROM	5	19	z8r8	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου…τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **obedience**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	19	qpsm	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, **the one man** refers to “Adam.” See how you translated the similar use of **one man** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	19	q8lj	figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disobedience of the one man caused many to become sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	5	19	huig	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοί…οἱ πολλοί	2		See how you translated **the many** in [verse 15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	5	19	huig	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοί	-1		See how you translated **the many** in [verse 15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	5	19	px2r	figs-nominaladj	ἁμαρτωλοὶ	1		See how you translated **sinners** in [verse 8](../05/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	5	19	bhra	figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς, δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the obedience of the one caused many to become righteous ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	5	19	haks	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς	2		Here, **the one** refers to “Jesus Christ.” See how you translated the third occurrence of **the one ** in [verse 17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	20	lah6	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμος	1		See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	5	20	w958	figs-personification	παρεισῆλθεν	1	the law came in	The word translated **slipped in** can mean to sneak in unnoticed, as in [Jude 1:4](../../jud/01/04.md). Paul may be stressing how the coming of **the law** was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	5	20	w958	figs-personification	παρεισῆλθεν	1	the law came in	The word translated **slipped in** can mean to sneak in unnoticed, as in [Jude 1:4](../jud/01/04.md). Paul may be stressing how the coming of **the law** was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	5	20	ttcw	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα…ἡ ἁμαρτία…ἡ χάρις	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **trespass** in [verses 15–18](../05/15.md), **sin** in [verses 12–13](../05/12.md), and **grace** in [verses 15](../05/15.md) and [17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	20	relk	figs-metaphor	πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα…ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις	1		Paul speaks figuratively of **the trespass**, **sin**, and **grace** as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	20	wbh3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα	1		This clause could refer to: (1) one of God’s purposes for giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the trespass” (2) the result of God giving **the law**. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “resulting in the trespass increasing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -983,7 +983,7 @@ ROM	6	4	vva7	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸ
 ROM	6	4	kmn3	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	We were buried, then, with him through baptism into death	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	4	y71v	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον…τῆς δόξης…ζωῆς	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **death** in [6:3](../06/03.md), **glory** in [5:2](../05/02.md), and **life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	4	k1el	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1		Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating one purpose for which God instituted **baptism**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	6	4	kado	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ… οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	6	4	kado	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ…οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	6	4	z6zk	figs-simile	ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1		The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being **raised** from the dead, like Christ was. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when Christ was raised from death through the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 ROM	6	4	dpy2	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the glory of the Father raised Christ from dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	6	4	t47r	figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father, so also we might walk in newness of life	See how you translated this phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1047,7 +1047,7 @@ ROM	6	13	qncn	figs-possession	ὅπλα ἀδικίας	1	in order that you may
 ROM	6	13	hlzf		ὅπλα…ὅπλα	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	The word translated as **tools** often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”
 ROM	6	13	dq4n	figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικίας…δικαιοσύνης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness** and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is unrighteous … of what is unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	13	wq3m	figs-metaphor	παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Paul speaks figuratively of his readers as if they could offer themselves as slaves to their master, who is **God**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “devote yourselves to serving God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	6	13	px9k	figs-simile	ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now **dead to sin, but alive to God**, as mentioned in [verse 11](../06/11.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+ROM	6	13	px9k	figs-simile	ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now **dead to sin, but alive to God**, as mentioned in [verse 11](../06/11.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 ROM	6	13	vk76	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 4](../06/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	6	13	amyo	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this from the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and present your members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	6	13	dz8u	figs-possession	ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **tools** that are characterized by **righteousness**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as righteous tools” or “as tools for living righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -1065,14 +1065,14 @@ ROM	6	15	rtts	figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι ο
 ROM	6	15	t4cc	figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον…ὑπὸ χάριν	1	May it never be	See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	15	t52x	figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	15	c77g	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-ROM	6	16	n5j4	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε— ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	6	16	n5j4	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε—ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	6	16	hn6y	writing-pronouns	ᾧ…ᾧ	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	The pronoun translated **what** here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever… to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	6	16	g6zz	figs-metaphor	παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους…δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Paul speaks figuratively of people as if they could offer themselves as **slaves** to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	16	psrr	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοήν	1		Here, **for** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are **presenting** themselves as **slaves**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	6	16	zim4	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοήν…ὑπακοῆς	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **obedience**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	16	h0ar	figs-personification	ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Here, **sin** and **obedience** are spoken of as if they were masters that **slaves** would obey. Paul means that people can be controlled either by their desire to **sin** or a desire to obey God. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether you are controlled by sinning, leading to death, or you are controlled by obeying God, leading to righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	16	gtzd	figs-possession	ἁμαρτίας…ὑπακοῆς	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that belong to **sin** or **obedience**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	6	16	cyct	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας…δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** in [verse 15](../06/15.md) and **righteousness** in [verse 13](../06/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	16	cyct	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας…δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** in [verse 1](../06/01.md) and **righteousness** in [verse 13](../06/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	16	zfgc	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς θάνατον…εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Here, **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	16	d8gv	figs-explicit	εἰς θάνατον	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “leading to spiritual death” or “causing one to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	17	xj75	figs-exclamations	χάρις…τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here **thanks be to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@@ -1092,7 +1092,7 @@ ROM	6	19	gt1n	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸ
 ROM	6	19	l4ah	figs-idiom	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	Here, the term **flesh** is an idiom that refers to human nature. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	6	19	psmw	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	**For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in [verses 17–18](../06/17.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	6	19	x2kt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ…οὕτως	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	See how you translated **just as** and **so** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	6	19	jbcz	figs-personification	παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν… παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	Paul speaks figuratively of body parts as if they were **slaves** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 13](../06/13.md). Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	19	jbcz	figs-personification	παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν…παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	Paul speaks figuratively of body parts as if they were **slaves** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 13](../06/13.md). Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	19	o0ta	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	presented the parts of your body as slaves to uncleanness and to evil	The phrase **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in sanctification” or “causing sanctification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	20	s9pk	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	20	i1ze	figs-personification	ὅτε…δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	you were free from righteousness	Here, **sin** and **righteousness** are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as **slaves** of **righteousness**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1183,7 +1183,7 @@ ROM	7	7	u8gm	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	See how yo
 ROM	7	7	y92j	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to the idea that **the law** is sinful. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” or “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	7	7	zzsf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this sentence is an example from God’s law that illustrates the importance of **the law**. See how you translated the same use of **For** in [verse 2](../07/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	7	7	g0np	figs-abstractnouns	τήν…ἐπιθυμίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **covetousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	7	7	refv	writing-quotations	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1		Here Paul uses **said** to indicate a quotation from **the law** that is written in the Old Testament ([Exodus 20:17](../../exo/20/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	7	7	refv	writing-quotations	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1		Here Paul uses **said** to indicate a quotation from **the law** that is written in the Old Testament ([Exodus 20:17](../exo/20/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	7	7	qb5v	figs-personification	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1		Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were a person who could say something. He means that God **said** what was written down in **the law**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God said in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	8	mz77	figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν…λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν	1	But sin took the opportunity … brought about every lust	Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were a person who could take an **opportunity** and produce **covetousness** within a person. Paul means that his desire to **sin** by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	8	fh6x	figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		Here, **the commandment** refers specifically to the command, “You will not covet,” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the command that we should not covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1264,7 +1264,7 @@ ROM	7	21	qae3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα	1	that evil is actually prese
 ROM	7	21	y5vo	figs-explicit	τὸν νόμον	1	that evil is actually present in me	Here, **law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	21	xxq9	figs-infostructure	τῷ θέλοντι ἐμοὶ ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν, ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1	that evil is actually present in me	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that evil is present in me, in me the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	7	21	mo4r	figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ…ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1		Here Paul speaks of **evil** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. Paul means that he does evil deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I … I do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	7	21	qn1r	figs-distinguish	τῷ θέλοντι…ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν	1		Here, **the one wanting to do good** is giving further information about **me**, which refers to Paul. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	7	21	qn1r	figs-distinguish	τῷ θέλοντι…ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν	1		Here, **the one wanting to do good** is giving further information about **me**, which refers to Paul. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	7	21	hqp9	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ καλὸν…τὸ κακὸν	1		See how you translated these abstract nouns in [verse 19](../07/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	22	mvod	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	the inner man	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why the previous verse is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	7	22	x28l	figs-metaphor	συνήδομαι…τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the law of God** as if it were a location in which a person could **delight**. He means that God’s laws cause him to **delight**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I delight because of the law of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ ROM	7	22	m13q	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον	1	the inner man	He
 ROM	7	23	zp7t	figs-metaphor	βλέπω	1	a different principle in my body parts	Here Paul uses **see** figuratively to refer to noticing or perceiving something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	23	fct8	figs-explicit	ἕτερον νόμον	1	a different principle in my body parts	Here, **a different law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	23	ijp9	figs-personification	ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον	1		Here Paul speaks figuratively of **a different law** as if it were a person who could fight within someone’s body parts. He means that his sinful desires caused him to use his body to do sinful things that he did not want to do. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing me to use my members to sin in opposition to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	7	23	v8d8		τοῖς μέλεσίν…τοῖς μέλεσίν	2		See how you translated **members** in [6:13](../06/13.md).
+ROM	7	23	v8d8		τοῖς μέλεσίν	-1		See how you translated **members** in [6:13](../06/13.md).
 ROM	7	23	t7yh	figs-possession	τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου	1		Here, **the law of my mind** could refer to: (1) a principle that Paul thinks, which is the delight for God’s laws that he said in the previous verse is in his “inner man.” Alternate translation: “the principle I have thought” or “the principle in my mind” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul says that he serves with his mind in [verse 25](../07/25.md). Alternate translation: “God’s law that is in my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	7	23	i8w4	figs-personification	αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με	1		Here Paul speaks figuratively of **a different law** as if it were a person who could take someone **captive**. He means that his sinful desires controlled him against his will. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlling me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	23	u4ny	figs-metaphor	τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1		Here **the law of the sin** could refer to: (1) that principle that people have a sinful nature. Alternate translation: “the law that is my sinful nature” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in [verse 5](../07/05.md) stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1325,7 +1325,7 @@ ROM	8	3	v0h2	figs-synecdoche	σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας…τῇ σαρκί
 ROM	8	3	hfr2	figs-explicit	περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	to be an offering for sin	This could mean: (1) Jesus was sent for the sake of doing away with sin. Alternate translation: “in order to do away with sin” (2) Jesus was an offering to pay for sin. Alternate translation: “as an offering for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	3	gid8	figs-personification	κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	to be an offering for sin	Here Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were a guilty person whom a judge could condemn. Paul means that God removed the power that sin has to control people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he canceled the power of sin” or “he destroyed how sin controls people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	8	3	es29	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ σαρκί	1	he condemned sin in the flesh	Here, **the flesh** refers specifically to Jesus’ body that died on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in his Son’s body on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	4	zcsi	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	the requirements of the law might be fulfilled in us	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God “ condemned sin in the flesh” of Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	8	4	zcsi	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	the requirements of the law might be fulfilled in us	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God “condemned sin in the flesh” of Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	8	4	j9ff	figs-activepassive	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν	1	the requirements of the law might be fulfilled in us	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) us. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill the righteous deeds of the law” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might fulfill in us the righteous deeds of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	4	puta	figs-metaphor	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν	1	the requirements of the law might be fulfilled in us	Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the righteous deeds of the law** as if they were something that could be located inside a person. Paul means that God enables Christians to do those **righteous deeds** that his law required. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds of the law might be done by us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	4	w2aa	figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου	1	the requirements of the law might be fulfilled in us	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **the righteous deeds** that God commanded in **the law**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds that the law requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@ ROM	8	23	b5sz	figs-explicit	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος
 ROM	8	23	qyic	figs-possession	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the firstfruit** that is **the Spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the firstfruit, that is, the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	23	wutm	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν	1		Here Paul uses **firstfruit** figuratively to refer to the Holy **Spirit** as if it were the first crop that was harvested during the harvest season. Paul means that the Holy **Spirit** is the first part of the blessings that God gives Christians. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	23	xun5	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	2		Paul uses the word **ourselves** here to emphasize that Christians also share in the suffering of the creation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our very selves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-ROM	8	23	ch9t	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς στενάζομεν	1		Here Paul uses **groan* figuratively to refer to the the emotional anguish that Christians experience while they wait to be with God in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	8	23	ch9t	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς στενάζομεν	1		Here Paul uses **groan** figuratively to refer to the the emotional anguish that Christians experience while they wait to be with God in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	23	tiij	figs-abstractnouns	υἱοθεσίαν…τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **adoption** in [verse 15](../08/15.md) and **redemption** in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	23	k1wy	figs-explicit	υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι	1		Here, **our adoption** refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	23	qsb9	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν	1		Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -1488,7 +1488,7 @@ ROM	8	27	rgcb	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ φρόνημα	1		See how you translated
 ROM	8	27	fgdd	figs-explicit	κατὰ Θεὸν	1		Here, **God** implies God’s will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	28	u0ev	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν…πρόθεσιν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good** and **purpose**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good … what he purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	28	q3ce	figs-activepassive	τοῖς…κλητοῖς οὖσιν	2	for those who are called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for those whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	8	29	m3vv	figs-explicit	οὓς προέγνω	1		Here, **foreknew** could mean: (1) God had determined to know them ahead of time, which is how this word is used in [1 Peter 1:20](../../1pe/01/20.md). Alternate translation: “whom he chose beforehand” (2) God knew what they would do ahead of time. Alternate translation: “whom he knew beforehand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	29	m3vv	figs-explicit	οὓς προέγνω	1		Here, **foreknew** could mean: (1) God had determined to know them ahead of time, which is how this word is used in [1 Peter 1:20](../1pe/01/20.md). Alternate translation: “whom he chose beforehand” (2) God knew what they would do ahead of time. Alternate translation: “whom he knew beforehand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	29	xhn2	figs-metaphor	συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	to be conformed to the image of his Son	Here, **image** refers to how Christians will one day resemble Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated **image** in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “to be a similar form that is like his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	29	yuw2	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 ROM	8	29	ojxg	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς	1	Son	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -1528,7 +1528,7 @@ ROM	8	35	q2dc	figs-doublet	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία	1	Tribulation
 ROM	8	35	kcjr	figs-metonymy	ἢ μάχαιρα	1		Here, **sword** refers to being killed violently. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “or being killed violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	8	36	clec	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	8	36	f2de	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the sons of Korah. Alternate translation: “just as the sons of Korah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	8	36	wegb	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ, θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1		In these clauses Paul quotes [Psalm 44:22](../../psa/44/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	8	36	wegb	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ, θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1		In these clauses Paul quotes [Psalm 44:22](../psa/044/022.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	8	36	t67y	figs-yousingular	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ	1	For your benefit	Here, **your** is singular and refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For your sake, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	8	36	s7wj	figs-exclusive	θανατούμεθα…ἐλογίσθημεν	1	we are killed all day long	Here, **we** refers to the people who wrote this verse. It does not refer to God, who is the one being spoken to. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	8	36	phxq	figs-activepassive	θανατούμεθα…ἐλογίσθημεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “our enemies put us to death … they consider us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1542,14 +1542,14 @@ ROM	8	37	wcm6	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς	1	through
 ROM	8	38	fch1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	8	38	dgky	figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι	1	I have been convinced	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God convinced me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	38	ok7f	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος…ζωὴ…ἀρχαὶ…δυνάμεις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death**, **life**, **governments**, or **powers**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being dead…being alive … those who govern … powerful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	38	js9q	figs-explicit	ἀρχαὶ	1	governments	Here, **governments** could refer to: (1) demons, which is usually how Paul uses this word ([1 Corinthians 15:24](../../1co/15/24.md), [Ephesians 6:12](../../eph/06/12.md)). Alternate translation: “ruling demons” (2) human kings and rulers. Alternate translation: “human rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	38	q7ti	figs-explicit	δυνάμεις	1	nor powers	This could refer to: (1) demons with power, which is how Paul uses this word in [1 Corinthians 15:24](../../1co/15/24.md) and [Ephesians 1:21](../../eph/01/21.md). Alternate translation: “demonic powers” (2) human beings with power. Alternate translation: “powerful people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	38	js9q	figs-explicit	ἀρχαὶ	1	governments	Here, **governments** could refer to: (1) demons, which is usually how Paul uses this word ([1 Corinthians 15:24](../1co/15/24.md), [Ephesians 6:12](../eph/06/12.md)). Alternate translation: “ruling demons” (2) human kings and rulers. Alternate translation: “human rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	38	q7ti	figs-explicit	δυνάμεις	1	nor powers	This could refer to: (1) demons with power, which is how Paul uses this word in [1 Corinthians 15:24](../1co/15/24.md) and [Ephesians 1:21](../eph/01/21.md). Alternate translation: “demonic powers” (2) human beings with power. Alternate translation: “powerful people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	39	ppaz	figs-metonymy	ὕψωμα…βάθος	1	nor powers	Here, **height** refers to everything that exists above a person, and **depth** refers to everything that exists below a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is above us … everything that is below us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	8	39	ajct	figs-activepassive	τις κτίσις ἑτέρα	1	nor powers	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “any other thing that God has created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	39	sd7j	figs-metaphor	δυνήσεται ἡμᾶς χωρίσαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	nor powers	See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 35](../08/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	39	fr5b	figs-distinguish	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	nor powers	Here, **which** marks that Paul is giving further information about **the love of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the love of God in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	8	39	tot5	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	nor powers	See how you translated this phrase in [6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	9	intro	w6f4			0		# Romans 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)<br>    * Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)<br>    * God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)<br>    * God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)<br>    * No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)<br><br>Chapter 9 begins a new topic in this letter. In Chapters 9-11, Paul focuses on the nation of Israel.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verses 25-29](../09/25.md) and [33](../09/33.md) of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Predestination<br><br>Many scholars believe that in this chapter Paul teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” Some take this to indicate that God has chosen some people to eternally save from before the world existed. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>### Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Stone of stumbling<br><br>In [verses 30–33](../09/30.md) Paul explains that God made some Gentiles righteous because they believed in Jesus, but most Jews rejected Jesus because they were trying to obey the Law of Moses to become righteous. Paul quotes [Isaiah 8:14] and [28:16] to describe Jesus as if he were a stone that the Jews trip over when walking. See the translations and notes for how Peter uses these same verses from Isaiah in [1 Peter 2:6](../../1pe/02/06.md), [8](../../1pe/02/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	9	intro	w6f4			0		# Romans 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)<br>    * Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)<br>    * God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)<br>    * God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)<br>    * No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)<br><br>Chapter 9 begins a new topic in this letter. In Chapters 9-11, Paul focuses on the nation of Israel.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verses 25-29](../09/25.md) and [33](../09/33.md) of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Predestination<br><br>Many scholars believe that in this chapter Paul teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” Some take this to indicate that God has chosen some people to eternally save from before the world existed. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>### Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Stone of stumbling<br><br>In [verses 30–33](../09/30.md) Paul explains that God made some Gentiles righteous because they believed in Jesus, but most Jews rejected Jesus because they were trying to obey the Law of Moses to become righteous. Paul quotes [Isaiah 8:14] and [28:16] to describe Jesus as if he were a stone that the Jews trip over when walking. See the translations and notes for how Peter uses these same verses from Isaiah in [1 Peter 2:6](../1pe/02/06.md), [8](../1pe/02/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	1	yg93	figs-doublet	ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	I tell the truth in Christ. I do not lie	These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the absolute truth in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	9	1	igs8	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	1	h9mp	figs-personification	συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς	1		Here Paul uses **conscience** as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ ROM	9	3	eg9b	figs-metonymy	τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου	1	brothers	Here, **br
 ROM	9	3	gn5p	figs-distinguish	τῶν συγγενῶν μου, κατὰ σάρκα	1	brothers	This clause gives us further information about **my brothers**. If it might be helpful in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those of my own race according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	9	3	qckq	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	brothers	See how you translated **according to the flesh** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	9	4	p1ys	figs-distinguish	οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	They are Israelites	This phrase gives us further information about “my brothers” in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those brothers of mine are Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	9	4	jfzg	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ υἱοθεσία…ἡ δόξα…ἡ νομοθεσία…ἡ λατρεία…αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **adoption**, **glory**, law-giving**, **service**, and **promises**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being adopted … glorious things … being given the law … serving … what has been promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	9	4	jfzg	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ υἱοθεσία…ἡ δόξα…ἡ νομοθεσία…ἡ λατρεία…αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **adoption**, **glory**, **law-giving**, **service**, and **promises**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being adopted … glorious things … being given the law … serving … what has been promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	4	l6vs	figs-metaphor	ἡ υἱοθεσία	1	They have adoption	**Here, **adoption** refers to the idea that the **Israelites were like God’s children. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the status as God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	4	n2vu	figs-explicit	ἡ νομοθεσία	1		Here, **the law-giving** refers to God giving his laws to the Jews. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the giving of God’s laws to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	4	vu6j	figs-explicit	ἡ λατρεία	1		Here, **the service** refers to Jewish worship in the temple, which was a way of serving God. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “serving God in his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1586,8 +1586,8 @@ ROM	9	7	kpls	figs-metaphor	πάντες τέκνα	1		Here, **children** refers
 ROM	9	7	pmfj	translate-names	Ἀβραάμ	1		See how you translated this name in [4:1](../04/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	9	7	y86t	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ…σοι σπέρμα	1		Here, **seed** refers to refers to physical descendants of **Abraham** who trust in Jesus, as did the second occurrence of “Israel” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “true descendants of Abraham … your true seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	7	o3e4	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is a strong contrast from what was said in the previous sentence. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	9	7	kbnn	writing-quotations	ἀλλ’	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 21:12](../../gen/21/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	9	7	z2f3	figs-quotemarks	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 21:12](../../gen/21/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	7	kbnn	writing-quotations	ἀλλ’	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 21:12](../gen/21/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	7	z2f3	figs-quotemarks	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 21:12](../gen/21/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	7	dzhb	translate-names	Ἰσαὰκ	1		**Isaac** is the name of a man, the son of **Abraham**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	9	7	wam8	figs-yousingular	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1		Here, **your** refers to **Abraham** and so is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham, in Isaac your seed will be called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	9	7	obgo	figs-metaphor	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ	1		Here, **in Isaac** means “through the descendants of Isaac.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Isaac’s descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1600,10 +1600,10 @@ ROM	9	8	z5no	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	children of the
 ROM	9	8	h751	figs-explicit	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	children of the promise	Here, **the promise** refers to God’s promise to give Abraham descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise God made to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	8	p768	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1		See how you translated **seed** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	9	f4ap	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	9	9	ptfv	writing-quotations	ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1	this is the word of promise	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 18:10](../../gen/18/10.md), [14](../../gen/18/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “this is the word of promise that God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	9	ptfv	writing-quotations	ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1	this is the word of promise	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 18:10](../gen/18/10.md), [14](../gen/18/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “this is the word of promise that God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	9	up57	figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος	1	this is the word of promise	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that is a **promise**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word that was promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	9	9	vplh	figs-metonymy	ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος	1	this is the word of promise	Here, Paul used the term **word** to describe what God had said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	9	9	sufo	figs-quotemarks	κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον, ἐλεύσομαι, καὶ ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	this is the word of promise	This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 18:10](../../gen/18/10.md), [14](../../gen/18/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	9	sufo	figs-quotemarks	κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον, ἐλεύσομαι, καὶ ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	this is the word of promise	This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 18:10](../gen/18/10.md), [14](../gen/18/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	9	r9dw	writing-pronouns	ἐλεύσομαι	1	this is the word of promise	The pronoun **I** here refers to God. If it might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	9	hxl1	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	this is the word of promise	Here, **and** indicates that what follows is the result of what happened in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the result will be that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	9	9	h4kf	figs-ellipsis	ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	this is the word of promise	This clause is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “a son will be born to Sarah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1625,13 +1625,13 @@ ROM	9	12	h6uj	figs-explicit	ἔργων	1		Here, **works** refers to human actio
 ROM	9	12	d6mr	figs-explicit	τοῦ καλοῦντος	1	because of him	Here, **the one who calls** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who calls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	12	sie3	figs-ellipsis	τοῦ καλοῦντος	1	because of him	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “the one who calls people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	9	12	wv7n	figs-activepassive	ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ	1	it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.”	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God said to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	9	12	fcho	writing-quotations	ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ	1	it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.”	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 25:23](../../gen/25/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it was said to her, as recorded in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	12	fcho	writing-quotations	ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ	1	it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.”	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 25:23](../gen/25/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it was said to her, as recorded in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	12	y9cc	writing-pronouns	αὐτῇ	1	it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.”	Here, the pronoun **her** refers to Rebekah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	9	12	hwwn	figs-quotemarks	ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι	1	it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.”	This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 25:23](../../gen/25/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	12	hwwn	figs-quotemarks	ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι	1	it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.”	This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 25:23](../gen/25/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	12	b8px	figs-explicit	ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι	1	it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.”	The phrases **the older** and **the younger** refer to Rebekah’s **older** and **younger** sons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	13	heon	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	13	mxfw	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Malachi and God is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “It is just as God had Malachi write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	9	13	xt7t	figs-quotemarks	τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	This sentence is a quotation from [Malachi 1:2–3](../../mal/01/02.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	13	xt7t	figs-quotemarks	τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	This sentence is a quotation from [Malachi 1:2–3](../mal/01/02.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	13	jb9k	translate-names	Ἰακὼβ…Ἠσαῦ	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	**Jacob** and **Esau** are the names of men, the twin sons of Isaac and Rebekah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	9	13	jcfs	writing-pronouns	ἠγάπησα…ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	The pronoun **I** here refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, loved … I hated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	13	y3zu	figs-hyperbole	ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	Paul quotes God using the word **hated** as an exaggeration to say that he did not love Esau and had completely rejected him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I completely rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1643,11 +1643,11 @@ ROM	9	14	euci	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here
 ROM	9	14	s1hm	figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	May it never be	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	14	jrp5	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	9	15	x9ri	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For he says to Moses	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	9	15	k9i0	writing-quotations	τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει	1	For he says to Moses	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Exodus 33:19](../../exo/33/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For he says to Moses what is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	15	k9i0	writing-quotations	τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει	1	For he says to Moses	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Exodus 33:19](../exo/33/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For he says to Moses what is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	15	v2x6	writing-pronouns	λέγει…ἐλεήσω…ἐλεῶ…οἰκτειρήσω…οἰκτείρω	1	For he says to Moses	The pronouns **he** and **I** here refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … ‘I, God, will have mercy … I will have mercy … I, God, will have compassion … I will have compassion’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	15	kq2c	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	For he says to Moses	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	9	15	tjgf	translate-names	Μωϋσεῖ	1		See how you translated this name in [5:14](../05/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	9	15	c2t0	figs-quotemarks	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Exodus 33:19](../../exo/33/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	15	c2t0	figs-quotemarks	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Exodus 33:19](../exo/33/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	15	f61q	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **mercy** and **compassion**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I will act mercifully to whomever I will act mercifully, and I will act compassionately to whomever I will act compassionately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	15	f1hi	figs-parallelism	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1		These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They emphasize that God does whatever he wants. If this form of parallelism would be misunderstood in your language, consider another form that emphasizes that God is graciously kind to exactly those and only those to whom he chooses to show kindness, and he does so without outside influence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	9	16	y06j	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		**So then** indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of [verses 11–15](../09/11.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -1658,10 +1658,10 @@ ROM	9	16	plbr	figs-distinguish	τοῦ ἐλεῶντος	1		This phrase gives u
 ROM	9	16	p1fn	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ ἐλεῶντος	1		See how you translated **mercy** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	17	st77	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For the scripture says	**For** here indicates that what follows is the another reason why what Paul said in [verse 14](../09/14.md) is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I said previously is also true due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	9	17	x1cj	figs-personification	λέγει…ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	Here Paul uses **the scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information that God said to **Pharaoh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says to Pharaoh in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	9	17	e0r9	writing-quotations	λέγει…ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Exodus 9:16](../../exo/09/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God said to Pharaoh in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	17	e0r9	writing-quotations	λέγει…ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Exodus 9:16](../exo/09/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God said to Pharaoh in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	17	w1ki	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	For the scripture says	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	9	17	hadc	translate-names	τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	**Pharaoh** is the title for the man who was the king of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	9	17	ipl3	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐξήγειρά σε, ὅπως ἐνδείξωμαι ἐν σοὶ τὴν δύναμίν μου, καὶ ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Exodus 9:16](../../exo/09/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	17	ipl3	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐξήγειρά σε, ὅπως ἐνδείξωμαι ἐν σοὶ τὴν δύναμίν μου, καὶ ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Exodus 9:16](../exo/09/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	17	wfwo	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1		See how you translated **purpose** in [verse 11](../09/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	17	xu7s	writing-pronouns	ἐξήγειρά σε…ἐνδείξωμαι…μου	1	I … my	Here the pronouns **I** and **my** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, raised you up … I might demonstrate my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	17	pz5x	figs-idiom	ἐξήγειρά σε	1	I raised you up	Paul quotes God using the phrase **raised you up** to refer to causing someone to become king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I caused you to become king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1704,7 +1704,7 @@ ROM	9	22	gk5u			0	General Information:	[Verses 22–24](../09/22.md) are one lon
 ROM	9	22	a9tl	figs-ellipsis	εἰ	1		Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, especially the idea in [verse 20](../09/20.md) that no one can speak against God. Alternate translation: “what can you say against God if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	9	22	afmb	figs-rquestion	εἰ	1		Here, **what if** indicates the beginning of one long rhetorical question that extends from [verse 22](../09/22.md) to [verse 24](../09/24.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	9	22	dzpq	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [verse 22](../09/22.md) to [verse 24](../09/24.md). Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	9	22	cqto	figs-infostructure	θέλων…ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “endured with much patience vessels of wrath prepared for destruction, willing to demonstrate {his} wrath and to make his power known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	9	22	cqto	figs-infostructure	θέλων…ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “endured with much patience vessels of wrath prepared for destruction, willing to demonstrate his wrath and to make his power known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	9	22	bqkv	grammar-connect-logic-result	θέλων…ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν	1		This clause could indicate: (1) the reason why God **endured vessels of wrath**. Alternate translation: “as a result of being willing to demonstrate his wrath” (2) a contrast between God being **willing to demonstrate his wrath** and **enduring vessels of wrath**. Alternate translation: “even though he was willing to demonstrate his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	9	22	yyyp	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν…τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ…πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ…ὀργῆς…εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath**, **power**, **patience**, and **destruction**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how wrathful he is … how powerful he is … being very patient … for being wrathful against … for being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	22	cj94	figs-activepassive	γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to make people know his power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1730,22 +1730,22 @@ ROM	9	24	yowi	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ…ἡμᾶς	1	also for us	H
 ROM	9	24	y6vp	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	also for us	The pronoun **us** here refers to Paul and his fellow believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	9	24	t8rn	writing-pronouns	ἐκάλεσεν	1	called	Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	24	zp1t	figs-distinguish	οὐ μόνον ἐξ Ἰουδαίων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐξ ἐθνῶν	1	called	This phrase gives further information about the people **whom** God **called**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those people not only from the Jews, but also from the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	9	25	eqc2	writing-quotations	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει	1		This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are quotations from an Old Testament book ([Hosea 2:23](../../hos/02/23.md); [1:10](../../hos/01/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “As he says also in the scripture written by Hosea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	25	eqc2	writing-quotations	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει	1		This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are quotations from an Old Testament book ([Hosea 2:23](../hos/02/23.md); [1:10](../hos/01/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “As he says also in the scripture written by Hosea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	25	ewb4	writing-pronouns	λέγει…καλέσω…μου…μου	1		Here, **he**, **I**, and **my** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … I, God, will call … my … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	25	is9f	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	9	25	m82v	translate-names	τῷ Ὡσηὲ	1	Hosea	**Hosea** is the name of a man, an Old Testament prophet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	9	25	f0rx	figs-quotemarks	καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου, καὶ τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Hosea 2:23](../../hos/02/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	25	f0rx	figs-quotemarks	καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου, καὶ τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Hosea 2:23](../hos/02/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	25	yy15	figs-activepassive	τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1	her beloved who was not beloved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I did not love, ‘One I love’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	9	26	t46e	figs-quotemarks	καὶ ἔσται ἐν τῷ τόπῳ οὗ ἐρρέθη αὐτοῖς, οὐ λαός μου ὑμεῖς, ἐκεῖ κληθήσονται υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	her beloved who was not beloved	This verse is a quotation from [Hosea 1:10](../../hos/01/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	26	t46e	figs-quotemarks	καὶ ἔσται ἐν τῷ τόπῳ οὗ ἐρρέθη αὐτοῖς, οὐ λαός μου ὑμεῖς, ἐκεῖ κληθήσονται υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	her beloved who was not beloved	This verse is a quotation from [Hosea 1:10](../hos/01/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	26	ciif	figs-activepassive	ἐρρέθη	1	her beloved who was not beloved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that God said this in first person. Alternate translation: “I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	9	26	yh4w	figs-activepassive	κληθήσονται	1	her beloved who was not beloved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “I will call them” (2) people in general. Alternate translation: “people will call them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	9	26	wpuw	figs-metaphor	υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	sons of the living God	See how you translated **sons** in [8:14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	26	brl6	figs-idiom	Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	sons of the living God	Here, **the living God** identifies God as the one who lives and possibly as the one who gives life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the God who is alive” or “the God who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	9	27	oej1	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας δὲ κράζει ὑπὲρ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ	1	sons of the living God	This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 10:22–23](../../isa/10/22.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, as recorded in the Scriptures, Isaiah cries out concerning Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	27	oej1	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας δὲ κράζει ὑπὲρ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ	1	sons of the living God	This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 10:22–23](../isa/10/22.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, as recorded in the Scriptures, Isaiah cries out concerning Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	27	i93k	translate-names	Ἠσαΐας	1		**Isaiah** is the name of a man, an Old Testament prophet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	9	27	zqi1	figs-pastforfuture	κράζει	1	cries out	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **cries out** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “cried out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	9	27	xjca	figs-metaphor	Ἰσραήλ	1	cries out	Here, **Israel** refers to the the Israelites. They are the descendants of Jacob, whom God also called **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Israelites” or “the descendants of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	9	27	kgza	figs-quotemarks	ἐὰν ᾖ ὁ ἀριθμὸς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ, ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης, τὸ ὑπόλειμμα σωθήσεται.	1	cries out	This sentence is the beginning of a quotation from [Isaiah 10:22–23](../../isa/10/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	27	kgza	figs-quotemarks	ἐὰν ᾖ ὁ ἀριθμὸς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ, ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης, τὸ ὑπόλειμμα σωθήσεται.	1	cries out	This sentence is the beginning of a quotation from [Isaiah 10:22–23](../isa/10/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	27	b0is	figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ	1	cries out	Here, the word **sons** means refers to descendants. Paul quotes Isaiah identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	27	cxzn	translate-names	Ἰσραὴλ	1		**Israel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	9	27	qr8l	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης,	1		Paul quotes Isaiah leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “as the number of the grains of sand of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1757,14 +1757,14 @@ ROM	9	28	rupx	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** indicates th
 ROM	9	28	cm32	figs-metonymy	λόγον	1	the Lord will carry out his sentence on the earth	Here, **word** refers to God’s promise to both punish the Israelites and save a remnant from among them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his promise to punish and save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	9	28	pqri	figs-explicit	συντελῶν	1		Here, **finishing** refers to successfully completing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “successfully completing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	28	md3o	figs-metaphor	συντέμνων	1		Here, **cutting it short** refers to finish doing something quickly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “ending it quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	9	28	x832	figs-quotemarks		1	the Lord will carry out his sentence on the earth	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Isaiah 10:22–23](../../isa/10/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	9	29	gq8u	writing-quotations	καὶ καθὼς προείρηκεν Ἠσαΐας	1		This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 1:9](../../isa/01/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And just as Isaiah has said beforehand in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	28	x832	figs-quotemarks		0	the Lord will carry out his sentence on the earth	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Isaiah 10:22–23](../isa/10/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	29	gq8u	writing-quotations	καὶ καθὼς προείρηκεν Ἠσαΐας	1		This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 1:9](../isa/01/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And just as Isaiah has said beforehand in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	29	a0lg	translate-names	Ἠσαΐας	1		See how you translated this name in [verse 27](../09/27.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	9	29	xem9	figs-quotemarks	εἰ μὴ Κύριος Σαβαὼθ ἐνκατέλιπεν ἡμῖν σπέρμα, ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 1:9](../../isa/01/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	29	xem9	figs-quotemarks	εἰ μὴ Κύριος Σαβαὼθ ἐνκατέλιπεν ἡμῖν σπέρμα, ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 1:9](../isa/01/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	29	dl9x	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν…ἂν ἐγενήθημεν…ὡμοιώθημεν	1	us … we	Here the pronouns **us** and **we** refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	9	29	iqy3	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	us … we	Here, **seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated **seed** in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	29	scjg	translate-names	Σόδομα…Γόμορρα	1		**Sodom** and **Gomorrah** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	9	29	yicp	figs-explicit	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		Paul’s readers would have known that **Sodom** and **Gomorrah** were cities that God completely destroyed because the people who lived in them were very wicked ([Genesis 19](../../gen/19/01.md)). If your readers might not be familiar with this story, you could state this explicitly or indicate this in a note. Alternate translation: “we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom, and we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	9	29	yicp	figs-explicit	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		Paul’s readers would have known that **Sodom** and **Gomorrah** were cities that God completely destroyed because the people who lived in them were very wicked ([Genesis 19](../gen/19/01.md)). If your readers might not be familiar with this story, you could state this explicitly or indicate this in a note. Alternate translation: “we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom, and we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	29	mkmt	figs-parallelism	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Israel could have been completely destroyed by God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “we would have become just like Sodom and Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	9	29	obdz	figs-activepassive	ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God would have made us like Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	9	30	xv7y	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [verses 20–29](../09/20.md). See how you translated this phrase in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1787,7 +1787,7 @@ ROM	9	32	hzww	figs-metaphor	προσέκοψαν τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προ
 ROM	9	32	r14f	figs-possession	τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκόμματος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **stone** that causes **stumbling**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the stone that causes stumbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	9	33	kx9c	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it has been written	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17]. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	33	ivt3	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Isaiah and God is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” or “just as God said through Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	9	33	uo7d	figs-quotemarks	ἰδοὺ, τίθημι ἐν Σιὼν λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται.	1		This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of parts of [Isaiah 8:14](../../isa/08/14.md) and [28:16](../../isa/28/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	9	33	uo7d	figs-quotemarks	ἰδοὺ, τίθημι ἐν Σιὼν λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται.	1		This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of parts of [Isaiah 8:14](../isa/08/14.md) and [28:16](../isa/28/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	33	m6ll	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Paul quotes Isaiah using the term **Behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	33	hmmn	writing-pronouns	τίθημι	1		In this quotation from the Old Testament, **I** refers to God. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	33	dy6x	figs-metonymy	ἐν Σιὼν	1	in Zion	Here, **Zion** refers to the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1818,37 +1818,37 @@ ROM	10	4	nprh	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1		Here,
 ROM	10	4	f6pu	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	for righteousness for everyone who believes	See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	4	z3z9	figs-ellipsis	παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	for righteousness for everyone who believes	See how you translated **everyone who believes** in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	10	5	vsyn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	5	ozvf	writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς…γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 18:5](../../lev/18/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses writes in the Scriptures about the righteousness that is from the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	5	ozvf	writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς…γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 18:5](../lev/18/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses writes in the Scriptures about the righteousness that is from the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	5	m8my	figs-pastforfuture	γράφει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **writes** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	5	qby2	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about being righteous based on the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	5	dufv	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md) and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	10	5	jyjx	figs-quotemarks	ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	In this sentence Paul quotes [Leviticus 18:5](../../lev/18/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	5	jyjx	figs-quotemarks	ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	In this sentence Paul quotes [Leviticus 18:5](../lev/18/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	5	bh04	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul quotes Moses using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “man or woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	10	5	kt66	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	Here, **these things** refers to everything that God commanded the Jews in the Law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things written in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	5	e3po	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	Paul quotes Moses implying that the person must do all of **these things** perfectly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these things perfectly” or “every single one of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	5	qkz4	figs-explicit	ζήσεται	1	will live	Here, **will live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “will live forever” (2) a mortal life that God blesses. Alternate translation: “will stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	5	gsls	writing-pronouns	αὐτῇ	1	will live	Here, **it** refers to the Law of Moses, which was called **these things** earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	6	knmo	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	10	6	r3ey	writing-quotations	ἡ…ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 9:4](../../deu/09/04.md); [30:12–14](../../deu/30/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the righteousness by faith says thus in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	6	r3ey	writing-quotations	ἡ…ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 9:4](../deu/09/04.md); [30:12–14](../deu/30/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the righteousness by faith says thus in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	6	sr9z	figs-personification	ἡ…ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη…λέγει	1		Here, **righteousness** is described as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But Moses says thus about the righteousness by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	6	cgv8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη	1		See how you translated **righteousness** in [6:13](../06/13.md) and **by faith** in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	6	ksbr	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-ROM	10	6	ezma	figs-quotemarks	μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Deuteronomy 9:4](../../deu/09/04.md) and [Deuteronomy 30:12](../../deu/30/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	6	ezma	figs-quotemarks	μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Deuteronomy 9:4](../deu/09/04.md) and [Deuteronomy 30:12](../deu/30/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	6	x7h4	figs-youcrowd	σου	1	Do not say in your heart	Here Paul quotes Moses addressing the people of Israel as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun **your** is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **your** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	10	6	nwlw	figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ	1		See how you translated **heart** in [verse 1](../10/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	6	tf9r	figs-rquestion	τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	Who will ascend into heaven?	Paul quotes Moses using a question to teach his audience. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can ascend into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	10	6	gi7s	figs-explicit	τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν	1	that is, to bring Christ down	In this clause Paul explains the meaning of the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “That means to make Christ come down to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	6	y5c3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν	1	that is, to bring Christ down	Here, **to** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of bringing Christ down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	10	7	g827	writing-quotations	ἤ	1		Paul uses **or** here to connect a quotation from [Deuteronomy 30:12](../../deu/30/12.md) with a paraphrase of [Deuteronomy 30:13](../../deu/30/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that shows this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses also said not to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	10	7	j2t4	figs-quotemarks	τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον	1		In this sentence Paul paraphrases [Deuteronomy 30:13](../../deu/30/13.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	7	g827	writing-quotations	ἤ	1		Paul uses **or** here to connect a quotation from [Deuteronomy 30:12](../deu/30/12.md) with a paraphrase of [Deuteronomy 30:13](../deu/30/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that shows this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses also said not to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	7	j2t4	figs-quotemarks	τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον	1		In this sentence Paul paraphrases [Deuteronomy 30:13](../deu/30/13.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	7	w8xe	figs-rquestion	τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον?	1	Who will descend into the abyss	Paul quotes Moses using a question to teach his audience. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can descend into the abyss!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	10	7	gw0r	figs-explicit	τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναγαγεῖν	1		In this clause Paul explains the meaning of the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “That means to make Christ come up from dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	7	iw13	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναγαγεῖν	1	from the dead	See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	10	8	ian2	writing-quotations	τί λέγει?	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 30:14](../../deu/30/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does it say in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	8	ian2	writing-quotations	τί λέγει?	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 30:14](../deu/30/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does it say in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	8	sen1	figs-rquestion	τί λέγει?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “it surely says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	10	8	gz7t	figs-personification	τί λέγει?	1	But what does it say?	The word **it** refers to “the righteousness” referred to in [verse 6](../10/06.md). Here Paul continues to describe righteousness as if it were a person who could speak. See how you translated “the righteousness by faith says” in [verse 6](../10/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	8	n63g	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	But what does it say?	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **say** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “did it say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-ROM	10	8	hybn	figs-quotemarks	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	But what does it say?	In this sentence Paul quotes [Deuteronomy 30:14](../../deu/30/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	8	hybn	figs-quotemarks	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	But what does it say?	In this sentence Paul quotes [Deuteronomy 30:14](../deu/30/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	8	kzb2	figs-metaphor	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	The word is near you	Paul quotes Moses speaking of the **word** as if it were an object that could be **near** or **in** someone. He means that God’s message could be easily known and spoken by Moses’ audience. Alternate translation: “You can easily know and speak the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	10	8	sx8r	figs-metonymy	τὸ ῥῆμά	1	The word is near you	Paul quotes Moses using **word** to describe what God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	8	wpvg	figs-youcrowd	σου…σου…σου	1	The word is near you	Here Paul quotes Moses addressing the people of Israel as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of your in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
@@ -1871,7 +1871,7 @@ ROM	10	10	h20k	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1		See how you translat
 ROM	10	10	xs8c	figs-explicit	στόματι…ὁμολογεῖται	1	with the mouth	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	10	uroy	figs-abstractnouns	σωτηρίαν	1	with the mouth	See how you translated this abstract noun in [verse 1](../10/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	11	rlqi	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	11	r6tf	writing-quotations	λέγει…ἡ Γραφή	1		This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 28:16](../../isa/28/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	11	r6tf	writing-quotations	λέγει…ἡ Γραφή	1		This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 28:16](../isa/28/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	11	gu99	figs-personification	λέγει…ἡ Γραφή	1	For scripture says	Here Paul uses **the scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	11	whdz	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Everyone who believes on him will not be put to shame	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	11	nv71	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται	1	Everyone who believes on him will not be put to shame	See how you translated this sentence in [9:33](../09/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1883,8 +1883,8 @@ ROM	10	12	r2jx	figs-nominaladj	πάντων…πάντας	1	For there is no dif
 ROM	10	12	p9py	figs-explicit	πλουτῶν	1	he is rich to all who call upon him	Here, **being rich** means to bless others generously. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he richly blesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	12	oe6l	figs-explicit	ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν	1		Here, **call on** implies calling out to be saved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who call upon him to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	13	cxph	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	13	t4j7	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		**For** here introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Joel 2:32](../../jol/02/32.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For Joel wrote in the Scriptures that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	10	13	gpyj	figs-quotemarks	πᾶς…ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Joel 2:32](../../jol/02/32.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	13	t4j7	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		**For** here introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Joel 2:32](../jol/02/32.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For Joel wrote in the Scriptures that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	13	gpyj	figs-quotemarks	πᾶς…ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Joel 2:32](../jol/02/32.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	13	qvbd	figs-nominaladj	πᾶς	1		See how you translated **all** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	10	13	n4yp	figs-explicit	ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1		See how you translated “call on” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	13	pe96	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	For everyone who calls on the name of the Lord will be saved	Here, **the name of the Lord** represents **the Lord** himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1901,15 +1901,15 @@ ROM	10	15	nqwf	writing-pronouns	κηρύξωσιν…ἀποσταλῶσιν	1
 ROM	10	15	l0xu	figs-activepassive	ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	15	atg0	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	15	ylan	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Isaiah wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	10	15	bb0k	figs-quotemarks	ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά!	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	This sentence is a quotation of [Isaiah 52:7](../../isa/52/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	15	bb0k	figs-quotemarks	ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά!	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	This sentence is a quotation of [Isaiah 52:7](../isa/52/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	15	e8rt	figs-metonymy	ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	Here, **feet** refers to the action of going to other people and telling them the **good news**. If it would be helpful, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How beautiful is the going and preaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	16	gxqu	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	not all of them obeyed	**But** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	10	16	hku8	writing-pronouns	οὐ πάντες	1	not all of them obeyed	Here, **them** could refer to (1) the Jews, who are the main topic of chapters 9–11. Alternate translation: “not all of the Jews” (2) all people, as in [verses 13–15](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “not everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	16	dqe6	figs-personification	ὑπήκουσαν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul speaks of **the gospel** as if it were a person who could be **obeyed**. Paul is referring to obeying the command to repent and believe the **gospel**, which is part of the **gospel** message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obeyed what God commanded in the gospel” or “believed the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	16	eze8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	not all of them obeyed	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	16	o91x	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας…λέγει	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 53:1](../../isa/53/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	16	o91x	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας…λέγει	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 53:1](../isa/53/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	16	e25r	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-ROM	10	16	jvah	figs-quotemarks	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1		This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:1](../../isa/53/01.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	16	jvah	figs-quotemarks	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1		This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:1](../isa/53/01.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	16	j3se	figs-rquestion	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1	Lord, who has believed our message?	Isaiah is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, surely no one has believed our report!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	10	16	z4s9	figs-exclusive	τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν	1	our message	Here, **our** refers to God and Isaiah, which would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	10	16	yore	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν	1	our message	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **report**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what we report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1927,8 +1927,8 @@ ROM	10	18	f6jy	figs-rquestion	μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν?	1	But I say, “Did
 ROM	10	18	djbd	figs-explicit	ἤκουσαν	1	But I say, “Did they not hear?” Yes, most certainly	See how you translated **they** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	18	wxxj	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ οὐκ	1	But I say, “Did they not hear?” Yes, most certainly	The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	10	18	zux3	figs-explicit	μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1	But I say, “Did they not hear?” Yes, most certainly	See how you translated **hear** in [verse 14](../10/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	18	lz77	writing-quotations	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1		This sentence is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 19:4](../../psa/19/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	10	18	tnzy	figs-quotemarks	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	Their sound has gone out into all the earth, and their words to the ends of the world.	In this sentence Paul quotes [Psalm 19:4](../../psa/19/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	18	lz77	writing-quotations	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1		This sentence is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 19:4](../psa/019/004.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	18	tnzy	figs-quotemarks	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	Their sound has gone out into all the earth, and their words to the ends of the world.	In this sentence Paul quotes [Psalm 19:4](../psa/019/004.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	18	s5zh	figs-parallelism	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	Their sound has gone out into all the earth, and their words to the ends of the world.	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes David saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “What they said went everywhere in the whole world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	10	18	g4vd	figs-personification	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1		In this sentence **their** refers to the sun, moon, and stars as if they were people who could make a **sound** or speak **words**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof that went out into all the earth, and they are proof to the ends of the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	18	e2nx	figs-idiom	τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης	1		This is an idiom that refers to everywhere people live on the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1938,7 +1938,7 @@ ROM	10	19	imik	figs-quotemarks	μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω…ἐγὼ
 ROM	10	19	ib4m	figs-rquestion	μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?	1	Moreover, I say, “Did Israel not know?”	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Israel most surely knew!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	10	19	zyw0	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1		Here Paul uses the word **Israel** to refer to the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	19	dkcp	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ…οὐκ	1		The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ROM	10	19	k4gk	writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 32:21](../../deu/32/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	19	k4gk	writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 32:21](../deu/32/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	19	jjt3	figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1		This phrase means that Moses wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote down that God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	19	yt4r	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	First Moses says, “I will provoke you … I will stir you up to anger.”	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	19	qvfa	figs-parallelism	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	First Moses says, “I will provoke you … I will stir you up to anger.”	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I myself will make you jealous and angry by using a non-nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -1948,20 +1948,20 @@ ROM	10	19	vxzz	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς…παρο
 ROM	10	19	o0gr	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς…παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **jealousy** and **anger**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I myself will cause you to become jealous … I will cause you to become angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	19	ve6t	figs-explicit	ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει	1	by what is not a nation	The phrase **a non-nation** refers to a group of people whom God did not previously have a relationship with. The meaning of **non-nation** is similar to “not my people” used in [9:25–26](../09/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by those people who did not belong to me” or “by those people whom I did not consider to be a nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	19	s3nz	figs-explicit	ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ	1	By means of a nation without understanding	Here, **senseless** means that these people do not know God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	20	mrwz	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Then Isaiah was very bold when he says	Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:1](../../isa/65/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold and he says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	20	mrwz	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Then Isaiah was very bold when he says	Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:1](../isa/65/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold and he says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	20	kig6	figs-pastforfuture	ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verbs **is** and **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “was very bold and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	20	cv1x	figs-explicit	Ἠσαΐας…ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Then Isaiah was very bold when he says	This phrase means that **Isaiah** wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold and wrote down that God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	20	pp4f	figs-quotemarks	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting [Isaiah 65:1](../../isa/65/01.md) from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	20	pp4f	figs-quotemarks	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting [Isaiah 65:1](../isa/65/01.md) from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	20	yoxf	writing-pronouns	εὑρέθην…ἐμὲ…ἐμφανὴς…ἐμὲ	1		In this verse the pronoun **I** refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, was found … me; I, God, appeared … for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	20	wona	figs-parallelism	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1		These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I was revealed to those people who did not even want to know me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	10	20	fc4b	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρέθην…ἐμφανὴς	1	I was found by those who did not seek me	Paul quotes God using the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will be found … I will appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	20	u60f	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those who were not seeking me found me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	20	t78j	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1	I appeared	These two clauses refer to non-Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the non-Jews, who were not seeking me; I appeared to the non-Jews, who were not asking for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	21	pziq	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that makes this contrast clearer. Alternate translation: “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	10	21	afo5	writing-quotations	πρὸς…τὸν Ἰσραὴλ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:2](../../isa/65/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “to Israel God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	21	afo5	writing-quotations	πρὸς…τὸν Ἰσραὴλ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:2](../isa/65/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “to Israel God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	21	ksjg	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1		See how you translated **Israel** in [verse 19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	21	tp8d	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-ROM	10	21	gtwp	figs-quotemarks	ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν, ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting [Isaiah 65:2](../../isa/65/02.md) from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	21	gtwp	figs-quotemarks	ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν, ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting [Isaiah 65:2](../isa/65/02.md) from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	21	hw4w	figs-idiom	ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1	All the day long	**The whole day** here refers to doing something constantly or continually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	10	21	il8s	translate-symaction	ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1	I reached out my hands to a disobedient and stubborn people	The action of stretching out **hands** toward someone represents welcoming or inviting someone to be a friend. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I welcomed a disobedient and contrary people to be my friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ROM	10	21	g03t	figs-explicit	λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1	I reached out my hands to a disobedient and stubborn people	This phrase refers to **Israel**, whom God was speaking to in this quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you disobedient and contradictory people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1972,7 +1972,7 @@ ROM	11	1	p4zd	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸ
 ROM	11	1	b8tg	figs-explicit	τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ	1	did God reject his people?	Here, **his people** refers to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his people, the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	1	wqu2	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	11	1	mls4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	May it never be	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said earlier in the verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	1	ra9c	figs-rpronouns	καὶ …ἐγὼ…εἰμί	1	May it never be	Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize that he is proof that God has not rejected the Israelites. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I, indeed, also am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+ROM	11	1	ra9c	figs-rpronouns	καὶ…ἐγὼ…εἰμί	1	May it never be	Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize that he is proof that God has not rejected the Israelites. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I, indeed, also am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	11	1	ewxc	figs-metaphor	σπέρματος	1	May it never be	Here, **seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated seed in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	1	v1yd	translate-names	Ἀβραάμ	1	May it never be	See how you translated this name in [4:1](../04/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	11	1	bc4g	translate-names	φυλῆς Βενιαμείν	1	tribe of Benjamin	**Benjamin** is the name of a man. He is the ancestor of one of the 12 tribes into which God divided the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1980,19 +1980,19 @@ ROM	11	2	wzs6	figs-explicit	τὸν λαὸν αὐτο	1	whom he foreknew	See h
 ROM	11	2	h4qe	figs-distinguish	ὃν προέγνω	1	whom he foreknew	This phrase gives further information about God’s **people**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “they are the people whom he foreknew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	11	2	k2al	figs-explicit	προέγνω	1	whom he foreknew	See how you translated this phrase in [8:29](../08/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	2	cjp6	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	Do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleaded with God against Israel?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	11	2	q3lx	writing-quotations	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	they have killed	This sentence indicates that what follows in the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([1 Kings 19:10](../../1ki/19/10.md), [14](../../1ki/19/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel? He says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	11	2	q3lx	writing-quotations	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	they have killed	This sentence indicates that what follows in the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([1 Kings 19:10](../1ki/19/10.md), [14](../1ki/19/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel? He says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	11	2	dd1e	figs-personification	τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1	what the scripture says	See how you translated **the scripture says** in [10:11](../10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	11	2	z5lk	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει…ἐντυγχάνει	1	what the scripture says	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs **says** and **pleads** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … he pleaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	11	2	rien	translate-names	Ἠλείᾳ	1		**Elijah** is the name of a man, a prophet in the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	11	2	ki3n	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1		See how you translated **Israel** in [10:19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	11	3	rnut	figs-quotemarks		0	they have killed	This sentence is a quotation from [1 Kings 19:10](../../1ki/19/10.md), [14](../../1ki/19/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	3	rnut	figs-quotemarks		0	they have killed	This sentence is a quotation from [1 Kings 19:10](../1ki/19/10.md), [14](../1ki/19/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	3	fh9i	writing-pronouns	ἀπέκτειναν…κατέσκαψαν…ζητοῦσιν	1	they have killed	In this verse **they** refers to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel killed … they tore down … those people of Israel seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	3	fd5k	writing-pronouns	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος…μου	1	they have killed	In this verse **I** and **my** refer to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and only I, Elijah, was left behind … my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	3	ut1s	figs-activepassive	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος	1	I alone am left	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I alone am remaining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	3	dhg7	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος	1	I alone am left	Here, **left behind** means that Elijah thought he remained alive and all the other **prophets** had been killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and I alone remained alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	3	dv5u		ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου	1	seeking my life	The phrase **seek my life** refers to the people trying to kill Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they want to kill me”
 ROM	11	4	rj4e	figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to get his audience to pay attention to what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But pay attention to what the divine response says to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	11	4	ougb	writing-quotations	τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Here Paul uses this question to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:1](../../isa/65/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does the divine response say to him in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	11	4	ougb	writing-quotations	τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Here Paul uses this question to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:1](../isa/65/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does the divine response say to him in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	11	4	w8cl	figs-metonymy	τί λέγει…ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Paul speaks of **the divine response** as if it were a person who you **say** something. Paul is referring to God responding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what does God say in response” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	11	4	rvmy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “did … say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	11	4	x6e9	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	him	Here, **him** refers to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2016,16 +2016,16 @@ ROM	11	7	rzet	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ…ἐκλογὴ…οἱ…λοιποὶ	1
 ROM	11	7	jib7	figs-activepassive	ἐπωρώθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The next verse indicates that God is the one who did the action. Alternate translation: “God hardened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	7	bp19	figs-metaphor	ἐπωρώθησαν	1		Here, **hardened** refers to being made stubborn. If it would be helpful in your language you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were made stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	8	cv7s	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	11	8	u829	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation is a paraphrase of [Isaiah 29:10](../../isa/29/10.md) and [Deuteronomy 29:4](../../deu/29/04.md). Alternate translation: “just as God stated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	11	8	o53g	figs-quotemarks	ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, ἕως τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας	1		In these clauses Paul paraphrases [Isaiah 29:10](../../isa/29/10.md) and [Deuteronomy 29:4](../../deu/29/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	8	u829	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation is a paraphrase of [Isaiah 29:10](../isa/29/10.md) and [Deuteronomy 29:4](../deu/29/04.md). Alternate translation: “just as God stated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	11	8	o53g	figs-quotemarks	ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, ἕως τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας	1		In these clauses Paul paraphrases [Isaiah 29:10](../isa/29/10.md) and [Deuteronomy 29:4](../deu/29/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	8	kaqc	figs-possession	πνεῦμα κατανύξεως	1	God has given them a spirit of dullness, eyes so that they should not see, and ears so that they should not hear	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **dullness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a dull spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	11	8	z47a	figs-metaphor	πνεῦμα κατανύξεως	1	spirit of dullness	Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or manner of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an attitude of dullness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	8	zyk1	figs-metaphor	ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν	1	eyes so that they should not see	Paul quotes Moses using **eyes not to see** and **ears not to hear** to refer to being unable to understand something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being unable to perceive and unable to comprehend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	8	ny8w	figs-doublet	ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν	1	ears so that they should not hear	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the people of Israel were completely unable to understand how to become righteous. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “being completely unable to comprehend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ROM	11	9	kr0g	writing-quotations	Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	ears so that they should not hear	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:22–23](../../psa/69/22.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	11	9	kr0g	writing-quotations	Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	ears so that they should not hear	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:22–23](../psa/069/022.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	11	9	zobm	figs-pastforfuture	Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	ears so that they should not hear	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	11	9	zb64	translate-names	Δαυεὶδ	1	ears so that they should not hear	See how you translated this name in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	11	9	b507	figs-quotemarks	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν	1	ears so that they should not hear	This phrase begins a quotation of [Psalm 69:22–23](../../psa/69/22.md) that continues into the next verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	9	b507	figs-quotemarks	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν	1	ears so that they should not hear	This phrase begins a quotation of [Psalm 69:22–23](../psa/069/022.md) that continues into the next verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	9	x0wl	figs-activepassive	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God, cause their table to become a net and a trap” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	9	kpg8	figs-idiom	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1	Let their table become a net and a trap	This clause is an idiom. The word **table** represents feasting, which is the situation in which a person feels safe, and **net** and **trap** represent punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let them be punished while they are feeling safe” or “Punish them while they are comfortable”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	11	9	l6re	figs-doublet	εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize David’s plea for judgment. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “for thorough punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -2034,7 +2034,7 @@ ROM	11	9	xex5	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς	1	a retrib
 ROM	11	10	c1nj	figs-metaphor	σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν, τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν	1	bend their backs continually	This clause refers to being unable to understand something. See how you translated “eyes not to see” in [verse 8](../11/08.md). Alternate translation: “Let them be unable to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	10	j9ag	figs-activepassive	σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν	1	bend their backs continually	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Blind their eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	10	biqg	figs-metaphor	τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον	1		This clause refers to making people suffer like slaves suffer by carrying heavy burdens on **their backs**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “make them continually suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	11	10	p4s5	figs-quotemarks	παντὸς	1		The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 69:22–23](../../psa/69/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	10	p4s5	figs-quotemarks	παντὸς	1		The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 69:22–23](../psa/069/022.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	11	z8tw	grammar-connect-logic-result	λέγω οὖν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../11/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	11	dysl	writing-pronouns	μὴ ἔπταισαν…πέσωσιν…αὐτῶν…αὐτούς	1		In this verse the pronouns **they**, **their**, and **them** refer to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish people did not stumble … they might fall, did they … the Jewish people’s … the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	11	r9hg	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν?	1	Did they stumble so as to fall?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely they did not stumble so that they might fall!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -2146,12 +2146,12 @@ ROM	11	26	jo0j	figs-explicit	καὶ οὕτως	1		Here, **thus** indicates tha
 ROM	11	26	vu7t	figs-activepassive	πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται	1	Thus all Israel will be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save all Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	26	xjq4	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1	Thus all Israel will be saved	See how you translated **Israel** in [10:19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	11	26	wuyz	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	11	26	n7yf	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	just as it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation is from [Isaiah 59:20–21](../../isa/59/20.md) and [27:9](../../isa/27/09.md). Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	11	26	eb3j	figs-quotemarks	ἥξει ἐκ Σιὼν ὁ ῥυόμενος, ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ	1	just as it is written	This sentence is a quotation of [Isaiah 59:20–21](../../isa/59/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	26	n7yf	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	just as it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation is from [Isaiah 59:20–21](../isa/59/20.md) and [27:9](../isa/27/09.md). Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	11	26	eb3j	figs-quotemarks	ἥξει ἐκ Σιὼν ὁ ῥυόμενος, ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ	1	just as it is written	This sentence is a quotation of [Isaiah 59:20–21](../isa/59/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	26	dm4e	figs-metonymy	Σιὼν	1		See how you translated **Zion** in [9:33](../09/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	11	26	at55	figs-metaphor	ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας	1	He will remove ungodliness	Paul quotes Isaiah speaking of **ungodly things** as if they were an object that someone could **turn away**. If it would be helpful in you language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He will cause ungodly activity to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	26	bkr2	figs-metonymy	Ἰακώβ	1	from Jacob	Here, **Jacob** refers to the descendants of Jacob, who are also called Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” or “the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	11	27	cie8	figs-quotemarks		0	from Jacob	This verse is a quotation of [Isaiah 59:20–21](../../isa/59/20.md) and [27:9](../../isa/27/09.md) in which God is speaking. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	27	cie8	figs-quotemarks		0	from Jacob	This verse is a quotation of [Isaiah 59:20–21](../isa/59/20.md) and [27:9](../isa/27/09.md) in which God is speaking. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	27	q7e3	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς…παρ’ ἐμοῦ…ἀφέλωμαι…αὐτῶν	1	from Jacob	The pronouns **I** and **me** here refer to God, and **them** and **their** refer to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the people of Israel … with me, God, … I take away Israel’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	27	ll39	figs-metaphor	ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	I will take away their sins	Paul quotes God speaking of **sins** as if they were objects that someone could **take away**. He means that people are forgiven for the **sins** they have done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will remove the guilt of their sins” or “I will forgive them for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	28	ctn9	figs-explicit	κατὰ…τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	As far as the gospel is concerned	Here Paul implies the Jewish people rejecting the **gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to the Jews rejecting the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2181,19 +2181,19 @@ ROM	11	32	wxjl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	you	**For** here indicate
 ROM	11	32	t6cb	figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν…ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν	1	God has shut up all into disobedience	Here Paul refers to people whom God allows to disobey him as if they were prisoners **shut up** in a prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has allowed all people to be disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	32	obi0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπείθειαν…ἐλεήσῃ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **mercy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how disobedient they are … he might show how merciful he is on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	33	veuz	figs-exclamations	ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1		**Oh** is an exclamation word that communicates awe. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “How amazing is the depth of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-ROM	11	33	ldc5	figs-abstractnouns	βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **depth**, **wealth**, wisdom**, and **knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how deeply wealthy and wise and knowledgeable is God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	33	ldc5	figs-abstractnouns	βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **depth**, **wealth**, **wisdom**, and **knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how deeply wealthy and wise and knowledgeable is God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	33	x3kb	figs-metaphor	βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1	Oh, the depth of the riches both of the wisdom and the knowledge of God!	Here Paul refers to God’s **wealth**, **wisdom**, and **knowledge** as if they were like a deep place. He means that God’s **wealth**, **wisdom**, and **knowledge** are truly great. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	33	jbyn	figs-doublet	ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Oh, the depth of the riches both of the wisdom and the knowledge of God!	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize what Paul is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “How completely incomprehensible are the things he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	11	33	u322	figs-exclamations	ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering	**How** here is used as an exclamation word that communicates awe. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	11	33	qb5r	figs-metaphor	ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ	1	How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering	Here Paul speaks of God’s **judgments** as if they are objects that people cannot search for. He means that people cannot fully understand God’s **judgments**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “incomprehensible are his judgments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	33	urwo	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ	1	How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgements**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is how he judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	33	m755	figs-metaphor	ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering	Here Paul speaks of God’s **ways** as if they are objects that people cannot discover. He means that people cannot fully understand God’s **ways**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his ways are incomprehensible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	11	34	w1ck	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 40:13](../../isa/40/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	11	34	uh2x	figs-quotemarks	τίς…ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor?	This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 40:13](../../isa/40/13.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	34	w1ck	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 40:13](../isa/40/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	11	34	uh2x	figs-quotemarks	τίς…ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor?	This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 40:13](../isa/40/13.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	34	r2wj	figs-rquestion	τίς…ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor?	Paul quotes Isaiah using this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has known the mind of the Lord or become his advisor!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	11	34	yy52	figs-metonymy	νοῦν Κυρίου	1	the mind of the Lord	Here, **mind** refers to what a person knows and thinks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	11	35	wonz	writing-quotations	ἢ	1	the mind of the Lord	**Or** here indicates that what follows is Paul’s paraphrase of a verse in an Old Testament book ([Job 41:11](../../job/41/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or, as is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	11	35	dc62	figs-quotemarks	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1		This sentence is a paraphrase of part of [Job 41:11](../../job/41/11.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	35	wonz	writing-quotations	ἢ	1	the mind of the Lord	**Or** here indicates that what follows is Paul’s paraphrase of a verse in an Old Testament book ([Job 41:11](../job/41/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or, as is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	11	35	dc62	figs-quotemarks	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1		This sentence is a paraphrase of part of [Job 41:11](../job/41/11.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	35	j5cn	figs-rquestion	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ?	1	Or who has first given anything to God, that God must repay him?	Paul quotes Job using this question to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he should be repaid by him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	11	35	wm4s	figs-ellipsis	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	Or who has first given anything to God, that God must repay him?	Paul quotes Job leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Who gave something to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	11	35	jbjk	figs-activepassive	ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	Or who has first given anything to God, that God must repay him?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God should repay him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2280,253 +2280,512 @@ ROM	12	19	zre0	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὀργῇ…ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησ
 ROM	12	19	tcwn	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	give way to his wrath	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You may need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	12	19	omjp	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1	give way to his wrath	See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	12	19	ns3b	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Moses wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	12	19	kf44	figs-quotemarks	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω, λέγει Κύριος	1		This sentence is a quotation of [Deuteronomy 32:35](../../deu/32/35.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	12	19	kf44	figs-quotemarks	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω, λέγει Κύριος	1		This sentence is a quotation of [Deuteronomy 32:35](../deu/32/35.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	12	19	lkpl	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω, λέγει Κύριος	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord says that vengeance is for him; he will repay.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ROM	12	19	l2i8	figs-parallelism	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	12	19	xo5r	figs-metaphor	ἀνταποδώσω	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay	Here Moses quotes God using **repay** to refer to appropriately punishing someone as if the punishment was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	19	mco6	figs-ellipsis	ἀνταποδώσω	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay	Moses quotes God leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “will repay them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	12	20	n96q	writing-quotations	ἀλλὰ	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay	**But** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Proverbs 25:21–22](../../pro/25/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	12	20	q7dq	figs-quotemarks	ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.	1		This sentence is a quotation of [Proverbs 25:21–22](../../pro/25/21.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	12	20	n96q	writing-quotations	ἀλλὰ	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay	**But** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Proverbs 25:21–22](../pro/25/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	12	20	q7dq	figs-quotemarks	ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.	1		This sentence is a quotation of [Proverbs 25:21–22](../pro/25/21.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	12	20	c4ig	figs-yousingular	ὁ ἐχθρός σου…σωρεύσεις	1		Here the pronouns **your** and **you** are singular and addressed as to one person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plural forms here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	12	20	uwbq	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what was said in the previous sentence is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	12	20	wce6	figs-idiom	ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	You will heap coals of fire on his head	This clause is an idiom. It could refer to: (1) a person feeling shame as a result of being helped by someone whom that person had harmed. Alternate translation: “you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you” (2) God very severely punishing the person who is being helped. Alternate translation: “you will give God a reason to judge him more harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	12	21	q761	figs-personification	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν	1	Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil with good	Paul describes **evil** as if it were a person who could conquer someone or be conquered by someone. He is referring to someone doing evil in response to someone doing evil to that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil cause you to do evil, but use good to prevent evil from influencing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	12	21	p7fd	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ κακοῦ…τῷ ἀγαθῷ…τὸ κακόν	1	Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil** and **good**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things … evil things … good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	21	k8et	figs-activepassive	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil overcome you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	13	intro	l4q7			0		# Romans 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br><br>In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Ungodly rulers<br><br>When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
-ROM	13	1	v5ik			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers.
-ROM	13	1	b8nf	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ…ὑποτασσέσθω	1	Let every soul be obedient to	Here, **soul** is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Let every Christian obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	13	1	g1by		ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις	1	higher authorities	Alternate translation: “submit to government officials”
-ROM	13	1	wii2	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ…ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1	there is no authority unless it comes from God	This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ROM	13	1	j3lr	figs-activepassive	αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν	1	The authorities that exist have been appointed by God	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “And the people who are in authority are there because God put them there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	13	2	ui8y		τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ	1	that authority	Alternate translation: “that government authority” or “the authority that God placed in power”
-ROM	13	2	dsa3	figs-activepassive	οἱ…ἀνθεστηκότες, ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	those who oppose it will receive judgment on themselves	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge those who oppose government authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	13	3	m3yf		γὰρ	1	For	Paul uses this word to begin his explanation of [Romans 13:2](../13/02.md) and to tell about what will result if the government condemns a person.
-ROM	13	3	c2xa		οἱ…ἄρχοντες οὐκ εἰσὶν φόβος	1	rulers are not a terror	Rulers do not make good people afraid.
-ROM	13	3	jt2z		τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ,…τῷ κακῷ	1	to good deeds … to evil deeds	People are identified with their **good deeds** or **evil deeds**.
-ROM	13	3	z4sq	figs-rquestion	θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν?	1	Do you desire to be unafraid of the one in authority?	Paul uses this question to get people to think about what they need to do in order not to be afraid of rulers. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you how you can be unafraid of the ruler.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	13	3	ahl9		ἕξεις ἔπαινον ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	you will receive his approval	The government will say good things about people who do what is good.
-ROM	13	4	ink8	figs-litotes	οὐ…εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	he does not carry the sword for no reason	You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” or “he has the power to punish people, and he will punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ROM	13	4	s3vz	figs-metonymy	τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	carry the sword	Roman governors carried a short **sword** as a symbol of their authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	13	4	au7j	figs-metonymy	ἔκδικος εἰς ὀργὴν	1	an avenger for wrath	Here, **wrath** represents the punishment people receive when they do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “a person who punishes people as an expression of the government’s anger against evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	13	5	q81v		οὐ μόνον διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	Alternate translation: “not only so the government will not punish you, but also so you will have a clear conscience before God”
-ROM	13	6	r1jy		διὰ τοῦτο	1	Because of this	Alternate translation: “because the government punishes evildoers”
-ROM	13	6	r4b3		τελεῖτε	1	you pay	Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.
-ROM	13	6	hy4f		γὰρ…εἰσιν	2	For they are	Alternate translation: “This is why you should pay taxes: authorities are”
-ROM	13	7	z9cn		ἀπόδοτε πᾶσι	1	Pay to everyone	Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.
-ROM	13	7	wg2l	figs-ellipsis	τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	Tax to whom tax is due, toll to whom toll is due; fear to whom fear is due, honor to whom honor is due.	The word “pay” is understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due and toll to whom toll is due. Pay fear to whom fear is due and honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	13	7	nwi2	figs-metaphor	τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	fear to whom fear is due, honor to whom honor is due	Here paying **fear** and **honor** is a metaphor for fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored. Alternate translation: “Fear those who deserve to be feared, and honor those who deserved to be honored” or “Respect those whom you ought to respect, and honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	7	s2nf		τὸ τέλος	1	toll	This is a kind of tax.
-ROM	13	8	s8pb			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul tells believers how to act toward neighbors.
-ROM	13	8	a69g	figs-doublenegatives	μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν	1	Owe no one anything, except to love one another	This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “Pay all you owe to everyone, and fulfill your obligation to love one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ROM	13	8	ay3n		εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν	1	except to love one another	This is the one debt that can remain.
-ROM	13	8	p6cw		ὀφείλετε	1	Owe	This verb is plural and applies to all the Christians in Rome.
-ROM	13	8	i5au		ἀγαπᾶν	1	love	This refers to the kind of **love** that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself.
-ROM	13	10	vy62	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται	1	Love does not harm one’s neighbor	This phrase portrays love as a person who is being kind to other people. Alternate translation: “People who love their neighbors do not harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	13	11	b6l3	figs-metaphor	εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι	1	we know the time, that it is already time for us to awake out of sleep	Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to change their behavior as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	12	ahn4	figs-metaphor	ἡ νὺξ προέκοψεν	1	The night has advanced	Paul speaks of the time when people do evil deeds as **night**. Alternate translation: “The sinful time is almost over” or “It is as though the night is almost finished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	12	p7xp	figs-metaphor	ἡ…ἡμέρα ἤγγικεν	2	the day has come near	Paul speaks of the time when people do what is right as the **day**. Alternate translation: “the time of righteousness will begin soon” or “it is as though it will soon be day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	12	bb8t	figs-metaphor	ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Let us therefore put aside the works of darkness	Paul speaks of **works of darkness** as if they are clothing that a person puts aside. Here to **put aside** means to stop doing something. Here, **darkness** is a metaphor for evil. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing the evil things that people do in the dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	12	y5n4	figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσώμεθα…τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός	1	let us put on the armor of light	Here, **light** is a metaphor for what is good and right. Paul speaks of doing what is right as if it were putting on armor to protect one’s self. Alternate translation: “let us start doing what is right. Doing this will protect us from what is evil like armor protects a solider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	13	gv4q	figs-exclusive	περιπατήσωμεν	1	Let us walk	Paul includes his readers and other believers with himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	13	13	e6ij	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν	1	Let us walk appropriately, as in the day	Paul speaks of living as true believers as if one were walking while it is **day**. Alternate translation: “Let us walk in a visible way knowing that everyone can see us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	13	qes3	figs-doublet	κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις	1	in sexual immorality or in uncontrolled lust	These concepts mean basically the same thing. You can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “in sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ROM	13	13	h6xl		ἔριδι	1	strife	This refers to plotting against and arguing with other people.
-ROM	13	14	sir6	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν	1	put on the Lord Jesus Christ	Paul speaks of accepting the moral nature of Christ as if he were our outer clothing that people can see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	14	j795		ἐνδύσασθε	1	put on	If your language has a plural form for commands, use it here.
-ROM	13	14	xre7	figs-metonymy	τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε	1	make no provision for the flesh	Here the **flesh** refers to the self-directed nature of people who oppose God. This is the sinful nature of human beings. Alternate translation: “do not allow your old evil heart any opportunity at all for doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	14	intro	kt8c			0		# Romans 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br>    * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)<br>    * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Weak in faith<br><br>Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>### Dietary restrictions<br><br>Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>### The judgment seat of God<br><br>The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.
-ROM	14	1	abm6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God.
-ROM	14	1	jf8v		ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει	1	weak in faith	This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things.
-ROM	14	1	p697		μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	without giving judgment about arguments	Alternate translation: “and do not condemn them for their opinions”
-ROM	14	2	ii8g		ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα	1	One person has faith to eat anything	Some people believe God permits them to eat any kind of food.
-ROM	14	2	n2n6		ὁ…ἀσθενῶν λάχανα ἐσθίει	1	another who is weak eats only vegetables	This describes a person who believes God does not want him to eat meat.
-ROM	14	4	q9bx	figs-rquestion	σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην?	1	Who are you, you who judge a servant belonging to someone else?	Paul is using a question to scold those who are judging others. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are not God, and you are not allowed to judge one of his servants!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	14	4	xq7r	figs-yousingular	σὺ…ὁ κρίνων	1	you, who judges	The form of **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	14	4	ba38	figs-metaphor	τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει	1	It is before his own master that he stands or falls	Paul speaks of God as if he were a **master** who owned slaves. Alternate translation: “Only the master can decide if he will accept the slave or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	14	4	cp9y	figs-metaphor	σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν	1	But he will be made to stand, for the Lord is able to make him stand	Paul speaks of the servant who is acceptable to God as if he were being **made to stand** instead of falling. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	intro	l4q7			0		# Romans 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Submission to rulers<br><br>In [13:1–7](../13/01.md) Paul commands his readers to obey rulers and pay taxes. Some readers will find this difficult to accept, especially if they live in places where wicked rulers persecute the church. It is important to recognize that the Holy Spirit led Paul to write these words while the Roman government was persecuting Christians. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God. The only time a Christian should disobey governing authorities is when those rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do (for an example of such a situation, see [Acts 5:28–29](../act/05/28.md)).<br><br>### “The night advanced, and the day has come near”<br><br>In [13:11–14](../13/11.md) Paul tells his readers that they should behave like Jesus because Jesus is coming back soon. He calls the current time in which people do what is evil the “night,” and he calls the time when Jesus returns the “day.”
+ROM	13	1	i1kf	figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις ὑποτασσέσθω	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let every soul subject itself to governing authorities” or “Let everyone subject themselves to governing authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	13	1	b8nf	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ	1	Let every soul be obedient to	Paul uses **soul** here to refer to the whole life of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ROM	13	1	gkmd	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαις…ἐξουσία…οὖσαι	1	Let every soul be obedient to	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authorities** and **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to those who are authorized to govern … authorized people … existing ones who are authorized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	1	wii2	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ…ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1	there is no authority unless it comes from God	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	13	1	j3lr	figs-activepassive	αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν	1	The authorities that exist have been appointed by God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and God appointed the existing authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	13	2	ezg5	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		**So then** here introduces the result of what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing result. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	2	ui8y	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ, τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ διαταγῇ…ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	that authority	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authority**, **command**, and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who are authorized … what God has commanded … will cause themselves to be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	2	vc3u	writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ ἀνθεστηκότες	1	that authority	Here, **it** refers to **that authority** stated earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the ones who have opposed that authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	13	2	dsa3	figs-activepassive	ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	those who oppose it will receive judgment on themselves	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will cause God to bring judgment on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	13	2	y21s	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	those who oppose it will receive judgment on themselves	Here Paul speaks of **judgment** as if it were an object that one could **bring** and put **on** someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause God to judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	3	m3yf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	13	3	c2xa	figs-abstractnouns	φόβος…τὴν ἐξουσίαν…τὸ ἀγαθὸν…ἕξεις ἔπαινον	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **terror**, **authority**, **good**, and **praise**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “terrifying … whom God has authorized … good things … you will be praised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	3	jt2z	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ,…τῷ κακῷ	1	to good deeds … to evil deeds	Here, **the good deed** and **the evil deed** refer to the people who do those deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who do the good deed … to those who do the evil deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	3	z4sq	figs-rquestion	θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν?	1	Do you desire to be unafraid of the one in authority?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Now this is how you can not fear the authority:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	13	3	nohi	figs-activepassive	ἕξεις ἔπαινον	1	Do you desire to be unafraid of the one in authority?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the authorities will praise you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	13	3	ahl9	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	you will receive his approval	Here, **from** indicates the reason why **you will have praise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	4	w4s0	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	he does not carry the sword for no reason	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	4	j4kb	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν…οὐ…φορεῖ…ἐστιν	1		In this verse the pronoun **he** refers to a person who rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ruler is … the ruler does not carry … the ruler is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	13	4	zgz2	figs-abstractnouns	Θεοῦ…διάκονός…τὸ ἀγαθόν…τὸ κακὸν…Θεοῦ…διάκονός…ὀργὴν…τὸ κακὸν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **servant**, **good**, **evil**, and **wrath**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who serves God … doing good … evil things … one who serves God … what is wrathful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	4	quy4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	4	ink8	figs-litotes	οὐ…εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	he does not carry the sword for no reason	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ROM	13	4	s3vz	figs-metonymy	οὐ…τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	carry the sword	Here, **the sword** refers to a ruler’s authority to punish wicked people, which could include killing them with a sword. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he does not have the authority to punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	13	4	vx6b	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	3		Here, **for** indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	13	4	d61t	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὀργὴν	1	an avenger for wrath	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the purpose of **an avenger**. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate the purpose for something. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	13	4	au7j	figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν	1	an avenger for wrath	See how you translated **wrath** in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	13	4	cq0x	figs-metaphor	ὀργὴν τῷ τὸ κακὸν πράσσοντι	1		Paul speaks of **wrath** as if it were an object that could be put **on** a person. He means that every evil person will experience wrathful punishment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “wrath will be experienced by the one who practices the evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	5	jqz7	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1		See how you translated this word in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	5	sxq1	figs-activepassive	ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	13	5	aq7p	figs-explicit	ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1		Paul implies that his readers should **be subjected** to the rulers described in [verses 1–4](../13/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be subjected to rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	5	q81v	figs-ellipsis	διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath they can do to you, but also because your conscience knows that you should do submit to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	13	5	ykg9	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν…τὴν συνείδησιν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **conscience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is wrathful … what you are conscience of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	5	bs1u	figs-metonymy	τὴν ὀργὴν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	13	6	x5i2	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	13	6	r1jy	writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Because of this	Here, **this** could refer to: (1) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience” (2) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse, and the fact that rulers **are servants of God**. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience, and because rulers are servants of God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	13	6	hy4f	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For they are	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is another reason why Christians should **pay taxes**. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	6	ib5x	writing-pronouns	εἰσιν	1		Here, **they** refers to the rulers described in [verses 1–4](../13/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the rulers are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	13	6	gh12	figs-abstractnouns	λειτουργοὶ…Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	6	e8ey	figs-distinguish	εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο προσκαρτεροῦντες	1		This clause gives additional information about the rulers, who are called **servants of God** in the previous clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the connection between these clauses more explicit. Alternate translation: “these rulers are the ones persisting in this very thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	13	6	xmsa	figs-explicit	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this very thing** refers to serving God by ruling over people, as is indicated by Paul calling them **servants of God** in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	7	z9cn	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς ὀφειλάς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obligations**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you are obligated to pay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	7	wg2l	figs-ellipsis	τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	Tax to whom tax is due, toll to whom toll is due; fear to whom fear is due, honor to whom honor is due.	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due, pay toll to whom toll is due, show fear to whom fear is due, show honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	13	7	jg3u	figs-genericnoun	τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος	1	Tax to whom tax is due, toll to whom toll is due; fear to whom fear is due, honor to whom honor is due.	Paul is speaking of taxes and tolls in general, not of one particular **tax** and **toll**. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “taxes to whom taxes, tolls to whom tolls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+ROM	13	7	s2nf	translate-unknown	τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος	1	toll	The word **toll** refers to a specific kind of tax that must be paid in addition to regular taxes. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of tax, you could use a general expression for additional taxes. Alternate translation: “government fees to whom government fees” or “revenues to whom revenues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ROM	13	7	ao8q	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fear** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “fear whomever should be feared … honor whomever should be honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	7	nwi2	figs-metaphor	τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	fear to whom fear is due, honor to whom honor is due	Here Paul refers to fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored as if someone is paying them **fear** and **honor**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fear those who should be feared, honor those who should be honored” or “respect those whom you ought to respect, honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	8	a69g	figs-doublenegatives	μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε	1		If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Do not owe anyone anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	13	8	ay3n	figs-metaphor	μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν	1	except to love one another	Here Paul speaks of loving other believers as if it were a debt owed to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Owe nothing to no one, but love one another, as if it were a debt that you owed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	8	dptn	figs-explicit	τὸ ἀλλήλους	1	except to love one another	Here, **one another** refers to other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	8	auu3	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1	except to love one another	See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	13	9	qcri	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why loving others fulfills the law, as stated in the previous verse. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	9	r7kd	writing-quotations	τὸ	1		Here Paul uses **this** to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament ([Exodus 20:13–15](../exo/20/13.md), [17](../exo/20/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God had said in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	13	9	t0os	figs-quotemarks	οὐ μοιχεύσεις, οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ κλέψεις, οὐκ ἐπιθυμήσεις	1		These clauses are a quotation from [Exodus 20:13–15](../exo/20/13.md), [17](../exo/20/17.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	13	9	ng84	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τις ἑτέρα ἐντολή	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if there is any other commandment, and there is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ROM	13	9	mgc9	figs-explicit	τις ἑτέρα ἐντολή	1		Here, **any other commandment** refers to **any** of the commandments that God gave the Israelites other than those that Paul has just mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “there are any other commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	9	jva8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐντολή	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **commandment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thing God has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	9	x8i1	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ, ἀνακεφαλαιοῦται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this word summed it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	13	9	ytof	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1		Here Paul uses **word** to refer to a commandment that is made up of words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	13	9	ylb1	writing-quotations	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1		Here Paul uses **this word** to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament ([Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “in this commandment in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	13	9	so4u	figs-quotemarks	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	13	10	vy62	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται	1	Love does not harm one’s neighbor	Here Paul speaks of love as if it were a person who could do some kind of **work**. He means that people who love other people do not do **evil** things to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “People who love do not work evil to a neighbor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	13	10	xa4n	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον…κακὸν…πλήρωμα…νόμου…ἡ ἀγάπη	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love**, **evil**, and **fulfillment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Loving a neighbor … what is evil …fulfills the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	10	l92e	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1		See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	13	11	okty	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο	1		Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “And do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	13	11	dxm0	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers back to all the commands Paul stated in [12:1](../12/01.md)–[13:10](../13/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these commands that I have given you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	13	11	cdwh	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν	1		This clause indicates one reason for Paul’s readers to obey the commands he gave in [12:1](../12/01.md)–[13:10](../13/10.md). Use the most natural way in your language to express a reason. Alternate translation: “since you know the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	11	vd49	figs-distinguish	τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη	1	we know the time, that it is already time for us to awake out of sleep	Here, **that** indicates that what follows in this clause is a description of **the time** stated in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the connection between these clauses more explicit. Alternate translation: “that it is already the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	13	11	gvlw	figs-metonymy	ὥρα	1	we know the time, that it is already time for us to awake out of sleep	Here, **hour** refers to a point in time when something happens. It has the same meaning as **time** in the previous clause. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the point in time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	13	11	b6l3	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι	1	we know the time, that it is already time for us to awake out of sleep	Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to be spiritually vigilant as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for you to be spiritually vigilant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	11	acg2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	we know the time, that it is already time for us to awake out of sleep	**For** here indicates a reason why Paul’s readers should **awake from sleep**. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	13	11	s3p9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡμῶν ἡ σωτηρία	1	we know the time, that it is already time for us to awake out of sleep	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “our being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	11	jgib	figs-explicit	ἡμῶν ἡ σωτηρία	1		Here Paul uses **salvation** to refer to the future event when Christ returns and Christians receive the full blessings of their **salvation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the completion of our salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	11	sj56	figs-metaphor	ἐγγύτερον	1		Here Paul speaks of **our salvation** as if it were an object that could become **nearer** to a person. He means that **our salvation** will occur soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to happen sooner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	11	ra5t	figs-explicit	ὅτε ἐπιστεύσαμεν	1		This phrase indicates the time at which Paul’s Christian readers first started believing in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we first believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	11	rhdr	figs-ellipsis	ἐπιστεύσαμεν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	13	12	ahn4	figs-metaphor	ἡ νὺξ	1	The night has advanced	**The night** here refers the current time period when people do evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This time when people act sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	12	dioj	figs-metaphor	προέκοψεν	1	The night has advanced	Here, **advanced** refers to the **night** being almost over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon be over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	12	p7xp	figs-explicit	ἡ…ἡμέρα	2	the day has come near	Paul speaks of the time when Jesus will return to earth as **the day**. This event is referred to as “the day of the Lord” elsewhere in the Bible and is related to Paul’s reference to a future “salvation” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	12	v3m1	figs-metaphor	ἤγγικεν	1	the day has come near	Here Paul speaks of **the day** as if it were an object that could **come near** a person. He means that the time when Jesus returns will be soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	12	b4ed	figs-exclusive	ἀποθώμεθα…ἐνδυσώμεθα	1	the day has come near	In this verse **us** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	13	12	bb8t	figs-metaphor	ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Let us therefore put aside the works of darkness	Here, **put off** means to stop doing something, and **the works of the darkness** refers to evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	12	o888	figs-possession	τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Let us therefore put aside the works of darkness	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **works** that are characteristic of **the darkness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that are characteristic of the darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	13	12	y5n4	figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσώμεθα	1	let us put on the armor of light	Here, **put on** means to start doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us therefore start doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	12	rjz0	figs-possession	τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **weapons** that are characteristic of **the light**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the weapons that are characteristic of the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	13	12	dw5m	figs-metaphor	τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός	1	let us put on the armor of light	Here, **weapons** refers to what Christians do to oppose evil, and **the light** refers to good deeds, which is in contrast to **the darkness** in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the good deeds used for opposing evil” or “the good deeds that are like weapons for fighting evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	13	gv4q	figs-exclusive	περιπατήσωμεν	1	Let us walk	Here, **us** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	13	13	ketz	figs-metaphor	εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν	1	Let us walk appropriately, as in the day	Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us behave decently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	13	e6ij	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here Paul refers to the unashamed way that Christians are supposed to behave as if they were walking during **the day** when people can see what they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as if everyone can see what we are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	13	svuf	figs-ellipsis	μὴ κώμοις καὶ μέθαις, μὴ κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις, μὴ ἔριδι καὶ ζήλῳ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not walking in drunken celebrations or drunkenness; not walking in sexual immorality and uncontrolled lust, not walking in strife and jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	13	13	wd5c	figs-abstractnouns	κώμοις…μέθαις…κοίταις…ἀσελγείαις…ἔριδι…ζήλῳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **celebrations**, **drunkenness**, **immorality**, **lust**, **strife**, and **jealousy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in being drunk while celebrating … being drunk … in acting sexually immoral … lusting uncontrollably … in quarreling with others … being jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	13	qes3	figs-doublet	κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις	1	in sexual immorality or in uncontrolled lust	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize all kinds of sexual sins. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in every kind of sexually immoral act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ROM	13	14	emp4	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	in sexual immorality or in uncontrolled lust	What follows the word **But** here is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of doing those things,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+ROM	13	14	sir6	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν	1	put on the Lord Jesus Christ	Paul speaks of **Christ** as if he were clothing that someone could **put on**. He means that people should behave like **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “act like the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	13	14	j795	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε, εἰς ἐπιθυμίας	1	put on	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **forethought** or **desires**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “do not think with regard to what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	14	xre7	figs-metaphor	τῆς σαρκὸς	1	make no provision for the flesh	Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated a similar use of **flesh** in [7:18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	intro	kt8c			0		# Romans 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br>    * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)<br>    * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verse 11](../14/11.md) of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Weak in faith<br><br>Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” regarding some situations. This describes Christians whose faith is immature and who feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>### Dietary restrictions<br><br>In the Law of Moses, God forbid the Jews from eating the meat of some animals which God said were unclean. However, since Christians have been “made dead to the law” ([7:4](../07/04.md)), they are free to eat what they want. The Roman church that Paul wrote this letter to was made up of both Jews and Gentiles. Some of the Jewish believers were offended by the non-Jewish believers eating foods that God had previously forbidden in the Law of Moses. The non-Jewish believers were also judging the Jewish believers for not eating those foods. Paul uses this situation to teach that Christians must use their freedom in a way that honors the Lord and shows love to other believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we” and “us” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	14	1	jf8v	figs-metaphor	ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει	1	weak in faith	Here, **weak in the faith** refers to someone who does not have a mature **faith**, but feels guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. The word **weak** here does not refer to physical weakness. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose faith is not mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	1	bdy7	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει…διακρίσεις	1	weak in faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **judgments**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what he believes … judging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	1	p697	figs-ellipsis	μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	without giving judgment about arguments	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “not accepting that one for passing judgments on opinions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	1	i45s	grammar-connect-logic-goal	μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	without giving judgment about arguments	Here, **for** indicates that this clause is a purpose clause. Use the most natural way in your language to express a purpose. Alternate translation: “not for the purpose of passing judgments on opinions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	14	2	tuf5	figs-genericnoun	ὃς	1	One person has faith to eat anything	**One person** here does not refer to one particular person. It refers to any person who believes he can eat any food without sinning against God. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “One type of person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+ROM	14	2	ii8g	figs-ellipsis	ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα	1	One person has faith to eat anything	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “One person believes that God has permitted people to eat any type of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	2	n2n6	figs-metaphor	ὁ…ἀσθενῶν	1	another who is weak eats only vegetables	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	2	yhhy	figs-explicit	λάχανα ἐσθίει	1	another who is weak eats only vegetables	Here Paul implies that this person **eats** only **vegetables**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	3	n0xd	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐσθίων, τὸν μὴ ἐσθίοντα μὴ ἐξουθενείτω; ὁ δὲ μὴ ἐσθίων, τὸν ἐσθίοντα μὴ κρινέτω	1		Here, **the one who eats** refers to those people mentioned in the previous verse who believe that they can eat any kind of food, and **the one who does not eat** refers to those people called “the one who is weak” in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let the one who eats any type of food not despise the one who does not eat every type of food, and let the one who does not eat every type of food not judge the one who does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	3	pqrp	writing-pronouns	ὁ Θεὸς…αὐτὸν προσελάβετο	1		Although the pronoun **him** is singular, here it refers to both **the one who eats** and **the one who does not eat**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has excepted them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	14	4	q9bx	figs-rquestion	σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην?	1	Who are you, you who judge a servant belonging to someone else?	Paul is using a question to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have no right to judge a household slave belonging to another!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	14	4	xq7r	figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	you, who judges	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** here is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	14	4	vaym	figs-metaphor	ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην	1	you, who judges	Paul speaks of any Christian as if he were a **household slave** who belongs **to another**. He means that all Christians belong to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who belongs to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	4	ba38	figs-metaphor	τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ	1	It is before his own master that he stands or falls	Paul speaks of God as if he were a **master** who owns slaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “To God, who is his master,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	4	cp9y	figs-metaphor	τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει. σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν	1	But he will be made to stand, for the Lord is able to make him stand	This could mean: (1) **stands** and **stand** refer to pleasing God, and **falls** refers to not pleasing God. Alternate translation: “He pleases or does not please his own master. But he will be made to please God, for the Lord is able to make him be pleasing” (2) **stands** and **stand** refer to being accepted God at the final judgment, and **falls** refers to being condemned by God at the final judgment. Alternate translation: “He will either be approved or condemned by his own master. But he will be approved by God, for the Lord is able to approve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	4	togo	figs-activepassive	σταθήσεται	1	It is before his own master that he stands or falls	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will make him stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	14	4	ucto	figs-activepassive	σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν	1		You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	14	5	x7j2		ὃς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν; ὃς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν.	1	One person values one day above another. Another values every day equally	Alternate translation: “One person thinks one day is more important than all the others, but another person thinks that all days are the same”
-ROM	14	5	m511	figs-explicit	ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω	1	Let each person be convinced in his own mind	You can make the full meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “Let each person be convinced that he is honoring the Lord by what he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	5	y5ea	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω	1		You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Let each person be sure what he is doing is to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	14	6	pfn6	figs-explicit	ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν, Κυρίῳ φρονεῖ	1	He who observes the day, observes it for the Lord	Here, **observes** refers to worshiping. Alternate translation: “The person who worships on a certain day does it to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	6	esu5	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἐσθίων	1	he who eats	The word “everything” is understood from [Romans 14:3](../14/03.md). It can be repeatd here. Alternate translation: “the person who eats every kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	14	6	f9tm		Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει	1	eats for the Lord	Alternate translation: “eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord”
-ROM	14	6	jh8j	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων	1	He who does not eat	The word “everything” is understood from [Romans 14:3](../14/03.md). It can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “and he who does not eat everything” or “and the person who does not eat certain kinds of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	14	7	txm3	figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἑαυτῷ ζῇ	1	For none of us lives for himself	Here, **lives for himself** means to live only to please oneself. Alternate translation: “None of us should live merely to please ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	7	u9ar	figs-exclusive	οὐδεὶς…ἡμῶν	1	none of us	Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	14	7	c9ls	figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἑαυτῷ ἀποθνῄσκει	1	none dies for himself	This means anyone’s death affects other people. Alternate translation: “none of us should think that when we die, it affects only us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	8	s3lb	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Paul is speaking of both himself and his readers, so all instances of “we” are inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	14	10	db9a	figs-rquestion	τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου?	1	why do you judge your brother? And you, why do you despise your brother?	By using these questions, Paul is demonstrating how he might need to scold individuals among his readers. Alternate translation: “it is wrong for you to judge your brother, and it is wrong for you to despise your brother!” or “stop judging and despising your brother!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	14	10	al55	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἀδελφόν	1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated “brothers” in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	14	10	jq85	figs-metonymy	πάντες γὰρ παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For we will all stand before the judgment seat of God	The **judgment seat** refers to God’s authority to judge. Alternate translation: “For God will judge us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	14	11	fel6	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται γάρ	1	For it is written,	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For someone has written in the scriptures:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	14	11	tf76	figs-explicit	ζῶ ἐγώ	1	As I live	This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	11	sb6q	figs-synecdoche	ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1	to me every knee will bend, and every tongue will confess to God	Paul uses the word **God** and **tongue** to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	14	11	vngp	figs-123person	ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1		The Lord uses the word **God** to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-ROM	14	12	nsy8		περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	will give an account of himself to God	Alternate translation: “will have to explain our actions to God”
-ROM	14	13	ia62	figs-doublet	ἀλλὰ τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον	1	but instead decide this, that no one will place a stumbling block or a snare for his brother	Here, **stumbling block** and **snare** mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “but instead make it your goal not to do or say anything that might cause a fellow believer to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ROM	14	5	x7j2		κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν	1	One person values one day above another. Another values every day equally	Alternate translation: “considers one day to be different from another day” or “considers one day to be more important than another day”
+ROM	14	5	vm8j		κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν	1		Alternate translation: “considers all days to be the same” or “considers no day to be more important than another day”
+ROM	14	5	m511	figs-explicit	ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω	1	Let each person be convinced in his own mind	Paul implies that each person should be **convinced** about what he thinks honors the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let each one be fully convinced in his own mind that what he does honors the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	5	y5ea	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος…πληροφορείσθω	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let each one be completely certain” or “Let each one fully convince himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	6	pfn6	figs-explicit	ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν	1	He who observes the day, observes it for the Lord	**The one who regards** refers to the person in the previous verse who “judges day from day”. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The one who regards some days as more important than other days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	6	esu5	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἐσθίων	1	he who eats	Here, **the one who eats** refers to the person in [verse 3](../14/03.md) who eats all kinds of food. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from [verse 3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “the one who eats every kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	6	f9tm	grammar-connect-logic-goal	Κυρίῳ…Κυρίῳ…Κυρίῳ	1	eats for the Lord	In this verse the phrase **for the Lord** indicates the purpose for which these people act in these ways. Thy do so in order to benefit or honor the Lord. Use the most natural way in your language to express purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	14	6	ad27	figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστεῖ…τῷ Θεῷ…καὶ εὐχαριστεῖ τῷ Θεῷ	1	He who does not eat	Here Paul speaks of expressing **thanks** as if they were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he thanks God … he also thanks God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	6	jh8j	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων	1	He who does not eat	Here, **the one who does not eat** refers to the person in [verse 3](../14/03.md) who only eats vegetables. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from [verse 3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “the one who eats does not eat every kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	7	t6q7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For none of us lives for himself	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	14	7	u9ar	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	none of us	Here, **us** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	14	7	txm3	figs-explicit	ἑαυτῷ…ἑαυτῷ	1	For none of us lives for himself	Here, **for himself** means to do something only to benefit oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of himself … for the benefit of himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	7	c9ls	figs-ellipsis	οὐδεὶς	2	none dies for himself	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “none of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	8	gbxd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	none dies for himself	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	14	8	s3lb	figs-exclusive	ζῶμεν…ζῶμεν…ἀποθνῄσκωμεν…ἀποθνῄσκομεν…ζῶμεν…ἀποθνῄσκωμεν…ἐσμέν	1		In this verse **we** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	14	8	xf7x	figs-explicit	τῷ Κυρίῳ	-1		Here, **for the Lord** means to do something only to benefit **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of the Lord … for the benefit of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	8	r1hh	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** here indicates that what follows is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in [verses 14–20](../14/14.md). Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	14	9	pbyn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	14	10	xciu	figs-youcrowd	σὺ…κρίνεις…σου…σὺ…ἐξουθενεῖς…σου	1	why do you judge your brother? And you, why do you despise your brother?	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** and **your** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	14	10	db9a	figs-rquestion	τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου?	1	why do you judge your brother? And you, why do you despise your brother?	Paul is using two questions here to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no right to judge your brother! And you also have no right to despise your brother!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	14	10	al55	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἀδελφόν	-1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated “brothers” in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ROM	14	10	b497	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Christians should not judge each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not judge others due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	14	10	jq85	figs-metaphor	πάντες…παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For we will all stand before the judgment seat of God	Here, **present ourselves before** refers to standing in front of a judge in order to be judged, and **the judgment seat of God** refers to the place where God judges. Paul means that all believers will be judged by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will all be judged by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	11	pldr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	For it is written,	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	14	11	mr7r	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	14	11	fel6	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	For it is written,	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation is from [Isaiah 49:18](../isa/49/18.md) and [45:23](../isa/45/23.md). Alternate translation: “Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	11	lvwr	figs-quotemarks	ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος, ὅτι ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1		This sentence is quotations from [Isaiah 49:18](../isa/49/18.md) and [45:23](../isa/45/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	14	11	yeb5	writing-pronouns	ζῶ ἐγώ…ἐμοὶ	1	For it is written,	In this sentence **I** and **me** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As I, God, live … to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	14	11	dxdt	figs-infostructure	ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος	1	For it is written,	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “The Lord says, ‘As I live,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	14	11	tf76	figs-explicit	ζῶ ἐγώ	1	As I live	This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate an oath. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	11	sb6q	figs-synecdoche	κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1	to me every knee will bend, and every tongue will confess to God	Paul uses the words **knee** and **tongue** to refer to the entire person who is doing these acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person will bow down and every person will confess to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ROM	14	11	fokd	translate-symaction	κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ	1	As I live	This action was an expression of worship in this culture. See how you translated a similar expression in [11:4](../11/04.md). Alternate translation: “every person will worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ROM	14	11	glhx	figs-ellipsis	ἐξομολογήσεται	1	As I live	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “will confess that I am Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	11	vngp	figs-123person	τῷ Θεῷ	1		The Lord uses the word **God** to refer to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+ROM	14	12	q0fv	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	14	12	nsy8		περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	will give an account of himself to God	Alternate translation: “must explain our actions to God”
+ROM	14	12	zb6k	figs-gendernotations	περὶ ἑαυτοῦ	1	will give an account of himself to God	Although the term **himself** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “concerning oneself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ROM	14	13	epi0	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	but instead decide this, that no one will place a stumbling block or a snare for his brother	**Therefore** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the result of what Paul said in [verses 10–12](../14/10.md). Use a natural way in your language to introduce the result of something. Alternate translation: “Because of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	14	13	ia62	figs-doublet	τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον	1	but instead decide this, that no one will place a stumbling block or a snare for his brother	Here, **stumbling block** and **trap** mean basically the same thing. They both refer to tempting someone to sin. The repetition is used to emphasize what Paul is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “not to do or say anything at all that might cause a brother to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ROM	14	13	fgg7	figs-metaphor	τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα	1	but instead decide this, that no one will place a stumbling block or a snare for his brother	See how you translated **stumbling block** in [11:9](../11/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	13	cx4s	figs-gendernotations	τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in [verse 10](../14/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	14	14	t7gc	figs-doublet	οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	Here the words **know** and **am persuaded** mean basically the same thing; Paul uses them to emphasize his certainty. Alternate translation: “I am certain because of my relationship with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ROM	14	14	fuk1	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	nothing is unclean by itself	You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	14	14	t7gc	figs-doublet	οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	Here the words **know** and **am persuaded** mean basically the same thing; Paul uses them to emphasize his certainty. Alternate translation: “I am completely certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ROM	14	14	qm09	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	Here, **in** could indicate: (1) the means by which Paul was persuaded. Alternate translation: “by means of the Lord Jesus” (2) Paul being united with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	14	erfx	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν κοινὸν…κοινὸν…κοινόν	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	The next verse indicates that here Paul is specifically referring to **unclean** foods, which were foods that Jews were forbidden to eat according to the Law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no food is forbidden to be eaten … forbidden … it is forbidden food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	14	fuk1	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	nothing is unclean by itself	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	14	14	mjc5		δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	by itself	Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is”
-ROM	14	14	w3gg	figs-explicit	εἰ μὴ τῷ λογιζομένῳ τι κοινὸν εἶναι, ἐκείνῳ κοινόν	1	Only for him who considers anything to be unclean, for him it is unclean	Paul implies here that a person should stay away from anything that he thinks is unclean. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “but if a person thinks something is unclean, then for that person it is unclean and he should stay away from it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	15	iw7w		εἰ…διὰ βρῶμα, ὁ ἀδελφός σου λυπεῖται	1	If because of food your brother is hurt	“If you hurt your fellow believer’s faith over the matter of food.” Here the word **your** refers to those who are strong in faith and **brother** refers to those who are weak in faith.
+ROM	14	15	vd20	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	by itself	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul’s readers should obey the command he gave in [verse 13](../14/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not place a stumbling block before your brother because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	14	15	iw7w	figs-explicit	διὰ βρῶμα	1	If because of food your brother is hurt	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christians thinks is unclean, as mentioned in the previous verse and [verses 2–6](../14/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “over the matter of food” or “because of what you eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	15	tfix	figs-youcrowd	σου…περιπατεῖς…σου	1		Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **your** and **you** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	14	15	ln42	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἀδελφός	1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in [verse 10](../14/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	14	15	bj8v	figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς	1	you are no longer walking in love	Paul speaks of the behavior of believers as if it were a walk. Alternate translation: “then you are no longer showing love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	14	16	gl48		μὴ βλασφημείσθω οὖν ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	So do not allow what you consider to be good to be spoken of as evil	Alternate translation: “If someone else thinks that something is evil, do not do it, even if you consider it to be good”
-ROM	14	17	j92k	figs-explicit	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ βρῶσις καὶ πόσις, ἀλλὰ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	For the kingdom of God is not about food and drink, but about righteousness, peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit	Paul argues that God set up his **kingdom** so he could give us a right relationship with himself, and to provide peace and joy. Alternate translation: “For God did not set up his kingdom so that he could rule over what we eat and drink. He set up his kingdom so we could have a right relationship with him, and so he could give us peace and joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	18	am8m	figs-activepassive	δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	approved by people	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “people will approve of him” or “people will respect him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	14	19	i3rv	figs-explicit	τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκωμεν, καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	let us pursue the things of peace and the things that build up one another	Here, **build up one another** refers to helping each other grow in faith. Alternate translation: “let us seek to live peacefully together and help one another grow stronger in faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	20	p65h	figs-explicit	μὴ ἕνεκεν βρώματος, κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	You can make explicit the full meaning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “Do not undo what God has done for a fellow believer just because you want to eat a certain kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	20	dk72	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι	1	but it is evil for that person who eats and causes him to stumble	Here a **stumbling block** is a food that a weaker brother eats despite thinking it is wrong, and thereby goes against his conscience. Alternate translation: “but it would be a sin for someone to eat food, which another brother thinks is wrong to eat, if by eating this causes the weaker brother to do something that is against his conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	21	mrr4		καλὸν τὸ μὴ φαγεῖν κρέα, μηδὲ πιεῖν οἶνον, μηδὲ ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἀδελφός σου προσκόπτει	1	It is good not to eat meat, nor to drink wine, nor anything by which your brother takes offense	Alternate translation: “It is better not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything else that might cause your brother to sin”
+ROM	14	15	a4kj	figs-metaphor	λυπεῖται	1	brother	Here, **hurt** refers to experiencing emotional suffering or offense. It does not refer to being physically injured. If it would be helpful in your language you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is offended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	15	bj8v	figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς	1	you are no longer walking in love	Here Paul uses **walking** to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See similar uses of “walk” in [6:4](../06/04.md), [8:4](../08/04.md), and [13:13](../13/13.md). Alternate translation: “you are no longer behaving according to love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	15	n099	figs-explicit	μὴ τῷ βρώματί σου ἐκεῖνον ἀπόλλυε, ὑπὲρ οὗ Χριστὸς ἀπέθανεν	1	you are no longer walking in love	Paul uses **destroy** here to refer to causing someone to stop trusting in Jesus, which will result in that person experiencing punishment forever in hell. See how you translated “destruction” in [9:22](../09/22.md). Alternate translation: “Do not cause that one from whom Christ died to stop trusting in Jesus and experience eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	15	sn7w	figs-explicit	τῷ βρώματί σου	1	you are no longer walking in love	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christian thinks is unclean, as mentioned in the previous verse and [verses 2–6](../14/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “over the matter of food” or “because of what you eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	16	zgzz	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the previous verses. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	14	16	rvtd	figs-abstractnouns	ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	16	h3af	figs-explicit	τὸ ἀγαθόν	1		Here, **good** could refer to: (1) the **good** things that God gives Christians. Alternate translation: “good things” (2) the freedom that Christians have to eat any food they want to eat. Alternate translation: “your freedom to eat anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	16	gl48	figs-activepassive	μὴ βλασφημείσθω…ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	So do not allow what you consider to be good to be spoken of as evil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not allow people to blaspheme your good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	17	v6jq	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	14	17	m0ya	figs-explicit	οὐ…ἐστιν	1		Here, **is not** indicates that what follows is what **the kingdom of God** does not consist of or is not concerned with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not consist of” or “is not concerned with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	17	tyyq	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	17	j92k	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ	1	For the kingdom of God is not about food and drink, but about righteousness, peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness**, **peace**, and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is righteous and what is peaceful and what is joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	17	sdlj	figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		Here, **in the Holy Spirit** could refer to: (1) the means by which Christians experience **righteousness and peace and joy**. Alternate translation: “by the Holy Spirit” (2) Christians being united with **the Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	18	i2za	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	14	18	iqg3	figs-explicit	ἐν τούτῳ	1		Here, **this way** refers to the “righteousness and peace and joy” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in this righteous, peaceful, and joyful way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	18	am8m	figs-activepassive	δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	approved by people	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “men approve it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	18	gy7n	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	approved by people	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ROM	14	19	q5fk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	14	19	xxgm	figs-metaphor	διώκωμεν	1		Here Paul refers to **the things of peace and the things of the building up** as if they were something that people could **pursue**. He is telling Christians to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us commit to doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	19	sfpg	figs-possession	τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης…καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** that result in the **peace** and **the building up** of other Christians. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the things that result in peace and the things that result in building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	14	19	i3rv	figs-metaphor	τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	let us pursue the things of peace and the things that build up one another	Here, Paul speaks of helping other Christians become more spiritually mature as if one were **building up** a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things that help one another grow spiritually mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	20	p65h	figs-explicit	μὴ…κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	Here, **tear down** refers to undoing **the work** God has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not undo the work of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	20	zbd1	figs-explicit	ἕνεκεν βρώματος	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christian thinks is unclean, as mentioned in [verses 2–6](../14/02.md), [13–17](../14/13.md). See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	20	r7u3	figs-explicit	πάντα μὲν καθαρά	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	Here, **things** refers to food and **clean** refers to something that God has permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All foods are indeed permitted by God to be eaten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	20	l75q	writing-pronouns	κακὸν	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	Here, **it** refers to the act of eating a food that someone believes God has not permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating those things is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	14	20	dk72	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι	1	but it is evil for that person who eats and causes him to stumble	Here **eats with a stumbling block** refers to tempting another believer to sin by eating food that the other believer thinks is sinful to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the man to eat what causes another believer to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	20	fz0m	figs-metaphor	προσκόμματος	1	but it is evil for that person who eats and causes him to stumble	See how you translated **stumbling block** in [11:9](../11/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	21	mrr4	figs-ellipsis	μηδὲ	2	It is good not to eat meat, nor to drink wine, nor anything by which your brother takes offense	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “nor do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	14	21	e1du	figs-youcrowd	σου	1	your	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **your** here is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	14	21	iq9g	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἀδελφός	1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in [verse 10](../14/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	14	21	e1du	figs-yousingular	σου	1	your	Here, **you** is singular and stresses the responsibility of each individual believer for his fellow believer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	14	22	hjk9		σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	The faith you have	Here, **faith** refers back to the beliefs about food and drink.
-ROM	14	22	b3hi	figs-yousingular	σὺ…σεαυτὸν	1	you … yourself	Here, **you** and **yourself** are singular. Because Paul is addressing the believers, you may have to translate this using plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	14	22	r53r		μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves	Alternate translation: “Blessed are those who do not feel guilty for what they decide to do”
-ROM	14	23	s1ph	figs-activepassive	ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται	1	He who doubts is condemned if he eats	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	14	23	yr44	figs-explicit	ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως	1	because it is not from faith	Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	23	tr9i	figs-explicit	πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν	1	whatever is not from faith is sin	Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	intro	ae9u			0		# Romans 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br>    * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)<br>    * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)<br>    * Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)<br>8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)<br>    * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)<br>    * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.<br><br>In [Romans 15:14](../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Strong/Weak<br><br>These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
-ROM	15	1	cx66			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived.
-ROM	15	1	u19s		δὲ	1	Now	Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument.
-ROM	15	1	u73x	figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ	1	we who are strong	Here, **strong** refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	1	dx9d	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	This refers to Paul, his readers, and other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	15	1	cv61	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀδυνάτων	1	of the weak	Here, **the weak** refers to the people who are weak in their faith. They believe that God does not allow them to eat some kinds of food. Alternate translation: “those who are weak in faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	2	z2k8	figs-explicit	πρὸς οἰκοδομήν	1	in order to build him up	By this, Paul means to strengthen someone’s faith. Alternate translation: “to strengthen his faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	3	y6fe	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	3	bcz1	figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	it was just as it is written	Here Paul refers to a scripture where Christ (the Messiah) speaks to God. Alternate translation: “the Messiah said to God in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	3	qni7		οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	The insults of those who insulted you fell on me	The insults of those who insulted God fell on Christ.
-ROM	15	4	txd4	figs-activepassive	ὅσα γὰρ προεγράφη, εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν ἐγράφη	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For in times past, the prophets wrote everything in the Scriptures to teach us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	4	m7yy	figs-exclusive	ἡμετέραν…ἔχωμεν	1	our … we have	Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	15	4	g6r1	figs-explicit	ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν	1	in order that through patience and through encouragement of the scriptures we would have certain hope	Here, **have hope** means that the believers will know that God will fulfill his promises. You can make explicit the full meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way the scriptures will encourage us to expect that God will do for us everything that he has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	5	u2zm			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul encourages the believers to remember that both Gentile believers and Jews that believe are made one in Christ.
-ROM	15	5	g5xm		Θεὸς…δῴη	1	may … God … grant	Alternate translation: “I pray that … God … will grant”
-ROM	15	5	ws7q		τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις	1	to be of the same mind with each other	Alternate translation: “to be in agreement with each other” or “to be united”
-ROM	15	6	uz1z	figs-metonymy	ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε	1	praise with one mouth	This means to be united in praising God. Alternate translation: “praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	15	7	z941		προσλαμβάνεσθε ἀλλήλους	1	receive one another	Alternate translation: “accept one another”
-ROM	15	8	gbh8		λέγω γὰρ	1	For I say	The pronoun **I** refers to Paul.
-ROM	15	8	k4my	figs-metonymy	Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς	1	Christ has been made a servant of the circumcision	Here, **the circumcision** is a metonym that refers to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has been made a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	15	8	r0gd	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς	1		You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has become a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	8	me1e		εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1	in order to confirm the promises	This is one of the two purposes for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision.
-ROM	15	8	gu7z	figs-explicit	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1	the promises given to the fathers	Here, **the fathers** refers to the ancestors of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the promises to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	21	m5nb	figs-metaphor	προσκόπτει	1	brother	Here, **stumbles** refers to another believer being tempted to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is tempted to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	21	k1bn	translate-textvariants	ἢ σκανδαλίζεται, ἢ ἀσθενεῖ	1	your	These words are found in some traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+ROM	14	21	o6kn	figs-activepassive	σκανδαλίζεται, ἢ ἀσθενεῖ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that offends him or makes him weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	21	mnon	figs-metaphor	ἀσθενεῖ	1		Here, **weak** refers to being spiritually immature. See how you translated “weak in the faith” in [verse 1](../14/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	22	u1cf	figs-abstractnouns	σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	The faith you have	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The things that you yourself believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	22	hjk9	figs-explicit	σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	The faith you have	Here, **faith** refers to what Christians believe that God permits them to do, as mentioned in [verses 1–6](../14/01.md). If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The beliefs that your yourself have about what God permits you do to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	22	b3hi	figs-youcrowd	σὺ…ἔχεις…σεαυτὸν	1		Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** and **yourself** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	14	22	tkse	figs-explicit	κατὰ σεαυτὸν ἔχε ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This clause means to keep one’s beliefs between oneself and God, rather than telling other people about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “keep it to yourself and God” or “keep it between you and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	22	bi7e	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of people keeping what they believe **before God**, as if they were standing in front of God. Paul means that people should keep private their beliefs about what God permits them to do as if God is the only one who knows about those beliefs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	22	r53r	figs-explicit	ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν	1	Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves	Here, **judge** refers to feeling guilty or condemning oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the one who does not feel guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	22	odxh	figs-gendernotations	ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves	Although the terms **himself** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “oneself in what one approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ROM	14	22	r8a1		ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves	Alternate translation: “with respect to what he approves” or “in regard to what he approves”
+ROM	14	23	zexs	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+ROM	14	23	s1ph	figs-activepassive	ὁ…διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται	1	He who doubts is condemned if he eats	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God condemns the one who passes judgment if he eats” (2) the person who eats. Alternate translation: “the one who passes judgment condemns himself if he eats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	23	wa8s	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ…διακρινόμενος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	23	dkcw	figs-explicit	ὁ…διακρινόμενος	1		This phrase refers to a person who has determined that eating certain foods is prohibited by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who judges that it is not right to eat certain foods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	23	b6t9	figs-explicit	ἐὰν φάγῃ	1		Paul implies that the person **eats** what that person believes God has forbidden to be eaten. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if he eats what he thinks God has forbidden him to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	23	l9ga	writing-pronouns	οὐκ	1		Here, **it** refers to eating food that someone believes God has forbidden to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating what one thinks is forbidden to eat is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	14	23	yr44	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	-1		In this verse **from** refers to what a person bases their actions on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on faith … based on faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	23	z696	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως…πίστεως	1		See how you translated the abstract noun **faith** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	23	u80o	figs-explicit	πᾶν	1		Here, **all** refers to anything that a person does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all that a person does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	23	u9p2	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία	1	whatever is not from faith is sin	See how you translated the abstract noun **sin** in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	intro	ae9u			0		# Romans 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br>    * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)<br>    * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)<br>    * Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)<br>8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)<br>    * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)<br>    * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verses 9–11](../15/09.md) and [21](../15/21.md) of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in [verse 12](../15/12.md).<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Able and unable<br><br>In [verses 1–6](../15/01.md) Paul concludes his teaching from chapter 14 about how Christians with different degrees of spiritual maturity should act toward each other. He refers to some Christians as those who are “weak in faith” ([14:1](../14/01.md)) or “unable” ([15:1](../15/01.md)). These phrases describe Christians who have immature faith and feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. By contrast, he refers to spiritually mature Christians as those who are “able” ([15:1](../15/01.md)). Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith and neither should judge each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>## Forms of ‘You’<br><br>In this chapter, with three exceptions, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to Paul’s Christian readers, whom he calls “brothers” in [verses 14](../15/14.md) and [30](../15/30.md). Notes will discuss the use of singular forms of “you” and “your” in [verses 3](../15/03.md) and [9](../15/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])<br><br>## Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ourselves” refer inclusively to Paul’s Christian readers. Paul calls these people “brothers” in [verses 14](../15/14.md) and [30](../15/30.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	15	1	u19s	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…ἑαυτοῖς	1	Now	Here and throughout this chapter the pronouns **we** and **ourselves** refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	15	1	u73x	figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ	1	we who are strong	Here, **we who are able** refers to Paul and other people who have mature faith. See the discussion about this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we who have mature faith” or “we who are spiritually strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	1	h18p	figs-metaphor	τὰ ἀσθενήματα…βαστάζειν	1	we who are strong	Paul speaks of **weaknesses** as if they were objects that a person could **bear**. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help overcome the weaknesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	1	kuhe	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἀσθενήματα	1	we who are strong	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weaknesses**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the weak qualities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	1	cv61	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀδυνάτων	1	of the weak	Here, **the ones who are unable** refers to Christians who are not spiritually mature. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the ones who have immature faith” or “of the ones who are spiritually weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	2	bkon	figs-explicit	τῷ πλησίον	1		Here, **neighbor** refers to other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	2	kz0t	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς…πρὸς	1	in order to build him up	Here, **for** and **toward** indicate that what follows are purposes for pleasing one’s **neighbor**. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose … and for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	2	z2k8	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομήν	1	in order to build him up	See how you translated **building up** in [14:19](../14/19.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	3	jqul	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is an example of pleasing others, as Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	3	h571	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	15	3	y6fe	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something David wrote, you could indicate David as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	3	bcz1	figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	it was just as it is written	In the quotation that follows, Paul quotes [Psalm 69:9](../psa/069/009.md) in which David records **Christ** (the Messiah) speaking to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as it is written that the Messiah said to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	3	nlu9	figs-quotemarks	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	it was just as it is written	This sentence is a quotation of [Psalm 69:9](../psa/069/009.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	15	3	ulis	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ	1	it was just as it is written	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **insults**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the insulting words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	3	qni7	figs-metaphor	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	The insults of those who insulted you fell on me	Paul quotes David referring to insults against God also affecting Christ as if those insults were objects that **fell** on him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The insults of those who insult you were also insults against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	4	h6qm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	**For** here indicates that what follows emphasizes the importance of the quotation from Scripture in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	4	txd4	figs-activepassive	ὅσα…προεγράφη…ἐγράφη	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whatever the prophets wrote previously they wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	4	pgdw	figs-explicit	ὅσα…προεγράφη	1		Paul is referring to what **was previously written** in the Hebrew Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what was previously written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	4	q3jp	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς…ἵνα	1		Here, **for** and **in order that** indicate that what follows are purposes for the Scriptures. Use the natural form in your language for indicating purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	4	dx6h	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **instruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for instructing us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	4	wk5h	figs-infostructure	ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “in order that we would have the hope through the patience and through the encouragement of the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	15	4	i0z9	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς…τῆς παρακλήσεως…τὴν ἐλπίδα	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **patience**, **encouragement**, and **hope**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **patience** in [2:4](../02/04.md), **encouragement** in [12:8](../12/08.md), and **hope** in [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	4	g6r1	figs-personification	διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν	1	through patience and through encouragement of the scriptures we would have certain hope	Here Paul speaks about **the Scriptures** as if they were a person who could have **patience** and be encouraging. He means that God uses **the Scriptures** to show his **patience** and **encouragement**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through the patience and through the encouragement that God gives in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	15	5	y97a	figs-possession	ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as being characterized by **patience** and **encouragement**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by patience and encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	5	u2zm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς…τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		See how you translated **patience** and **encouragement** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	5	ip4l		τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις	1		Alternate translation: “to agree with each other”
+ROM	15	5	g5xm	figs-explicit	κατὰ Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		This could refer to: (1) the example of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “according to the example of Christ Jesus” (2) the will of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “according to the will of Christ Jesus” (3) both the example and will of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “according to Christ Jesus’ will and example” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	6	lp5m	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	praise with one mouth	This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the unity that he prayed for in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	6	smvb		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	praise with one mouth	Alternate translation: “with the same purpose”
+ROM	15	6	uz1z	figs-metonymy	ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε	1	praise with one mouth	Here, **glorify with one mouth** refers to being united while praising God aloud. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “you might be united while praising God” or “you might praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	15	6	nvq8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+ROM	15	7	prx1	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	receive one another	**Therefore** here introduces the conclusion of what Paul has said in [14:1](../14/01.md)–[15:6](../15/06.md). See how you translated this word in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	15	7	z941	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	receive one another	Here, **to** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Christians should accept each other as Christ accepted Christians. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	8	ae6k	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	8	gbh8	writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	For I say	The pronoun **I** refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	15	8	refk	figs-abstractnouns	διάκονον…ἀληθείας…τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **servant** in [13:4](../13/04.md), **truth** in [2:8](../02/08.md), and “promises” in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	8	k4my	figs-metonymy	περιτομῆς	1	Christ has been made a servant of the circumcision	Here, **the circumcision** refers to the people who have been circumcised: the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	15	8	rtbo	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι	1		Here, **to** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for which **Christ** became a **servant of the circumcision**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of confirming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	8	prp8	figs-possession	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the promises** that God made to **the fathers**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promises given to the fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	8	gu7z	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων	1	the promises given to the fathers	See how you translated this phrase in [9:5](../09/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	8	dxz1	figs-activepassive	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1		You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “the promises that God gave to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	9	k5q7		τὰ δὲ ἔθνη, ὑπὲρ ἐλέους δοξάσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	and for the Gentiles to glorify God for his mercy	This is the second reason for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Alternate translation: “and in order that the Gentiles might glorify God for his mercy”
-ROM	15	9	xgc4	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	As it is written	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as someone has written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	9	em5q	figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ	1	sing praise to your name	Here, **your name** is a metonym that refers to God. Alternate translation: “sing praise to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	15	10	yvy9		καὶ πάλιν λέγει	1	Again it says	Alternate translation: “And again the scripture says”
-ROM	15	10	x4kg	figs-explicit	μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	with his people	This refers to God’s **people**. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	11	xw7t		ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν	1	Let praise him	Alternate translation: “let … praise the Lord”
-ROM	15	12	fta5	figs-metonymy	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί	1	root of Jesse	**Jesse** was the physical father of King David. Alternate translation: “descendant of Jesse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	15	12	i4nn	figs-explicit	ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν	1	in him the Gentiles will have hope	Here, **him** refers to the descendant of Jesse, the Messiah. Those who are not Jews will also trust him to fulfill his promises. Alternate translation: “the people who are not Jews can trust him to do what he has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	13	w7wn	figs-hyperbole	πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “may … fill you with great joy and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ROM	15	14	h98x			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds the believers in Rome that God chose him to reach the Gentiles.
-ROM	15	14	qfs6	figs-explicit	πέπεισμαι…ἀδελφοί μου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ περὶ ὑμῶν	1	I myself am also convinced about you, my brothers	Paul is quite sure that the believers in Rome are honoring each other in their behavior. Alternate translation: “I myself am completely sure that you yourselves have acted toward others in a completely good way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	9	k5q7	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τὰ δὲ ἔθνη	1	and for the Gentiles to glorify God for his mercy	Here, **and** indicates that what follows is a second reason why Christ became a “servant of the circumcision.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “and also for the purpose of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	9	el62	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλέους	1		See how you translated **mercy** in [9:23](../09/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	9	kebq	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	15	9	xgc4	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	As it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by King David in [Psalm 18:49](../psa/018/049.md). Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” or “just as God said through David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	9	tfh8	figs-quotemarks	διὰ τοῦτο ἐξομολογήσομαί σοι ἐν ἔθνεσι, καὶ τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ	1	As it is written	This sentence is a quotation of [Psalm 18:49](../psa/018/049.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	15	9	em5q	figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματί σου	1	sing praise to your name	Here, **your name** refers to God himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	15	10	az24	figs-explicit	καὶ πάλιν	1	Again it says	Here, **again** indicates that what follows is another quotation from Scripture that expresses the same idea of the quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	10	iprn	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	Again it says	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of something Moses said in an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 32:43](../deu/32/43.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	15	10	qt5h	figs-quotemarks	εὐφράνθητε, ἔθνη, μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Again it says	This sentence is a quotation from [Deuteronomy 32:43](../deu/32/43.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	15	10	x4kg	figs-explicit	μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	with his people	Here, **his people** refers to God’s **people**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	11	xw7t	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	1		This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of an Old Testament book ([Psalm 117:1](../psa/117/001.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And also in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	15	11	gk0i	figs-quotemarks	αἰνεῖτε πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τὸν Κύριον; καὶ ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ λαοί	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 117:1](../psa/117/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	15	12	inaw	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν Ἠσαΐας λέγει	1	root of Jesse	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of something **Isaiah** said in an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 11:10](../isa/11/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And also in the Scriptures, Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	15	12	u5kr	figs-pastforfuture	Ἠσαΐας λέγει	1	root of Jesse	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Isaiah said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+ROM	15	12	lpf6	figs-explicit	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί…ὁ ἀνιστάμενος…αὐτῷ	1	root of Jesse	These three expressions all refer to the same person, the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The root of Jesse … he is the one who rises … that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	12	fta5	figs-metaphor	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί	1	root of Jesse	Paul quotes Isaiah referring to a descendant of **Jesse** as if that person were a **root** or shoot that had grown out of a plant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The descendant of Jesse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	12	lgr5	figs-idiom	ὁ ἀνιστάμενος	1	root of Jesse	Paul quotes Isaiah using **rises** to refer to someone becoming a king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who becomes king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	15	13	t3dd	figs-possession	ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as the source of **hope**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	13	u77u	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐλπίδος…χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης…ἐλπίδι…δυνάμει	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	See how you translated the abstract nouns **hope** in the previous verse, **joy** and **peace** in [14:17](../14/17.md), and **power** in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	13	w7wn	figs-metaphor	ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	Paul refers to people experiencing **joy** and **peace** as if they were things that could **fill** someone. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “may the God of hope allow you to experience all joy and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	13	zmno	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ πιστεύειν	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	Here, **in** indicates that **believing** is the means by which people will experience **all joy and peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	13	aee3	figs-ellipsis	τῷ πιστεύειν	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “in believing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	15	13	a6rk	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that you might abound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	13	k3y1		εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς	1		Alternative translation: “so that you this hope with abundance”
+ROM	15	14	h98x	figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι…καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has also persuaded me myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	14	g16z	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ…αὐτοὶ…ἐστε	1		Paul uses the words **myself** and **yourselves** to emphasize how certain he is that his readers are good and knowledgeable Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed … you are indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	15	14	d878	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	15	14	qhv3	figs-hyperbole	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	filled with all knowledge	Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “having been filled with sufficient knowledge to follow God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ROM	15	14	ge2l	figs-explicit	δυνάμενοι καὶ ἀλλήλους νουθετεῖν	1	able to also exhort one another	Here, to **exhort** means to teach. Alternate translation: “also able to teach each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	15	n2gr	figs-activepassive	τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the grace given me by God	Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a physical gift that **God** had **given** him. God had appointed Paul and apostle even though he had persecuted believers before he decided to follow Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	16	wiw1	figs-metaphor	γένηται ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν εὐπρόσδεκτος	1	the offering of the Gentiles might become acceptable	Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel as if he, as a priest, were making an **offering** to God. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles might please God when they obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	15	18	lu97	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ γὰρ τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ, εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ	1	by the power of signs and wonders, and by the power of the Spirit of God	You can translate this double negative in a positive form. Alternate translation: “For the sake of the obedience of the Gentiles, I will only speak of what Christ has accomplished through me in my words and actions and by the power of signs and wonders through the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ROM	15	18	by9s		εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	Alternate translation: “so that the Gentiles will obey God”
-ROM	15	18	xds3	figs-explicit	λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ	1	These are things done by word and action	Here, **word and deed** refers to what Christ has accomplished through Paul. Alternate translation: “through me in my words and actions” or “the things that Christ has accomplished through what I have said and done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	19	g8bk	figs-doublet	σημείων καὶ τεράτων	1	signs and wonders	These two words mean basically the same thing and refer to various kinds of miracles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ROM	15	19	c8ff		ὥστε…ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ κύκλῳ μέχρι τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ	1	so that from Jerusalem, and round about as far as Illyricum	This is from the city of **Jerusalem** as far as the province of **Illyricum**, a region close to Italy.
-ROM	15	20	x9xm	figs-explicit	οὕτως δὲ φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1	In this way, my desire has been to proclaim the gospel, but not where Christ is known by name	Paul only wants to preach to people who have never heard of Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of this, I want to preach the good news in places where people have never heard of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	20	kt3r	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ	1	in order that I might not build upon another man’s foundation	Paul speaks of his ministry work as if he were building a house on a **foundation**. Alternate translation: “in order that I might not be simply continuing the work that someone else already started. I do not want to be like a man who builds a house on someone else’s foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	15	21	rb5r	figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	It is as it is written	Here Paul refers to what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures. You can make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what was written by Isaiah in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	21	wy8k	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		You can translate this in an active form and make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	21	u8d6	figs-activepassive	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Those whom no one had told the news about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	22	f1fq			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul tells the believers in Rome about his personal plans to visit them and asks the believers to pray.
-ROM	15	22	ex5j	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην	1	I was also hindered	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “they also hindered me” or “people also hindered me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	23	b6kl	figs-explicit	μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις	1	I no longer have any place in these regions	Paul implies that there are no more places in these areas where people live who have not heard about Christ. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	24	si59	translate-names	τὴν Σπανίαν	1	Spain	At that time, **Spain** was a Roman province west of Rome that Paul desired to visit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	15	24	c6wq		διαπορευόμενος	1	in passing	Alternate translation: “as I pass through Rome” or “while I am on my way”
-ROM	15	24	vya3	figs-explicit	καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ	1	and to be helped by you along my journey there	Here Paul implies that he wants the Roman believers to provide some financial assistance to him for his journey to Spain. Alternate translation: “that you will provide for me on my journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	24	rzie	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ	1		You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “and that you will help me on my journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	24	wg6d		ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ	1	I have enjoyed your company	Alternate translation: “after I have enjoyed spending some time with you”
-ROM	15	26	vn1r	figs-synecdoche	εὐδόκησαν…Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	Here the words **Macedonia** and **Achaia** are synecdoches for the people who live in those areas. Alternate translation: “the believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia were happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	15	27	w5ap		εὐδόκησαν γάρ	1	Indeed they were please to do this	Alternate translation: “Indeed, the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased to do it”
-ROM	15	27	tfz1		ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν αὐτῶν	1	indeed, they are their debtors	Alternate translation: “indeed the people of Macedonia and Achaia are in debt to the believers in Jerusalem”
-ROM	15	27	en7l		εἰ…τοῖς πνευματικοῖς αὐτῶν ἐκοινώνησαν τὰ ἔθνη, ὀφείλουσιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς σαρκικοῖς λειτουργῆσαι αὐτοῖς	1	if the Gentiles have shared in their spiritual things, they owe it to them also to serve them	Alternate translation: “since the Gentiles have shared in the spiritual things of the Jerusalem believers, the Gentiles ought to share their physical things with the Jerusalem believers”
-ROM	15	28	zz8u	figs-metaphor	σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον	1	made sure that they have received what was collected	Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it were a **fruit** that was collected and **sealed** for them. Alternate translation: “and have safely delivered this offering to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	15	29	ylq8	figs-explicit	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι	1	I know that when I come to you I will come in the fullness of the blessing of Christ	This phrase means that Christ will bless Paul and the Roman believers. Alternate translation: “Christ will abundantly bless us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	30	w1ta		δὲ	1	Now	If your language has a way to show that Paul has stopped talking about the good things he is confident of ([Romans 15:29](../15/29.md)) and is now starting to talk about the dangers he faces, use it here.
-ROM	15	30	yb7m		παρακαλῶ…ὑμᾶς	1	I urge you	Alternate translation: “I encourage you”
+ROM	15	14	jne2	figs-metaphor	αὐτοὶ μεστοί ἐστε ἀγαθωσύνης	1	brothers	Paul refers to people experiencing **goodness** as if it were something that could make someone **full**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you yourselves fully experience goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	14	ext0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθωσύνης…γνώσεως	1	brothers	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **goodness** and **knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is good … that is knowable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	14	wit1	figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	brothers	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having filled you with all knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	14	fkec	figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	brothers	Here Paul refers to people having **knowledge** as if it were something that someone could be**filled with**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having all knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	14	qhv3	figs-hyperbole	πάσης γνώσεως	1	filled with all knowledge	Here, **all** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize how much **knowledge** these people have. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “abundant knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ROM	15	15	j9yk	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ μέρους	1		Here, **in part** refers to some parts of this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in some parts of this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	15	fuw3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὡς ἐπαναμιμνῄσκων ὑμᾶς	1		This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Paul wrote certain things in this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of reminding you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	15	n2gr	figs-activepassive	τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the grace given me by God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	15	nln5	figs-explicit	τὴν χάριν	1		Here, **grace** refers to God graciously choosing Paul to be an apostle. See how you translated the similar phrase in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	16	coxw	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναί με	1		Here, **in order for** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God graciously gave Paul authority, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that I would be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	16	zgo0	figs-abstractnouns	λειτουργὸν	1		See how you translated **servant** in [13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	16	wiw1	figs-metaphor	ἱερουργοῦντα τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα…ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	the offering of the Gentiles might become acceptable	Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel to the Gentiles as if he is a priest who serves **the gospel** by making an **offering** to God. He speaks of **the Gentiles** who become Christians as a result of his preaching as if they were **the offering** that he makes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “preaching the gospel so that the Gentiles who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	16	hert	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	the offering of the Gentiles might become acceptable	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which Paul preaches the gospel to the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	16	veeq	figs-possession	ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the offering** that consists of **the Gentiles**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the offering, that is, the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	16	ah87	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ προσφορὰ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **offering**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	16	lztb	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένη ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	17	s7ns	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the result of what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce the result of something. Alternate translation: “Because of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	15	17	mtjb	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	17	lpc0	figs-metaphor	ἔχω…καύχησιν	1		Here, Paul speaks of **a boast** as if it were an object someone can **have**. He means that he is rightfully able to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I can boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	18	b3q2	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	18	lu97	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ…τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ	1	by the power of signs and wonders	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will only dare to speak what Christ produced through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	15	18	by9s		εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	Here, **for** indicates the result of **what Christ produced through** Paul. Use the natural way in your language to express a result. Alternate translation: “that resulted in the obedience of the Gentiles”
+ROM	15	18	zdk4	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν…ἔργῳ	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **obedience** and **deed**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how the Gentiles obey … what is done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	18	yua7	figs-explicit	ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	Here, **obedience** refers to **the Gentiles** obeying the command to repent and believe the gospel, which is part of the gospel message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles to obey what God commanded in the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	18	xds3	figs-explicit	λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ	1	These are things done by word and action	Here, **word and deed** could refer to: (1) what Paul had said and done that resulted in **the Gentiles** trusting in Christ. Alternate translation: “by my words and actions” (2) how **the Gentiles** displayed their **obedience**. Alternate translation: “by their words and actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	18	pqtq	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	These are things done by word and action	Here Paul uses the term **word** to describe what he had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	15	19	oxsn	figs-explicit	ἐν δυνάμει σημείων καὶ τεράτων	1		This clause indicates and additional means by which Christ produced through Paul “the obedience of the Gentiles” that is referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and by means of the power of signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	19	g8bk	figs-hendiadys	σημείων καὶ τεράτων	1	signs and wonders	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **wonders** describes the character of the miraculous **signs** that **the Spirit** enabled Paul to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of wonderful miraculous signs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ROM	15	19	wxml	figs-explicit	ἐν δυνάμει Πνεύματος Θεοῦ	1	signs and wonders	This clause indicates that **the Spirit of God** empowered Paul’s “word and deed” and **signs and wonders** to result in non-Jews trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “empowered by the Spirit of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	19	c8ff	translate-names	τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ	1	so that from Jerusalem, and round about as far as Illyricum	**Illyricum** is the name of a Roman province that was close to Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	15	19	f60i	figs-idiom	πεπληρωκέναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Paul speaks of preaching the gospel throughout an entire area as if he had **fulfilled the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have thoroughly proclaimed the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	15	20	x9xm	figs-ellipsis	φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1	In this way, my desire has been to proclaim the gospel	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I am counting it an honor to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	15	20	n5fm	figs-abstractnouns	φιλοτιμούμενον	1	In this way, my desire has been to proclaim the gospel	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **honor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “counting it honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	20	r9t1	figs-explicit	εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1		The clause **not where Christ has been name** indicates the kind of places where Paul would not **proclaim the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to proclaim the gospel in places other than where Christ has been named” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	20	gpcl	figs-activepassive	ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1	In this way, my desire has been to proclaim the gospel	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have named Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	20	i4sx	figs-idiom	ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1	In this way, my desire has been to proclaim the gospel	Here, **has been named** refers to speaking someone’s name. It does not refer to giving someone a name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Christ’s name has been spoken” or “Christ’s name has been heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	15	20	kt3r	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ	1	I might not build upon another man’s foundation	Paul speaks of his work of preaching the gospel and making disciples as if he were building a house on a **foundation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I might not continue doing the work that another man has already begun” or “I might not be like someone who builds upon another man’s foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	21	dcs1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is the opposite of what Paul said in the last clause of the previous verse. Use the best way in your language to indicate a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+ROM	15	21	zyps	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται	1		In this verse Paul quotes Scripture to state that he preaches the gospel to those who have never heard it, which he also stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Instead of doing that, I aspire to preach the gospel where it has not been preached before. Doing so is just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	21	rb5r	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	15	21	wy8k	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	21	ocug	figs-quotemarks	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 52:15](../isa/52/15.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	15	21	zbeu	figs-parallelism	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν	1		These two clauses mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that non-Jewish people will hear about the Messiah. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Those who have not heard about him will certainly understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ROM	15	21	u8d6	figs-activepassive	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those to whom no one had reported concerning him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	21	m1f0	figs-explicit	ὄψονται…συνήσουσιν	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	Isaiah implies that the non-Jewish people who never heard about the Messiah will **understand** who the Messiah is and what he has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “will see who the Messiah is … will understand who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	21	eihc	figs-metaphor	ὄψονται	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	Paul quotes Isaiah using **see** to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “will perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	22	f1fq	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1		**Therefore** indicates that what follows is the result of Paul’s desire to preach the gospel where people have never heard it before. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “For this reason” or “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	15	22	ex5j	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην	1	I was also hindered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those things also prevented me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	22	uf9y	figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς	1	I was also hindered	Here, **you** is plural and refers to the believers of the church in Rome to whom Paul was writing this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers who are in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ROM	15	23	hgiv	grammar-connect-logic-result	μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις, ἐπιποθείαν δὲ ἔχων τοῦ ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν ἐτῶν	1	I no longer have any place in these regions	These clauses are two reasons why Paul hopes to see the Roman believers, as stated in the next verse. If you keep this verse and the next verse as one sentence in your translation, then you could use the most natural way in your language to indicate reasons. However, if you translate this verse and the next verse as separate sentences, then you could show that these clauses are reasons by indicating result in the next verse, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “because I no longer have a place in these regions, and because I have a longing from a considerable number of years to come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	15	23	b6kl	figs-explicit	μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις	1	I no longer have any place in these regions	Paul uses this clause to imply that where he was there were no more places with people who had not heard about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	23	slf1	figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς	1	I no longer have any place in these regions	See how you translated **you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ROM	15	24	si59	translate-names	τὴν Σπανίαν	1	Spain	At that time, **Spain** was a Roman province west of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	15	24	c6wq	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	διαπορευόμενος	1	in passing	This clause indicates something that would happen at the same time as the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “while passing through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+ROM	15	24	ww2v	figs-explicit	διαπορευόμενος	1	in passing	Paul implies that he would be **passing through** Rome on his way to **Spain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “passing through Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	24	rzie	figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ, ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for you to send me ahead to there, if you might first satisfy me for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	24	hlc3	figs-euphemism	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ	1		Here, **sent ahead** refers to receiving supplies needed for a journey. This is a polite way of asking for food or money. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “to be given some provisions for my journey to there by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+ROM	15	24	wg6d		ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ	1	I have enjoyed your company	Alternate translation: “if I might first enjoy being with you for a while”
+ROM	15	25	z3e5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	διακονῶν τοῖς ἁγίοις	1		This clause is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for him **traveling to Jerusalem**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of ministering to the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	26	mjvr	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul is going to minister to the saints in Jerusalem, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “I am going to Jerusalem because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	15	26	wape	translate-names	Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	**Macedonia** and **Achaia** are the names of Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	15	26	vn1r	figs-synecdoche	εὐδόκησαν…Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	Paul uses **Macedonia** and **Achaia** here to refer to the Christians who lived in those areas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were well-pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ROM	15	26	n0fb	figs-abstractnouns	κοινωνίαν τινὰ ποιήσασθαι	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **contribution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to contribute a certain amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	27	w5ap	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	Indeed they were please to do this	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	27	px7a	writing-pronouns	εὐδόκησαν…ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν	1	Indeed they were please to do this	The two occurrences of **they** in this verse refer to the Christians in Macedonia and Achaia, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased … those people are obligated to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	15	27	tfz1	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν…αὐτῶν…αὐτοῖς	1	indeed, they are their debtors	In this verse, **them** and **their** refer to the Christians in Jerusalem. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Jerusalem … their … those believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	15	27	ipij	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason the believers in Macedonia and Achaia **are obligated** to help the believers in Jerusalem. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	15	27	en7l	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	if the Gentiles have shared in their spiritual things, they owe it to them also to serve them	Paul uses **if** as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ROM	15	28	jj6t	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to Paul traveling to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this trip to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	15	28	zz8u	figs-metaphor	σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον	1		Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it were**fruit**, and he speaks of his delivery of the money as if he were sealing it for the poor believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having safely delivered this offering to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	28	gz16	figs-metonymy	δι’ ὑμῶν	1		Paul uses **you** here to refer to the place where those people lived, which is Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through the area where you live” or “through where you are in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	15	28	ywlm	translate-names	Σπανίαν	1		See how you translated **Spain** in [verse 24](../15/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	15	29	wod6	figs-explicit	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι	1		This could mean: (1) Paul and the believers in Rome will experience Christ’s blessing. Alternate translation: “I will come and we will experience the fullness of the blessing of Christ” (2) Paul will bring Christ’s blessing to the believers in Rome. Alternate translation: “I will bring the fullness of the blessing of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	29	ylq8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fullness** and **blessing**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the full experience of how Christ blesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	29	st5e	figs-metaphor	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of abundantly experiencing **the blessing of Christ** as if it were something that a person could receive in a full amount. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the abundant experience of the blessing of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	30	v9iy	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	15	30	fy1v		συναγωνίσασθαί	1	to strive together with	Alternate translation: “to work hard with” or “to struggle with”
-ROM	15	31	u7st	figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	I may be rescued from those who are disobedient	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may rescue me from those who are disobedient” or “God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	31	nw5h	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ εὐπρόσδεκτος τοῖς ἁγίοις γένηται	1	and that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers	Here Paul expresses his desire that the **saints** in **Jerusalem** will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: “and pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	33	s947	figs-explicit	ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ	1	May the God of peace be with	The **God of peace** means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: “I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace may be with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	intro	qy96			0		# Romans 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)<br>    * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)<br>    * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)<br>    * Paul commends Phoebe (16:1–2)<br>    * Paul greets Christians in Rome (16:3–16)<br>    * Paul warns against false teachers (16:17–20)<br>    * Paul greets more Christians in Rome (16:21–24)<br>    * Doxology (16:25–27)<br><br>In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	1	sg6a			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name.
-ROM	16	1	vkg8		συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην	1	I commend to you Phoebe	Alternate translation: “I want you to respect Phoebe”
-ROM	16	1	sry4	translate-names	Φοίβην	1	Phoebe	**Phoebe** is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	1	q86q	figs-exclusive	τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν	1	our sister	The word **our** refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	16	1	q669	translate-names	Κενχρεαῖς	1	Cenchrea	**Cenchrea** was a seaport city in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	2	cwx1	figs-explicit	αὐτὴν προσδέξησθε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	you may receive her in the Lord	Paul encourages the Roman believers to welcome Phoebe as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “you would welcome her because we all belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	30	scg1	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		The two occurrences of **by** in this verse indicate that what follows are the basis for Paul to **urge** his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of our Lord Jesus Christ and on the basis of the love of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	30	wq9l	figs-possession	τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		This could refer to: (1) **the love** that **the Spirit** gives to Christians. Alternate translation: “the love from the Spirit” (2) **the love** that belongs to **the Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	30	a5g4	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος…ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **prayers**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you love from the Spirit … what we pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	30	fy1v	figs-metaphor	συναγωνίσασθαί μοι	1	to strive together with	Paul speaks of praying fervently as if it were a struggle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “to pray intensely together with me” or “to pray intensely with me as if striving together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	31	q3v8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα…καὶ	1	to strive together with	Both occurrences of **so that** in this verse could indicate: (1) the contents of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that … and that” (2) the purposes for praying. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	31	u7st	figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	I may be rescued from those who are disobedient	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God might deliver me from the disobedient ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	31	gq4x	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	I may be rescued from those who are disobedient	Here, **the disobedient ones** refers to the Jews **in Judea** who disobeyed God by refusing to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews” or “those Jews who do not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	31	nw5h	figs-euphemism	διακονία μου	1	and that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers	Here, **my service** refers to the money that Paul was going to bring to the poor believers in Jerusalem from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. This is a polite way of referring to bringing money. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “the money I bring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+ROM	15	31	li3i	figs-metonymy	εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	and that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers	Here, **for Jerusalem** means “for the poor of the saints in Jerusalem,” as mentioned in [verse 26](../15/26.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the poor saints in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	15	32	fe4d	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα	1	and that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers	See how you translated **so that** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	32	erby	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν χαρᾷ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while being joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	32	ekou	figs-abstractnouns	θελήματος Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	32	sgcl	figs-activepassive	συναναπαύσωμαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and might refresh myself together with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	33	s947	figs-possession	ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	May the God of peace be with	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** who gives **peace**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	33	ubtx	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εἰρήνης	1	May the God of peace be with	See how you translated **peace** in [1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	intro	qy96			0		# Romans 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)<br>    * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)<br>    * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)<br>    * Paul commends Phoebe (16:1–2)<br>    * Paul greets Christians in Rome (16:3–16)<br>    * Paul warns against false teachers (16:17–20)<br>    * Paul greets more Christians in Rome (16:21–24)<br>    * Doxology (16:25–27)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Letter writing and sending<br><br>In this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Tertius mentions that he is the scribe writing the letter for Paul ([16:22](../16/22.md)). Paul begins this chapter by recommending Phoebe to the believers in Rome who receive this letter. This could indicate that Phoebe was the messenger who delivered the letter to them.<br><br>### Greetings<br><br>In this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letter. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In [verses 3–16](../16/03.md) and [21–23](../16/21.md) Paul includes greetings to and from people whom he and the Romans knew. Express these greetings in a natural form in your language.
+ROM	16	1	sg6a	writing-pronouns	συνίστημι	1		The pronoun **I** here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul, except for [verse 22](../16/22.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, commend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	16	1	sry4	translate-names	Φοίβην	1	Phoebe	**Phoebe** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	1	q86q	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	When Paul writes **our** here and throughout this chapter, he is speaking of himself and his Christian readers, so our would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	16	1	b81z	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀδελφὴν	1	our	Paul speaks of **Phoebe** as if she were the physical **sister** of him and his Christian readers. He means she has a brother-sister relationship with all Christians because she trusts in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our spiritual sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	1	mbn3	figs-abstractnouns	διάκονον	1	our	See how you translated the abstract noun **servant** in [13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	1	q669	translate-names	Κενχρεαῖς	1	Cenchrea	**Cenchrea** was a city in Greece. If available in your language, see how **Cenchrea** is translated in [Acts 18:18](../act/18/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	2	cwx1	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	you may receive her in the Lord	Here, **in the Lord** refers to Phoebe being a fellow believer in **the Lord** Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as someone who believes in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	2	yic3		ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων	1	in a manner worthy of the saints	Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers”
-ROM	16	2	qp4w	figs-euphemism	παραστῆτε αὐτῇ	1	stand by her	Paul encourages the Roman believers to give to Phoebe anything she needs. Alternate translation: “help her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-ROM	16	2	inh1		καὶ…προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ	2	has become a helper of many, and of myself as well	Alternate translation: “has helped many people, and she has also helped me”
-ROM	16	3	c5lg	translate-names	Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν	1	Priscilla and Aquila	**Priscilla** was the wife of **Aquila**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	3	fsk1	figs-explicit	τοὺς συνεργούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	my fellow workers in Christ Jesus	Paul’s **fellow workers** are people who also tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “who work with me to tell people about Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	5	i32d		καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Greet the church that is in their house	Alternate translation: “and greet the believers who meet in their house to worship”
+ROM	16	2	g7of	grammar-connect-logic-goal	καὶ	1	in a manner worthy of the saints	Here, **and** indicates that what follows is a second purpose for Paul to commend Phoebe to the believers in Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in order that you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	16	2	qp4w	figs-metaphor	παραστῆτε αὐτῇ	1	stand by her	Here, **stand by** refers to helping someone. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might assist her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	2	i0fm	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	stand by her	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants the Roman believers to help Phoebe. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason I want you to do this is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	16	2	inh1	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ…προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ	2	has become a helper of many, and of myself as well	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **benefactor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has also benefited many, and myself as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	3	na1k			0	General Information:	As was customary in his culture, in [verses 3–16](../16/03.md) Paul begins to conclude the letter by extending greetings to the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “Enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “Send regards to”
+ROM	16	3	xigr	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		**Greet** here and throughout [verses 3–16](../16/03.md) is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Make it your habit to greet” or “Make it your practice to greet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	3	c5lg	translate-names	Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν	1	Priscilla and Aquila	**Prisca** is the name of a woman who is also called “Priscilla” in [Acts 18:2](../act/18/02.md). **Aquila** is the name of her husband. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	3	fsk1	figs-explicit	τοὺς συνεργούς μου	1	my fellow workers in Christ Jesus	Here, **fellow workers** refers to people who work together with Paul to tell other people about Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who work with me to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	3	uo3a	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	in Christ Jesus	Here, **in Christ Jesus** could refer to: (1) the kind of work that **Prisca and Aquila** did with Paul. Alternate translation: “in the service of Christ Jesus” (2) being united with Christ, as this phrase is used in [3:24](../03/24.md); [6:11](../06/11.md), [23](../06/23.md); [8:1–2](../08/01.md), [39](../08/39.md); and [15:17](../15/17.md). Alternate translation: “who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	4	ilnn	figs-distinguish	οἵτινες ὑπὲρ τῆς ψυχῆς μου, τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν, οἷς οὐκ ἐγὼ μόνος εὐχαριστῶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ ἐκκλησίαι τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	in Christ Jesus	This verse interrupts the main part of the sentence in [verses 3–5](../16/03.md) in order to give further information about Priscilla and Aquila. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse as its own sentence and repeat the main verb of the previous verse in the next verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	16	4	fye8	figs-idiom	τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν	1		This phrase refers to doing something that would put someone in danger of being executed. Romans often executed people by chopping their heads off at the neck with an axe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “risked having their heads chopped off by the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	16	4	xmf8	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ…εὐχαριστῶ	1		Here Paul speaks of expressing **thanks** as if they were something that he could **give** to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am thankful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	5	i32d	figs-infostructure	καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Greet the church that is in their house	This clause continues the sentence that Paul began in [verse 3](../16/03.md) and interrupted in the previous verse. If you made the previous verse into its own sentence, then here you will need to add the main verb from [verse 3](../16/03.md). Alternate translation: “and greet the church based in their house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	16	5	d6i0	writing-pronouns	οἶκον αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **their** here refers to Priscilla and Aquila. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the house of Prisca and Aquila” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	16	5	qqdg	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ROM	16	5	bn9z	translate-names	Ἐπαίνετον	1	Epaenetus	**Epaenetus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	5	d1f1	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν	1	firstfruit of Asia to Christ	Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were a fruit that he harvested. Alternate translation: “first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	6	ew2z	translate-names	Μαρίαν	1	Mary	**Mary** is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	7	tzk4	translate-names	Ἀνδρόνικον	1	Andronicus	**Andronicus** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	7	z9uk	translate-names	Ἰουνίαν	1	Junias	This could refer to: (1) Junia, a woman’s name. (2) Junias, a man’s name, although this is less likely. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	5	d1f1	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν	1	firstfruit of Asia to Christ	Paul speaks of **Epaenetus** as if he were **fruit** that he had harvested. He means that **Epaenetus** was the first person in **Asia** who believed in **Christ** as a result of Paul’s preaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	6	jvvk	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	6	ew2z	translate-names	Μαρίαν	1	Mary	**Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	7	ck8s	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	7	tzk4	translate-names	Ἀνδρόνικον	1	Andronicus	**Andronicus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	7	z9uk	translate-names	Ἰουνίαν	1	Junias	**Junias** could refer to: (1) a woman named Junia, in which case **Andronicus and Junias** might be a married couple like Piscilla and Aquila. See the UST. (2) the shortened form of Junianus, a man’s name, which is less likely. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	7	ycr0	figs-explicit	τοὺς συγγενεῖς μου	1	Junias	Here, **kinsmen** could refer to: (1) Jewish Christians. Alternate translation: “my Jewish Christian kinsmen” (2) Christian relatives of Paul. Alternate translation: “my Christian relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	7	gce3	figs-activepassive	οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	They are prominent among the apostles	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	16	8	h976	translate-names	Ἀμπλιᾶτον	1	Ampliatus	**Ampliatus** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	8	alh2		τὸν ἀγαπητόν μου ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	my beloved in the Lord	Alternate translation: “my dear friend and fellow believer in the Lord”
-ROM	16	9	bd5l	translate-names	Οὐρβανὸν…Στάχυν	1	Urbanus … Stachys	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	10	k55t	translate-names	Ἀπελλῆν…Ἀριστοβούλου	1	Apelles … Aristobulus	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	10	q96n		τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ	1	the approved in Christ	The word **approved** refers to someone who has been tested and proved to be genuine. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved”
-ROM	16	11	gt6r	translate-names	Ἡρῳδίωνα…Ναρκίσσου	1	Herodion … Narcissus	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	11	ket9	figs-explicit	τοὺς ὄντας ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	who are in the Lord	This refers to those who trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are believers” or “who belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	12	sq9n	translate-names	Τρύφαιναν…Τρυφῶσαν…Περσίδα	1	Tryphaena … Tryphosa … Persis	These are women’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	13	zmf4	translate-names	Ῥοῦφον	1	Rufus	**Rufus** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	13	zy3x	figs-activepassive	τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	chosen in the Lord	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	16	13	hqf6	figs-metaphor	τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ	1	his mother and mine	Paul speaks of the mother of Rufus as if she were his own **mother**. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	14	dwh9	translate-names	Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν	1	Asyncritus … Phlegon … Hermes … Patrobas … Hermas	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	7	nvw5	figs-distinguish	οἳ	1	They are prominent among the apostles	Here, **who** indicates that what follows is further information about **Andronicus and Junias**. It is not information about **the apostles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these two people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	16	7	ylvm	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	They are prominent among the apostles	Here, **in Christ** refers to being united with Christ. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	8	mfd4	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	8	h976	translate-names	Ἀμπλιᾶτον	1	Ampliatus	**Ampliatus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	8	alh2	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		See how you translated the same use of this phrase in [verse 2](../16/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	9	ble9	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	9	bd5l	translate-names	Οὐρβανὸν…Στάχυν	1	Urbanus … Stachys	**Urbanus** and **Stachys** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	9	if0q	figs-explicit	τὸν συνεργὸν ἡμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	10	bni7	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε…ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	10	k55t	translate-names	Ἀπελλῆν…Ἀριστοβούλου	1	Apelles … Aristobulus	**Apelles** and **Aristobulus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	10	q96n	figs-activepassive	τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ	1	the approved in Christ	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	16	11	u21q	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε…ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	11	gt6r	translate-names	Ἡρῳδίωνα…Ναρκίσσου	1	Herodion … Narcissus	**Herodion** and **Narcissus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	11	iifk	figs-explicit	τὸν συγγενῆ	1	Herodion … Narcissus	See how you translated “kinsmen” in [verse 7](../16/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	11	ket9	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	who are in the Lord	Here, **in the Lord** refers to being united to Christ and has the same meaning as “in Christ” in [verse 7](../16/07.md) and [3:24](../03/24.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	12	el82	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε…ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	12	sq9n	translate-names	Τρύφαιναν…Τρυφῶσαν…Περσίδα	1	Tryphaena … Tryphosa … Persis	**Tryphaena**, **Tryphosa**, and **Persis** are names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	12	vkh4	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	-1		See how you translated a similar use of **in the Lord** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	13	sx5e	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	13	zmf4	translate-names	Ῥοῦφον	1	Rufus	**Rufus** is the name of a man. See how this name is translated in [Mark 15:21](../mrk/15/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	13	zy3x	figs-activepassive	τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	16	13	hqf6	figs-metaphor	τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ	1	his mother and mine	Paul speaks of the **mother** of **Rufus** as if she were his own **mother**. He means that she treated him as if he were her own child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	14	b3cd	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	14	dwh9	translate-names	Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν	1	Asyncritus … Phlegon … Hermes … Patrobas … Hermas	These are names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	14	ck2w	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφούς	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	16	15	ye9j	translate-names	Φιλόλογον…Νηρέα…Ὀλυμπᾶν	1	Philologus … Nereus … Olympas	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	15	n2rx	translate-names	Ἰουλίαν	1	Julia	**Julia** is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of Philologus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	16	g2z1		φιλήματι ἁγίῳ	1	a holy kiss	an expression of affection for fellow believers
-ROM	16	16	t1q4	figs-hyperbole	ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	All the churches of Christ greet you	Here Paul speaks in a general manner concerning the **churches** of Christ. Alternate translation: “The believers in all the churches in this area send their greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ROM	16	17	u1m9			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives one last warning to the believers about unity and living for God.
+ROM	16	14	il54	figs-explicit	τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς ἀδελφούς	1		Here, **with them** implies that these people meet together as a church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the brothers who meet with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	15	y84x	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	15	ye9j	translate-names	Φιλόλογον…Νηρέα…Ὀλυμπᾶν	1	Philologus … Nereus … Olympas	**Philologus**, **Nereus**, and **Olympas** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	15	n2rx	translate-names	Ἰουλίαν	1	Julia	**Julia** is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of **Philologus**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	15	j4uu	figs-explicit	τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς πάντας ἁγίους	1	Julia	See how you translated **with them** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	16	nxka	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	16	16	g2z1	translate-unknown	φιλήματι ἁγίῳ	1	a holy kiss	Here, **a holy kiss** describes a **kiss** that believers would give to other believers (that is why it is **holy**). In Paul’s culture, this was an appropriate way to greet someone with whom one was very close, such as a family member or a good friend. You could use a greeting that is used by close friends or family members and clarify that here it is used in a **holy** or Christian way. Alternate translation: “with a Christian hug” or “in warm way that is appropriate for fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ROM	16	16	t1q4	figs-hyperbole	ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	All the churches of Christ greet you	**All** here could refer to: (1) all the **churches** that were in the area where Paul was working when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ in this region” (2) all the **churches** that Paul had authority over or represented. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ that I represent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ROM	16	17	wx6r	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	16	17	ztv5		σκοπεῖν	1	to think about	Alternate translation: “to watch out for”
-ROM	16	17	n59l	figs-explicit	τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα…ποιοῦντας	1	who are causing the divisions and obstacles	This refers to those who argue and cause others to stop trusting in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another and to stop having faith in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	17	j9x7		παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε	1	They are going beyond the teaching that you have learned	Alternate translation: “and teaching things that do not agree with the truth you have already learned”
-ROM	16	17	b318	figs-metaphor	ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	Turn away from them	Here, **turn away** is a metaphor for “refuse to listen.” Alternate translation: “do not listen to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	18	ea6h	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	but their own stomach	The words “they serve” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but they serve their own stomach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	16	18	nxn4	figs-metonymy	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	but their own stomach	Here, **stomach** is a metonym that refers to physical desires. Alternate translation: “but they only care about their physical desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	16	18	eff9	figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1		Serving there **stomach** represents satisfying their desires. Alternate translation: “but they only want to satisfy their own selfish desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	18	eif6	figs-doublet	καὶ διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας	1	By their smooth and flattering speech	The words **smooth** and **flattering** mean basically the same thing. Paul is emphasizing how these people are deceiving believers. Alternate translation: “and by saying things that seem to be good and true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ROM	16	18	c2je	figs-metonymy	ἐξαπατῶσι τὰς καρδίας τῶν ἀκάκων	1	they deceive the hearts of the innocent	Here, **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “they deceive the innocent believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	16	18	m9h5		τῶν ἀκάκων	1	innocent	This refers to those who are simple, inexperienced, and naive. Alternate translation: “of those who innocently trust them” or “of those who do not know these teachers are fooling them”
-ROM	16	19	imc7	figs-personification	ἡ γὰρ ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο	1	For your obedience reaches everyone	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ **obedience** as if it were a person who could go to people. Alternate translation: “For everyone has heard how you obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	16	19	le5l		ἀκεραίους…εἰς τὸ κακόν	1	innocent to that which is evil	Alternate translation: “not involved in doing evil things”
-ROM	16	20	s3cq	figs-metaphor	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν ἐν τάχει	1	The God of peace will soon crush Satan under your feet	The phrase **crush … under your feet** refers to complete victory over an enemy. Here Paul speaks of the victory over **Satan** as if the Roman believers were trampling an enemy under their **feet**. Alternate translation: “Soon God will give you peace and complete victory over Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	21	z4g3			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives greetings from the believers who are with him.
-ROM	16	21	ku15	translate-names	Λούκιος…Ἰάσων…Σωσίπατρος	1	Lucius, Jason, and Sosipater	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	22	xu3q	translate-names	ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν	1	Tertius, who write this epistle	**Tertius** is the man who wrote down what Paul spoke. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	22	nx4g		ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς…ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	greet you in the Lord	Alternate translation: “greet you as a fellow believer”
-ROM	16	23	sw7r	translate-names	Γάϊος…Ἔραστος…Κούαρτος	1	Gaius … Erastus … Quartus	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	16	23	j9u7		ὁ ξένος	1	the host	This refers to Gaius, the person in whose house Paul and his fellow believers gathered for worship.
-ROM	16	23	m5hg		ὁ οἰκονόμος	1	the treasurer	This is a person who takes care of the money for a group.
+ROM	16	17	ztv5	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς διχοστασίας…τὰ σκάνδαλα…τὴν διδαχὴν	1	to think about	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **divisions**, **obstacles**, and **teaching**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what divides … what obstructs … what is taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	17	n59l	figs-explicit	τὰς διχοστασίας…ποιοῦντας	1	who are causing the divisions and obstacles	This phrase refers to causing believers to argue with each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	17	atil	figs-metaphor	τὰ σκάνδαλα	1		See how you translated “trap” in [11:9](../11/09.md) and [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	17	j9x7	figs-explicit	παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε	1	They are going beyond the teaching that you have learned	This clause could refer to: (1) the **traps**. Alternate translation: “which are contrary to the teaching that you have learned” (2) the means by which these people are **causing divisions and traps**. Alternate translation: “by doing what is contrary to the teaching that you have learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	17	b318	figs-metaphor	ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	Turn away from them	Here, **turn away** refers to avoiding someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “avoid them completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	18	yij5	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	16	18	fpvs	writing-pronouns	τοιοῦτοι	1		Here, **these** refers to “those who are causing division and traps,” who are mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such as those causing such divisions and traps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	16	18	azob	figs-explicit	τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Χριστῷ οὐ δουλεύουσιν	1		Here, **enslaved to our Lord Christ** refers to living under the control of **our Lord Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are not living under the control of our Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	18	ea6h	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	but their own stomach	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but they are enslaved to their own stomach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	16	18	nxn4	figs-metonymy	τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	but their own stomach	Here, **stomach** could refer to: (1) physical desires, especially the desires to eat or drink. Alternate translation: “to their own physical desires” (2) pleasing oneself. Alternate translation: “to their own pleasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	16	18	gddw	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας	1	but their own stomach	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **speech** and **flattery**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “through speaking smoothly and flatteringly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	18	c2je	figs-metonymy	τὰς καρδίας	1	they deceive the hearts of the innocent	See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	16	19	vqml	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that was follows is one reason why Paul’s readers should obey the command to “watch out for” and “turn away from” false teachers. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “Watch out for and turn away from these people since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	16	19	imc7	figs-personification	ἡ…ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο	1	For your obedience reaches everyone	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ **obedience** as if it were a person who could go to people. He means that many people had heard about their **obedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your obedience has been heard about by everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	16	19	o1b9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ…ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ…τὸ ἀγαθόν…τὸ κακόν	1		See how you translated **obedience** in [5:19](../05/19.md) and **good** and **evil** in [7:19](../07/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	19	gj2r	figs-hyperbole	πάντας	1	For your obedience reaches everyone	Here, **everyone** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show that many believers had heard about the **obedience** of the Roman believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ROM	16	20	bnni	figs-possession	ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1		See how you translated this phrase in [15:33](../15/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	16	20	s3cq	figs-metaphor	συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν	1	The God of peace will soon crush Satan under your feet	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers having victory over **Satan** as if they would **crush** him **under** their **feet**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause you to have complete victory over Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	20	qpr7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τάχει. ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **haste** and **grace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “hastily. May the Lord Jesus Christ act graciously toward you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	20	btor		ἐν τάχει	1		The phrase translated as **with haste** can also refer to something happening after a short time period. Alternate translation: “in a short time” or “soon”
+ROM	16	20	oo2r	translate-blessing	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν	1		As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Roman believers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ within you” or “I pray that you will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
+ROM	16	21	z4g3	figs-explicit	ὁ συνεργός μου	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	21	ku15	translate-names	Λούκιος…Ἰάσων…Σωσίπατρος	1	Lucius, Jason, and Sosipater	**Lucius**, **Jason**, and **Sosipater** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	21	km7u	figs-explicit	οἱ συγγενεῖς μου	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 7](../16/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	21	wvzj		ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς	1		As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you”
+ROM	16	22	pijj	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν	1		This clause means that **Tertius** wrote down the words that Paul told him to write in this letter. In ancient times it was common for people to use scribes to write down letters for them. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “I, Tertius, am the person who wrote down what Paul told me to write in this epistle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	22	g8li	figs-123person	ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν, ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		**I** here refers to **Tertius**, who writes this verse. Unlike elsewhere in this letter, it does not refer to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the third person in this verse. Alternate translation: “Tertius, who wrote this epistle, greets you in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+ROM	16	22	xu3q	translate-names	Τέρτιος	1	Tertius, who write this epistle	**Tertius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	22	nx4g	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	greet you in the Lord	See how you translated the similar use of **in the Lord** in [verse 2](../16/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	23	sw7r	translate-names	Γάϊος…Ἔραστος…Κούαρτος	1	Gaius … Erastus … Quartus	**Gaius**, **Erastus**, and **Quartus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	23	j9u7	figs-explicit	ὁ ξένος μου, καὶ ὅλης τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	the host	This phrase indicates that the home of **Gaius** was where Paul and his fellow believers gathered to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who hosts me and the whole church in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	23	m5hg	figs-explicit	ὁ οἰκονόμος	1	the treasurer	Here, **steward** refers to the person who takes care of the money for **the city** in which Paul is staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the treasurer” or “the one who administrates the finances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	23	fnet	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφός	1	the treasurer	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in [14:10](../14/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	16	25	psm3			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul closes with a prayer of blessing.
-ROM	16	25	v71l		δὲ	1	Now	Here the word **Now** marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you can use it here.
-ROM	16	25	pp5k	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1	to strengthen you	Paul speaks here of having strong faith as if a person were being set firmly in place. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	25	kmw1		κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, καὶ τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	according to my gospel and the preaching of Jesus Christ	Alternate translation: “by the good news that I have preached about Jesus Christ”
-ROM	16	25	s5ky	figs-metaphor	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1	according to the revelation of the mystery that had been kept secret for long ages	Paul says that God has revealed previously hidden truths to the believers. He speaks of these truths as if they were a **secret**. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers what had been kept secret for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	25	n6c1	figs-activepassive	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1		You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers the secret that he was keeping for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	16	26	d7r5	figs-doublet	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος	1	but now has been revealed and made known through the prophetic writings to all nations, by the command of the eternal God	The verbs **revealed** and **made known** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both of them to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “but now the mystery has been made known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so people can believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ROM	16	26	efyy	figs-activepassive	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος	1		You can combine the verbs **revealed** and **made known** in an active form. Alternate translation: “but now the eternal God has made it known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so that people would believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	16	26	lc6d	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	to bring about the obedience of faith	Here, **obedience** and **faith** are abstract nouns. You can use the verbs “obey” and “trust” in your translation. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will believe and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	16	26	cvi3	figs-explicit	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1		You may need to make explicit who will obey and trust. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will obey God because they trust in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	27	qmj7	figs-explicit	μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ᾧ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. ἀμήν!	1	To the only wise God … be glory forever. Amen	Here, **through Jesus Christ** refers to what Jesus did. To give **glory** means to praise God. Alternate translation: “Because of what Jesus Christ has done for us, we will praise forever the one who alone is God and who alone is wise. Amen!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	24	ct9t	translate-textvariants	Ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ χριστοῦ μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν. Ἀμήν	1	the treasurer	This verse is not in the best earliest manuscripts. It seems to be an accidental repetition of the last part of [verse 20](../16/20.md). It has been included in the ULT, but it is marked off with square brackets (\[ \]) at the beginning and end. If possible, do not include this addition in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+ROM	16	25	xma1			0		[Verses 25–27](../16/25.md) are one long sentence. If you divide this sentence into shorter sentences, then you will need to repeat part of [verse 27](../16/27.md) in [verse 25](../16/25.md), as the UST does.
+ROM	16	25	v71l		δὲ	1	Now	**Now** here marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you could use it here.
+ROM	16	25	xgkv	figs-explicit	τῷ…δυναμένῳ ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1		Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who is able to establish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	25	pp5k	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1	to strengthen you	Here Paul speaks of God strengthening a person’s faith as if God were establishing that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	25	kmw1	figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** message that he preached. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel that I preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	16	25	yprj	figs-possession	τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **preaching** that is about **Jesus Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the preaching about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	16	25	wyyl	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κήρυγμα…ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **preaching**, **revelation**, and **mystery**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is preached … what is revealed of what is mysterious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	25	vyj4	figs-explicit	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου	1		Here, **according to** indicates that what follows is what Paul’s preaching is based on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of the revelation of the mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	25	s5ky	translate-unknown	μυστηρίου	1	according to the revelation of the mystery that had been kept secret for long ages	Here Paul uses the word **mystery** to refer to God’s plan to save people that was revealed in the **gospel**. This does not mean that the idea is hard to understand, but rather, God had not yet revealed it to people. If your language would not use **mystery** to refer to something that was concealed but has now been revealed, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of this concealed message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ROM	16	25	n6c1	figs-activepassive	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the mystery that God has revealed, yet had kept secret for long ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	16	25	bgqm	figs-distinguish	χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1		This clause gives further information about **the mystery**, which is also the **gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to make this connection clear. Alternate translation: “which is what was kept secret for long ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	16	26	d7r5	figs-distinguish	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν	1		This clause gives further information about “the mystery,” which is also the “gospel” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to make this connection clear. Alternate translation: “but now that mystery has been revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	16	26	kgs8	figs-activepassive	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but now God has revealed it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	16	26	vrul	figs-infostructure	διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος	1		The word translated as **and** here indicates that the following four phrases are connected to the fifth phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and having been made known through the prophetic writings, according to the command of the eternal God, to the obedience of faith, to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	16	26	efyy	figs-abstractnouns	Γραφῶν προφητικῶν…ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **writings**, **command**, **obedience**, and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what was written by the prophets … what the eternal God commanded, to be obedient of what is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	26	fbr6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1		Here, **to** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the obedience of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	16	26	lc6d	figs-possession	ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	to bring about the obedience of faith	See how you translated this phrase in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	16	26	cvi3	figs-activepassive	γνωρισθέντος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having made known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	16	27	kuyu		μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ	1		Alternate translation: “to God who alone is wise”
+ROM	16	27	ua9d	figs-abstractnouns	ᾧ ἡ δόξα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “may people glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

en_tn_49-GAL.tsv

@@ -207,7 +207,8 @@ GAL	2	15	tz45	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί	1	not Gentile
 GAL	2	16	vduo	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 
 GAL	2	16	y3tl	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 
 GAL	2	16	xhx3	figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦται…δικαιωθῶμεν…δικαιωθήσεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
-GAL	2	16	purc	figs-abstractnouns	ἔργων νόμου	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	2	16	s2ys	figs-possession	ἔργων νόμου	-1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe what types of **works** he is referring to. He is specifically referring to works of the Mosaic law. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses” or “doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded” or “doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+GAL	2	16	purc	figs-abstractnouns	ἔργων νόμου	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys” or “obey”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
 GAL	2	16	ncnt	grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐὰν μὴ	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but rather only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 GAL	2	16	iivr	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a  such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
 GAL	2	16	q4iw	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…δικαιωθῶμεν	1		When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 
@@ -227,83 +228,187 @@ GAL	2	17	qw76	figs-rquestion	ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκ
 GAL	2	17	yy9s		μὴ γένοιτο	1	Absolutely not!	The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!”
 GAL	2	18	mwuo	figs-metaphor	ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω	1		Paul speaks of no longer thinking it is necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to going back again to acting like, and teaching, that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 GAL	2	18	o7g8	figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
-GAL	2	19	wdaa	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Desilva 47 Here, the word **For** indicates that what follows is FILL IN. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	2	19	xe23		διὰ νόμου	1		The phrase **through the law** could refer to: (1) Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law (2) how Christ paid the requirements of the law. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah completed the law”
-GAL	2	19	r55d		ἐγὼ…νόμῳ ἀπέθανον	1		The phrase, **I … died to the law** means that the law no longer has any power or authority over Paul. Alternate translation: “I am separated from the law”
-GAL	2	19	yl7y	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he **through the law, died to the law**. The purpose being **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	2	19	l3r9	figs-explicit	Θεῷ ζήσω	1		The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “live for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
-GAL	2	19	xg5q		Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι;	1		The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** could mean: (1) by the Messiah’s death, Paul was now separated from the law (2) Paul died spiritually and escaped the dominion of sin and the law.
-GAL	2	19	fh2i	figs-activepassive	συνεσταύρωμαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “FILL IN” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
-GAL	2	20	o3jk		ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ	1		Here, the phrase **I no longer live**
-GAL	2	20	msd4		ζῇ…ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός	1		Here, the phrase **Christ lives in me**
+GAL	2	19	wdaa	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** is introducing the reason that Paul said **May it never be” in [2:17](../02/17.md) and and also introducing information which gives support for what he said in [2:18](../02/18.md). Use a natural form for introducing a reason for something that was said prior. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+GAL	2	19	zqqw		διὰ νόμου	1		Alternate translation: “by means of the law”
+GAL	2	19	r55d	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ…νόμῳ ἀπέθανον	1		Here, the phrase, **I … died to the law** could: (1) be a metaphor that refers to believers’ vicarious death with Christ through their believing in him and their consequent union with him which they as a result of their faith in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. (See [Rom 7:4](../07/04.md) and [Gal 4:4-5](../04/04.md)) Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through my union with Christ” (2) be a metaphor that refers to Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law. Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through the things that it required” or “I … died to the law through the things that it commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n
+GAL	2	19	yl7y	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose or reason for which he **died to the law**. The purpose was **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+GAL	2	19	l3r9	figs-explicit	Θεῷ ζήσω	1		The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I might live for God” or “I might live to serve God” or “I might live to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	2	19	xg5q	figs-metaphor	Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι	1		The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** is a metaphor. Paul is not saying that he literally died with Christ. Paul is using this metaphor to express the reality that as a result of his faith in Christ, and the subsequent union with Christ that his faith has brought about, God now views Paul as if he had died with Christ. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **crucified with Christ** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	2	19	fh2i	figs-activepassive	Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “the law” was the reason Christ had to be but to death. Roman soldiers put Jesus to death, but in context Paul is explaining that it was because of the requirements of “the law” that put Christ to died. If you must state the action you could explain this in your translation as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	2	20	o3jk	figs-metaphor	ζῶ…οὐκέτι ἐγώ, ζῇ δὲ ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός	1		Here, the phrase **I no longer live, but Christ lives in me** is a metaphor. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or you could express the meaning plainly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 GAL	2	20	y2qf	figs-ellipsis	ὃ…νῦν ζῶ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 GAL	2	20	rtmc	figs-synecdoche	ὃ…νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί	1		Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	2	20	a4j0	figs-explicit	ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he FILL. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrases “through faith in Jesus Christ” and “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	2	20	a4j0	figs-explicit	ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he now lives his life by means of having faith in God’s Son. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “I live by having faith in God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
 GAL	2	20	bb2x	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 GAL	2	20	m55w	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με	1		The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
 GAL	2	20	by5a	figs-explicit	παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν	1		The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
 GAL	2	21	tj6l	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀθετῶ	1	I do not set aside	Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+GAL	2	21	xvoq		οὐκ ἀθετῶ	1		Alternate translation: “I do not ignore” or “I do not dismiss”
 GAL	2	21	g5b8	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
-GAL	2	21	ogus	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη	1		Here, the word **righteousness** refers to FILL and the phrase “if righteousness is through the law” means “if...” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a  such as “”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
-GAL	2	21	yl3c	figs-hypo	εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses and Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. If your language does state things as a hypothetical possibility that the speaker is trying to prove false then use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+GAL	2	21	ogus	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “righteous”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	2	21	yl3c	figs-hypo	εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses. Also, Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. If your language does state things as a hypothetical possibility that the speaker is trying to prove false then use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 GAL	2	21	imxg	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Use a natural way in your language for expressing conditional “if … then” constructions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-GAL	2	21	m74u		διὰ νόμου	1		Here, the phrase **through {the} law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of the law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). 
-GAL	2	21	k6bg		εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη	1	if righteousness could be gained through the law	Alternate translation: “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” or “if it were possible for a person to become righteous in God’s sight by obeying the law”.
+GAL	2	21	m74u	figs-explicit	εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη	1		Here, the word **through** expresses the means by which something happens. The phrase **if righteousness is through the law** means “if righteousness could be obtained through keeping the law.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if righteousness could be obtained by keeping the law” or “if a person could be justified by keeping the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	2	21	dv5f		διὰ νόμου	1		The phrase **through the law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of the law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md).
 GAL	2	21	rku5		ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	then Christ died for nothing	Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die”
-GAL	3	intro	xd92			0		# Galatians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Equality in Christ<br><br>All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical Questions<br><br>Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br>This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])<br><br>### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”<br>Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	1	p7uw			0	General Information:	Paul is rebuking the Galatians by asking rhetorical questions.
-GAL	3	1	ryu7	figs-irony	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	Who has put a spell on you?	Paul is using irony and a rhetorical question to say that the Galatians are acting as though someone has put a spell on them. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on them. Alternate translation: “You behave as if someone has put a spell on you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	1	xvji		ἀνόητοι	1		Alternate translation: “without understanding” or “stupid”
-GAL	3	1	dc2j		ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	put a spell on you	Alternate translation: “done magic on you” or “done witchcraft on you”
-GAL	3	1	gwv2	figs-metaphor	οἷς κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος	1	It was before your eyes that Jesus Christ was publicly displayed as crucified	This metaphor describes how the Galatian believers heard the gospel message preached so clearly that it was if Jesus was crucified before their own eyes. Alternate translation: “You yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	2	m1zd	figs-irony	τοῦτο μόνον θέλω μαθεῖν ἀφ’ ὑμῶν	1	This is the only thing I want to learn from you	This continues the irony from verse 1. Paul knows the answers to the rhetorical questions he is about to ask. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-GAL	3	2	wq9g	figs-rquestion	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐλάβετε, ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Did you receive the Spirit by the works of the law or by believing what you heard?	Alternate translation: “You received the Spirit, not by doing what the law says, but by believing what you heard.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	3	f96u	figs-rquestion	οὕτως ἀνόητοί ἐστε	1	Are you so foolish?	Alternate translation: “You are very foolish!” or “Don’t be so foolish!” or “are you crazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	3	xu4d	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ	1	by the flesh	The word **flesh** is a metonym and refers to an independent reliance on one’s own effort through outward deeds . Alternate translation: “by your own effort” or “by your own work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	4	iyj1	figs-rquestion	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1	Have you suffered so many things for nothing…?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Galatians that when they were suffering, they believed that they would receive some benefit. Alternate translation: “Surely you did not think that you were suffering so many things for nothing…!” or “Surely you knew that there was some good purpose for suffering so many things…!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	4	xujz		ἐπάθετε	1		This could refer to: (1) suffering from persecution (2) the spiritual benefits they have experienced.
-GAL	3	4	qn1a	figs-explicit	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1	Have you suffered so many things for nothing	It can be stated clearly that they had suffered these things because of people who opposed them for their faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “Have you suffered so many things by those who opposed you for your faith in Christ for nothing” or “You believed in Christ, and you suffered many things by those who oppose Christ. Were your belief and suffering for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	4	nq68		εἰκῇ	1	for nothing	Alternate translation: “uselessly” or “in vain”
-GAL	3	4	xl9l	figs-rquestion	εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ	1	if indeed it was for nothing?	This could mean: (1) Paul warns them not to let their experiences be for nothing. Alternate translation: “Do not let it be for nothing!” or “Do not stop believing in Jesus Christ and let your suffering be for nothing.” (2) their suffering was already in vain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	intro	xd92			0		# Galatians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Equality in Christ\n\nAll Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nPaul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\nThis is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter in contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])\n\n### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”\nBible scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit all of the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	3	1	u6lo	figs-exclamations	ὦ	1		**O** is an exclamation word. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language that would be natural to use in this context. Alternate translation: “Oh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+GAL	3	1	xvji		ἀνόητοι Γαλάται	1		Alternate translation: “you Galatians are without understanding” or “you Galatians who are without understanding”
+GAL	3	1	p7uw	figs-rquestion	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	General Information:	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 
+GAL	3	1	ryu7	figs-irony	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	Who has put a spell on you?	Paul is using irony to express the fact that the Galatian believers are acting as though someone has put a spell on them. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on them. In fact Paul is upset with the Galatians believers for willingly choosing to believe false teachers and letting themselves be deceived. If your readers would misunderstand what Paul is saying here, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You behave as if someone has put a spell on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+GAL	3	1	gwv2	figs-metaphor	οἷς κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος	1	It was before your eyes that Jesus Christ was publicly displayed as crucified	This phrase is a metaphor which could: (1) be referring to someone publicly drawing a picture for people to see. In this case Paul would be referring to the teaching about Jesus that the Galatians had received as if it were a clear picture that they had seen with their eyes. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (2) be referring to the practice of someone posting a public announcement for people to read. In this case Paul would be referring to his preaching the good news about Jesus as if it were a public announcement which the Galatians had read. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	3	1	ty3a	figs-activepassive	προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST.  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	2	wq9g	figs-rquestion	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐλάβετε, ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Did you receive the Spirit by the works of the law or by believing what you heard?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You received the Spirit, not by doing what the law says, but by believing what you heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	2	dbp8	figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1		See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+GAL	3	2	cfj2	figs-possession	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1		Paul is using the possessive form here to describe the response that the Galatians had when they heard the preaching of the gospel which was to respond to it with **faith**. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “by believing what you heard” or “by hearing with faith” or “by trusting in the Messiah when you heard the message about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+GAL	3	3	f96u	figs-rquestion	οὕτως ἀνόητοί ἐστε	1	Are you so foolish?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphatically show his surprise. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You are very foolish!” or “Don’t be so foolish!” or “Surely you cannot be so foolish!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	3	kkg7		οὕτως	1		Here, the word **so** adds magnitude to (amplifies) the word **foolish** and also points forward to what comes after the word **foolish**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this. 
+GAL	3	3	nghz		ἀνόητοί	1		See how you translated the word ** foolish** in [3:1](../03/01.md) where it is used with the same meaning. 
+GAL	3	3	vof3	figs-rquestion	ἐναρξάμενοι Πνεύματι, νῦν σαρκὶ ἐπιτελεῖσθε	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about what they are doing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	3	croz	figs-ellipsis	ἐναρξάμενοι	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Having begun the Christian life” or “Having begun your new relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+GAL	3	3	xu4d	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ	1	by the flesh	Paul is describing the actions a person does while in their body by association with their body, which he calls **flesh**. Here, **flesh** refers to a reliance on one’s own effort in doing outward deeds and doing these actions with a self-sufficient and self-reliant trust in them instead of trusting  God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “by your own effort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+GAL	3	4	iyj1	figs-rquestion	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1	Have you suffered so many things for nothing…?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about the implications of believing and following the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	4	xujz	figs-extrainfo	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1		The original word that Paul used which is translated as **experienced** by the ULT could refer to: (1) the spiritual privileges and blessings that the Galatian believers had experienced such as receiving God’s Spirit  when they believed in Jesus and God “working miracles” among them, both of which are mentioned in the next verse. If your language does not allow you to use a neutral term but rather requires a more specific term you could specify that the things the Galatians experienced were good things as modeled by the UST. (2) experiencing bad things such as suffering. If this is what Paul means here, then he is referring to the suffering that the Galatians believers experienced when they were persecuted. Alternate translation: “Keep in mind that if what God has done for you was because of your obeying the laws that God gave to Moses and not because of trusting in Christ, did you not suffer many things needlessly? I certainly hope that you did not suffer like that needlessly” (3) both good things and bad things here and be referring to both the persecution that the Galatians had experienced and the spiritual blessings that they had experienced. Because it is not known for sure what type of things that Paul is referring to, if possible you should try to use a neutral term or expression. You could then translate this rhetorical question as the ULT does or with a similar neutral phrase such as “Did all the things that happened to you not cause you to think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+GAL	3	4	mvad		ἐπάθετε	1		Alternate translation: “Did you experience” 
+GAL	3	4	nq68		εἰκῇ…καὶ εἰκῇ	1	for nothing	Alternate translation: “uselessly … it was really uselessly” or “in vain … it was really in vain” or “for no purpose … it was really for no purpose”
+GAL	3	4	xl9l	figs-hypo	εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ	1	if indeed it was for nothing?	The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** shows contingency regarding his rhetorical question **Have you experienced so many things for nothing** and shows that Paul still has hope for the Galatians. Paul hopes that the Galatians will not make the **many things** that they have **experienced** be **for nothing** by following the false teachers who were teaching that it was necessary that they follow the laws of Moses such as circumcision and the dietary laws it required. Paul is making a hypothetical statement to help his readers recognize the serious implications of following the teachings of the false teachers instead of trusting in Jesus alone. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was really for nothing that you experienced so many things, but I hope with you that this is not the case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+GAL	3	4	mx8b	figs-rquestion	εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ	1	if indeed it was for nothing?	The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to help the Galatians think about what he is saying and to show that he still has hope that they will not follow the teachings of the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	5	fuzy	figs-rquestion	ὁ οὖν ἐπιχορηγῶν ὑμῖν τὸ Πνεῦμα καὶ ἐνεργῶν δυνάμεις ἐν ὑμῖν, ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1		This entire verse is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to teach the Galatians a truth by engaging their reasoning. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God who gives you his Spirit and does miracles among you does not do these things because you obey the law of Moses. Surely you must know that God gives you these blessings because you believed the good news about the Messiah when you heart it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	5	upx9	figs-explicit	ὁ	1		Here, the phrase **the one** refers to “God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	5	qnkz	figs-possession	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **by hearing of faith** in [3:02](../03/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 GAL	3	5	s3bc	figs-rquestion	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Does he…do so by the works of the law, or by hearing with faith?	Paul asks another rhetorical question to remind the Galatians how people receive the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	5	j4vz		ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	by the works of the law	This represents people doing the works that the law requires. Alternate translation: “because you do what the law tells us to do”
+GAL	3	5	j4vz	figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	by the works of the law	See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 GAL	3	5	e17q	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	by hearing with faith	Your language may require that what the people heard and whom they trusted be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “because you heard the message and had faith in Jesus” or “because you listened to the message and trusted in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	6	ahy9			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds the Galatian believers that even Abraham received righteousness by faith and not by the law.
-GAL	3	6	f7sv		ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	it was credited to him as righteousness	God saw Abraham’s faith in God, so then God considered Abraham righteous.
-GAL	3	7	i9x4	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1	those of faith	Alternate translation: “those who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	7	kq1h	figs-metaphor	οὗτοι υἱοί εἰσιν Ἀβραὰμ	1	children of Abraham	Since Abraham was saved by faith, Abraham’s true children are those who are also saved by faith as he was.This phrase goes against the opponents who claimed that the Galatian believers mustbe circumcised and obey the law in order to be a genuine son of Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	8	vs1m	figs-personification	προϊδοῦσα δὲ ἡ Γραφὴ	1	foreseeing	Here, **the scripture** is a personification and is equivalent to saying “the Lord” or “God”. Alternate translation: “God predicted” or “the Lord saw ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	3	8	k9tp	figs-you	ἐν σοὶ	1	In you	The word **you** refers to Abraham and is singular. Alternate translation: “Because of you” or “Because of what you have done” or “Because I have blessed you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-GAL	3	8	j83j		πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	all the nations	God was emphasizing that he was not favoring only the Jewish people, his chosen group. His plan of salvation was for both Jews and non-Jews.
+GAL	3	6	ahy9	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καθὼς	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **Just as** indicates that what follows is connected to what precedes it, specifically [3:1-5](../03/01.md). The phrase **Just as** is also introducing new information. The new information that this phrase is introducing is the biblical example of Abraham. Use a form that would be appropriate in this context. Alternate translation: “Even as”  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+GAL	3	6	iv9t	figs-quotemarks	ἐπίστευσεν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1		Here, Paul quotes Genesis 15:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning and end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+GAL	3	6	ohbw	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God credited it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	6	ghuy	figs-explicit	ἐλογίσθη	1		Here, the word **it** refers to Abraham’s belief in God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God credited his belief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	6	f7sv	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	it was credited to him as righteousness	See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md).  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+GAL	3	7	i9x4	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1	those of faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+GAL	3	7	rh9q	figs-explicit	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1		Your language may require you to state the object of **faith**. Here, the phrase **by faith** is probably a shortened way of of saying “who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ”. Here, the phrase **by faith** is equivalent or similar in meaning to the phrase “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ”. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the ones who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “the ones who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	7	kq1h	figs-metaphor	υἱοί…Ἀβραὰμ	1	children of Abraham	People who have faith in God, as Abraham did, are here spoken of as if they were Abraham’s **sons**. Paul does not mean that people who have faith in God are Abraham’s biological descendants but rather he is saying that they share a spiritual similarity to him because they believe in God, therefore Paul calls them **sons of Abraham**. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of Abraham** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	3	7	pq0z	figs-gendernotations	υἱοί	1	υἱοί	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 
+GAL	3	8	vs1m	figs-personification	προϊδοῦσα…ἡ Γραφὴ, ὅτι ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοῖ τὰ ἔθνη ὁ Θεὸς, προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ	1	foreseeing	Here, **the Scripture** is spoken of as though it were a person who could foresee **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith** and **preach the gospel**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+GAL	3	8	wws9	figs-extrainfo	ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Here, the phrase **the Scripture** could refer to: (1) The Scriptures as a whole, referring here to the entire Old Testament. If you are are using capitalization, or some other convention, to indicate when the words “Scripture” and “Scriptures” refer to the entirety of the collected writings of the Bible use that convention here. Here, “Scripture” would only refer to the Old Testament since the New Testament was still in the process of being written at this time. Most likely Paul is referring to the entire Old Testament when he says “the Scripture” here, and then when he quotes Genesis 12:3 at the end of this verse he is giving a specific example of a passage within the Old Testament that teaches **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith**. (2) just the specific scripture reference which is cited at the end of this verse, Genesis 12:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+GAL	3	8	htbq	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the object of **faith** explicitly. Alternate translation: “by their faith in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	8	ojbm	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”. Alternate translation: “by their believing in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	8	f6ly	writing-quotations	προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ	1		The sentence **In you all the nations will be blessed** is a quotation from Genesis 12:3. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham where it is written” or “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham when Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+GAL	3	8	j83j	figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	all the nations	Here, the term **nations** refers to the people who make up these **nations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all the nations” or “people from every nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+GAL	3	8	qf98	figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται ἐν σοὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “In you God will bless all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	9	ss1b		ὥστε	1		Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Consequently”
+GAL	3	9	l1bq		οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **the ones by faith** in [3:7](../03/7.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
+GAL	3	9	m5ef	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως εὐλογοῦνται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones by faith are the ones that God will bless” or “the ones who believe are blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	10	r5bm	figs-explicit	ὅσοι…ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἰσὶν	1		Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is probably a shortened way of saying “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous”. Here, the phrase **of works of the law** is similar in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “no man is justified by works of the law”. Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is describing people who rely on the **works of the law** and is in contrast to the phrase “the ones by faith” in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “as many as rely on the works of the law as the basis for being righteous before God” or “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous” or “as many as are trusting that God will consider them righteous because they try to obey the Law of Moses” or “as many as are seeking for God to consider them righteous on the basis of following what the Mosaic Law commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	10	uz3y	figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1		
+GAL	3	10	fv3c	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται…γεγραμμένοις	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 GAL	3	10	mxe7		ὅσοι γὰρ ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	the works of the law	Alternate translation: “All people who follow the law” or “Everyone who tries to be justified through obeying the law”
-GAL	3	10	jhr2	figs-metaphor	ὅσοι γὰρ ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἰσὶν ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν	1	All who rely on…the law are under a curse	Here, **under a curse** represents being cursed by God. Here it refers to eternal punishment. Alternate translation: “are cursed” or “God will eternally punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	11	sn9h		δῆλον	1	Now it is clear	Alternate translation: “it is obvious that” or “it is evident that”
-GAL	3	11	k6k5		ἐν νόμῳ, οὐδεὶς δικαιοῦται παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	no one is justified before God by the law	Alternate translation: “God justifies no one by the law”
-GAL	3	11	i537	figs-nominaladj	ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	the righteous will live by faith	The nominal adjective **righteous**” refers to people who righteous. Alternate translation: “Righteous people will live by faith” or “The person who is righteous because he believes will live” “It is through believing that a person becomes righteous and obtains eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-GAL	3	12	rep5		ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	must live by them	Alternate translation: “will live because of them” or “will because he obeyed them”
-GAL	3	13	ml63		ἐκ τῆς κατάρας τοῦ νόμου	1	from the curse of the law	The word **curse**  is a metonym for God condemning the person whom he has cursed. Alternate translation: “from God condemn us because we broke the law” or “from being cursed because of the law” or “from being cursed for not obeying the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	13	mt6z		ὁ κρεμάμενος ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	hangs on a tree	Paul expected his audience to understand that he was referring to Jesus hanging on the cross.
-GAL	3	14	brf7		ἵνα…ἡ εὐλογία τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ γένηται	1	so that the blessing of Abraham might come	Alternate translation: “Because Christ became a curse for us, the blessing of Abraham will come”
-GAL	3	14	h46q	figs-exclusive	λάβωμεν	1	we	The word **we** includes the people who would read the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	3	15	al9b		ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md).
-GAL	3	15	c3gs		κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	in human terms	Alternate translation: “from a human standpoint” or “with a human analogy”
-GAL	3	16	f1xu		δὲ	1	Now	This word shows that Paul has stated a general principle and is now beginning to introduce a specific case.
-GAL	3	16	w3wl		ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν	1	referring to many	Alternate translation: “referring to many descendants”
-GAL	3	16	t25e	figs-you	τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	to your descendant	The word **your** is singular and refers to a specific person who is a  descendant of Abraham (and that descendant is identified as “Christ”). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-GAL	3	17	h36m	translate-numbers	ὁ μετὰ τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη	1	430 years	Alternate translation: “four hundred and thirty years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-GAL	3	18	ujg2	figs-hypo	εἰ γὰρ ἐκ νόμου ἡ κληρονομία, οὐκέτι ἐξ ἐπαγγελίας	1	For if the inheritance comes by the law, then it no longer comes by promise	Paul is speaking of a situation that did not exist to emphasize that the inheritance came only by means of the promise. Alternate translation: “the inheritance comes to us by means of the promise, because we could not keep the demands of God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-GAL	3	18	c8fu	figs-metaphor	κληρονομία	1	inheritance	Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were an **inheritance** of property. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	19	kx2e		τί οὖν ὁ νόμος	1	What, then, was the purpose of the law?	This can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what the purpose of the law is.” or “Let me tell you why God gave the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	10	jhr2	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν	1	All who rely on…the law are under a curse	Here, **under a curse** represents being cursed by God and refers to being condemned by God and therefore being doomed to eternal punishment. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “are cursed by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	10	bin9	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “curse”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	10	uj98	figs-explicit	γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul uses the phrase **it is written** to indicate that what follows is a quotation from the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+GAL	3	11	zyvq	figs-activepassive	ἐν νόμῳ, οὐδεὶς δικαιοῦται παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God justifies no one by the law” or “God justifies no one as a result of their seeking to obey the Law of Moses” or “God justifies no person on the basis of doing what the Law of Moses commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	11	sn9h		δῆλον	1	Now it is clear	Alternate translation: “is evident”
+GAL	3	11	e2hj	writing-quotations	ὅτι	2		The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “because it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+GAL	3	11	qiab	writing-quotations	ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+GAL	3	11	i537	figs-nominaladj	ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	the righteous will live by faith	Paul is citing the prophet Habakkuk who is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “People who are righteous will live by their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+GAL	3	11	h7t4		ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		The phrase **by faith** could be connected to: (1) the phrase **will live** and be describing the ongoing means by which a righteous person has spiritual life, namely by their faith. Alternate translation: “The righteous person has life through their faith” or “The righteous person lives as a result of their faith” “The righteous person has spiritual life as a result of their faith” (2) the phrase **the righteous** and be describing the means by which God considers a sinful person to be **righteous*, namely by their having faith in him. Alternate translation: “The person who is made right with God as a result of their faith will live” or “Every person whose record of sins God erases because that person trusts God will live spiritually”\n 
+GAL	3	11	osgj	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	the righteous will live by faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by believing” or “because they believe” or “by believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	11	e610	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the object of **faith** here is God. Alternate translation: “by believing in God” or “because they believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	12	jr9l	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		The word **Now** indicates that Paul is introducing new information into his argument and it also indicates that Paul is introducing information that will be in contrast with his statement in [3:11](../03/11.md), that “the law” is not able to justify a person. Use a natural form in your language for indicating these things. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+GAL	3	12	hr2x	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	12	r7i7	figs-explicit	ὁ…νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως	1		Here, the phrase **the law is not by faith** means that the Law of Moses is not based on faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the Law of Moses is not founded on faith” or “the Law of Moses is not dependent upon faith” or “when God gave his laws to the Jews he did not make them dependent upon a person believing in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	12	fml8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		What follows the word **but** here is indicating a contrast between **law** and **faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+GAL	3	12	opyp	writing-quotations	ἀλλ’	1		The phrase **The one doing these things will live in them** is a quotation from Leviticus 18:5. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “but as it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+GAL	3	12	khuu	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1		The phrase **these things” refers to God’s “statutes” and “laws” which are mentioned in the first part of Leviticus 18:5. Paul is citing the second half of Leviticus 18:5 here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly in your translation what “these things” refers to. Alternate translation: “these law and statutes of mine” or “my law and statutes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	12	rep5	figs-explicit	ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	must live by them	Here, the phrase **will live in them** means FILL or DELETE. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will live because of them” or “will because he obeyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+GAL	3	13	ml63	figs-explicit	τῆς κατάρας…κατάρα	1	from the curse of the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb phrase as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+GAL	3	13	vqc3	figs-metonymy	κατάρα	1		By using the phrase **a curse** Paul is describing a person who is cursed by God by association with the **curse** itself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “one who was cursed” or “one who was cursed by God” or “one who God cursed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+GAL	3	13	vaay		ὑπὲρ	1		Alternate translation: “for”
+GAL	3	13	p5m9		ὅτι γέγραπται	1		The phrase **for it is written** is introducing a quotation from Deuteronomy 21:23. See how you translated the phrase **for it is written** in [3:10](../03/10.md) where it is also introducing a quotation from Scripture.
+GAL	3	13	vjbr		ἐπικατάρατος πᾶς ὁ	1		See how you translated the phrase **Cursed is everyone** in [3:10](../03/10.md).
+GAL	3	13	mt6z	figs-explicit	ξύλου	1	hangs on a tree	In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the word **tree** can refer to a post made out of wood. Here, Paul is using this term to refer to the wooden cross that Jesus was crucified on. If it would help your readers, use a term which would be applicable to something made of wood and not merely to a live tree. Alternate translation: “a pole” or “a wooden pole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	14	brf7	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	so that the blessing of Abraham might come	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for Christ’s death (which he discussed in the previous verse). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n
+GAL	3	14	z38j	figs-abstractnouns	εὐλογία	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “bless”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	14	a0nd	figs-explicit	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, the word **in** could be used to indicate: (1) by what means **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely “by means of” **Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of Christ Jesus” or “through Christ Jesus” or “by Christ Jesus” (2) the sphere in which **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely **so that the blessing of Abraham might come to the Gentiles** who are “in the sphere of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “who are in union with Christ Jesus” (3) the reason **the blessing of Abraham** would ** come to the Gentiles**, namely “because of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “because of what Christ Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+GAL	3	14	gt7z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	2		Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for **the blessing of Abraham** coming **to the Gentiles**, namely so that **the promise of the Spirit** could be received **through faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+GAL	3	14	g87i		διὰ	1		Alternate translation: “by” 
+GAL	3	14	agv5	figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1		Here, the object of **faith** is Christ. If it would help your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. The phrase **through faith** also occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md), where it has “Jesus Christ” as the object of the phrase “through faith”. Alternate translation: “through faith in Christ” or “through faith in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	14	qsai	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	14	h46q	figs-exclusive	λάβωμεν	1	we	When Paul says **we** he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so **we** would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+GAL	3	14	ezpz	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a verb form such as “promised”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	14	vce3	figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to explain what the **promise** is regarding. Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that the **promise** he is referring to here is the promise regarding the coming Holy Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “promise regarding the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+GAL	3	15	al9b		ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	See how you translated the term “brothers** in [Galatians 1:11](../01/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
+GAL	3	15	c3gs	figs-explicit	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	in human terms	Here, Paul uses the phrase **according to man** to means that he is speaking in accord with the manner of human practice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “with a human analogy from human legal practice” or “using an analogy from standard daily life”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+GAL	3	15	bfjq	figs-gendernotations	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to humans in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “using an analogy from standard human practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 
+GAL	3	15	si56		ὅμως	1		Here, the word **Nevertheless** could be: (1) indicating a concession. Paul is admitting or conceding that the analogy from human legal affairs that he is about to use is imperfect, **Nevertheless** he is going to use it to illustrate a spiritual truth. (2) indicating a comparison. Alternate translation: “similarly” or “likewise”
+GAL	3	15	jrdg	figs-activepassive	ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which people have established” or “which men have established” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	15	rbir	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην διαθήκην, οὐδεὶς ἀθετεῖ ἢ ἐπιδιατάσσεται	1		Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “no one sets aside or adds to a covenant which people have established” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+GAL	3	15	zu16	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to people in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 
+GAL	3	16	f1xu	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** could indicate: (1) that Paul is introducing additional information into his ongoing argument. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” (2) a transition. Alternate translation: “But note that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+GAL	3	16	rreg	figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ…τοῖς σπέρμασιν…τῷ σπέρματί σου	1		Here, the term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring.  If your readers would not understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	3	16	x8m7		τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ…τοῖς σπέρμασιν…τῷ σπέρματί σου	1		In order to correctly communicate Paul’s meaning here it is important to translate both occurrences of the word **seed** with a singular form and to translate the single occurrence of the word **seeds** with a plural form that indicates more than one.
+GAL	3	16	j9x7	figs-explicit	οὐ λέγει	1		Here, the word **He** could: (1) refer to God speaking to Abraham. By using the phrase **and to your seed** Paul is referring to multiple passages in the book of Genesis where God made promises to Abraham and his **seed**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **He** refers to the God. Alternate translation: “God does not say” (2) be translated as “It” and be referring to the various passages in Genesis which record that God spoke promises to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **It** refers to Scripture. Alternate translation: “Scripture does not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	16	w3wl	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐφ’ ἑνός	1	referring to many	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as speaking about many, but as speaking about one” or “as referring to many, but as referring to one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])\n
+GAL	3	16	t25e	figs-you	σου	1	to your descendant	The word **your** is singular and refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+GAL	3	17	pdd3		δὲ	1		Alternate translation: “And”
+GAL	3	17	h36m	translate-numbers	τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη	1	430 years	Alternate translation: “four hundred and thirty years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+GAL	3	17	qn7j	figs-activepassive	προκεκυρωμένην ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which God established previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	17	fmw4	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ καταργῆσαι	1		Here, the word **to** introduces what the result would have been if **the law** had **set aside the covenant previously established by God**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “so as to nullify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+GAL	3	18	ujg2		εἰ…ἐκ…ἡ κληρονομία, οὐκέτι ἐξ	1	For if the inheritance comes by the law, then it no longer comes by promise	Alternate translation: “if the inheritance is from…then it is no longer from”
+GAL	3	18	c8fu	figs-metaphor	 ἡ κληρονομία	1	inheritance	Paul speaks of God’s blessings to those who believe in him as if they were an **inheritance**. If your readers would not understand what **inheritance** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the blessing” or “God’s blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	3	18	h1xv	figs-explicit	ἐκ νόμου…οὐκέτι ἐξ	1		Alternate translation: “is by the law, it is no longer by” or “is based on the law, it is no longer based on” or “comes from the law, it no longer comes from”
+GAL	3	18	q6jq	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to the idea that **the inheritance is from the law**. Instead, Paul points out that **the inheritance** is based on God’s promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 
+GAL	3	18	xsep	figs-explicit	κεχάρισται	1		Here, the word **it** refers to **the inheritance** mentioned earlier in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “has graciously given the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	18	ue27		δι’	1		Here, the word **through** is indicating means and is introducing the means through which God gave **the inheritance … to Abraham**, namely **through a promise**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating the means by which something happens.
+GAL	3	19	kx2e	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ὁ νόμος	1	What, then, was the purpose of the law?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have regarding the purpose of the law and to introduce his answer to this anticipated question. If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what the purpose of the law is” or “Let me tell you why God added the law to the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+GAL	3	19	mnw2	figs-ellipsis	ὁ νόμος	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was the law given” or “did God give the law” or “was the law added” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 GAL	3	19	uk9m	figs-activepassive	προσετέθη	1	It was added	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God added it” or “God added the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	19	cf66	figs-activepassive	διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	The law was put into force through angels by a mediator	God used angels to give the law to Moses. Moses is referred here as a **mediator** between God and the people of Israel. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God issued the law with the help of angels, and a mediator put it into force” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	19	bgi6		χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	a mediator	Alternate translation: “given through a middleman”
-GAL	3	20	x9l1		ὁ δὲ μεσίτης ἑνὸς οὐκ ἔστιν, ὁ δὲ Θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν	1	Now a mediator implies more than one person, but God is one	God gave his promise to Abraham without a mediator, but he gave the law to Moses, who was a mediator between God and the people of Israel.
-GAL	3	21	wes3	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The word **us** in this section is inclusive and refers to all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+GAL	3	19	yf5t		τῶν παραβάσεων χάριν προσετέθη	1		The phrase **because of transgressions** could refer to: (1) the purpose that **the law … was added** to the covenant with Abraham, namely the law **was added** to the covenant “for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “for the purpose of showing people what sin is”. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the purpose that **the law … was added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted show them what sin was by giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “It was added for the purpose of showing people what sin is” (2) what caused God to decide that **the law** should be **added** to the covenant with Abraham. This phrase would then mean that what caused God to add **the law** to the covenant was because people were committing transgressions. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the cause for **the law** being **added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted to correct people’s wrong and sinful behavior by showing them what righteous behavior was and so he gave **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added because people were committing transgressions” or “It was added because people were sinning”
+GAL	3	19	phd5	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν παραβάσεων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgressions**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “sinful”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	19	cf66	figs-activepassive	 διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων	1	The law was put into force through angels by a mediator	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+GAL	3	19	lxcw		διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων	1		Translate the phrase **through angels** in a way that indicates that God was the source of the law and not angels. God was the source of the law but he used angels to give the law Moses. The Bible records in Deuteronomy 33:2; Hebrews 2:2; and Acts 7:38, 53 that God used angels to give Moses his law and this is what Jewish people believed regarding how God delivered his law to Moses. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels” 
+GAL	3	19	v74y		ἄχρις οὗ ἔλθῃ τὸ σπέρμα ᾧ ἐπήγγελται, διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1		When Paul says that **the law** was administered **by the hand of a mediator (Moses) until the seed would come to whom the promise had been made** his point is that **the law** was temporary and only needed **until the seed (Christ) would come**. By saying this, Paul is implicitly telling the Galatian believers that the law was temporary, and only needed until Christ, whom he calls **the seed**, came.
+GAL	3	19	bgi6	figs-idiom	ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	a mediator	The phrase **by the hand of** is an idiom which means “through.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “through a mediator” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+GAL	3	19	edcu	figs-explicit	μεσίτου	1	a mediator	Here, the **mediator** that Paul is referring to is Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of Moses who acted as a mediator” or “of Moses who acted as a go-between” or “of Moses who acted as an intermediary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	19	m67a		σπέρμα	1		See how you translated the word **seed** in [3:16](../03/16.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
+GAL	3	19	nl4h	figs-activepassive	ἐπήγγελται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God had made the promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	20	x9l1		ὁ δὲ μεσίτης ἑνὸς οὐκ ἔστιν	1	Now a mediator implies more than one person, but God is one	In this verse Paul is proving to the Galatian believers that God’s promise to Abraham is superior to the law that he gave Moses. What Paul means by saying **a mediator is not for one** is that a mediator is not needed when one person is speaking with another person directly. Paul is implicitly expressing to the Galatian believers that the promise to Abraham is superior to the law because it was not given through a mediator but rather God gave the promise directly to Abraham. If it would help your readers you could indicate that in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section.
+GAL	3	20	pqtm		μεσίτης	1		See how you translated the term **mediator** in [3:19](../03/19.md). 
+GAL	3	20	y3ix	figs-explicit	ἑνὸς	1		The phrase **for one** leaves the object implied. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what **one** is referring to. Alternate translation: “for one party alone” or “needed for one party” or “needed when there is only one party involved” or “is not needed as a go-between when only one party is involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	20	lhui	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	2		What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to the opening statement in this verse that **a mediator is not for one**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+GAL	3	20	l2b6	figs-explicit	δὲ	2		Here, the phrase **God is one** is a quote from Deuteronomy 6:4 which the Galatians believers would have been familiar with. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the phrase **God is one** is cited from Scripture. Alternate translation: “but as God has said in Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	20	cle8		Θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν	1		There are many different views among Bible scholars as to exactly what Paul means by using the phrase **God is one** here and how it is related to the phrase **a mediator is not for one** earlier in the verse. The most likely interpretation is that expressed by the UST. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section.
+GAL	3	21	zwk0	figs-rquestion	ὁ…νόμος κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have and to introduce his answer to the question which begins with the phrase **if a was given being able to make alive...** If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “you might think that the law is against the promises” or “you might think that the law is opposed to the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 GAL	3	21	e43u		κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1	against the promises	Alternate translation: “opposed to the promises” or “in conflict with the promises”
+GAL	3	21	ee7y	figs-explicit	τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1		The phrase **the promises** refers to the promises that God made to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promises that God made to Abraham” or “God’s promises to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	21	nd97		μὴ γένοιτο	1		**May it never be** is an emphatic way of negating a statement. The statement that the phrase **May it never be** is negating is the proposed question **is the law against the promises**. Use a natural word or expression for strongly negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Certainly not!”
+GAL	3	21	jnwe	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ…ἐδόθη νόμος ὁ δυνάμενος ζῳοποιῆσαι, ὄντως	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Alternate translation: “if it was possible that a law was given that was able to make people alive, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])\n\n\n\n
+GAL	3	21	bjpb	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη νόμος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God gave a law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	21	dljp	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιῆσαι	1		Here, it is implied that Paul is referring to making “people” alive. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make people alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	21	skc0	figs-extrainfo	ζῳοποιῆσαι	1		The phrase **to make alive** could refer to: (1) both eternal life in the future and to making people spiritually alive in the present. Paul is probably referring to both here since in this letter Paul discusses the important role of the Holy Spirit and the fact that the Holy Spirit is given through faith and not the law. (2) eternal life in the future after a person dies. If it is possible in your language, it would be best to retain a general phrase as modeled by the ULT, since Paul does not explain the phrase **to make alive**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+GAL	3	21	nebi	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δικαιοσύνη	1		See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
 GAL	3	21	iyg9		ἐν νόμου ἂν ἦν ἡ δικαιοσύνη	1	righteousness would certainly have come by the law	Alternate translation: “we could have become righteous by obeying that law”
-GAL	3	22	jbn7	figs-personification	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	scripture	This could refer to: (1) a particular passage of Scripture (2) all of scripture (3) a metonymy for God himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	23	su16	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι	1	we were held captive under the law, imprisoned	The way the law controlled us is spoken of as if the law were a prison guard holding us as captives. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law held us captive in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	23	t32j	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	until faith should be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “until God would reveal that he justifies those who have faith in Christ” or “until God would reveal that he justifies those who trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+GAL	3	22	smkw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, the word **But** is indicating a strong contrast between the hypothetical (and false) possibility that “the law” could make a person righteous. Paul is using the word **But** here to indicate this strong contrast and to introduce his explanation of what the law actually does. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 
+GAL	3	22	yzcp	figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1		Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If your readers would not understand what **imprisoned all things under sin** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	3	22	upkg	figs-personification	συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1		Here, Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were a person who is an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+GAL	3	22	jbn7	figs-metonymy	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	scripture	Here, the word **Scripture** could: (1) refer to all of the Old Testament scriptures. Use whatever convention you are using to indicate this. The ULT indicates when the word **Scripture** refers to the entire Bible, or the entire Old Testament, by capitalizing the word **Scripture**. (2) refer to a particular passage of Scripture such as Deuteronomy 27:26 or some other Old Testament passage. Alternate translation: “the scripture”
+GAL	3	22	dxqc	figs-metonymy	ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Paul is describing “God” doing something by association with his Word, **the Scripture**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+GAL	3	22	mk9g	figs-explicit	τὰ πάντα	1		Here, the phrase **all things* could refer to: (1) all people. If your language requires you to indicate explicitly what **all things** refers to, you could indicate that it refers to “people,” but if it doesn’t you could use a general expression as modeled by the ULT. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the entire creation and the things which make up this present fallen world. See Romans 8:18-22. If you decide that this is what Paul means you should use a general phrase such as **all things** as the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+GAL	3	22	dt14	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1		Here, the phrase **under sin** refers to being “under the power of sin.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the power of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	22	xqmi	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Following the phrase **so that** Paul states the purpose for which **the Scripture imprisoned all things under sin**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 
+GAL	3	22	pvv3	figs-activepassive	ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might give the promise by faith in Jesus Christ to the ones believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	22	elb4		ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1		Alternate translation: “God’s promise to Abraham which is received through faith in Jesus Christ might be given to the those who believe” 
+GAL	3	22	ib27	figs-explicit	ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1		The phrase **the promise** refers to the promise given to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise given to Abraham” or “the promise that God gave to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	22	jyvn		ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		See how you translated the phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). The phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) has basically the exact same meaning as the phrase **by faith in Jesus Christ** does in this verse.
+GAL	3	22	bo1b	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	23	jzut	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν…τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusting” or “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
+GAL	3	23	ztcj	figs-explicit	πρὸ τοῦ…ἐλθεῖν τὴν πίστιν	1		The phrase **before the faith came** means “before faith in Jesus Christ came.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “before faith in Jesus Christ came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	23	su16	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι	1	we were held captive under the law, imprisoned	Here, Paul is continuing the metaphor of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. The power that **the law** had over humans us is spoken of as if the law were a prison guard holding people captive. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **held captive** by the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL	3	23	r5y3	figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι	1		Here, Paul is continuing his personification of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. Paul speaks of **the law** as though it were a jailer who **held** people **captive** and kept them **imprisoned** up **until** the time when the coming **faith** in Jesus Christ would **be revealed**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+GAL	3	23	e729	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law held us captive under its power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	23	xmur	figs-activepassive	συνκλειόμενοι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the first half of the verse states that **the law** did it. Alternate translation: “and the law imprisoned us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 
+GAL	3	23	way9		εἰς	1		Here, the word **until** could: (1) refer to time and be introducing the time period at which people being **imprisoned** under the law would terminate, namely **until** the time when God would reveal Jesus Christ as on object of faith. (2) be translated as “to” and be indicating the purpose for people being **imprisoned** under the law, namely so that people would be ready for the coming faith in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “to”
+GAL	3	23	rz75	figs-explicit	τὴν…πίστιν	2		The phrase **the faith** means “the faith in Jesus Christ.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the faith in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 
+GAL	3	23	t32j	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	until faith should be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “until the faith that God was about to reveal” or “until the faith that God would soon reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 GAL	3	24	ln1s	figs-personification	παιδαγωγὸς	1	guardian	A **guardian**  was usually a slave who was responsible for enforcing rules and behaviors given by the parent and would report to the parent on the child’s actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 GAL	3	24	s8g5	figs-activepassive	ἵνα…δικαιωθῶμεν	1	so that we might be justified	Before Christ came, God had planned to justify us. When Christ came, he carried out his plan to justify us. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that God would declare us to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 GAL	3	27	v6n1		ὅσοι γὰρ εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	For as many of you who were baptized into Christ	Alternate translation: “For all of you who were baptized into Christ”

en_tn_51-PHP.tsv

@@ -1,12 +1,11 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 PHP	front	intro	pv9j			0		# Introduction to Philippians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of Philippians<br><br>1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1–11)<br>2. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12–26)<br>3. Instructions<br>    * To be steadfast (1:27–30)<br>    * To be united (2:1–2)<br>    * To be humble (2:3–11)<br>    * To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12–13)<br>    * To be innocent, and shining as light (2:14–18)<br>4. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19–30)<br>5. Warning about false teachers (3:1–4:1)<br>6. Personal instruction (4:2–5)<br>7. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4–6)<br>8. Final remarks<br>    * Values (4:8–9)<br>    * Contentment (4:10–20)<br>    * Final Greetings (4:21–23)<br><br>### Who wrote the book of Philippians?<br><br>Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.<br><br>### What is the book of Philippians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice, even if they were suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus, the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill, so Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome him and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returned.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Philippi like?<br><br>Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul tells the believers that it is much more important that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The words “you” and “your” always refer to the believers in Philippi, except for one time in 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?<br><br>The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired, and God would not punish them (3:19).<br><br>### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ.<br><br>### What does Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” or “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>These kinds of expressions occur in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Philippians?<br><br>Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and some modern versions include it, but many other versions do not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 PHP	1	intro	kd3g			0		# Philippians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Paul follows the normal practice of the time by beginning the letter with a statement of the names of the senders and the recipients. In that culture, the sender would then offer a good wish for the recipients. Paul does this in the form of a Christian blessing.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The day of Christ<br><br>This refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
-PHP	1	1	xk9z	translate-names	Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος	1	Paul and Timothy	**Paul** and **Timothy** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 PHP	1	1	bzfs		ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul and Timothy	Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus”
 PHP	1	2	uuep	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Grace to you and peace	This is a greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 PHP	1	2	pyji	figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1		Here, **you** refers to the Philippian Christians and is plural in form in the original language in which Paul wrote. Throughout this letter, with one exception, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/03.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	1	2	yh4s	figs-exclusive	Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1		If your language has different forms for including or excluding the hearers, use the inclusive form for **our** here and throughout the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-PHP	1	3	ntp5		ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν	1	in all my remembrance of you	Here, **in all {my} remembrance of you** could refer to: (1) each time that Paul thought about the Philippian believers. Alternate translation: “each time that I think about you” (2) each time that Paul prayed for the Philippian believers. Alternate translation: “every time that I pray for you”
+PHP	1	3	ntp5		ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν	1	in all my remembrance of you	Here, **in all my remembrance of you** could refer to: (1) each time that Paul thought about the Philippian believers. Alternate translation: “each time that I think about you” (2) each time that Paul prayed for the Philippian believers. Alternate translation: “every time that I pray for you”
 PHP	1	3	gjyv	figs-possession	τῷ Θεῷ μου	1		Use of the words **my God** does not mean that God belongs to Paul, but that Paul belongs to God. That is, God is the one whom Paul worships exclusively. Alternate translation: “the one who is God to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 PHP	1	3	w8dz	figs-yousingular	ὑμῶν	1		See how you translated the word **you** in [1:2](../01/02.md). In this letter, every use of the words **you** and **your** is plural and refers to the Philippian believers, except for one use in [4:3](../04/03.md), which has a note to discuss it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	1	5	bca2		ἐπὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν	1		Here, **because** could refer to: (1) the reason that Paul gives thanks to God. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God because of your partnership in the gospel from the first day until now” (2) the reason for Paul’s joy.
@@ -19,28 +18,28 @@ PHP	1	6	jf4x	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐναρξάμενος ἐν ὑμῖν ἔργ
 PHP	1	6	u80a	figs-explicit	ὅτι ὁ ἐναρξάμενος ἐν ὑμῖν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν	1		The phrase **a good work in you** refers to both the initial conversion of the Philippian Christians and to God’s ongoing work in their lives through the Holy Spirit. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that God, having begun his good work in you through your conversion and continuing it through the work of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	1	6	qhmh		ὑμῖν	1		See how you translated the word **you** in [Philippians 1:2](../01/02.md).
 PHP	1	6	p2a5	figs-explicit	ἐπιτελέσει	1		Here, **will perfect {it}** means that God would bring to completion the work which he began in the lives of the Philippian believers at their conversion and which he was continuing to do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	1	6	p5pu	figs-explicit	ἡμέρας Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		The phrase **{the} day of Jesus Christ** refers to the time in the future when Jesus Christ will return to judge the world and save those who believe in him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	1	7	sowf	figs-idiom	τὸ ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς	1	I have you in my heart	The phrase, **I have you in {my} heart** is an idiom which expresses strong affection. If you have an equivalent expression which adequately communicates the meaning, you may use it here. If not, you could state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “I love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+PHP	1	6	p5pu	figs-explicit	ἡμέρας Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		The phrase **the day of Jesus Christ** refers to the time in the future when Jesus Christ will return to judge the world and save those who believe in him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	1	7	sowf	figs-idiom	τὸ ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς	1	I have you in my heart	The phrase, **I have you in my heart** is an idiom which expresses strong affection. If you have an equivalent expression which adequately communicates the meaning, you may use it here. If not, you could state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “I love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 PHP	1	7	jn2s		συνκοινωνούς μου τῆς χάριτος…ὄντας	1	being partakers with me of grace	Alternate translation: “sharing in grace with me”
 PHP	1	7	df00	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτος	1		Here, **grace** refers to the way that God kindly gives us good things that we do not deserve. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with a verb or adjective. In this context, Paul considers both his imprisonment and his ministry of defending and confirming the gospel to be gifts from God. Alternate translation: “of God’s gracious gift” or “in experiencing how kind God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	7	o7ef	figs-metonymy	δεσμοῖς μου	1		Paul refers to his imprisonment in Rome by using the phrase **my chains**. Paul was chained to a guard and the Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 PHP	1	7	wey7	figs-doublet	καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀπολογίᾳ καὶ βεβαιώσει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1		The words translated **defense** and **confirmation** could be used to refer to defending and confirming in a court of law the truth of something against which a charge was made. These two words mean very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that this is hard work. If your language has one word for these ideas, use that here and add emphasis another way. If there is a word or phrase that could be used with this legal sense but could also be used in the context of defending the gospel, consider using it here. Alternate translation: “and as I contend for the truth of the gospel” or “and as I labor to show people that the gospel is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 PHP	1	8	xun1	figs-idiom	ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	in the bowels of Christ Jesus	The Greek word translated as **inner parts** is a term which refers to body organs, particularly to the intestines, liver, lungs, and heart. Paul is using **inner parts** to refer to love or affection. You can use the body part that represents the seat of affection in your language, or translate the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “with the heart of Christ Jesus” or “with the affection of Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-PHP	1	8	bo0r		ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	in the bowels of Christ Jesus	Here, **{the} inner parts of Christ Jesus** could mean: (1) the same kind of love as Christ Jesus gives to people. (2) love that originates with Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “with love that comes from Christ Jesus”
+PHP	1	8	bo0r		ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	in the bowels of Christ Jesus	Here, **the inner parts of Christ Jesus** could mean: (1) the same kind of love as Christ Jesus gives to people. (2) love that originates with Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “with love that comes from Christ Jesus”
 PHP	1	9	jlyu	figs-abstractnouns	ἵνα ἡ ἀγάπη ὑμῶν ἔτι μᾶλλον καὶ μᾶλλον περισσεύῃ	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with the verb form. Alternate translation: “that you will be able to love others more and more abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	9	f4q5		ὑμῶν	1		See how you translated the word **your** in [Philippians 1:5](../01/05.md).
 PHP	1	9	tbtt	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐπιγνώσει καὶ πάσῃ αἰσθήσει	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **knowledge** and **understanding** with verb phrases. Alternate translation: “and that God will enable you to see the truth about Him and teach you to love wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	10	e17g	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ δοκιμάζειν ὑμᾶς τὰ διαφέροντα	1		The word **{what}** here refers to that which a person does, and the word **excels** here refers to something that is best, according to God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that you may approve and choose to do what pleases God the most” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	1	10	ybw6	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς	1		Here, the phrase **so that** shows that what follows this phrase is the desired result of Paul’s prayer in verse nine. Consider using a connecting word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows it is the desired result of what Paul prayed in verse nine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHP	1	10	siv8	figs-doublet	εἰλικρινεῖς καὶ ἀπρόσκοποι	1	pure and blameless	The words **pure** and **blameless** have very similar meanings. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the idea of moral purity. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these two words and translate them as one idea. Alternate translation: “completely innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-PHP	1	11	lu5n	figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης τὸν	1		Here, the phrase **being filled with** is a metaphor meaning to be occupied in doing something. The phrase **{the} fruit of righteousness** is a metaphor which refers to what characterizes a person, namely what a person produces. This metaphor is a comparison between a good tree that produces good fruit and a person who is filled with righteousness and produces good actions as a result. So with these two metaphors, Paul is telling the Philippians to be occupied in doing righteous deeds. If this would be unclear in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “filling your lives with the righteous deeds that are” or “habitually doing the good works that are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+PHP	1	11	lu5n	figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης τὸν	1		Here, the phrase **being filled with** is a metaphor meaning to be occupied in doing something. The phrase **the fruit of righteousness** is a metaphor which refers to what characterizes a person, namely what a person produces. This metaphor is a comparison between a good tree that produces good fruit and a person who is filled with righteousness and produces good actions as a result. So with these two metaphors, Paul is telling the Philippians to be occupied in doing righteous deeds. If this would be unclear in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “filling your lives with the righteous deeds that are” or “habitually doing the good works that are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	1	11	t3w4	figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένοι	1		The phrase **being filled with** is a passive form. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “letting God fill you with” or “continually producing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 PHP	1	11	yq99	figs-metaphor	τὸν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **through Christ Jesus** is a metaphor meaning that Christ Jesus is the one who makes it possible for a person to be righteous and thus to do the things that a righteous person does. Alternate translation: “that Christ Jesus produces in you” or “that Christ Jesus enables you to produce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	1	11	jwgb	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς δόξαν καὶ ἔπαινον Θεοῦ	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **glory** and **praise** with verbs. Alternate translation: “which will cause people to glorify and praise God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	11	mfs6	figs-doublet	εἰς δόξαν καὶ ἔπαινον Θεοῦ	1		The words **glory** and **praise** mean very similar things here. They are used together to emphasize how much people will praise God. If you have one word for this in your language, you could use it here and show emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “which will cause people to greatly praise God” or “which will cause people to declare how great God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 PHP	1	12	tu2t	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a spiritual sense to include both men and women who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 PHP	1	12	ygt3	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Paul is using the term **brothers** here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “my companions who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	1	12	zy4g	figs-explicit	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ	1	the things concerning me	The phrase **the {things} concerning me** refers to Paul’s imprisonment. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things I have suffered because I was put into prison for preaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	1	12	zy4g	figs-explicit	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ	1	the things concerning me	The phrase **the things concerning me** refers to Paul’s imprisonment. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things I have suffered because I was put into prison for preaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	1	12	q288	figs-metaphor	μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν	1	have really happened for the advancement of the gospel	The phrase **advancement of the gospel** refers to an increasing number of people hearing and believing the gospel. Alternate translation: “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	1	13	wi6n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	my chains in Christ became apparent among the whole palace guard and all the others	Here, the phrase **As a result** shows that what follows this phrase is the result of Paul’s circumstances which he began discussing in verse 12, namely, his imprisonment. Consider using a connecting word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows it is the result of Paul’s imprisonment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHP	1	13	h1ly	figs-metonymy	δεσμούς μου	1	my chains in Christ became apparent	Paul again refers to his imprisonment in a figurative way by using the phrase **my chains**. See how you translated this phrase in [1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -77,7 +76,7 @@ PHP	1	20	ysty	figs-doublenegatives	ἐν οὐδενὶ αἰσχυνθήσομ
 PHP	1	20	ch6v	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ παρρησίᾳ	1	whether through life or through death	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with a similar adverb. Alternate translation: “always act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	20	y78k	figs-abstractnouns	εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς εἴτε διὰ θανάτου	1	whether through life or through death	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **life** and **death** with their verbal forms. Alternate translation: “whether I live or I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	21	n3jd	figs-abstractnouns	κέρδος	1	to die is gain	If the abstract noun **gain** would be unclear in your language, you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “to die is to go to Christ” or “to die would give me more blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHP	1	22	a21c	figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκί	1	Now if to live in the flesh	Here Paul is using the word **flesh** to refer to his entire body. The phrase **in {the} flesh** then refers to living as physical beings. If this would be confusing in your language, consider using a different word or phrase that refers to this present physical life. Alternate translation: “on this earth” or “in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+PHP	1	22	a21c	figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκί	1	Now if to live in the flesh	Here Paul is using the word **flesh** to refer to his entire body. The phrase **in the flesh** then refers to living as physical beings. If this would be confusing in your language, consider using a different word or phrase that refers to this present physical life. Alternate translation: “on this earth” or “in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 PHP	1	22	mwl6	figs-metaphor	τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου	1	this is fruitful labor for me	Here, the word **fruitful** refers to Paul’s work producing good results. This is a metaphor in which Paul’s anticipated productive work is compared to a plant or tree which produces good fruit. Alternate translation: “this will mean effectively serving God” or “this will mean productively working for the advancement of the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	1	22	kxuu	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου	1		If the an abstract noun **labor** would be unclear in your language, you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “I will accomplish something important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	23	tq29	figs-metaphor	συνέχομαι δὲ ἐκ τῶν δύο	1	But I am hard pressed between the two	The phrase **I am hard pressed between the two** is a metaphor. Paul speaks as if he were experiencing literal pressure from two opposite sides at the same time. Paul uses this figurative expression to show his difficulty in deciding which decision is best, if given the option between living or dying. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate this phrase using a metaphor that would make sense in your language, or you could choose to use plain language to express it. Alternate translation: “both options have their advantages, so the decision is not an easy one for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -127,7 +126,7 @@ PHP	2	1	dapb	figs-explicit	εἴ τις…παράκλησις ἐν Χριστ
 PHP	2	1	k1b2	figs-explicit	εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης	1	if any comfort of love	Here, **love** probably refers to Christ’s love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “if his love has given you any comfort” or “if his love for you has comforted you in any way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	1	d63e	figs-abstractnouns	εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **comfort** and **love** by using verbal forms of these words and/or using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if Christ’s love for you has comforted you” or “if being loved by Christ has comforted you” or “if Christ’s love comforts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	1	ub8e	figs-explicit	εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης	1		The phrase **comfort of love** refers to the comfort which the Philippian believers received from Christ’s love. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if you have received any comfort from Christ’s love” or “if Christ’s love comforts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	2	1	m84k		εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος	1	if any fellowship of the Spirit	The phrase **fellowship of {the} Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other. Alternate translation: “if the Spirit has produced any fellowship among you” or “if the Spirit has given you fellowship with each other” (2) the Philippian Christians’ fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have fellowship with the Spirit” (3) both the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other and to their having fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have any fellowship with the Spirit and the Spirit has produced in you any fellowship with each other”
+PHP	2	1	m84k		εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος	1	if any fellowship of the Spirit	The phrase **fellowship of the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other. Alternate translation: “if the Spirit has produced any fellowship among you” or “if the Spirit has given you fellowship with each other” (2) the Philippian Christians’ fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have fellowship with the Spirit” (3) both the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other and to their having fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have any fellowship with the Spirit and the Spirit has produced in you any fellowship with each other”
 PHP	2	1	quhq	figs-abstractnouns	εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος	1	if any fellowship of the Spirit	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **fellowship** by using it in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if the Spirit has produced any fellowship among you” or “if the Spirit has given you fellowship with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	1	l2px	figs-abstractnouns	εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί	1	if any affections and compassions	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **affections** and **compassions** by using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if you feel any affection and compassion for one another” or “if you have any affection and compassion for each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	1	u3dz	figs-explicit	εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί	1	if any affections and compassions	The phrase **if any affections and compassions** probably refers to the Philippian believers’ affection and compassion toward each other. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if you have any affection and compassion toward one another”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -149,15 +148,15 @@ PHP	2	5	pqdc		τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν
 PHP	2	5	rh98	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Have this attitude in you which also was in Christ Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **attitude**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **attitude** with a verb such as “think.” Alternate translation: “Think about one another the way Christ Jesus thought of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	5	kwoe	figs-yousingular	τοῦτο φρονεῖτε	1		This is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian believers. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you should have this attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	2	5	acmu	figs-explicit	τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here the phrase **Have this attitude in you which also {was} in Christ Jesus** means that a believer is to have the same attitude and disposition which Christ Jesus had and which characterized his behavior. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating it explicitly. Alternate translation: “Think the same way that Christ Jesus did” or “Have the same values which Christ Jesus also had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	2	6	xo2l		ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων	1		The phrase **existing in {the} form of God** means that Jesus had the very nature of God. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be God, but was not God. This phrase is saying that Jesus was fully God. The rest of this verse and the next two verses explain that Jesus, while being fully God, humbled himself and acted as a servant, in obedience to God. Avoid any translation that would suggest that Jesus was not fully God. Alternate translation: “being fully God” or “though everything that is true of God is true of him”
+PHP	2	6	xo2l		ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων	1		The phrase **existing in the form of God** means that Jesus had the very nature of God. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be God, but was not God. This phrase is saying that Jesus was fully God. The rest of this verse and the next two verses explain that Jesus, while being fully God, humbled himself and acted as a servant, in obedience to God. Avoid any translation that would suggest that Jesus was not fully God. Alternate translation: “being fully God” or “though everything that is true of God is true of him”
 PHP	2	6	kd1l		οὐχ…ἡγήσατο	1		Alternate translation: “did not think” or “did not regard”
 PHP	2	6	els2		ἁρπαγμὸν	1	did not consider being equal with God something to be grasped	Alternate translation: “something to be held onto” or “something to be retained”
 PHP	2	7	x5rt	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		The word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the preceding clause in [2:6](../02/06.md) and what is expressed about Jesus in this verse and the next two verses. The contrast is made between Jesus’ choice to retain his divine rights and privileges, or to surrender them. Choose the best form in your language to show the contrast that **Instead** expresses here. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” or “Rather” or “But instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 PHP	2	7	kvjd	writing-pronouns	ἀλλὰ ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν	1		Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider the best way to express the meaning of **he** to show that it refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Instead, Jesus emptied himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 PHP	2	7	c64i	figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν	1		Here, the reflexive pronoun **himself** refers to Jesus and is used to emphasize the fact that Jesus freely and intentionally chose to empty himself of divine rights and privileges. Consider the best way to express the emphatic element of this pronoun in your language. Alternate translation: “he willingly set aside divine privileges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 PHP	2	7	yu25	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν	1	he emptied himself	Here, Paul statement that Christ **emptied himself** is figurative, and not literal. By using the figurative phrase **he emptied himself**, Paul is vividly expressing that Christ chose to give up his divine rights and privileges when he became human. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he gave up divine rights and privileges” or “he willingly set aside divine privileges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	2	7	r5dn		μορφὴν δούλου λαβών	1		The phrase, **having taken {the} form of a servant**, means that Jesus acted as a servant while on earth. It does not mean that Jesus simply appeared to be a servant. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using an equivalent expression from your language, or state this in plain language. Alternative translation, “and acted as a servant”
-PHP	2	7	qetl		ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων γενόμενος	1		The phrase **having been born in {the} likeness of men** means that Jesus became a human being. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be human. Rather, it means that Jesus, who always existed as God, chose to take on a human body and appear on earth in human form. If it would be helpful in your language, consider saying this in plain language. Alternate translation: “having become a human being”
+PHP	2	7	r5dn		μορφὴν δούλου λαβών	1		The phrase, **having taken the form of a servant**, means that Jesus acted as a servant while on earth. It does not mean that Jesus simply appeared to be a servant. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using an equivalent expression from your language, or state this in plain language. Alternative translation, “and acted as a servant”
+PHP	2	7	qetl		ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων γενόμενος	1		The phrase **having been born in the likeness of men** means that Jesus became a human being. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be human. Rather, it means that Jesus, who always existed as God, chose to take on a human body and appear on earth in human form. If it would be helpful in your language, consider saying this in plain language. Alternate translation: “having become a human being”
 PHP	2	7	tc8n	figs-gendernotations	ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων	1	in the likeness of men	Here, the word **men** is emphasizing the idea of Jesus’ humanity rather than his gender. The word **men** is plural in form to emphasize the idea that Jesus resembled humanity in general. Consider the best way in your language to express this emphasis on Jesus’ humanity. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 PHP	2	7	uizd		καὶ σχήματι εὑρεθεὶς ὡς ἄνθρωπος	1		The phrase **having been found in appearance as a man** does not mean that Jesus appeared to be a man but was not a man. Rather, this phrase continues the thought of the previous phrase, **having been born in the likeness of men**, and means that Jesus became a human being and therefore was fully human in appearance. The phrase, **in appearance**, points out that Jesus appeared in all ways to be fully human. It also indicates that while being fully human, Jesus was distinct from the rest of humanity: He retained his full deity while being human and, therefore, he was both human and divine at the same time. Alternate translation: “and while being found in the form of a human being”
 PHP	2	7	jmr8	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1		Here the word **man** is emphasizing the idea of Jesus’ humanity rather than his gender. If your language has a way of expressing this emphasis on Jesus’ humanity, consider using the term that would most clearly express this. See how you translated the word **men** earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -185,23 +184,23 @@ PHP	2	12	cm1s	figs-doublet	μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	with fear
 PHP	2	13	fc9l		ἐνεργῶν	1		In the original language in which Paul wrote this letter, the word **working** expresses continuous action and emphasizes the ongoing nature of God’s work in believers. Consider the best way to express the continuous nature of this word in your language. Alternate translation: “continually working”
 PHP	2	13	qy5x	figs-extrainfo	ἐν ὑμῖν	1		The phrase **in you** could refer to: (1) God working individually within the heart of each of the Philippian believers. (2) God working among the Philippian believers as a whole. Alternate translation: “among you” (3) both option one and two simultaneously. Alternate translation: “in and among you” If your language allows you to keep the object of God’s work ambiguous, as it is in the ULT, this is the preferable option. If your language does not allow for this, choose one of the options above. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 PHP	2	13	m6b8		καὶ τὸ θέλειν, καὶ τὸ ἐνεργεῖν, ὑπὲρ τῆς εὐδοκίας	1	both to will and to work for his good pleasure	Alternate translation: “to enable you to both desire to do, and to do, the things which him happy” or “so that you will want to do what pleases him, and will be able to do what pleases him”
-PHP	2	14	gy6p	figs-yousingular	πάντα ποιεῖτε χωρὶς γογγυσμῶν καὶ διαλογισμῶν	1		The phrase **Do all {things} without** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you, make sure that you do not complain or argue in anything you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+PHP	2	14	gy6p	figs-yousingular	πάντα ποιεῖτε χωρὶς γογγυσμῶν καὶ διαλογισμῶν	1		The phrase **Do all things without** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you, make sure that you do not complain or argue in anything you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	2	15	z2lz	figs-doublet	ἄμεμπτοι καὶ ἀκέραιοι	1	blameless and pure	The words **blameless** and **pure** are very similar in meaning and are used together to emphasize the idea of living a morally pure life. You may translate these words individually, as the ULT does, or combine them together into one idea and express their meaning together as a single expression. Consider what would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “completely innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 PHP	2	15	sp0g	figs-metaphor	τέκνα Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **children of God** is a metaphorical way of describing people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. Here, **children** does not refer to those who are young, but only to the relationship that people have at any age to their father. If you translate **children** using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their fathers. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual offspring” or “spiritual children of God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 PHP	2	15	im15	figs-explicit	ἄμωμα	1		The phrase **without blemish** means being free from flaws or defects. Here the phrase **without blemish** specifically means being free from moral flaws or corruption. Consider using an equivalent phrase from your language that would be understood in this context, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who abstain from all evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	15	f957	figs-metonymy	ἐν οἷς φαίνεσθε ὡς φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ	1		Paul is describing people by associating them with the world in which they live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “among whom you shine as lights before the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-PHP	2	15	p71u	figs-metaphor	φαίνεσθε ὡς φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ	1	you shine as lights in the world	Here, the word **lights** represents believers who are living in a righteous way that shows other people what is true and good. “Light”, is often used metaphorically in the Bible to represent truth and the righteous living that aligns with truth. In the Bible, light is often contrasted with darkness, which represents falsehood and living according to it. To **shine as lights in {the} world** means to live in a way that helps people see God’s truth and character. You can retain this metaphor or express this using plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be examples of God’s goodness and truth in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+PHP	2	15	p71u	figs-metaphor	φαίνεσθε ὡς φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ	1	you shine as lights in the world	Here, the word **lights** represents believers who are living in a righteous way that shows other people what is true and good. “Light”, is often used metaphorically in the Bible to represent truth and the righteous living that aligns with truth. In the Bible, light is often contrasted with darkness, which represents falsehood and living according to it. To **shine as lights in the world** means to live in a way that helps people see God’s truth and character. You can retain this metaphor or express this using plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be examples of God’s goodness and truth in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	2	15	jb7y	figs-doublet	μέσον γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς καὶ διεστραμμένης	1	in the world, in the midst of a crooked and depraved generation	The words **crooked** and **perverted** are used together to emphasize the idea of extreme sinfulness. These two words are very similar in meaning. You may translate these words individually, as the ULT does, or combine them together into one idea and express their meaning together as a single expression. Consider what would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “among people who are very sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 PHP	2	16	u3qb		λόγον ζωῆς ἐπέχοντες	1	holding forth the word of life	Here, **holding forth** could mean: (1) holding out to others the word of life. Alternate translation: “holding out the word of life” or “offering the word of life” (2) holding firmly to the word of life. Alternate translation: “holding tightly to the word of life” or “holding firmly to the word of life”
-PHP	2	16	cher		λόγον ζωῆς ἐπέχοντες	1		The phrase **holding forth {the} word of life** continues the thought from the previous verse and shows in more detail how Christians can become “blameless and pure, children of God” who “shine as lights in the world.” Consider the best way to show this connection in your language. Alternate translation: “as you hold forth the word of life”
+PHP	2	16	cher		λόγον ζωῆς ἐπέχοντες	1		The phrase **holding forth the word of life** continues the thought from the previous verse and shows in more detail how Christians can become “blameless and pure, children of God” who “shine as lights in the world.” Consider the best way to show this connection in your language. Alternate translation: “as you hold forth the word of life”
 PHP	2	16	eq86	figs-explicit	λόγον ζωῆς	1	the word of life	The phrase **word of life** refers to the good news about Jesus. If this would be unclear in your language, consider translating this phrase in plain language. Alternate translation: “the message that gives life” or “the life-giving gospel” or “the life-giving message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	2	16	nmix	figs-metonymy	λόγον	1		Here the phrase **{the} word** means “the gospel.” In his writings, Paul often uses **word** to refer to the message of the gospel. In doing this, Paul is describing something Christians communicate to others by associating it with words. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the gospel” or “the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-PHP	2	16	i448	figs-explicit	λόγον ζωῆς	1		The phrase **{the} word of life** could mean: (1) the word that gives people life. Alternate translation: “the word that gives life” (2) the word that is about life and that gives life. Alternate translation: “the word that is about life and gives life” (3) the word which contains life and has the ability to give people life. Alternate translation: “the word that contains and gives life” If your language allows you to keep the phrase **{the} word of life** ambiguous, this is the best option. If your language does not allow you to do this, you may specify clearly how the phrase **of life** is related to **{the} word**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	2	16	nmix	figs-metonymy	λόγον	1		Here the phrase **the word** means “the gospel.” In his writings, Paul often uses **word** to refer to the message of the gospel. In doing this, Paul is describing something Christians communicate to others by associating it with words. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the gospel” or “the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+PHP	2	16	i448	figs-explicit	λόγον ζωῆς	1		The phrase **the word of life** could mean: (1) the word that gives people life. Alternate translation: “the word that gives life” (2) the word that is about life and that gives life. Alternate translation: “the word that is about life and gives life” (3) the word which contains life and has the ability to give people life. Alternate translation: “the word that contains and gives life” If your language allows you to keep the phrase **the word of life** ambiguous, this is the best option. If your language does not allow you to do this, you may specify clearly how the phrase **of life** is related to **the word**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	16	fz1d	figs-abstractnouns	λόγον ζωῆς	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the abstract noun **life** by using it in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the life-giving word” or “the word which gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHP	2	16	s3z9	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς καύχημα ἐμοὶ εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ, ὅτι οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον, οὐδὲ εἰς κενὸν ἐκοπίασα	1		With the phrase **for my boasting on {the} day of Christ**, Paul introduces a reason that the Philippian believers should try to live out the things he has just told them to do in [2:12](../02/12.md) and ending with the phrase “holding forth the word of life.” Paul here gives one reason for what he has just asked them to do. He says that if they live out what he has just told them, then when Christ returns, he can be proud of the fact that he did not work in vain among them. Consider the best way in your language to show this reason-result relationship. Alternate translation: “so that I will be able to boast on the day Christ returns that I did not run in vain or labor in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+PHP	2	16	s3z9	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς καύχημα ἐμοὶ εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ, ὅτι οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον, οὐδὲ εἰς κενὸν ἐκοπίασα	1		With the phrase **for my boasting on the day of Christ**, Paul introduces a reason that the Philippian believers should try to live out the things he has just told them to do in [2:12](../02/12.md) and ending with the phrase “holding forth the word of life.” Paul here gives one reason for what he has just asked them to do. He says that if they live out what he has just told them, then when Christ returns, he can be proud of the fact that he did not work in vain among them. Consider the best way in your language to show this reason-result relationship. Alternate translation: “so that I will be able to boast on the day Christ returns that I did not run in vain or labor in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHP	2	16	esvd	figs-explicit	εἰς καύχημα ἐμοὶ	1		Here, **boasting** refers to Paul being rightfully proud of God’s work in the lives of the Philippian believers. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that I may be rightfully proud of God’s work in you” or “so that I might glory in God’s work in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	16	heo4		εἰς καύχημα ἐμοὶ	1		Alternate translation: “so that I may boast” or “in order that I have good reason to glory”
-PHP	2	16	q7y8	figs-explicit	εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ,	1	on the day of Christ	The phrase **{the} day of Christ** refers to the time in the future when Christ will return. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when Christ returns” or “at the time Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	2	16	q7y8	figs-explicit	εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ,	1	on the day of Christ	The phrase **the day of Christ** refers to the time in the future when Christ will return. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when Christ returns” or “at the time Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	16	m5aq	figs-parallelism	οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον, οὐδὲ εἰς κενὸν ἐκοπίασα	1	I did not run in vain nor labor in vain	The phrases **run in vain** and **labor in vain** have very similar meanings here. Paul uses these two phrases together to emphasize how hard he has worked to help people believe in Christ and mature in their obedience and love for him. You may translate these two phrases separately, as the ULT does, or if it would be clearer in your language, you may translate them together as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “I did not work so hard for nothing” or “I did not work hard with no lasting results” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 PHP	2	16	m1z7	figs-metaphor	οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον	1	I did … run	Here Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Here Paul specifically means that he worked for the advancement of the gospel among the Philippians. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Philippians’ minds the image of a runner who is racing toward a finish line in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. But if this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I did not work for the advancement of the gospel uselessly” or “I did not work for the spread of the good news for nothing” or “I did not run the race uselessly”( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	2	16	wyyg		εἰς κενὸν	-1		Alternate translation: “for no purpose … for no purpose” or “without positive results … without positive results” or “for nothing … for nothing”
@@ -216,9 +215,8 @@ PHP	2	17	s1j9		χαίρω καὶ συνχαίρω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν	1		The
 PHP	2	18	bicj	figs-explicit	τὸ…αὐτὸ	1		The phrase **in the same manner** refers to the Philippian Christians rejoicing in the same manner that Paul said he would rejoice in previous verse [2:17](../02/17.md). If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the same way that I rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	18	dr9c	figs-yousingular	καὶ ὑμεῖς χαίρετε καὶ συνχαίρετέ μοι	1	Connecting Statement:	The phrases **you also rejoice** and **rejoice with me** are both commands or instructions given to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I urge each of you to rejoice, and also to rejoice with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	2	19	gml9	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίζω δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	Now I hope in the Lord Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **hope** with a verb form such as “hoping.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHP	2	19	pq9g	translate-names	Τιμόθεον	1		**Timothy** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 PHP	2	20	d9mw		οὐδένα γὰρ ἔχω ἰσόψυχον	1	For I have no one like-minded	Alternate translation: “For I have no one else who loves you like I do”
-PHP	2	21	b922	figs-explicit	οἱ πάντες γὰρ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ζητοῦσιν, οὐ τὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	For they all	Here the words **they** and **{their}** refer to a group of people Paul does not think he can trust to help the believers in Philippi. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating that explicitly. Alternate translation: “All the other people I might send to you seek what they want and not the things Jesus Christ wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	2	21	b922	figs-explicit	οἱ πάντες γὰρ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ζητοῦσιν, οὐ τὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	For they all	Here the words **they** and **their** refer to a group of people Paul does not think he can trust to help the believers in Philippi. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating that explicitly. Alternate translation: “All the other people I might send to you seek what they want and not the things Jesus Christ wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	22	gm8i	figs-simile	ὡς πατρὶ τέκνον, σὺν ἐμοὶ ἐδούλευσεν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	as a child with his father, he served with me	The point of this comparison is that children learn from their fathers and try to follow and imitate them as they work alongside them. Paul was not Timothy’s biological father, but he uses this simile to illustrate how Timothy worked alongside him and learned from him as, together, they advanced the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he learned from me and did what I did as he served with me in the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 PHP	2	22	clvw	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δὲ δοκιμὴν αὐτοῦ γινώσκετε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **worth** with an adjective such as “valuable” or in some other way. Alternate translation: “But you know how valuable Timothy is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	22	xdn5	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	in the gospel	Here, **the gospel** means the work of advancing the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in gospel work” or “in working to spread the gospel” or “in the work of telling people the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -246,7 +244,7 @@ PHP	2	30	ns1y	writing-pronouns	ὅτι διὰ τὸ ἔργον Χριστοῦ
 PHP	2	30	vj8b	figs-possession	διὰ τὸ ἔργον Χριστοῦ	1	he came near even to death	In the phrase **the work of Christ**, Paul is using the possessive form to describe work that is done for Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this phrase in some other way. Alternate translation: “for the sake of working for Christ” or “as a result of working for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 PHP	2	30	nhja	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὸ ἔργον Χριστοῦ	1	he came near even to death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **work**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **work** with a verbal form such as “working.” Alternate translation: “for the sake of working for Christ” or “as a result of working for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	30	ffly	figs-abstractnouns	μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισεν	1	he came near even to death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** with an adjective such as “dying” or with a verbal form such as **died**, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “he was close to dying” or “he came close to dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHP	2	30	kjti	figs-abstractnouns	παραβολευσάμενος τῇ ψυχῇ	1	he came near even to death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind the phrase **risking {his} life** in some other way. Alternate translation: “running the risk of dying” or “taking the risk that he would die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+PHP	2	30	kjti	figs-abstractnouns	παραβολευσάμενος τῇ ψυχῇ	1	he came near even to death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind the phrase **risking his life** in some other way. Alternate translation: “running the risk of dying” or “taking the risk that he would die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	30	x4rl	figs-abstractnouns	ἵνα ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας	1	he came near even to death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **service**, you can express the idea behind the word **service** by using a verb form such as “serve.” Alternate translation: “so that he might make up for your being unable to serve me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	30	g98z	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας	1	he might make up your lack of service to me	The **lack of service** Paul speaks of here is the inability of the Philippian believers to be present with him in prison. By sending Epaphroditus to Paul, the Philippian believers ministered to Paul’s needs through Epaphroditus, and so Epaphroditus supplied what they could not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that he might supply what you could not give me” or “so that he might make up for what you could not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	intro	btx3			0		# Philippians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 4–8, Paul lists the ways he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew, but he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Dogs<br><br>The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.<br><br>### Resurrected bodies<br><br>We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Prize<br><br>Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is to grow to be like Christ while we live on earth. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it.
@@ -264,21 +262,21 @@ PHP	3	2	x8r2	figs-metonymy	τὴν κατατομήν	1	the mutilation	Here, **t
 PHP	3	3	y8yt	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς γάρ ἐσμεν	1	For we are	Here Paul uses **we** to refer to himself and the Philippian believers and anyone else who believes in Christ, so **we** is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHP	3	3	xt5r	figs-metonymy	ἡ περιτομή	1	the circumcision	In contrast to its normal usage in the Bible, here Paul uses the term **the circumcision** as a metonym to refer to all true Christians. Normally, the term **the circumcision** was used to refer to Jewish males, all circumcised, but here Paul intentionally uses this term with a spiritual sense to refer to all Christians, both Jews and non-Jew. This would have been surprising to his readers. Paul’s use of **the circumcision** here refers to the inward, spiritual circumcision that the Holy Spirit performs in the hearts of all true Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this term using plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 PHP	3	3	wn2n		οἱ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λατρεύοντες	1		Alternate translation: “the ones who are empowered by God’s Spirit to worship him” or “the ones who are enabled to worship God by his Spirit” or “the ones who worship God through his Spirit”
-PHP	3	3	k8ph	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθότες	1	having no confidence in the flesh	You can state explicitly that Paul did not have any **confidence** in the “works of” **{the} flesh**. Alternate translation: “having no confidence in the works of the flesh” or “not trusting that circumcision will please God” or “not trusting that being circumcized will earn God’s favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	3	3	nkrs		καυχώμενοι ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθότες	1		The phrase **boasting in Christ Jesus** and the phrase **and having no confidence in {the} flesh** are complementary ideas which express a similar truth. If people truly place their confidence in Christ as their only means of earning God’s favor, they will not put their confidence in themselves or religious acts. Conversely, if people put their confidence in religious rituals and observances, they cannot place their full confidence in Christ. Consider the best way to clearly express these coordinate ideas in your language.
+PHP	3	3	k8ph	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθότες	1	having no confidence in the flesh	You can state explicitly that Paul did not have any **confidence** in the “works of” **the flesh**. Alternate translation: “having no confidence in the works of the flesh” or “not trusting that circumcision will please God” or “not trusting that being circumcized will earn God’s favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	3	3	nkrs		καυχώμενοι ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθότες	1		The phrase **boasting in Christ Jesus** and the phrase **and having no confidence in the flesh** are complementary ideas which express a similar truth. If people truly place their confidence in Christ as their only means of earning God’s favor, they will not put their confidence in themselves or religious acts. Conversely, if people put their confidence in religious rituals and observances, they cannot place their full confidence in Christ. Consider the best way to clearly express these coordinate ideas in your language.
 PHP	3	3	ox7y	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ οὐκ ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθότες	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **confidence** with an adjective such as **trusting** or a verbal form such as **trust.** Alternate translation: “and we do not trust in our flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	3	4	upw5	figs-hypo	ἐγὼ ἔχων πεποίθησιν καὶ ἐν σαρκί. εἴ τις δοκεῖ ἄλλος πεποιθέναι ἐν σαρκί, ἐγὼ μᾶλλον	1	I myself, having confidence even in the flesh. If anyone else seems to have confidence in the flesh, I even more	Using a type of hypothetical situation, Paul recites his own credentials to illustrate that if observing the law could earn God’s favor, then he had more reason to boast than anyone else. His purpose is to teach the Philippian believers that they should only trust in Christ and not trust in other things to earn God’s favor. Paul explains in [3:7–11](../03/07.md) that his hope is in Christ and not in the things he lists in the next two verses. Alternate translation: “We do not trust in those rituals to make us acceptable to God, although I could very well do that if it would be useful for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 PHP	3	5	d5bq		περιτομῇ ὀκταήμερος ἐκ γένους Ἰσραήλ φυλῆς Βενιαμείν, Ἑβραῖος ἐξ Ἑβραίων, κατὰ νόμον Φαρισαῖος	1		In this verse and the next verse, Paul lists a total of seven things in which he put his confidence before he believed in Christ. In this verse he lists five of those things and in the next verse he lists the remaining two.
-PHP	3	5	yq98	figs-explicit	φυλῆς Βενιαμείν	1	circumcision	The phrase **of {the} tribe of Benjamin** means that Paul was from the Israelite tribe of Benjamin and therefore descended from Jacob’s son Benjamin. Consider the best way to say this in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	3	5	yq98	figs-explicit	φυλῆς Βενιαμείν	1	circumcision	The phrase **of the tribe of Benjamin** means that Paul was from the Israelite tribe of Benjamin and therefore descended from Jacob’s son Benjamin. Consider the best way to say this in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	5	p4ik		Ἑβραῖος ἐξ Ἑβραίων	1	a Hebrew of Hebrews	The phrase **a Hebrew of Hebrews** could mean: (1) that Paul had retained Hebrew customs and spoke the language of the Hebrew people, which was Aramaic. (2) that Paul had no Gentile ancestors, but rather was a pure-blooded Hebrew. Alternate translation: “a Hebrew whose parents and ancestors are all full-blooded Jews” (3) a combination of both of the above. Alternate translation: “a full-blooded Jew who has retained the Hebrew culture, customs, and language”
-PHP	3	5	we4t		κατὰ νόμον Φαρισαῖος	1	according to the law, a Pharisee	The phrase **according to {the} law, a Pharisee** means that prior to his conversion Paul had been a Pharisee. He related to the law of Moses as a Pharisee and, therefore, strictly obeyed it as well as the many rules scribes had added to try to safeguard the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “in relation to the law of Moses, I was a Pharisee” or “in relation to how I observed the law of Moses, I was a Pharisee, and therefore, I strictly obeyed every detail of it including the teachings of the scribes”
+PHP	3	5	we4t		κατὰ νόμον Φαρισαῖος	1	according to the law, a Pharisee	The phrase **according to the law, a Pharisee** means that prior to his conversion Paul had been a Pharisee. He related to the law of Moses as a Pharisee and, therefore, strictly obeyed it as well as the many rules scribes had added to try to safeguard the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “in relation to the law of Moses, I was a Pharisee” or “in relation to how I observed the law of Moses, I was a Pharisee, and therefore, I strictly obeyed every detail of it including the teachings of the scribes”
 PHP	3	6	f81s		κατὰ ζῆλος διώκων τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, κατὰ δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐν νόμῳ γενόμενος ἄμεμπτος	1		In this verse Paul finishes naming the things in which he put his confidence before he believed in Christ.
 PHP	3	6	ksr3	figs-explicit	κατὰ ζῆλος διώκων τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	according to zeal, persecuting the church	Here, the phrase **persecuting the church** is explaining the extent of Paul’s **zeal**. Before Paul believed in Jesus, he thought that by **persecuting the church**, he was serving God and ensuring that the law of Moses was honored and obeyed. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating the meaning of the phrase **according to zeal, persecuting the church** plainly. Alternate translation: “having so much desire to serve God that I persecuted the church” or “wanting so much to honor God, I persecuted the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	6	n51b	grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	persecuting the church	Here, **church** is a collective noun. The phrase **the church** refers to Christians as a whole and includes anyone belonging to the group of people who follow Jesus. What Paul means by saying that he had persecuted **the church** is that he formerly persecuted anyone who was a Christian. Alternate translation: “persecuting Christians” or “persecuting anyone who was a Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-PHP	3	6	hln8	figs-explicit	κατὰ δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐν νόμῳ γενόμενος ἄμεμπτος	1	according to righteousness that is under the law, having become blameless	The phrase **righteousness {that is} in {the} law** refers to obeying the righteous guidelines for living that the law of Moses required. Paul obeyed the law so carefully that he believed that no one could find any part of it that he disobeyed. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating it plainly. Alternate translation: “As regards obeying the law of Moses, no one could say that I ever disobeyed the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	3	6	hln8	figs-explicit	κατὰ δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐν νόμῳ γενόμενος ἄμεμπτος	1	according to righteousness that is under the law, having become blameless	The phrase **righteousness {that is} in the law** refers to obeying the righteous guidelines for living that the law of Moses required. Paul obeyed the law so carefully that he believed that no one could find any part of it that he disobeyed. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating it plainly. Alternate translation: “As regards obeying the law of Moses, no one could say that I ever disobeyed the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	7	i2td	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἅτινα ἦν μοι κέρδη, ταῦτα ἥγημαι διὰ τὸν Χριστὸν ζημίαν	1		This entire verse is Paul’s response to the seven things he listed in [3:5–6](../03/05.md), which he once considered to be spiritually and religiously profitable to himself. In this verse Paul contrasts his former way of viewing things when he was a Pharisee with his new way of viewing things now that he believes in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 PHP	3	7	lb8f	figs-metaphor	ἅτινα ἦν μοι κέρδη, ταῦτα ἥγημαι διὰ τὸν Χριστὸν ζημίαν	1	a profit … loss	In the original language in which Paul wrote this letter, the words **gains** and **loss** were common business terms used for accounting to describe things a business person determined to be either profitable or unprofitable. Here, Paul is using these two terms metaphorically to portray the things he considers spiritually profitable and unprofitable. If your language has similar business or accounting terms that would be natural to use in this context, consider using them here. Alternate translation: “Whatever things I formerly counted as gains, these things I now count as loss for the sake of Christ” or “Whatever things I formerly accounted as gains, these things I now account as loss for the sake of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	3	7	n4lg	figs-explicit	ἅτινα ἦν μοι κέρδη	1	Whatever was a profit for me	Here, the phrase **Whatever {things} were gains for me** refers specifically to the list of seven things that Paul has just listed in [3:5–6](../03/05.md) and to anything else in which he would have put confidence before he believed in Christ. Alternate translation: “Whatever things I formerly considered profitable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	3	7	n4lg	figs-explicit	ἅτινα ἦν μοι κέρδη	1	Whatever was a profit for me	Here, the phrase **Whatever things were gains for me** refers specifically to the list of seven things that Paul has just listed in [3:5–6](../03/05.md) and to anything else in which he would have put confidence before he believed in Christ. Alternate translation: “Whatever things I formerly considered profitable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	7	nwdi	figs-abstractnouns	ἅτινα ἦν μοι κέρδη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gains**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **gains** by using an adjective such as **profitable**, or you can express it in some other way. Alternate translation: “Whatever things were profitable for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	3	7	yxtx	figs-abstractnouns	ταῦτα ἥγημαι διὰ τὸν Χριστὸν ζημίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **loss**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **loss** by using a verbal phrase such as “worth losing”. Alternate translation: “I consider these things worth losing for the sake of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	3	8	e1fp	figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ μενοῦνγε καὶ ἡγοῦμαι πάντα ζημίαν εἶναι, διὰ τὸ ὑπερέχον τῆς γνώσεως Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου μου, δι’ ὃν τὰ πάντα ἐζημιώθην καὶ ἡγοῦμαι σκύβαλα, ἵνα Χριστὸν κερδήσω	1	I consider even all things to be loss	In this verse Paul continues the business metaphor which he began in [3:7](../03/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -302,7 +300,7 @@ PHP	3	9	jmqf	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην
 PHP	3	9	dely	figs-ellipsis	ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει	1		In the phrase **by faith**, Paul is leaving out some words that would be needed to complete the sentence in many languages. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “which comes by faith” or “which is received through faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHP	3	10	ot4a	writing-pronouns	τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτὸν, καὶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ, καὶ κοινωνίαν παθημάτων αὐτοῦ, συμμορφιζόμενος τῷ θανάτῳ αὐτοῦ	1		All occurrences of the pronouns **him** and **his** in this verse refer to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to know Christ and the power of his resurrection and the fellowship of his sufferings, being conformed to his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 PHP	3	10	vj4s	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	the power of his resurrection	The first occurrence of the word **and** indicates that what follows is the Paul’s explanation of how specifically he wants to know Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-PHP	3	10	tam1		τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτὸν, καὶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ, καὶ κοινωνίαν παθημάτων αὐτοῦ	1		In the original language in which Paul wrote this letter, he closely connects the phrase **the power of his resurrection** and the phrase **{the} fellowship of his sufferings**. He does this because in Paul’s mind these two things are inseparably linked, and a person cannot know the power of Christ’s resurrection without first sharing in Christ’s suffering. Consider the best way to show the close connection between these two phrases in your language.
+PHP	3	10	tam1		τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτὸν, καὶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ, καὶ κοινωνίαν παθημάτων αὐτοῦ	1		In the original language in which Paul wrote this letter, he closely connects the phrase **the power of his resurrection** and the phrase **the fellowship of his sufferings**. He does this because in Paul’s mind these two things are inseparably linked, and a person cannot know the power of Christ’s resurrection without first sharing in Christ’s suffering. Consider the best way to show the close connection between these two phrases in your language.
 PHP	3	10	ngz6		τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτὸν	1		See how you translated the word “knowledge” in [3:8](../03/08.md). Here, the word **know** does not refer to simply being mentally aware of something or someone, but rather, it refers to having a deep, intimate, personal knowledge or experience of something or someone. Here, it refers to having an intimate and personal knowledge or experience of Christ. Consider the best way to express this meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “to intimately know Christ” or “to deeply know and experience him”
 PHP	3	10	fpij	figs-abstractnouns	δύναμιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the idea behind **power** by using an adverb such as “powerfully,” as modeled in UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	3	10	vqb6	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ κοινωνίαν παθημάτων αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract noun for the idea of **fellowship**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verbal form such as “participate” or “sharing.” Alternate translation: “and to participate in his sufferings” or “and the sharing of his sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -318,10 +316,10 @@ PHP	3	12	k9ar	figs-activepassive	ἤδη τετελείωμαι	1	or have alread
 PHP	3	12	m52v	figs-activepassive	καταλάβω, ἐφ’ ᾧ καὶ κατελήμφθην ὑπὸ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	I might grasp that for which I was also grasped by Christ Jesus	If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **I was also grasped by Christ Jesus** with an active form. Alternate translation: “I might grasp the things for which Christ Jesus grasped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 PHP	3	13	tzg8		ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	See how you translated the word **Brothers** in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md) and [3:1](../03/01.md).
 PHP	3	13	kqk7	figs-extrainfo	ἐγὼ ἐμαυτὸν οὐ λογίζομαι κατειληφέναι	1	I do not consider myself to have grasped it	Paul does not explicitly state what **{it}** is that he has not yet **grasped**. He is probably referring to becoming perfectly like Jesus and to fully knowing Jesus. You may choose to state this in your translation, as the UST does, or you may leave it ambiguous, as the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-PHP	3	13	hjs9	figs-ellipsis	ἓν δέ	1	forgetting what is behind and straining for what is ahead	In the phrase **But one {thing}**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But take note of this one thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+PHP	3	13	hjs9	figs-ellipsis	ἓν δέ	1	forgetting what is behind and straining for what is ahead	In the phrase **But one thing**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But take note of this one thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHP	3	13	ia2b	figs-metaphor	τὰ μὲν ὀπίσω ἐπιλανθανόμενος, τοῖς δὲ ἔμπροσθεν ἐπεκτεινόμενος	1	forgetting what is behind and straining for what is ahead	In the phrase **forgetting {what is} behind and straining for {what is} ahead**, Paul is using the imagery of a person who is in a race to win a prize. Paul portrays himself as a runner in this metaphor, and he continues using this metaphor until the end of [Philippians 3:14](../03/14.md). If this metaphor is unfamiliar in your culture, consider using another metaphor that would be familiar to your readers, or you may state this in plain language, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “like a runner, I forget what is behind me and put all of my effort into running toward the finish line in front of me” or “like a runner, I have one focus, and therefore I do not look backward as I run, but only look forward as I strain with all my might so that I will reach the finish line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	3	14	z39s	figs-metaphor	κατὰ σκοπὸν διώκω εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον	1	I press on toward the goal to the prize of the upward calling of God in Christ Jesus	In this verse Paul continues using the metaphor of a runner who is competing in a foot race in order to win a prize. In this verse Paul says that his **goal**, which he works hard for, is to win the **prize** which God promises to give every person who obediently follows Christ. If this metaphor would be unfamiliar in your culture, consider using another metaphor, or use plain language to translate the idea behind this metaphor. Alternate translation: “I do all I can to pursue the goal of winning the prize of God’s upward call in Christ Jesus” or “I work hard so that I can reach my goal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	3	14	jhtv		σκοπὸν…εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	I press on toward the goal to the prize of the upward calling of God in Christ Jesus	The phrases **{the} goal** and **the prize** could be related to each other in one of two ways. They could: (1) be focusing on the same basic idea. Alternate translation: “the goal, which is to be given the prize of God’s upward call” or “my goal, which is to receive the prize of God’s upward call” (2) be focusing on different things, in which case **{the} goal** is referring to the goal of Paul’s life, while **the prize** is referring to what Paul hopes to receive once he has successfully achieved his goal. Alternate translation: “the goal and toward being given the prize of God’s upward call” or “the goal and toward receiving the prize of God’s upward call”
+PHP	3	14	jhtv		σκοπὸν…εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	I press on toward the goal to the prize of the upward calling of God in Christ Jesus	The phrases **the goal** and **the prize** could be related to each other in one of two ways. They could: (1) be focusing on the same basic idea. Alternate translation: “the goal, which is to be given the prize of God’s upward call” or “my goal, which is to receive the prize of God’s upward call” (2) be focusing on different things, in which case **the goal** is referring to the goal of Paul’s life, while **the prize** is referring to what Paul hopes to receive once he has successfully achieved his goal. Alternate translation: “the goal and toward being given the prize of God’s upward call” or “the goal and toward receiving the prize of God’s upward call”
 PHP	3	14	lmr6	figs-extrainfo	τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of the upward calling	The phrase **the prize of the upward calling of God** could mean: (1) that **the prize** is **the upward calling of God**. Alternate translation: “receive the prize of God’s upward call” or “receive the prize of God’s heavenward invitation” (2) that the **upward calling of God** is a call to come and receive God’s **prize**. Alternate translation: “answer God’s upward call to receive his prize” or “answer God’s invitation to receive his prize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 PHP	3	14	cq3f	figs-extrainfo	τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of the upward calling	The word **upward** probably refers to both the origin of God’s call and to the direction of God’s call. In other words, the phrase **the upward calling of God** probably refers both to the fact that the **calling** is from God and that the calling is also a heavenly calling to move towards God. Alternate translation: “God’s heavenward call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 PHP	3	14	agwg	figs-explicit	κατὰ σκοπὸν διώκω εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	of the upward calling	The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could be: (1) modifying the phrase **the upward calling of God**. (2) modifying the phrase **I press on**. Alternate translation: “I press on in Christ Jesus toward the goal for the prize of the upward calling of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -372,7 +370,7 @@ PHP	4	3	lb79	figs-metonymy	τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	with also Clement	Here P
 PHP	4	3	gfq5		τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	with also Clement	See how you translated the phrase **the gospel** in [Philippians 1:5](../01/05.md).
 PHP	4	3	cm3u	translate-names	Κλήμεντος	1	with also Clement	**Clement** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 PHP	4	3	s9h9		ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς	1	whose names are in the Book of Life	Alternate translation: “whose names God has written in the Book of Life”
-PHP	4	4	elt7		χαίρετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Rejoice in the Lord	See how you translated the phrase **Rejoice in {the} Lord** in [Philippians 3:1](../03/01.md).
+PHP	4	4	elt7		χαίρετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Rejoice in the Lord	See how you translated the phrase **Rejoice in the Lord** in [Philippians 3:1](../03/01.md).
 PHP	4	4	sbdp	figs-yousingular	χαίρετε ἐν Κυρίῳ πάντοτε, πάλιν ἐρῶ, χαίρετε!	1		Both occurrences of the word **Rejoice** are commands or instructions to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I urge you all to rejoice in the Lord at all times. Again I will say it, I urge each of you to rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	4	5	hopf	figs-yousingular	τὸ ἐπιεικὲς ὑμῶν γνωσθήτω	1	The Lord is near	The phrase **Let your gentleness be known** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	4	5	mo7g	figs-gendernotations	πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις	1	The Lord is near	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a general sense to mean all people in general, including women. Alternate translation: “to all people” or “to everyone.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
@@ -408,7 +406,7 @@ PHP	4	9	i8ki	figs-yousingular	πράσσετε	1	And what you learned and receiv
 PHP	4	9	mhvb	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	5	And what you learned and received and heard and saw in me	Here, the word **and** shows that what follows it is the result of practicing what comes before it. Consider the best way to show this relationship in your language. Alternate translation: “and then” or “and the result will be that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHP	4	9	y8xg		ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	And what you learned and received and heard and saw in me	The phrase **the God of peace** could mean: (1) that God is the giver of peace. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” or “God, who gives peace,” (2) that God is characterized by peace. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” or “our God who is characterized by peace” (3) God, the source of peace and the giver of peace. Alternate translation: “God, who is both the source of peace and the giver of peace,”
 PHP	4	9	poeh	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἔσται μεθ’ ὑμῶν	1	And what you learned and received and heard and saw in me	If your readers would better understand it, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** with an adjective such as “peaceful” or in some other way. Alternate translation: “the God who gives us a peaceful spirit will be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHP	4	10	pwh9		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the phrase **in {the} Lord** in [Philippians 3:12](../03/12.md).
+PHP	4	10	pwh9		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the phrase **in the Lord** in [Philippians 3:12](../03/12.md).
 PHP	4	10	xb0n		ὅτι ἤδη ποτὲ ἀνεθάλετε τὸ ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ φρονεῖν	1	Connecting Statement:	Alternate translation: “because now at last you revived your concern for me”
 PHP	4	10	ge1l		ἐφ’ ᾧ καὶ ἐφρονεῖτε	1	Connecting Statement:	Alternate translation: “for whom you were certainly worried”
 PHP	4	10	nm86	figs-ellipsis	ἠκαιρεῖσθε δέ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but you did not have a way to demonstrate it” or “but it was not possible for you to show it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -425,20 +423,20 @@ PHP	4	12	iqtr	figs-merism	χορτάζεσθαι καὶ πεινᾶν	1	to be f
 PHP	4	12	ufv4	figs-ellipsis	περισσεύειν καὶ ὑστερεῖσθαι	1	to abound and to be in need	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be understandable. If it would help your readers, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to have an abundance of things I need and to live contentedly when I do not have certain things I need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHP	4	12	fwes	figs-merism	περισσεύειν καὶ ὑστερεῖσθαι	1	to abound and to be in need	Here, the phrases **to abound** and **to be in need** refer to two opposite extremes and to everything in between them. If it would help your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to abound and to be in need and to everything in between” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 PHP	4	13	z1pb	writing-pronouns	πάντα ἰσχύω ἐν τῷ ἐνδυναμοῦντί με	1	I can do all things in him who strengthens me	Here, **the one** refers to Christ. Alternate translation: “I can do all things because Christ gives me strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-PHP	4	13	fpo4	figs-explicit	πάντα ἰσχύω ἐν τῷ ἐνδυναμοῦντί με	1	I can do all things in him who strengthens me	Here, **all {things}** refers to all situations. The phrase **I can do all {things}** means “I can handle all situations.” Alternate translation: “I can deal with anything through him who strengthens me” or “I am able to act properly in every situation because Jesus makes me strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	4	13	fpo4	figs-explicit	πάντα ἰσχύω ἐν τῷ ἐνδυναμοῦντί με	1	I can do all things in him who strengthens me	Here, **all things** refers to all situations. The phrase **I can do all things** means “I can handle all situations.” Alternate translation: “I can deal with anything through him who strengthens me” or “I am able to act properly in every situation because Jesus makes me strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	14	fe2z	figs-explicit	συνκοινωνήσαντές μου τῇ θλίψει	1	in my affliction	The phrase **having shared together in my affliction** means that the Philippian believers helped Paul while he was experiencing difficulties by giving him money and sending Epaphroditus to him. If it would help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by helping me in my affliction through your gift of money and sending Epaphroditus to me” or “by helping me when I faced difficult circumstances by sending Epaphroditus to encourage me and bring me your gift of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	14	ulzo	figs-abstractnouns	μου τῇ θλίψει	1	in my affliction	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **affliction** with an adjective such as **difficult** or in some other way. Alternate translation: “when I was suffering” or “when I was mistreated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	4	14	tlur		μου τῇ θλίψει	1	in my affliction	Alternate translation: “in my trials” or “in my troubles” or “in my difficulties”
-PHP	4	15	w23w	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	the beginning of the gospel	Here, **in {the} beginning of the gospel** refers to when Paul first began communicating the gospel message to the Philippians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly the idea behind this phrase. Alternate translation: “when you first heard me preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	4	15	w23w	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	the beginning of the gospel	Here, **in the beginning of the gospel** refers to when Paul first began communicating the gospel message to the Philippians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly the idea behind this phrase. Alternate translation: “when you first heard me preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	15	npph		τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	the beginning of the gospel	See how you translated the phrase **the gospel** in [Philippians 1:5](../01/05.md) and [4:3](../04/03.md).
-PHP	4	15	dyf8	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδεμία μοι ἐκκλησία ἐκοινώνησεν εἰς λόγον δόσεως καὶ λήμψεως, εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς μόνοι	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	You can state **no church shared with me in {the} matter of giving and receiving except you alone** in the positive. Alternate translation: “you were the only church that shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+PHP	4	15	dyf8	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδεμία μοι ἐκκλησία ἐκοινώνησεν εἰς λόγον δόσεως καὶ λήμψεως, εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς μόνοι	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	You can state **no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone** in the positive. Alternate translation: “you were the only church that shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 PHP	4	15	bpc2	figs-explicit	μοι…ἐκοινώνησεν	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	Here, **shared with me** means the Philippians helped Paul financially and in other practical ways. Alternate translation: “were partners with” or “helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	15	rgxx		εἰς λόγον δόσεως καὶ λήμψεως	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	In the original language in which Paul wrote this letter, the phrase **giving and receiving** could refer either to exchanges that involved money or to exchanges that involved the giving and receiving of non-financial things that would benefit the other party. Here, the phrase **giving and receiving** may refer to both financial and non-financial gifts because the Philippians helped Paul by sending a gift of money via Epaphroditus, who also helped Paul in other ways. Alternate translation: “by sending money and help to me”
 PHP	4	16	getb		ὅτι καὶ ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	Alternate translation: “for even when I was in Thessalonica”
 PHP	4	16	puar	figs-idiom	καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δὶς	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	The phrase **both once and twice** is an idiom meaning that something occurred more than one time. If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use an equivalent idiom from your language, or you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “several times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 PHP	4	16	lqor	figs-ellipsis	εἰς τὴν χρείαν μοι ἐπέμψατε	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	Paul is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you sent me money to help me with my needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHP	4	17	bh3t	figs-metaphor	ἐπιζητῶ τὸν καρπὸν τὸν πλεονάζοντα εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν	1	I seek the fruit that increases to your account	At the time Paul wrote this letter, the word **fruit** could be used in a business context to refer to what was gained in a financial transaction. When used in a business context, the word **fruit** meant “profit” or “gain.” Here Paul is using this business meaning to refer to God’s reward. If your language has an equivalent word that could be used in a business context, consider using it here if it would be natural in your language. Alternately, you may express this meaning using plain language, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “I seek the profit that increases to your account” or “I seek the gain that increases to your account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	4	18	fs44		ἀπέχω…πάντα	1	I have everything in full	The phrase **I have all {things} in full** could mean: (1) that Paul has received **all {things}** that he needs from the Philippian believers and is therefore sufficiently supplied. Alternate translation: “I have everything I need and am content” (2) that Paul is continuing the business metaphor from [Philippians 4:17](../04/17.md) and is here offering the Philippians a figurative receipt for the gifts they gave him. Alternate translation: “I have received the gift that you sent”
+PHP	4	18	fs44		ἀπέχω…πάντα	1	I have everything in full	The phrase **I have all things in full** could mean: (1) that Paul has received **all things** that he needs from the Philippian believers and is therefore sufficiently supplied. Alternate translation: “I have everything I need and am content” (2) that Paul is continuing the business metaphor from [Philippians 4:17](../04/17.md) and is here offering the Philippians a figurative receipt for the gifts they gave him. Alternate translation: “I have received the gift that you sent”
 PHP	4	18	en6t	figs-explicit	περισσεύω	1	I abound	The phrase **I abound** means that Paul has more than enough of the things that he needs for himself. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have more than enough of the things I need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	18	p6y1	figs-activepassive	πεπλήρωμαι, δεξάμενος παρὰ Ἐπαφροδίτου τὰ παρ’ ὑμῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the phrase **I have been filled** with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “You have fully provided for me by giving me the things which Epaphroditus brought to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 PHP	4	18	hte4	translate-names	Ἐπαφροδίτου	1	I abound	**Epaphroditus** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Philippians 2:25](../02/25.md). (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)

en_tn_52-COL.tsv

@@ -4,9 +4,7 @@ COL	1	intro	gtm3			0		# Colossians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Forma
 COL	1	1	nlf1	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Throughout this letter the words “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include the Colossian believers unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	1	1	bqvt	figs-yousingular		0	General Information:	The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Colossian believers, and so they are plural unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 COL	1	1	xnhq	figs-123person	Παῦλος	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the first person here. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-COL	1	1	v9jr	translate-names	Παῦλος	1		Here and throughout the letter, **Paul** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	1	1	yzlo	figs-explicit	καὶ Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1		This phrase does not mean that **Timothy** helped Paul write this letter. Paul was the author of this letter, as he shows by using the first person singular throughout the letter. What this does mean is that Timothy is with Paul and that Timothy is in agreement with what Paul writes. If it sounds in your language like Timothy is writing the letter with Paul, you could make Timothy’s supporting role more clear. Alternate translation: “with the support of Timothy, our fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-COL	1	1	f3ki	translate-names	Τιμόθεος	1		**Timothy** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	1	2	v9x7	figs-123person	τοῖς ἐν Κολοσσαῖς ἁγίοις, καὶ πιστοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1		In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to you who live in the city of Colossae and who are God’s people and faithful fellow believers who are united to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 COL	1	2	s9x7	figs-doublet	τοῖς…ἁγίοις, καὶ πιστοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1		The words **saints**, **faithful brothers**, and **in Christ** all describe people who are followers of Jesus. Paul is using all of these to describe one group of people. For example, he is not implying that **saints** and **faithful brothers in Christ** are two different groups. If using both **saints** and **faithful brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could join these together in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “to God’s faithful people, joined together as a family in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 COL	1	2	cqfk	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		After stating his name and the name of the person to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing for the Colossians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah” or “I pray that grace and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah will always be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
@@ -94,12 +92,12 @@ COL	1	19	nyos	figs-explicit	ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ
 COL	1	19	zu89	figs-metaphor	ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα κατοικῆσαι	1		Here, Paul speaks of the Son as though he were a house in which God’s **fullness** could **dwell**. This does not mean that God lives inside of the Son or that the Son is part of God. This means that the Son has all the divinity of God. It means that the Son is fully God just as the Father is fully God. If the metaphor might be misunderstood in your language, you could state it more plainly. Alternate translation: “the Son is fully God in every way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	1	19	wmdw	figs-metonymy	πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα	1		In the context, **fullness** stands for the **fullness** of divinity, or everything that characterizes God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clear that **fullness** refers to the **fullness** of God. Alternate translation: “the full divinity of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 COL	1	20	qweh		ἀποκαταλλάξαι	1	through the blood of his cross	This verse continues the sentence from the previous verse, so **to reconcile** continues the same verb from there, “was pleased,” along with its implied subject, God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat that subject and verb here. Alternate translation: “God the Father was pleased to reconcile”
-COL	1	20	cf2d		τὰ πάντα	1	through the blood of his cross	Here, **all {things}** includes everything that God created, including people. If **all {things}** would be misunderstood in your language, you could be more specific. Alternate translation: “all things and all people”
+COL	1	20	cf2d		τὰ πάντα	1	through the blood of his cross	Here, **all things** includes everything that God created, including people. If **all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could be more specific. Alternate translation: “all things and all people”
 COL	1	20	c3qd	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρηνοποιήσας	1	through the blood of his cross	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **peace**, you can express this idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having made things right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	1	20	as3p	figs-possession	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ σταυροῦ αὐτοῦ	1	through the blood of his cross	Paul uses the possessive form to describe **blood** characterized by **his cross**, which is the location where the blood was shed. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can make the relationship between the two words clearer with a short phrase such as “shed on.” Alternate translation: “the blood shed on his cross.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	1	20	x5av	figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ σταυροῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the blood of his cross	Here, **blood** stands for the death of Christ on the cross. If the meaning of **blood** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word that stands for death or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-COL	1	20	mbra	figs-infostructure	τὰ πάντα εἰς αὐτόν…εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		The last part of this verse (**whether the {things} on the earth or the {things} in the heavens**) describes **all {things}**, found near the beginning of the verse. If your language does not separate a description from the thing it describes, you can move the description next to **all {things}**. Alternate translation: “all things, whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens, to himself” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
-COL	1	20	quxc	figs-merism	εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		Paul refers to the **{things} on the earth** and the **{things} in the heavens** to include them and everything in between, that is, everything in all of creation. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “everything in the whole creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+COL	1	20	mbra	figs-infostructure	τὰ πάντα εἰς αὐτόν…εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		The last part of this verse (**whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens**) describes **all things**, found near the beginning of the verse. If your language does not separate a description from the thing it describes, you can move the description next to **all things**. Alternate translation: “all things, whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens, to himself” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
+COL	1	20	quxc	figs-merism	εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		Paul refers to the **things on the earth** and the **things in the heavens** to include them and everything in between, that is, everything in all of creation. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “everything in the whole creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 COL	1	21	kv5u	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ποτε	1	Connecting Statement:	The phrase **At one time** does not refer to one specific instance in time when the Colossians were alienated from God. Instead, it refers to all the time before they believed in Jesus. If **At one time** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify what **time** Paul is referring to. Alternate translation: “During the time before you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 COL	1	21	wp3t	figs-activepassive	ὄντας ἀπηλλοτριωμένους	1	alienated	If your language does not use this passive form, you can describe the Colossians’ state with an active form. Alternate translation: “did not want a relationship with God” or “were people who did not want to be near God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	1	21	rn6l	figs-explicit	ἀπηλλοτριωμένους, καὶ ἐχθροὺς	1		Paul assumes that the Colossians will know from whom they were **alienated** and with whom they were **enemies**: God. If your language would include this implied information, you could include a reference to “God” in this sentence. Alternate translation: “alienated from God and were his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -163,12 +161,12 @@ COL	2	intro	p3uc			0		# Colossians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Forma
 COL	2	1	tt6v	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	The word **For** introduces the reason why Paul told them in [1:29](../01/29.md) about how hard he works. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make the transition more explicit. Alternate translation: “I tell you about my hard work because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 COL	2	1	dqg5	figs-metaphor	ἡλίκον ἀγῶνα ἔχω	1	how great a struggle I have for you	Here, the word **struggle** is directly related to the word “striving” in [1:29](../01/29.md). Just as in that verse, it is usually used for striving to win a contest, whether athletic, legal, or military. Paul uses the word here to indicate how much he cares for the Colossians and how hard he works for their benefit. If that meaning of **struggle** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “how much care I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	1	xoih	figs-abstractnouns	ἡλίκον ἀγῶνα ἔχω	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **struggle**, you can express the idea behind this abstract noun by combining it with the verb **have** and using a verb such as “struggle.” Alternate translation: “how much I struggle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-COL	2	1	fn4z	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, καὶ τῶν ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ, καὶ ὅσοι οὐχ ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί	1	those at Laodicea	This list includes the Colossians and the Laodiceans among those who have not seen Paul’s **face in {the} flesh**. If this inclusion would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the list and include **you** and **the ones at Laodicea** among those who **have not seen** Paul’s face. Alternate translation: “for as many as have not seen my face in the flesh, including you and those at Laodicea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-COL	2	1	rj7d	figs-idiom	οὐχ ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί	1	as many as have not seen my face in the flesh	In Paul’s culture, seeing a **face in {the} flesh** refers to meeting someone in person. If the meaning of **have not seen my face in {the} flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “have not personally made my acquaintance” or “have not personally met me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	2	1	fn4z	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, καὶ τῶν ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ, καὶ ὅσοι οὐχ ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί	1	those at Laodicea	This list includes the Colossians and the Laodiceans among those who have not seen Paul’s **face in the flesh**. If this inclusion would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the list and include **you** and **the ones at Laodicea** among those who **have not seen** Paul’s face. Alternate translation: “for as many as have not seen my face in the flesh, including you and those at Laodicea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	2	1	rj7d	figs-idiom	οὐχ ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί	1	as many as have not seen my face in the flesh	In Paul’s culture, seeing a **face in the flesh** refers to meeting someone in person. If the meaning of **have not seen my face in the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “have not personally made my acquaintance” or “have not personally met me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	2	2	ge1w	figs-123person	αὐτῶν	1	so that their hearts	Paul here switches from the second person to the third person because he wishes to include everyone he has not met in person, including the Colossians. If this switch would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) use the second person from the previous verse but make it clear that this includes everyone Paul has not met in person. Alternate translation “your hearts and their” (2) retain the third person here and reverse the list in the previous verse as suggested by the note there (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 COL	2	2	oyih	figs-activepassive	παρακληθῶσιν αἱ καρδίαι αὐτῶν, συμβιβασθέντες	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express these verbs in their active forms, with Paul as the subject of the “encouraging” and God as the subject of the “bringing together.” Alternate translation: “I might encourage their hearts, with God bringing them together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	2	2	spxx	figs-synecdoche	αἱ καρδίαι αὐτῶν	1		Here when Paul refers to **their hearts**, the Colossians would have understood him to mean the entire person. Paul uses **hearts** because his culture identified **hearts** as the body part where people experienced encouragement. If that meaning of **their hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the location where people experience encouragement in your culture, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-COL	2	2	a4px	figs-metaphor	πᾶν πλοῦτος τῆς πληροφορίας	1	having been brought together	Paul here speaks as if **full assurance** could be characterized as having **all {the} riches**. He uses this metaphor to describe **the full assurance** as complete and valuable. If **all {the} riches of the full assurance** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the complete and valuable full assurance” or “all the blessings of the full assurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	2	a4px	figs-metaphor	πᾶν πλοῦτος τῆς πληροφορίας	1	having been brought together	Paul here speaks as if **full assurance** could be characterized as having **all the riches**. He uses this metaphor to describe **the full assurance** as complete and valuable. If **all the riches of the full assurance** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the complete and valuable full assurance” or “all the blessings of the full assurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	2	kdg8	figs-possession	τῆς πληροφορίας τῆς συνέσεως	1	all the riches of the full assurance of understanding	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **full assurance** that is gained from **understanding**. From the rest of the verse, it is clear that what is “understood” is **the mystery of God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a relative clause to translate **of understanding**. Alternate translation: “of the full assurance that comes from understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	2	qgi2	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς πᾶν πλοῦτος τῆς πληροφορίας τῆς συνέσεως; εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν τοῦ μυστηρίου τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of the mystery of God	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **full assurance**, **understanding**, and **knowledge**, you can express the ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “having all the riches that come when they completely trust God because they understand, that is, they know the mystery of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	2	ahpn	figs-doublet	τῆς συνέσεως; εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν	1	of the mystery of God	Here, the words **understanding** and **knowledge** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both words to emphasize the breadth of spiritual knowledge he speaks about. If your language does not use repetition in this way or has only one word for this concept, you can use just one word or translate **understanding** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “of wise knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -254,8 +252,8 @@ COL	2	16	bvs7	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		The word **Therefore** dr
 COL	2	16	e1rp	figs-imperative3p	μὴ…τις ὑμᾶς κρινέτω	1		This phrase translates a third-person imperative. If your language has third-person imperatives, you could use one here. If your language does not have third-person imperatives, you can use a comparable phrase or express the idea with a second-person imperative. Alternate translation: “you should not let anyone judge you” or “do not permit anyone to judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 COL	2	16	cii9	figs-explicit	ἐν βρώσει, καὶ ἐν πόσει, ἢ ἐν μέρει ἑορτῆς, ἢ νουμηνίας, ἢ Σαββάτων	1	in food or in drink	This list of areas in which someone might judge the Colossians refers to parts of the law of Moses. Some of these areas were also important for other religions in Paul’s culture. If Paul’s list of things that someone could **judge** the Colossians in would be misunderstood in your translation, you could clarify that these areas are covered by the law of Moses and sometimes by the traditions of other religions as well. Alternate translation: “for you how behave in relationship to the law of Moses and other religious traditions, including in the areas of food and drink and festivals, new moons or Sabbaths.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	2	16	b4kd	figs-metonymy	νουμηνίας	1	in regard to a festival, or a new moon, or Sabbaths	The word **new moon** refers to a festival or celebration that would take place when it was the time of the new moon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea with a longer phrase. Alternate translation: “a new moon celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-COL	2	17	ip3a	figs-metaphor	ἅ ἐστιν σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων, τὸ δὲ σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	which are a shadow of the things coming, but the body is of Christ	A **shadow** shows the shape and outline of a **body**, but it is not the **body** itself. In a similar way, the things listed in the previous verse show the shape and outline of the **{things} coming**, but the **body** that casts this **shadow** is **Christ**. He is the substance of the **{things} coming**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “which are a foretaste of the things coming, but the full experience is of Christ” or “which hint at the things that were to come, but Christ is the one who came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	2	17	sev8	figs-possession	σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων	1		Paul here uses the possession form to show that the **shadow** is cast by the **{things} coming**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a shadow cast by the things coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+COL	2	17	ip3a	figs-metaphor	ἅ ἐστιν σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων, τὸ δὲ σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	which are a shadow of the things coming, but the body is of Christ	A **shadow** shows the shape and outline of a **body**, but it is not the **body** itself. In a similar way, the things listed in the previous verse show the shape and outline of the **things coming**, but the **body** that casts this **shadow** is **Christ**. He is the substance of the **things coming**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “which are a foretaste of the things coming, but the full experience is of Christ” or “which hint at the things that were to come, but Christ is the one who came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	17	sev8	figs-possession	σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων	1		Paul here uses the possession form to show that the **shadow** is cast by the **things coming**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a shadow cast by the things coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	17	liqe	translate-unknown	τῶν μελλόντων	1		The **things coming** primarily refers to things that will happen or be experienced in the future. They can be connected with both the first and the second coming of Christ, which is why the **body** is of Christ in this verse. If that meaning of **coming** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **coming** refers to what Christ has blessed believers with at his first coming and what he will bless them with at his second coming. Alternate translation: “blessings that Christ brings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	17	ykh9	figs-possession	τὸ…σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **Christ** as the **body** that casts the “shadow.” If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea with a simple “being” verb. Alternate translation: “the body is Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	18	aa4v	figs-gendernotations	μηδεὶς…ἑόρακεν…αὐτοῦ	1		The words **no one**, **he**, and **his** do not refer to one male person. Instead, they refer in a generic way to anyone who acts in these ways. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words with a comparable generic phrase in your language or make them plural. Alternate translation: “no one … they have seen … their” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -279,9 +277,9 @@ COL	2	20	cpki	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἀπεθάνετε σὺν
 COL	2	20	yg7h	figs-metaphor	ἀπεθάνετε σὺν Χριστῷ	1	If you died with Christ from the elemental principles of the world	Paul now returns to a metaphor he has used earlier: believers have died and “been buried with” Christ ([2:12](../02/12.md)). This means that, in their union with Christ, believers share in his death so that they too have died. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the language of analogy, or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you participated in the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	20	oshk	figs-idiom	ἀπεθάνετε σὺν Χριστῷ ἀπὸ	1		To “die from” something does not identify what caused the death, but rather it indicates what the death separated the person from. Here, then, the Colossians were separated from the **elemental principles** by participating in Christ’s death. If “dying” **from** something would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you died with Christ, which separated you from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	2	20	ydqo	translate-unknown	τῶν στοιχείων τοῦ κόσμου	1		As in [2:8](../02/08.md), the word **elemental principles** could refer to (1) the spiritual powers of this world. Alternate translation: “the powerful spiritual beings in this world” (2) basic human opinions about how the world works. Alternate translation: “the basic things that humans teach about the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	2	20	uu77	figs-infostructure	τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ δογματίζεσθε	1	as living in the world, are you being subjected to its decrees	If this structure would be difficult to understand in your language, you could move the phrase **as living in {the} world** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “why are you being subjected to the world’s decrees as living in the world” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
-COL	2	20	ywkx	figs-metaphor	ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ	1		Paul uses the verb **living** to describe the Colossian’s way of life. They are indeed physically alive and in the world, but he wants them to behave in ways that do not match what people **in {the} world** normally do. If **living in {the} world** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a verbal phrase such as “belonging to” or “conforming to.” Alternate translation: “belonging to the world” or “conforming to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	2	20	xm1v	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ	1		In this context, the word **as** introduces something that is not true: the Colossians do not actually live **in {the} world**. If **as** would be misunderstood your language, you could clarify that **living in {the} world** is not true of the Colossians, using a phrase such as “as if.” Alternate translation: “as if living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+COL	2	20	uu77	figs-infostructure	τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ δογματίζεσθε	1	as living in the world, are you being subjected to its decrees	If this structure would be difficult to understand in your language, you could move the phrase **as living in the world** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “why are you being subjected to the world’s decrees as living in the world” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
+COL	2	20	ywkx	figs-metaphor	ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ	1		Paul uses the verb **living** to describe the Colossian’s way of life. They are indeed physically alive and in the world, but he wants them to behave in ways that do not match what people **in the world** normally do. If **living in the world** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a verbal phrase such as “belonging to” or “conforming to.” Alternate translation: “belonging to the world” or “conforming to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	20	xm1v	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ	1		In this context, the word **as** introduces something that is not true: the Colossians do not actually live **in the world**. If **as** would be misunderstood your language, you could clarify that **living in the world** is not true of the Colossians, using a phrase such as “as if.” Alternate translation: “as if living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 COL	2	20	fe1k	figs-rquestion	τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ δογματίζεσθε	1	of the world	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to be **subjected to its decrees**. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not, as living in the world, be subjected to its decrees” or “you should not, as living in the world, be subjected to its decrees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 COL	2	20	g0jz	figs-activepassive	δογματίζεσθε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in its active form, perhaps by using a similar verb. Alternate translation: “do you submit to its decrees” or “do you subject yourselves to its decrees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	2	20	cdgc	figs-abstractnouns	δογματίζεσθε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **decrees**, you can express the idea with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “are you being subjected to what people require” or “are you being subjected to what it commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -299,7 +297,7 @@ COL	2	23	h2hk	figs-metonymy	λόγον	1		Here, **a word** represents a message
 COL	2	23	y2dc	figs-hypo	ἅτινά…λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος	1	These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body	While there is no grammatical marker for a condition here, the word **in** functionally introduces a condition: these commands have a **word of wisdom** “if” one values **self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body**. It is only if one values these things that the commands have wisdom. If Paul’s explanation of how these commands could have **wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using a conditional expression, or use the word “seem.” Alternate translation: “which, having indeed a word of wisdom if one values self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 COL	2	23	g60j	figs-abstractnouns	λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος,	1	These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body	If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **wisdom**, **religion**, **humility**, and **severity**, you can rephrase this part of the verse so that you can express these ideas with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “having indeed a word that seems wise according to people who serve God in their own way, who humble themselves for gain, and who act severely to their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	23	vr8p	translate-unknown	ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ	1		The phrase **self-made religion** could describe (1) people who worship God however they want to. Alternate translation: “invented religion” (2) people who pretend to worship God but do not. Alternate translation: “mock worship” or “false worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	2	23	g9i8	translate-unknown	ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος	1		The phrase **severity of {the} body** refers to treating one’s body harshly as part of one’s religious practice. This could include beating oneself, not eating enough, or other ascetic practices. If **severity of {the} body** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to religious practice or translate the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “and wounding one’s body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+COL	2	23	g9i8	translate-unknown	ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος	1		The phrase **severity of the body** refers to treating one’s body harshly as part of one’s religious practice. This could include beating oneself, not eating enough, or other ascetic practices. If **severity of the body** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to religious practice or translate the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “and wounding one’s body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	23	e7p5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐστιν…οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ τινι	1	are not of any value against the indulgence of the flesh	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **value**, you can combine it with the verbal phrase **are not** to create a new phrase. Alternate translation: “do nothing” or “are ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	23	blil	figs-possession	πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός	1		Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **indulgence** one gives to the **flesh**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could translate **indulgence** with a verb such as “indulging.” Alternate translation: “indulging the flesh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	23	e70e	translate-unknown	πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός	1		If one “indulges” **the flesh**, this means that one has behaved in ways that match what one’s weak and sinful parts wish. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word for “sin.” Alternate translation: “sin” or “giving in to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -310,12 +308,12 @@ COL	3	1	oav8	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…συνηγέρθητε τῷ
 COL	3	1	t1jv	figs-metaphor	συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ	1	you were raised with Christ	Paul again states that believers have been raised from the dead with Christ. By this, he means that believers are united to Christ in his resurrection and thus receive new life. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	1	qmzv	figs-idiom	συνηγέρθητε	1	you were raised with Christ	Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone who had died coming back to life. If this word does not refer to coming back to life in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you were restored to life with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	1	sl1f	figs-activepassive	συνηγέρθητε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father raised you with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-COL	3	1	vuct	figs-metaphor	τὰ ἄνω ζητεῖτε	1		Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Colossians to look for or try to find **{things} above**. By using the word **seek**, Paul wants to tell the Colossians to focus on **the {things} above** as if they were something valuable that the Colossians had lost and needed to find. If **seek the {things} above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “direct your attention to the things above” or “focus on the things above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	3	1	p3fw	figs-idiom	τὰ ἄνω	1	the things above	The **{things} above** is another term for heavenly things, which Paul makes clear in the next phrase. If **the {things} above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the phrase refers specifically to things in heaven. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	3	1	upi9	figs-explicit	ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ καθήμενος	1		This phrase implies two things. First, what Christ sits on is the divine throne in heaven. Second, **sitting** on this throne means that Christ has assumed a position of authority over the universe with God the Father. If **sitting at {the} right hand of God** would be misunderstood in your language, you could make either or both of these points explicit. Alternate translation: “sitting on the throne at the right hand of God” or “ruling at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	3	1	vuct	figs-metaphor	τὰ ἄνω ζητεῖτε	1		Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Colossians to look for or try to find **things above**. By using the word **seek**, Paul wants to tell the Colossians to focus on **the things above** as if they were something valuable that the Colossians had lost and needed to find. If **seek the things above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “direct your attention to the things above” or “focus on the things above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	3	1	p3fw	figs-idiom	τὰ ἄνω	1	the things above	The **things above** is another term for heavenly things, which Paul makes clear in the next phrase. If **the things above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the phrase refers specifically to things in heaven. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	3	1	upi9	figs-explicit	ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ καθήμενος	1		This phrase implies two things. First, what Christ sits on is the divine throne in heaven. Second, **sitting** on this throne means that Christ has assumed a position of authority over the universe with God the Father. If **sitting at the right hand of God** would be misunderstood in your language, you could make either or both of these points explicit. Alternate translation: “sitting on the throne at the right hand of God” or “ruling at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	3	2	vpat		φρονεῖτε	1		The phrase **Think about** refers not just to reasoning but also to focus and desire. Alternate translation: “Focus on”
-COL	3	2	f181	figs-idiom	τὰ ἄνω	1		Just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the **things above** is another term for heavenly things. If **the {things} above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the phrase refers specifically to things in heaven. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	3	2	ow7x	figs-explicit	τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1		The **{things} on the earth** describes those things in this world that are not connected to Christ, which are not **the {things} above**. Not thinking about **the {things} on the earth** does not mean that the Colossians are supposed to abandon all care for earthly things. Instead, Paul is urging them to focus on Christ and what he has promised for them, not on whatever they could gain on earth. If the meaning of **the {things} on the earth** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify this contrast by further describing **the {things} on the earth**. Alternate translation: “the things that matter in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	3	2	f181	figs-idiom	τὰ ἄνω	1		Just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the **things above** is another term for heavenly things. If **the things above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the phrase refers specifically to things in heaven. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	3	2	ow7x	figs-explicit	τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1		The **things on the earth** describes those things in this world that are not connected to Christ, which are not **the things above**. Not thinking about **the things on the earth** does not mean that the Colossians are supposed to abandon all care for earthly things. Instead, Paul is urging them to focus on Christ and what he has promised for them, not on whatever they could gain on earth. If the meaning of **the things on the earth** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify this contrast by further describing **the things on the earth**. Alternate translation: “the things that matter in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	3	3	oa5x	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		The word **For** introduces the reason why the Colossians should think about the things above ([3:1–2](../03/01.md)): it is because they **died**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the transition more explicitly. Alternate translation: “You should think about the things above because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 COL	3	3	l9yk	figs-metaphor	ἀπεθάνετε	1	For you died	Here Paul expresses in slightly different form the idea he already stated in [2:20](../02/20.md): the Colossians have been united to Christ in his death. As Christ actually died, so God counts the Colossian believers as having **died** with Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea as you did in [2:20](../02/20.md), or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “you died in union with the Messiah” or “you participated in the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	3	gkz6	figs-metaphor	ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν κέκρυπται σὺν τῷ Χριστῷ ἐν τῷ Θεῷ	1	your life has been hidden with Christ in God	Here Paul speaks as if the Colossians’ lives were objects that could be **hidden** where Christ is, and as if the place they were hidden was God. By using this metaphor, Paul wants the Colossians to know that they are safe (**with Christ in God**) but also that their new life is not yet fully revealed (**hidden**). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God is protecting your new life with Christ and will reveal it when the time comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -397,11 +395,11 @@ COL	3	13	p474	figs-abstractnouns	πρός…ἔχῃ μομφήν	1	may have a c
 COL	3	13	lp1o	figs-infostructure	καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	may have a complaint against	If your language would put the comparison after the command, you could switch them in your translation, including “forgive” in the new first clause. Alternate translation: “you should forgive others, just as the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 COL	3	13	lkdl	figs-simile	καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν	1	may have a complaint against	Here Paul draws a comparison between how he wants the Colossians to forgive and how Jesus has forgiven them. Use a word or phrase that would normally be used for comparing things that are similar. Alternate translation: “in the same way that the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 COL	3	13	l0kr	figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	may have a complaint against	Paul leaves out words that could be needed in some languages to make a complete statement. If your language needs these words, you could supply words such as “forgive one another.” Alternate translation: “so also you should forgive each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-COL	3	14	l1ik	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ πᾶσιν δὲ τούτοις, τὴν ἀγάπην	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	Here Paul speaks as if **love** is higher than, or **above**, all the things he has said. By this, he means that **love** is more important than **all these {things}**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly with a word such as “important” or “essential.” Alternate translation: “But what is most essential is love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	3	14	l1ik	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ πᾶσιν δὲ τούτοις, τὴν ἀγάπην	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	Here Paul speaks as if **love** is higher than, or **above**, all the things he has said. By this, he means that **love** is more important than **all these things**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly with a word such as “important” or “essential.” Alternate translation: “But what is most essential is love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	14	mlfc	figs-ellipsis	τὴν ἀγάπην	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language would include more words, you could insert the words that Paul implies, which can be found in [3:12](../03/12.md): “put on.” Alternate translation: “put on love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 COL	3	14	c5o7	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀγάπην	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb. If your language requires you to specify who the Colossians are supposed to “love,” you can clarify that Paul has other believers in mind first, but he is also thinking of God. Alternate translation: “love one another” or “love each other and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-COL	3	14	x5g8	figs-metaphor	ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	Here, **{the} bond of perfection** is a metaphor for something that brings people together in perfect unity. This could refer to (1) the perfect unity in community that Paul wishes for believers. Alternate translation: “which brings you together in perfect unity” (2) the perfect unity that love brings to all Christian virtues. Alternate translation: “which brings all these virtues together to perfection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	3	14	bp1w	figs-possession	σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **{the} bond** that leads to **perfection**. Alternate translation: “the bond that brings perfection” (2) **{the} bond** that has **perfection**. Alternate translation: “the perfect bond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+COL	3	14	x5g8	figs-metaphor	ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	Here, **the bond of perfection** is a metaphor for something that brings people together in perfect unity. This could refer to (1) the perfect unity in community that Paul wishes for believers. Alternate translation: “which brings you together in perfect unity” (2) the perfect unity that love brings to all Christian virtues. Alternate translation: “which brings all these virtues together to perfection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	3	14	bp1w	figs-possession	σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **the bond** that leads to **perfection**. Alternate translation: “the bond that brings perfection” (2) **the bond** that has **perfection**. Alternate translation: “the perfect bond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	3	14	welw	figs-abstractnouns	σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος	1	love, which is the bond of perfection	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **perfection**, you can express the idea by an adjective such as “perfect” or a verb such as “complete.” Alternate translation: “the perfect bond” or “the bond that completes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	3	15	gtz3	figs-imperative	ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ βραβευέτω ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts	Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could translate this imperative in the second person, with the Colossians as the subject of a verb such as “obey” and the **peace of Christ** as the object. Alternate translation: “in your hearts obey the peace of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 COL	3	15	hdg5	figs-metaphor	ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ βραβευέτω ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts	Paul speaks of the **peace of Christ** as if it should be the “ruler” in the Colossians’ hearts. The word **rule** is closely related to the word translated “deprive of your prize” that Paul uses in [2:18](../02/18.md): both are used of a judge or an umpire making a decision, although in [2:18](../02/18.md), the judge or umpire decides against the Colossians. Here, the idea is that the **peace of Christ** acts as the judge or umpire in the **hearts** of the Colossians, which means that this **peace** helps them decide what to feel and do. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “let the peace of Christ make your decisions in your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -426,33 +424,33 @@ COL	3	16	ives	figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	with p
 COL	3	17	ivxg	figs-infostructure	πᾶν, ὅ τι ἐὰν ποιῆτε ἐν λόγῳ ἢ ἐν ἔργῳ, πάντα ἐν	1	in word or in deed	The word **all** refers back to **everything, whatever you might do in word or in deed**. If your language would not write the object (**everything, whatever you might do in word or in deed**) first, you could put it where **all** is, after the verb. Or, you could change the object into a relative clause. Alternate translation: “do everything, whatever you might do in word or in deed, in” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
 COL	3	17	g059	figs-idiom	πᾶν, ὅ τι ἐὰν ποιῆτε	1	in word or in deed	In Paul’s culture, this is a natural way to refer to anything someone might do, including all possibilities. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to refer to all possible actions. Alternate translation: “anything you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	17	g8p8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν λόγῳ ἢ ἐν ἔργῳ	1	in word or in deed	If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **word** and **deed**, you can express the idea with verbs such as “speak” and “act.” Alternate translation: “in speaking or in acting” or “when you speak or act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-COL	3	17	uix9	figs-idiom	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus	Acting **in {the} name of** a person means representing that person. Representatives, those who do anything **in {the} name of** someone else, should act so as to help others think well of and honor the people they represent. If **in {the} name of** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for representing someone or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “as representatives of the Lord Jesus” or “in a way that leads to honor for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	3	17	uix9	figs-idiom	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus	Acting **in the name of** a person means representing that person. Representatives, those who do anything **in the name of** someone else, should act so as to help others think well of and honor the people they represent. If **in the name of** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for representing someone or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “as representatives of the Lord Jesus” or “in a way that leads to honor for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	17	bv84	figs-explicit	δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	through him	The phrase **through him** does not mean that the prayers of thanks are mediated to God the Father by God the Son. Rather, it is **through** the Son that the Colossians are able to give thanks. This means that they can give thanks because of what the Son has done for them. If that meaning of **through him** would not be understood in your language, you could express the idea with a preposition such as “because” or clarify that it is **through** the “work” of the Son. Alternate translation: “because of what he has done” or “through his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	3	18	tt9u		αἱ γυναῖκες	1	Wives, submit to your husbands	Here Paul directly addresses the **Wives** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You wives”
 COL	3	18	gtft	figs-activepassive	ὑποτάσσεσθε τοῖς ἀνδράσιν	1	is fitting	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form with a verb such as “obey” or “submit.” Alternate translation: “obey your husbands” or “submit to your husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-COL	3	18	dc5v	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἀνδράσιν	1	is fitting	Here Paul does not explicitly state that wives must **be subjected** to “their own” husbands. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **{your}** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each wife’s husband in mind. Alternate translation: “to your own husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	3	18	dc5v	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἀνδράσιν	1	is fitting	Here Paul does not explicitly state that wives must **be subjected** to “their own” husbands. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **your** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each wife’s husband in mind. Alternate translation: “to your own husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	3	18	juqx	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὡς	1	is fitting	Here, the word **as** functions to introduce the reason why “wives” should “be subjected to” their **husbands**. If **as** does not indicate a reason in your language, you could express this idea using a causal word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “because this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 COL	3	18	b2y3	translate-unknown	ἀνῆκεν	1	is fitting	The phrase **is fitting** refers to what or to whom something properly belongs. If **is fitting** would be misunderstood your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that identifies proper behavior in specific circumstances. Alternate translation: “is suitable” or “suits your position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	3	18	y1m8	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	is fitting	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in {the} Lord** or united to the Lord is the standard for how to behave. Alternate translation: “in your union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	3	18	y1m8	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	is fitting	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord** or united to the Lord is the standard for how to behave. Alternate translation: “in your union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	19	apyy		οἱ ἄνδρες	1	do not be embittered against	Here Paul directly addresses the **Husbands** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You husbands”
-COL	3	19	n9dm	figs-explicit	τὰς γυναῖκας	1	do not be embittered against	Here Paul does not explicitly state that husbands must **love** “their own” wives. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **{your}** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each husband’s wife in mind. Alternate translation: “your own wives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	3	19	n9dm	figs-explicit	τὰς γυναῖκας	1	do not be embittered against	Here Paul does not explicitly state that husbands must **love** “their own” wives. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **your** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each husband’s wife in mind. Alternate translation: “your own wives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	3	19	lc4a	translate-unknown	μὴ πικραίνεσθε πρὸς	1	do not be embittered against	The phrase **be embittered** could refer to (1) the husband doing or saying things that cause his wife to be bitter or upset with him. Alternate translation: “do not do what makes them bitter against you” (2) the husband becoming bitter or upside with his wife for doing or saying certain things. Alternate translation: “do not become bitter against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	20	mlu2		τὰ τέκνα	1	do not be embittered against	Here Paul directly addresses the **Children** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You children”
-COL	3	20	imh3	figs-explicit	τοῖς γονεῦσιν	1	do not be embittered against	Here Paul does not explicitly state that children must **obey** “their own” parents. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **{your}** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each child’s parents in mind. Alternate translation: “your own parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-COL	3	20	gu2o	figs-idiom	κατὰ πάντα	1	do not be embittered against	The phrase **in all {things}** is an idiom that indicates that children should obey “everything their parents command” or “in every situation.” If **in all {things}** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **{things}** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	3	20	imh3	figs-explicit	τοῖς γονεῦσιν	1	do not be embittered against	Here Paul does not explicitly state that children must **obey** “their own” parents. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **your** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each child’s parents in mind. Alternate translation: “your own parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	3	20	gu2o	figs-idiom	κατὰ πάντα	1	do not be embittered against	The phrase **in all things** is an idiom that indicates that children should obey “everything their parents command” or “in every situation.” If **in all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	20	kadq	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	do not be embittered against	The word **for** introduces the basis or reason for somethin; here it is Paul’s command to children. Use a word that indicates the reason for a command in your language. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 COL	3	20	vbad	translate-unknown	εὐάρεστόν ἐστιν	1	do not be embittered against	If something **is pleasing**, that means that the person it “pleases” finds that thing acceptable, agreeable, or pleasant. If **is pleasing** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that emphasizes that obedience to parents is something that is acceptable to God. Alternate translation: “is acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	20	vps1	figs-explicit	εὐάρεστόν	1	do not be embittered against	Paul does not state to whom obedience to parents is **pleasing**, but it is clear that it pleases God. If your language would state who is pleased, you could expressly state that it is God. Alternate translation: “pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-COL	3	20	ales	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	do not be embittered against	Just as in [3:18](../03/18.md), Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in {the} Lord**, or united to **{the} Lord**, identifies specifically that those who are united to **{the} Lord** are to behave in this way. Alternate translation: “in your union with the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
+COL	3	20	ales	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	do not be embittered against	Just as in [3:18](../03/18.md), Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to **the Lord**, identifies specifically that those who are united to **the Lord** are to behave in this way. Alternate translation: “in your union with the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 COL	3	21	uc7r		οἱ πατέρες	1	do not provoke your children	Here Paul directly addresses the **Fathers** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You fathers”
 COL	3	21	bvi3	translate-unknown	μὴ ἐρεθίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑμῶν	1	do not provoke your children	The word **provoke** in this context refers to irritating someone or making them angry. If **provoke** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “do not irritate your children” or “do not provoke your children to anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	21	ozeh	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα μὴ ἀθυμῶσιν	1	do not provoke your children	This clause indicates the goal or purpose of the previous command, but this purpose is in the negative. If your language has a customary way to indicate a negative purpose, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “lest they be discouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 COL	3	21	fvi7	figs-activepassive	μὴ ἀθυμῶσιν	1	do not provoke your children	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form with the **Fathers** as the subject. Alternate translation: “you may not discourage them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	3	21	bjk2	translate-unknown	ἀθυμῶσιν	1	do not provoke your children	The phrase **they may … be discouraged** describes the feeling of despair or hopelessness. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “they may … despair” or “they may … lose heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	22	lf6k		οἱ δοῦλοι	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	Here Paul directly addresses the **Slaves** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You slaves”
-COL	3	22	cx6a	figs-idiom	τοῖς κατὰ σάρκα κυρίοις	1	obey your masters according to the flesh	The phrase **according to {the} flesh** describes the **masters** as humans on this earth. Paul uses this phrase to describe these **masters** because he is already setting up a contrast with the “Master” over these masters: Jesus (see [4:1](../04/01.md)). If **according to {the} flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with an adjective such as “human” or “earthly.” Alternate translation: “your earthly masters” or “your human masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	3	22	o6mi	figs-explicit	τοῖς…κυρίοις	1	obey your masters according to the flesh	Here Paul does not explicitly state that slaves must **obey** “their own” masters. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **{your}** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each slave’s master in mind. Alternate translation: “your own masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-COL	3	22	iy1n	figs-idiom	κατὰ πάντα	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	Just as in [3:20](../03/20.md), the phrase **in all {things}** is an idiom that indicates that slaves should obey “everything their masters command” or “in every situation.” If **in all {things}** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **{things}** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	3	22	cx6a	figs-idiom	τοῖς κατὰ σάρκα κυρίοις	1	obey your masters according to the flesh	The phrase **according to the flesh** describes the **masters** as humans on this earth. Paul uses this phrase to describe these **masters** because he is already setting up a contrast with the “Master” over these masters: Jesus (see [4:1](../04/01.md)). If **according to the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with an adjective such as “human” or “earthly.” Alternate translation: “your earthly masters” or “your human masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	3	22	o6mi	figs-explicit	τοῖς…κυρίοις	1	obey your masters according to the flesh	Here Paul does not explicitly state that slaves must **obey** “their own” masters. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **your** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each slave’s master in mind. Alternate translation: “your own masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	3	22	iy1n	figs-idiom	κατὰ πάντα	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	Just as in [3:20](../03/20.md), the phrase **in all things** is an idiom that indicates that slaves should obey “everything their masters command” or “in every situation.” If **in all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	22	p36t	translate-unknown	μὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοδουλεία	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	The word **eyeservice** describes how people sometimes behave to look good more than to do the right thing. If **eyeservice** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase such as “wanting to look impressive.” Alternate translation: “not focusing on how you appear to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	22	b5en	translate-unknown	ὡς ἀνθρωπάρεσκοι	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	The phrase **people pleasers** describes the kind of people who care about “eyeservice.” Here, **people pleasers** are those who focus on impressing humans rather than doing what God desires. If these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could emphasize that **people pleasers** want to please humans only, not God. Alternate translation: “as people who want to please humans rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	22	r22m	figs-possession	ἐν ἁπλότητι καρδίας	1	with sincerity of heart	Paul here uses the possessive form to describe a **heart** that is characterized by its **sincerity**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **sincerity** with an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “with a sincere heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -460,7 +458,7 @@ COL	3	22	ouca	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἁπλότητι καρδίας	1	with s
 COL	3	22	m27w	figs-metonymy	καρδίας	1	with sincerity of heart	In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where a person thinks and desires. If that meaning of **heart** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of mind” or “of desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 COL	3	22	tsn9	grammar-connect-logic-result	φοβούμενοι τὸν Κύριον	1	with sincerity of heart	The phrase **fearing the Lord** could describe: (1) the reason why the slaves should obey their masters. Alternate translation: “because you fear the Lord” (2) the way or manner in which the slaves should obey their masters. Alternate translation: “showing fear for the Lord” or “in a way that shows that you fear the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 COL	3	23	olwu	figs-idiom	ὃ ἐὰν ποιῆτε	1	as to the Lord	In Paul’s culture, this is a natural way to refer to anything someone might do, including all possibilities. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way of referring to all possible actions. Alternate translation: “In anything you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	3	23	itn9	figs-idiom	ἐκ ψυχῆς	1	as to the Lord	Working **from {the} soul** is comparable to the English idiom working “with all one’s heart,” which refers to doing something with diligence, without holding anything back. If **from {the} soul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “with all your heart” or “with all your strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	3	23	itn9	figs-idiom	ἐκ ψυχῆς	1	as to the Lord	Working **from the soul** is comparable to the English idiom working “with all one’s heart,” which refers to doing something with diligence, without holding anything back. If **from the soul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “with all your heart” or “with all your strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	23	arw4	figs-idiom	ὡς τῷ Κυρίῳ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώποις	1	as to the Lord	This contrast indicates that, even though they serve **men**, they should consider their work to be directed to or in service of **the Lord**. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a contrast phrase such as “even as.” Alternate translation: “to serve the Lord, even as you are serving men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	23	ckiz	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	as to the Lord	The word **men** does not refer to only male people but to humans in general. If **men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to people or humans in general. Alternate translation: “to humans” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 COL	3	24	p5qy	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1	the reward of the inheritance	The word **knowing** introduces a reason why the slaves should obey as Paul commands them to in [3:22–23](../03/22.md). If **knowing** would not introduce a reason in your language, you could clarify this by using a word such as “because.” Alternate translation: “since you know” or “for you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -511,23 +509,23 @@ COL	4	6	c1w4	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδέναι	1	to know how it is ne
 COL	4	6	jdtx		πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς…ἀποκρίνεσθαι	1	to know how it is necessary for you to answer	Alternate translation: “how to best answer” or “the right answer to give to”
 COL	4	6	djl0	writing-pronouns	ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ	1	to know how it is necessary for you to answer	The phrase **each one** refers to individuals who would be considered part of “those outside” ([4:5](../04/05.md)). If what **each one** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could explicitly refer back to how you translated “those outside.” Alternate translation: “each outsider” or “each one who does not believe in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 COL	4	7	ut91	figs-infostructure	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ πάντα γνωρίσει ὑμῖν Τυχικὸς, ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς, καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος, καὶ σύνδουλος ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Connecting Statement:	If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange this sentence so that (1) what **Tychicus will make known** to them comes after **to you**, and (2) the words that describe **Tychicus** come after his name. You may need to make one or both of these changes to make the verse clear in your language. Alternate translation: “Tychicus, the beloved brother and faithful servant and fellow slave in the Lord, will make known to you all the things concerning me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
-COL	4	7	xzz4	figs-idiom	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ πάντα	1	the things concerning me	When Paul speaks of **All the {things} concerning me**, he refers to details about his life such as where he is living, his health, how his work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “All the news about me” or “All the details about how I am doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	4	7	xzz4	figs-idiom	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ πάντα	1	the things concerning me	When Paul speaks of **All the things concerning me**, he refers to details about his life such as where he is living, his health, how his work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “All the news about me” or “All the details about how I am doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	4	7	cbzm	translate-names	Τυχικὸς	1	the things concerning me	**Tychicus** is the name of a man. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
 COL	4	7	m52y	figs-explicit	πιστὸς διάκονος	1	the things concerning me	If your language would state whom Tychicus serves, you could make this explicit. He could be a **servant** to: (1) Paul. Alternate translation: “my faithful servant” (2) the Lord, and thus the Lord’s church as well. Alternate translation: “faithful servant of the Lord and his church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	4	7	p7c1	figs-explicit	σύνδουλος	1	fellow slave	If **fellow slave** would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit that Tychicus is a **slave** of Christ, along with Paul. Alternate translation: “fellow slave of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	4	7	h3mk	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	fellow slave	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies Paul and Tychicus as “slaves” of the Lord because of their union with him. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 COL	4	8	wmmd	figs-pastforfuture	ἔπεμψα	1	the things concerning us	Here Paul uses the past tense form **sent** to describe something he has not yet done when he is dictating this letter. He uses the past tense because, when the letter is read to the Colossians, his sending of Tychicus will be in the past. If your language would not use the past tense here, you could use whatever tense would customarily be used in this situation in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I send” or “whom I have sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 COL	4	8	eei1	figs-doublet	ὑμᾶς εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, ἵνα	1	the things concerning us	It may seem that the phrase **for this very {reason}** contains redundant information in your language, since Paul also includes **so that**. If both of these phrases would be redundant in your language, you could use a single purpose phrase, such as **so that**. Alternate translation: “you so that” or “you in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-COL	4	8	iv0m	translate-textvariants	ἵνα γνῶτε τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	he might encourage your hearts	While many manuscripts have **so that you might know the {things} concerning us**, some say “so that he might know the things concerning you.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the phrase it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-COL	4	8	fr1z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα…καὶ	1	he might encourage your hearts	The words **so that** and **and {that}** introduce two of Paul’s purposes in sending Tychicus to the Colossians. If **so that** and **and {that}** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to introduce a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-COL	4	8	cty1	figs-idiom	τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	the things concerning us	Just like the phrase “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md), the phrase **the {things} concerning us** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the news about us” or “the details about how we are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	4	8	iv0m	translate-textvariants	ἵνα γνῶτε τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	he might encourage your hearts	While many manuscripts have **so that you might know the things concerning us**, some say “so that he might know the things concerning you.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the phrase it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+COL	4	8	fr1z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα…καὶ	1	he might encourage your hearts	The words **so that** and **and that** introduce two of Paul’s purposes in sending Tychicus to the Colossians. If **so that** and **and that** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to introduce a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+COL	4	8	cty1	figs-idiom	τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	the things concerning us	Just like the phrase “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md), the phrase **the things concerning us** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the news about us” or “the details about how we are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	4	8	vyq5	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	the things concerning us	The word **us** does not include the Colossians. Instead, Paul is referring to himself and those who are with him, including Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	4	8	rw4z	figs-synecdoche	τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	the things concerning us	Here when Paul refers to **your hearts**, the Colossians would have understood him to mean the entire person. Paul uses **hearts** because his culture identified **hearts** as the body part where people experienced encouragement. If that meaning of **your hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the location where people experience encouragement in your culture, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “your souls” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
 COL	4	9	f18w	figs-explicit	σὺν Ὀνησίμῳ	1	the faithful and beloved brother	Paul uses this phrase to tell the Colossians that he is sending **Onesimus** along with Tychicus to the city of Colossae. If this implication would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit by adding a verb such as “sending.” Alternate translation: “With him I send Onesimus” (start a new sentence with “they will make”) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	4	9	yqh9	translate-names	Ὀνησίμῳ	1	the faithful and beloved brother	**Onesimus** is the name of a man. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
 COL	4	9	aqe3	figs-idiom	ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	the faithful and beloved brother	The phrase **from among you** means that Onesimus used to live with the Colossians and was part of the group to whom Paul is writing the letter. To express this idea, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a person belongs to a specific group of people. Alternate translation: “is from your town” or “used to live with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	4	9	n15d	writing-pronouns	γνωρίσουσιν	1	they will make known to you	The pronoun **they** refers back to Onesimus and Tychicus. If what **they** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit by using their names or referring to “two” of them. Alternate translation: “the two of them will make known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-COL	4	9	vb7j	figs-idiom	πάντα…τὰ ὧδε	1	all the things here	Just like the phrases “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md) and “the {things} concerning us” in [4:8](../04/08.md), the phrase **all the {things} here** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “all the news about us” or “all the details about what is happening here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	4	9	vb7j	figs-idiom	πάντα…τὰ ὧδε	1	all the things here	Just like the phrases “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md) and “the things concerning us” in [4:8](../04/08.md), the phrase **all the things here** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “all the news about us” or “all the details about what is happening here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	4	10	wmf4	translate-names	Ἀρίσταρχος…Μᾶρκος…Βαρναβᾶ	1	Aristarchus	**Aristarchus**, **Mark**, and **Barnabas** are all names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	4	10	lcxt		ἀσπάζεται	1	Aristarchus	As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “asks to be remembered to” or “says hello to”
 COL	4	10	v0le	translate-unknown	ὁ συναιχμάλωτός μου	1	Aristarchus	The phrase **my fellow prisoner** identifies Aristarchus as someone who is in prison along with Paul. If **fellow prisoner** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this with a short phrase instead. Alternate translation: “who has been imprisoned with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -551,7 +549,7 @@ COL	4	12	rq61	figs-idiom	ὁ ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	He is from among you	The phrase
 COL	4	12	ek51	figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1	a servant of Christ Jesus	Here, **always** is an exaggeration that the Colossians would have understood to mean that Epaphras prays for them very often. If **always** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “frequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 COL	4	12	p8ff	figs-metaphor	ἀγωνιζόμενος ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	always striving on behalf of you in prayers	The word **striving** is usually used for attempting to win a contest, whether that is athletic, military, or legal. While Epaphras is not actually participating in an athletic or military contest, Paul uses the metaphor to explain how earnestly Epaphras prays for the Colossians. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “praying zealously for you” or “spending much effort on his prayers for you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 COL	4	12	sn23	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	you may stand complete and fully assured	The phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the content of Epaphras’ prayers. Alternate translation: “asking that” (2) the purpose or goal of Epaphras’ prayers. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-COL	4	12	nuh9	figs-metaphor	σταθῆτε τέλειοι καὶ πεπληροφορημένοι ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	you may stand complete and fully assured	Here Paul speaks as if the Colossians can **stand complete and fully assured in all {the} will of God**. By this, he means that they should consistently do God’s will, just as if God’s will served as a foundation underneath them. The words **complete and fully assured** explain the way in which they are supposed to **stand** or continue to obey. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you may be complete and fully assured as you consistently do all the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	4	12	nuh9	figs-metaphor	σταθῆτε τέλειοι καὶ πεπληροφορημένοι ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	you may stand complete and fully assured	Here Paul speaks as if the Colossians can **stand complete and fully assured in all the will of God**. By this, he means that they should consistently do God’s will, just as if God’s will served as a foundation underneath them. The words **complete and fully assured** explain the way in which they are supposed to **stand** or continue to obey. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you may be complete and fully assured as you consistently do all the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	4	12	t6o3	translate-unknown	τέλειοι	1	you may stand complete and fully assured	The word **complete** in this context means that a person is what he or she is supposed to be and is able to do what he or she is called to do. If **complete** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that has this meaning, such as “perfect” or “excellent,” or translate **complete** with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “fit for what God has called you to be” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown)
 COL	4	12	ojtu	translate-unknown	πεπληροφορημένοι	1	you may stand complete and fully assured	The phrase **fully assured** describes people who are confident or sure of what they believe and do. If **fully assured** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “convinced about what you know” or “without doubts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	4	12	s7e7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	you may stand complete and fully assured	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “wants” or “desires.” Alternate translation: “in whatever God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -560,7 +558,7 @@ COL	4	13	k8vv	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πολὺν πόνον	1	I testify fo
 COL	4	13	zzc8	figs-ellipsis	τῶν ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ, καὶ τῶν ἐν Ἱεραπόλει	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	Here Paul leaves out to whom the pronoun **the ones** refers, since in his language it was clear that **the ones** refers to people who live in the cities he mentions. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **the ones** refers to believers who live in these two towns. Alternate translation: “of believers who live in Laodicea, and of believers who live in Hierapolis” or “of believers who live in Laodicea and Hierapolis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 COL	4	13	d0et	figs-explicit	Λαοδικίᾳ…Ἱεραπόλει	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	**Laodicea** and **Hierapolis** were towns near Colossae. In fact, they were all in the same valley. If it would be helpful to your readers to clarify that these are nearby towns, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “nearby Laodicea … nearby Hierapolis” or “Laodicea … Hierapolis, churches near you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	4	14	v0ho		ἀσπάζεται	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “asks to be remembered to” or “says hello to”
-COL	4	14	hq1k	translate-names	Λουκᾶς…Δημᾶς	1	Demas	**Luke** and **Demas** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+COL	4	14	hq1k	translate-names	Λουκᾶς…Δημᾶς	1	Demas	**Demas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	4	14	bv7b	figs-ellipsis	ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς Λουκᾶς, ὁ ἰατρὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς, καὶ Δημᾶς.	1	Demas	Paul has not included the verb “greet” with **and also Demas,** because it was unnecessary in his language. If including “greet” is necessary in your language, you could (1) move **and also Demas** before **greets you**. Alternate translation: “Luke the beloved physician and also Demas greet you” (2) include it with the phrase **and also Demas**. Alternate translation: “Luke the beloved physician greets you, and also Demas greets you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 COL	4	15	xi2b		ἀσπάσασθε	1	the brothers	As was customary in this culture, Paul not only extends greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing (as he has done in [4:10–14](../04/10.md)). He also asks the Colossians to extend greetings for him to other people that both he and the Colossians know. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “Remember me to” or “Say hello for me to”
 COL	4	15	sc5g	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς…ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	The word **brothers** does not refer to only male people. Instead, it refers to both men and women who are part of the group of believers. If **brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word that does not refer to natural gender or you could use both male and female genders. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -576,7 +574,7 @@ COL	4	17	yy8s	figs-quotations	βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν ἣν παρ
 COL	4	17	d39x	figs-yousingular	εἴπατε Ἀρχίππῳ, βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν ἣν παρέλαβες ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἵνα αὐτὴν πληροῖς.	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	The words **Look**, **you have received**, and **you may fulfill** all refer to Archippus alone and are singular. However, the word **say** refers to the Colossians and is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 COL	4	17	dy11	figs-metaphor	βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Here Paul speaks as if Archippus’ **ministry** were something he can **look to**. By this, he means that he wants Archippus to focus on carrying out his ministry just as if it were something he could stare at. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “Focus on the ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	4	17	dau6	figs-extrainfo	τὴν διακονίαν…παρέλαβες	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Paul does not clarify or even hint at what **the ministry** is or from whom Archippus **received** it. If it is possible, leave this information unclear in your translation. If you must include some extra information, you could clarify that “God” gave him the **ministry** of serving the church. Alternate translation: “the task of serving the church … God gave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-COL	4	17	uble	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe the union of Archippus with Christ. In this case, being **in {the} Lord** or united to the Lord identifies the situation in which he **received** his **ministry**. He received this **ministry** when he was united to **{the} Lord**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	4	17	uble	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of Archippus with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord** or united to the Lord identifies the situation in which he **received** his **ministry**. He received this **ministry** when he was united to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	4	17	ufdy	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	The phrase **so that** introduces a goal or purpose. Here, it is the purpose for which Archippus should **look to** or stay focused on his ministry. Use a word or phrase that introduces the goal or purpose of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 COL	4	18	t5js		ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ	1	Remember my chains	Paul concludes his letter by writing a final greeting to the Colossians. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “I ask to be remembered by my own hand” or “I say hello by my own hand”
 COL	4	18	fqek	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ	1	Remember my chains	In this culture, it was normal for a scribe to write down what the author of the letter was saying. Paul here indicates that he himself is writing these last words. The phrase **by my {own} hand** means that it was his own hand that took up the pen and wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **by my {own} hand**by using a comparable expression or include any extra information needed to make it clear. Alternate translation: “is in my handwriting” or “I write myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

en_tn_53-1TH.tsv

@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	7	bnp2	figs-idiom	ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν	1		Paul uses the idiom **in the midst of you** that means “spending time” or “visiting”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “while visiting you” or “while spending time with you” or “when we were with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	2	7	ag1l	figs-simile	ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα	1	as if a mother might comfort her own children	The point of this comparison is that in the same way a **mother** would gently **comfort** her **children**, so the apostles gently and affectionately nurtured the Thessalonian church (See [2:8](../02/08.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as we affectionately cared for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1TH	2	8	r8b4	figs-abstractnouns	οὕτως ὁμειρόμενοι ὑμῶν	1	Having affection for you in this manner	If your language does not use the abstract noun **affection**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “Because we desire you so much” or “Since we yearn for you like this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TH	2	8	q86v	figs-metaphor	τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς	1	we were pleased to impart to you not only the gospel of God but also our own souls	Paul uses **{our} own souls** to speak of the apostles’ bodies or their life. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our own selves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	2	8	q86v	figs-metaphor	τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς	1	we were pleased to impart to you not only the gospel of God but also our own souls	Paul uses **our own souls** to speak of the apostles’ bodies or their life. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our own selves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	9	v837	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here the connecting word **For** emphasizes that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to. Alternate translation: “Certainly,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	2	9	exw6	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TH	2	9	tc98	figs-doublet	τὸν κόπον ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν μόχθον	1	our labor and toil	Here, **labor** and **toil** mean basically the same thing. The repetition emphasizes how hard the apostles worked. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases or make them active. Alternate translation: “our toilsome labor” or “how hard we worked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -131,15 +131,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	12	udek	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν	1		Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live.” If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to habitually live” or “for you to continue to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	12	v9ph	figs-distinguish	τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς	1		This phrase gives us further information about God and describes what he is doing through the apostles’ teachings. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “he is the one who continues to summon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	2	12	b0by	figs-parallelism	τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **the one calling you** is a parallelism that equates the apostles’ **exhorting**, **encouraging**, and **testifying** with God’s **calling**. See also [2:13](../02/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1TH	2	12	vbd2	figs-hendiadys	εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν	1		This phrase, **into {his} own kingdom and glory**, expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **glory** describes what the **kingdom** is like. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+1TH	2	12	vbd2	figs-hendiadys	εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν	1		This phrase, **into his own kingdom and glory**, expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **glory** describes what the **kingdom** is like. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TH	2	13	au3b	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἡμεῖς εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ ἀδιαλείπτως	1	General Information:	The phrase **And because of this** indicates that what follows are the reasons why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, as in the UST, to make this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	2	13	zja7	figs-hyperbole	καὶ ἡμεῖς εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ ἀδιαλείπτως	1		This phrase uses exaggeration to emphasize the apostles’ gratitude (See also [1:2](../01/02.md)). Here, **constantly** does not mean “every moment.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows intense gratitude. Alternate translation: “We ourselves habitually thank” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1TH	2	13	ruy0		ἡμεῖς	1		Here Paul uses the word **we** to emphasize how thankful the apostles are. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we personally” or “we ourselves”
 1TH	2	13	ei3j	figs-distinguish	ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε	1	General Information:	This clause explains why the apostles are thankful. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. See UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-1TH	2	13	i39s	figs-events	ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε	1	General Information:	Paul is stressing that it is **{the} word of God** that the apostles reported. This is why he first mentions that the Thessalonians **received {the} word of God** before mentioning that they **heard** it. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “that when we told you God’s message, you heard it, and then you accepted it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
+1TH	2	13	i39s	figs-events	ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε	1	General Information:	Paul is stressing that it is **the word of God** that the apostles reported. This is why he first mentions that the Thessalonians **received the word of God** before mentioning that they **heard** it. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “that when we told you God’s message, you heard it, and then you accepted it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 1TH	2	13	dr6q	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Here, **that** marks the reasons in [2:13–14](../02/13.md) for why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why people should do things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	2	13	zj5f	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ καθὼς ἀληθῶς ἐστὶν	1	not as the word of man	Paul uses this contrasting clause to strongly negate the idea that the apostles’ message is of human origin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing an emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but in fact what it really is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1TH	2	13	f6ta	figs-metonymy	λόγον ἀνθρώπων…λόγον Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses the phrase **{the} word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **{the} word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **{the} word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8–9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1TH	2	13	f6ta	figs-metonymy	λόγον ἀνθρώπων…λόγον Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses the phrase **the word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8–9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	2	13	ci1e	figs-personification	ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται ἐν ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1	which is also working in you who believe	The apostles refer to God’s gospel message as if it were a person or tool doing work. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and God is energizing you faithful ones with this message” or “and God is activating this message among you who trust in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1TH	2	13	z89g	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1	which is also working in you who believe	Here, the word translated **which** could refer to **God** or **the word**. Alternate translation: “and God” or “and God’s word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1TH	2	13	x7oi	figs-yousingular	ἐν ὑμῖν	1		Here, the pronoun **you** is plural and refers to all the believers in God at Thessalonica (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	17	edb1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἡμεῖς δέ, ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	The phrase **But we, brothers** expresses that this is a contrasting phrase that switches the attention back to the apostles’ relationship with the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TH	2	17	m5sf	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TH	2	17	yhhy	figs-explicit	ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφ’ ὑμῶν	1		Since the Greek word that ULT translates as **having been separated from you** can also mean “having been orphaned from you,” Paul may be revisiting the idea where the apostles affectionately compare themselves to “little children” in [2:7](../02/07.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since we have been apart from you, we feel like orphans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1TH	2	17	lmpu	figs-idiom	πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας	1		Here, **for {the} time of an hour** is an idiom that indicates a short time span. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for short time” or “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1TH	2	17	lmpu	figs-idiom	πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας	1		Here, **for the time of an hour** is an idiom that indicates a short time span. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for short time” or “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	2	17	vr7v	figs-metonymy	προσώπῳ οὐ καρδίᾳ	1	by face, not in heart	Here, **face** represents the person or physical presence, and **heart** represents the apostles’ concerns, feelings, and affections. Though the apostles were not physically present in Thessalonica, they continued to care about and show concern for their relationship with the church there. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “by distance, not in feeling” or “in person, not in affection” or “in presence, not in concern” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	2	17	yxzu	figs-parallelism	τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ	1	to see your faces	Here, **to see your face, in much desire** means the same thing as **by face, not in heart**. Paul says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show how much the apostles desire to visit the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1TH	2	17	jgi2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ	1	to see your faces	If your language does not use the abstract noun **desire**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. It can also be translated as an active phrase. Alternate translation: “for which we long passionately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	3	8	y1vb	figs-hyperbole	ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν	1	we live	Here, **For now we live** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how thankful he is that the Thessalonians **stand firm** in the Christian faith (See [3:7](../03/07.md)). Paul is not trying to say that he was dead. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows thankfulness. Alternate translation (replace the comma): “O how we are now refreshed!” or “O how we now feel alive!” or “Certainly now we thrive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1TH	3	8	x4zn	figs-idiom	ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Here, the term **stand firm** is an idiom meaning “remain faithful.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when you remain faithful to the Lord” or “if you continue unwavering in your relationship with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	3	8	zbyo	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-1TH	3	8	hk91	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though they were occupying space inside the Lord Jesus. Here, this metaphor, **in {the} Lord**, could express these ideas: (1) devotion to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are really devoted to the Lord Jesus” (2) relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are truly standing firm in your relationship with the Lord Jesus” (3) union with Jesus. Alternate translation: “all of you are firmly united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	3	8	hk91	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though they were occupying space inside the Lord Jesus. Here, this metaphor, **in the Lord**, could express these ideas: (1) devotion to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are really devoted to the Lord Jesus” (2) relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are truly standing firm in your relationship with the Lord Jesus” (3) union with Jesus. Alternate translation: “all of you are firmly united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	3	8	e3pe	figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize his joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternative translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1TH	3	9	pzq7	figs-rquestion	τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν.	1	For what thanks are we able to give back to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you,	Paul is using a rhetorical question that continues to the end of [3:10](../03/10.md) in order to emphasize the apostles’ thankful joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not possibly thank God enough for what he has done for you! When we pray to our God, we greatly rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1TH	3	9	pdc5	figs-metaphor	τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν	1	before our God	With the phrase **give back**, Paul speaks of the apostles as if they owe God a debt for the sake of the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Paul means that the apostles cannot adequately express how thankful they are. If your readers would not understand what it means to **give back** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because, how could we possibly show how grateful we are to God for you” or “Indeed, what kind of thanksgiving for you could we give to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	intro	b1z5			0		# 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 4<br><br>1. Apostolic Teachings on Holiness (4:1–8)<br>2. Apostolic Teachings on Christian Love (4:9–12)<br>* Reminder (4:9–10)<br>* Keep Busy (4:11–12)<br>3. Apostolic Teachings on the Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)<br><br>## “We” and “You”<br><br>In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Christian love<br><br>The apostles address the topic of Christian love that the Thessalonian church had previously asked about. The apostles encouraged the church that they were already loving well, and they should continue to grow in this practice. The apostles also link “brotherly love” to living in harmony with each other and minding their own business, so that they would be a good example to non-Christians (See [4:11–12](../04/11.md)).<br><br>### Dying before the Second Coming of Christ<br><br>The Thessalonian church was concerned about what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They were anxious to know whether or not those who died before Christ returned would be part of the Kingdom of God. Paul addresses that concern in [4:13–5:11](../04/13.md).<br><br>### The manner of the Second Coming of Christ<br><br>In [4:13–18](../04/13.md), the apostles teach about the events related to the Second Coming of Christ (called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md)). This is so that the Thessalonians can “comfort one another with these words” (See [4:18](../04/18.md)).<br><br>## Important Translation Issues in this Chapter<br><br>### Sexual immorality<br><br>Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate these sensitive issues.<br><br>### The Second Coming of Christ and the Day of the Lord<br><br>All Christians believe that Jesus will return to earth to judge all people and to rule forever. As the Nicene Creed (381 A.D.) states: “I await the resurrection of the dead and the life of the age to come.” Christ came once as Incarnate God and will return once as Resurrected Judge. However, there are various ways that Christians understand the “coming of the Lord” as explained in [4:13–5:11](../04/13.md), and the “day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). Some believe they are one and the same event, but others believe them to be two separate events. Your translation should state clearly only what is clear in these verses without promoting any particular interpretation.
 1TH	4	1	vtas	grammar-connect-words-phrases	λοιπὸν οὖν	1	brothers	Here, **So finally** could refer to: (1) a summary of the apostles’ teachings. Alternate translation: “So, in summary,” (2) the remaining things to address. “So then, here is what remains for us to talk about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	4	1	u2lw	figs-doublet	ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν	1	we beg and exhort you	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how seriously the apostles want the Thessalonian church to follow their teachings. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “we are urging and appealing to you” or “we strongly urge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1TH	4	1	foeh	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	we beg and exhort you	Paul speaks as if the apostles are occupying space inside of **{the} Lord Jesus**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that the apostles represent Jesus himself like ambassadors who possess a king’s authority. If your readers would not understand what **in {the} Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with our authority from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	4	1	foeh	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	we beg and exhort you	Paul speaks as if the apostles are occupying space inside of **the Lord Jesus**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that the apostles represent Jesus himself like ambassadors who possess a king’s authority. If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with our authority from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	4	1	p4db	figs-metaphor	τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν	1	it is necessary for you to walk	Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live” or “to obey” (See [2:12](../02/12.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “about how you must live” or “about how you are obligated to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	4	1	ckii	figs-hendiadys	τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν καὶ ἀρέσκειν Θεῷ (καθὼς καὶ περιπατεῖτε)	1	it is necessary for you to walk	Here, **to walk and to please** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **please** describes how the Thessalonian church should **walk**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “about how you must live to please God (exactly as you live now)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TH	4	1	q937	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα περισσεύητε μᾶλλον	1	it is necessary for you to walk	This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which apostles are begging and exhorting the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you can excel more and more” or “in order that you thrive even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -281,20 +281,20 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	2	vg16	figs-metaphor	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	through the Lord Jesus	Paul speaks of the **commands** that the apostles gave to the Thessalonian church as though **Jesus** personally told them to the apostles. Paul means that **Jesus** made the apostles his messengers, not that **Jesus** is a messenger of the apostles. If your readers would not understand what **through the Lord Jesus** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “through a message from the Lord Jesus” or “by order of the Lord Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	4	3	ycsw	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν,	1	for you to keep from sexual immorality	If your language does not use the abstract nouns **will** and **sanctification**, you can express the ideas behind them in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God desires that you live like those who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TH	4	3	lit4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν	1	for you to keep from sexual immorality	Here, **For this is** indicates that this is the beginning of a section about the content of the commands from the Lord Jesus in [4:2](../04/02.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate the beginning of new topic. Alternate translation: “Now, this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1TH	4	3	vnp0	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	for you to keep from sexual immorality	Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that emphasizes what **is {the} will of God**. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+1TH	4	3	vnp0	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	for you to keep from sexual immorality	Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that emphasizes what **is the will of God**. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 1TH	4	3	mw4j		τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν	1	For this is the will of God, your sanctification	Here begins a list spanning through [4:3–8](../04/03.md) that explains what **sanctification** means in this context. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the beginning of a topic.
 1TH	4	3	lgac	figs-distinguish	ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας	1	for you to keep from sexual immorality	This phrase gives us further information about what is meant by **sanctification**. Paul is defining the **sanctification** God wants for his people by forbidding **sexually immorality**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	4	3	lhxi	figs-imperative	ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς	1	for you to keep from sexual immorality	The following list of verb forms in [4:3–6](../04/03.md) could be translated as commands (See [4:2](../04/02.md)). Here, the verb forms are likely meant to express a strong suggestion or appeal. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “you yourselves must refrain” or “you should withhold yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1TH	4	4	u98k	figs-distinguish	εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ	1	to know to possess his own vessel	Here Paul gives more instructions about the **sanctification** God wants for his people, by telling the Thessalonian church that every husband needs to treat his wife’s body and his own body **in sanctification and honor**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these verses clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	4	4	vhbp	figs-euphemism	εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ,	1	to know to possess his own vessel	Here, **to know to possess** refers to sexual intimacy. This is a polite way of referring to something private. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God desires that you treat your wives’ bodies like they belong to God and to honor them” or “each of you men must use your own body for God’s holy and honorable purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1TH	4	4	fk6n	figs-nominaladj	ἕκαστον	1	to know to possess his own vessel	Paul is using the adjective **each** as a noun in order to describe a group of men. Here it specifically is used to emphasize that every husband or man must obey this teaching. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “each and every man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1TH	4	4	f4ux	figs-metaphor	τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι	1	to know to possess his own vessel	Here Paul speaks of a person’s body as if it were a container. Here, **to possess {his} own vessel** is a metaphor that compares sexual self-control to a proper use of a container. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. It could refer to: (1) a wife’s body. Alternate translation: “to use his wife’s body” or “to properly care for his own wife” (2) a husband’s own body. Alternate translation: “to control his own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TH	4	4	arkf	figs-possession	τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος	1	to know to possess his own vessel	Paul is using the possessive form **{his} own** to express ownership. Use a natural way in your language to express ownership. Alternate translation: “the wife that belongs to you” or “your very own wife” or “the body that belongs to you”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1TH	4	4	f4ux	figs-metaphor	τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι	1	to know to possess his own vessel	Here Paul speaks of a person’s body as if it were a container. Here, **to possess his own vessel** is a metaphor that compares sexual self-control to a proper use of a container. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. It could refer to: (1) a wife’s body. Alternate translation: “to use his wife’s body” or “to properly care for his own wife” (2) a husband’s own body. Alternate translation: “to control his own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	4	4	arkf	figs-possession	τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος	1	to know to possess his own vessel	Paul is using the possessive form **his own** to express ownership. Use a natural way in your language to express ownership. Alternate translation: “the wife that belongs to you” or “your very own wife” or “the body that belongs to you”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	4	4	ihqe	figs-hendiadys	ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ	1	to know to possess his own vessel	This phrase could express a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **honor** tells how a husband or man must live in **sanctification**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “by honorably setting it apart for God’s purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-1TH	4	5	utvd	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας	1	in the passion of lust	If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **in {the} passion of lust**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “not passionately lusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TH	4	5	y9g2	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας	1	in the passion of lust	Here, **not in {the} passion of lust** contrasts with the previous phrase “in holiness and honor” (See: [4:4](../04/04.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “not passionately lusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1TH	4	5	utvd	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας	1	in the passion of lust	If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **in the passion of lust**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “not passionately lusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1TH	4	5	y9g2	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας	1	in the passion of lust	Here, **not in the passion of lust** contrasts with the previous phrase “in holiness and honor” (See: [4:4](../04/04.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “not passionately lusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TH	4	5	vjej	figs-possession	πάθει ἐπιθυμίας	1	in the passion of lust	Paul is using the possessive phrase **of lust** to describe **passion**. This genitive phrase could refer to: 1) passion characterized by lust. Alternate translation: “lustful passion” 2) the source of the passion. Alternate translation: “passion that comes from lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1TH	4	5	nrmz	figs-distinguish	καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν	1	in the passion of lust	This phrase gives us further information about the those who live **in {the} passion of lust**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “like the nations who remain ignorant of God act” or “exactly like all the people who have no relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+1TH	4	5	nrmz	figs-distinguish	καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν	1	in the passion of lust	This phrase gives us further information about the those who live **in the passion of lust**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “like the nations who remain ignorant of God act” or “exactly like all the people who have no relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	4	5	tz8o	figs-genericnoun	τὰ ἔθνη	1	in the passion of lust	Here, **the Gentiles** refers to all the non-Christian nations in general, not one group of people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase (See your translation at [2:16](../02/16.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1TH	4	5	w03g	figs-distinguish	τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν	1	in the passion of lust	Here, **the ones not knowing God** is meant to give further information about the **Gentiles**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who have no relationship with God” or “who remain ignorant of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	4	6	wmb6	figs-hendiadys	ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν	1	transgress and wrong	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **exploit** describes **transgress** . If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “exploits by transgressing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	10	u3fl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	abound	Here, **But** indicates that what follows are numerous exhortations. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	4	11	h2df	figs-metonymy	καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν καὶ πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, καὶ ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν	1	to strive	Paul is describing peaceful communal living by using this combination of ideas. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others: by living quietly and tending to your own business and focusing on doing your own work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	4	11	d2fg		καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν	1	to strive	These phrases continue the apostles’ exhortations. Here, the phrases translated **and to strive to live quietly** could refer to: (1) phrases that complement each other. Alternate translation: “and to aspire to live quietly” (2) phrases that express separate ideas. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others, to live quietly,” Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this.
-1TH	4	11	j4c7	figs-explicit	πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια	1	to live quietly	Here, **to perform your own {things}** implies that the Thessalonian church should tend to their own concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to tend to your own business” or “to focus on your own tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TH	4	11	j4c7	figs-explicit	πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια	1	to live quietly	Here, **to perform your own things** implies that the Thessalonian church should tend to their own concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to tend to your own business” or “to focus on your own tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	4	11	jmt9	figs-idiom	ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν	1	to perform your own things	Here, **to work with your own hands** is an idiom meaning “earn what you need to live.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to work hard to earn what you need” or “to labor to pay for your expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	4	11	bz8s	figs-distinguish	καθὼς ὑμῖν παρηγγείλαμεν	1	to work with your own hands	This phrase and the following verse signal the end of this larger section of teaching about how to live in Christian community (See [4:1,2](../04/01.md) for the same wording). Here, **just as we commanded** also expresses that what the apostles teach is the same as being “taught by God” (See [4:9](../04/09.md)). If this would not be understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation as a new sentence: “This is what we already commanded you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	4	12	wj25	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	you may walk properly	Here, **so that** could introduce a purpose clause. Paul could be stating the purpose for the apostles’ exhortation in [4:10](../04/10.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -346,9 +346,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	14	kmk2	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως…ὁ Θεὸς	1	rose again	This phrase could refer to: (1) result. Alternate translation: “then God” (2) manner. Alternate translation: “this is the way God” or “this is how God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	4	14	m1fy	figs-possession	καὶ ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ.	1	rose again	Paul is using the possessive form. Here, **through Jesus** could refer to: (1) being united to Jesus’ resurrection power **through** death. Alternate translation: “God will bring back with Jesus those who are united to him in death” (2) those who God will also bring back again **through** Jesus. Alternate translation: “it is through Jesus that God will also bring back the dead people who are with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	4	14	tjqj	figs-explicit	αὐτῷ	1	rose again	Here Paul implies that **him** refers to **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1TH	4	15	vvda	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦτο γὰρ ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου	1	by the word of the Lord	This clause indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to (See also [1:8](../01/08.md) for **{the} word of {the} Lord**). Alternate translation: “Certainly, what we now say to you is the Lord Jesus’ message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1TH	4	15	ni3m	figs-metonymy	ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου	1	by the word of the Lord	The phrase **{the} word of {the} Lord** refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Here, **word** could refer to: (1) the authority of the message. Alternate translation: “because the Lord Jesus authorized our message” (2) the means of the message. Alternate translation: “with a message from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1TH	4	15	gbe1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	Κυρίου, ὅτι ἡμεῖς	1	by the word of the Lord	Here, **that** indicates that the rest of the verse is the content of **{the} word of {the} Lord**. You could indicate this by changing the punctuation or some other natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord: we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1TH	4	15	vvda	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦτο γὰρ ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου	1	by the word of the Lord	This clause indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to (See also [1:8](../01/08.md) for **the word of the Lord**). Alternate translation: “Certainly, what we now say to you is the Lord Jesus’ message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1TH	4	15	ni3m	figs-metonymy	ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου	1	by the word of the Lord	The phrase **the word of the Lord** refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Here, **word** could refer to: (1) the authority of the message. Alternate translation: “because the Lord Jesus authorized our message” (2) the means of the message. Alternate translation: “with a message from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1TH	4	15	gbe1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	Κυρίου, ὅτι ἡμεῖς	1	by the word of the Lord	Here, **that** indicates that the rest of the verse is the content of **the word of the Lord**. You could indicate this by changing the punctuation or some other natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord: we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	4	15	fdwk	figs-exclusive	λέγομεν…ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες	1	by the word of the Lord	When Paul says **we say**, he is speaking of himself, Silvanus, and Timothy, so **we** would be exclusive. However, when Paul says **we who are alive**, since he seems to be referring to all Christians, **we, the ones being alive** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles say … all of us believers in Christ who are still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	4	15	hdlr	figs-distinguish	οἱ περιλειπόμενοι	1	by the word of the Lord	This phrase gives us further information about **we, the ones being alive**. It is not making a distinction between **the ones being left behind** and **we, the ones being alive**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “and survive” or “and remain here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	4	15	b786	figs-idiom	εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	at the coming of the Lord	Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [3:13](../03/13.md) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “until the Lord Jesus returns” or “for the Second Coming of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -370,8 +370,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	17	o7lj	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἀπάντησιν	1	with them	Here, **to meet** is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why living believers **will be caught up together** with “the dead in Christ.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to encounter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1TH	4	17	ukh1	writing-symlanguage	ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα	1	with them	Here, **clouds** and **air** could be considered symbolic language representing God’s presence and the spiritual realm (See Exodus 19; Daniel 7:13–14; Matthew 24; Mark 13; Luke 17; 21; Ephesians 2:2). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to spiritually encounter the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 1TH	4	17	ti69	writing-endofstory	καὶ οὕτως	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	This clause is meant to signal the end of the events related to the Second Coming. You can use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-1TH	4	17	ouvu	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ οὕτως	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	This clause also indicates the result of the meeting with **{the} Lord**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and then” or “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TH	4	17	k6qc	figs-parallelism	σὺν Κυρίῳ	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	Here, **with {the} Lord** parallels **together with them** to express union with Christ as communion with his people. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1TH	4	17	ouvu	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ οὕτως	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	This clause also indicates the result of the meeting with **the Lord**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and then” or “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1TH	4	17	k6qc	figs-parallelism	σὺν Κυρίῳ	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	Here, **with the Lord** parallels **together with them** to express union with Christ as communion with his people. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1TH	4	18	gt91	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε παρακαλεῖτε	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “So then, keep encouraging” or “Because of this, you must comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	4	18	y7zi	figs-imperative	παρακαλεῖτε	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	This is an imperative, but it communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “you should encourage” or “please continue to comfort (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1TH	4	18	aya5	writing-pronouns	ἀλλήλους	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	The pronoun **one another** refers to the Thessalonian church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “each fellow member of your church” or “your fellow Thessalonian believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	5	2	yvg3	figs-simile		0	perfectly well	This verse begins an extended list of contrasting similes that continues through [5:8](../05/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use equivalent comparisons or express these meanings in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1TH	5	2	dqgk	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε	1	perfectly well	The words **For**, **yourselves**, and **perfectly** emphasize how clearly the Thessalonian church should understand when and how the Lord’s Second Coming will happen. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact, it is certain that you recognize accurately” or “You are certainly well aware of this fact” or “Indeed, you know precisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1TH	5	2	mcq9	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	perfectly well	Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church has “no need that anything be written” to them about the timing and manner of the Lord’s Second Coming (See [5:1](../05/01.md)). Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Certainly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TH	5	2	tu9t	figs-idiom	ἡμέρα Κυρίου	1	in this manner—like a thief in the night	Here, **{the} day of {the} Lord** is an idiom that refers to the Old Testament concept of the time of God’s final judgment. The context of this passage makes it clear that **{the} day of {the} Lord** is synonymous with “the coming of the Lord” Jesus in [4:15](../04/15.md). (See also [Acts 2:20](../act/02/20.md); [1 Corinthians 5:5](../1co/05/05.md); [2 Thessalonians 2:2](../2th/02/02.md); [2 Peter 3:10](../2pe/03/10.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation; “the time when the Lord Jesus returns again to earth” or “the time when the Lord Jesus will finally judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1TH	5	2	tu9t	figs-idiom	ἡμέρα Κυρίου	1	in this manner—like a thief in the night	Here, **the day of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to the Old Testament concept of the time of God’s final judgment. The context of this passage makes it clear that **the day of the Lord** is synonymous with “the coming of the Lord” Jesus in [4:15](../04/15.md). (See also [Acts 2:20](../act/02/20.md); [1 Corinthians 5:5](../1co/05/05.md); [2 Thessalonians 2:2](../2th/02/02.md); [2 Peter 3:10](../2pe/03/10.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation; “the time when the Lord Jesus returns again to earth” or “the time when the Lord Jesus will finally judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	5	2	tmj3	figs-simile	ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως ἔρχεται	1	in this manner—like a thief in the night	The point of this comparison is that, just like a thief at night comes unexpectedly, the way Jesus will return is unexpected and the timing of his return is unknown. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is going to come as unexpectedly as a robber at night” or “is going to come so surprisingly–like when a thief breaks in at night” or “is going to happen like this–all of a sudden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1TH	5	3	p1wi	figs-hypo	ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια	1	When they may say	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to express the suddenness of the “the day of the Lord.” Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Whenever they might say, ‘Everything is safe and sound,’” or “At a time when people are saying, ‘All is well,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1TH	5	3	mjvd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	τότε	1	When they may say	Here what follows the word **then** is in contrast to the **Peace and safety** these people expected to last. Instead, **sudden destruction comes** on them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	5	11	sfv4		καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε	1	build up one the other	Here Paul uses the emphatic phrase **just as also you are doing** to encourage the Thessalonian church to continue their practice of mutually supporting each other. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “exactly as you have been doing”
 1TH	5	12	pd47	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	General Information:	Here, **Now** indicates that what follows is the final section of instructions from the apostles. Alternate translation: “Lastly” or “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	5	12	fqh3	figs-distinguish	τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς	1	leading you in the Lord	This clause expresses different functions for the same group of leaders. It is not making a distinction between **the ones laboring among you** and **leading you** and **admonishing you**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “your leaders who are working among you and guiding you in the Lord and training you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-1TH	5	12	f4jv	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	leading you in the Lord	Paul speaks as if the leaders of the church at Thessalonica were occupying space inside of **{the} Lord**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that these men represent Jesus himself in their leadership role in the Thessalonian church (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). If your readers would not understand what **in {the} Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	5	12	f4jv	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	leading you in the Lord	Paul speaks as if the leaders of the church at Thessalonica were occupying space inside of **the Lord**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that these men represent Jesus himself in their leadership role in the Thessalonian church (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	13	jq0o	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν	1	to regard them highly in love because of their work	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because of their work on your behalf, we also ask you to lovingly show them the utmost consideration” or “and since they work so hard for you, we also urge you to show them the highest honor out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	5	13	p6m4	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	to regard them highly in love because of their work	Paul speaks as if the Thessalonian church is occupying space inside of **love**. He is describing how they should show honor to their leaders. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Here, **in love** could refer to: (1) the means of love. Alternate translation: “by loving them” (2) the basis for love. Alternate translation: “on the basis of your love for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	13	rqs8	figs-imperative	εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς	1	to regard them highly in love because of their work	Here is the first of 17 final appeals in [5:13–26](../05/13.md) that the apostles give the Thessalonian church. **Be at peace** is an imperative, but here it could be an urgent request rather than a command. Use a natural way in your language to communicate an appeal or urgent request. Alternate translation: “We urge you to continue to live peacefully with your leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
@@ -458,15 +458,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	5	18	q7gn	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε; τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	for this is the will of God	Here, **for** begins a reason clause. Paul is telling the Thessalonian church the reason why they should “rejoice,” “pray,” and **give thanks** in [5:16–18](../05/16.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Give thanks in everything, because all these things are what God desires for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “Because this is God’s will for you who are united to Christ Jesus, you must give thanks in everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	5	18	l3sk	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ	1	for this is the will of God	Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that could refer to: (1) all the commands in [5:14–18](../05/14.md) Alternate translation: “because all these things are what God desires” (2) **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “for in fact, this is God’s will” or “for certainly, this thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 1TH	5	18	yu36	figs-ellipsis	τοῦτο	1	for this is the will of God	A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1TH	5	18	sw8b	figs-abstractnouns	θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	for this is the will of God	If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **{the} will of God in Christ Jesus for you**, you can express the idea it in another way. Alternate translation: “how God desires people to live who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TH	5	18	mbz1	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	for this is the will of God	Here, Paul speaks of **{the} will of God** as though it were occupying space inside **Christ Jesus**. This metaphor means that the way God desires his people to live is inseparable from being united to **Christ Jesus** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “for those of you who are united to Jesus Christ” or “for all of you who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	5	18	sw8b	figs-abstractnouns	θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	for this is the will of God	If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **the will of God in Christ Jesus for you**, you can express the idea it in another way. Alternate translation: “how God desires people to live who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1TH	5	18	mbz1	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	for this is the will of God	Here, Paul speaks of **the will of God** as though it were occupying space inside **Christ Jesus**. This metaphor means that the way God desires his people to live is inseparable from being united to **Christ Jesus** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “for those of you who are united to Jesus Christ” or “for all of you who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	19	j1ei	figs-metaphor	τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε	1	Do not quench the Spirit	Paul speaks of **the** Holy **Spirit** as if he is fire that can be extinguished. Paul means that the Thessalonian church must not hinder the work of the Holy **Spirit**, especially by despising prophecies (See [5:20](../05/20.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **quench** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not extinguish the Spirit” or “Do not reject the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	19	sv8r	figs-litotes	μὴ σβέννυτε	1	Do not quench the Spirit	Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Continue to kindle” or “Be fervent in” or “Keep working along with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 1TH	5	20	iv1n	figs-litotes	μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε	1	Do not despise prophecies	Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Readily accept” or “Cherish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 1TH	5	20	rrza	figs-parallelism	προφητείας μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε	1	Do not despise prophecies	The two phrases in [5:19–20](../05/19.md) could refer to the same thing. Paul could be saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to correct how the Thessalonian church viewed prophecy. He means that the Holy Spirit is the source of true prophecy (See [2 Peter 1:21](2pet/01/21.md)), so they should not “quench the Spirit” by rejecting all prophecies. You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Do not continue to despise prophetic messages from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1TH	5	21	ihzh	figs-metaphor	πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε	1	Test all things	This could mean: (1) Paul is beginning a general list of things that the Thessalonians should **Test** and **Hold fast** if they are **good**. (2) Paul is continuing to refer to the prophesies in the previous verse, and he wants the Thessalonians to **Test** those and **Hold fast** to the prophesies that are truly from God.
-1TH	5	21	wx69	figs-metaphor	πάντα δοκιμάζετε	1	Test all things	Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians could make **all {things}** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TH	5	21	sjh0	figs-nominaladj	πάντα	1	Test all things	Here, **all {things}** is an adjectival phrase. Depending on whether you decided this is a new list or a continuation of verse 20, this could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “everything you hear and do” (2) Alternate translation: “all prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1TH	5	21	wx69	figs-metaphor	πάντα δοκιμάζετε	1	Test all things	Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians could make **all things** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	5	21	sjh0	figs-nominaladj	πάντα	1	Test all things	Here, **all things** is an adjectival phrase. Depending on whether you decided this is a new list or a continuation of verse 20, this could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “everything you hear and do” (2) Alternate translation: “all prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1TH	5	21	n1jv	figs-metaphor	τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε	1	Test all things	Paul speaks of **good** things as if they were objects that someone could hold tightly in his hands. He means that the Thessalonian church should only believe and practice things that prove to be from the Holy Spirit. If your readers would not understand what it means to **hold fast to what {is} good** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Keep only the valid things” or “Retain what is from the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	21	jska	figs-ellipsis	τὸ καλὸν	1	Test all things	A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TH	5	22	z9k0	figs-personification	παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ	1	Test all things	Here, **evil** is spoken of as though it were a person who could be seen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “anything clearly wicked” or “all that is obviously evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])

en_tn_54-2TH.tsv

@@ -38,9 +38,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	8	dkkx	figs-possession	τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, Paul is using the general possessive form **of our Lord Jesus** to describe **the gospel**. The specific meaning here is that the gospel is about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the gospel that is about our Lord Jesus” or “the gospel message that tells us about our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2TH	1	9	plw5	writing-pronouns	οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν	1	who will pay the penalty—eternal destruction	Here, **who** refers to the people who are not obeying the gospel, not to the Lord Jesus. You may prefer to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those people will pay the penalty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2TH	1	9	peog	figs-abstractnouns	οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the word **penalty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who will be punished by God” or “whom God will punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TH	1	9	ebf1	figs-idiom	δίκην τίσουσιν	1		Here, the phrase **pay {the} penalty** is an idiom meaning to suffer the consequences of doing something bad. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will suffer the consequences” or “will undergo the retribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2TH	1	9	ebf1	figs-idiom	δίκην τίσουσιν	1		Here, the phrase **pay the penalty** is an idiom meaning to suffer the consequences of doing something bad. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will suffer the consequences” or “will undergo the retribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TH	1	9	yruv	figs-abstractnouns	ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον	1		Here, **eternal destruction** further describes the **penalty** that people will experience if they refuse to “obey the gospel.” The **destruction** that these people will experience is **eternal**, that is, it never ends. Therefore, do not translate with the meaning that these people will cease to exist. They will continue to exist, but continually experience the ruin of their lives. If necessary, put this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “God will punish them eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TH	1	9	qhta	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here, **{the} face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2TH	1	9	qhta	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here, **the face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TH	1	9	htqg	figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the possessive form is describing **power** that has **glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “glorious” to describe the **power**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2TH	1	9	wmdm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “experiencing how magnificent and powerful he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	1	10	ugk9	figs-explicit	ὅταν ἔλθῃ…ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ	1	when he comes on that day	Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -59,14 +59,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	12	pg2i	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ	1	and you in him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus might glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	1	12	l4l1	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ	1		The phrase **and you in him** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make a complete sentence by supplying these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that you might be glorified in him” or “and so that he might glorify you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
 2TH	1	12	z8k9	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	according to the grace of our God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TH	1	12	z1my		τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		The phrase translated as **our God and {the} Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
+2TH	1	12	z1my		τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
 2TH	2	intro	jq9r			0		# 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Man of lawlessness<br><br>This person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satan’s evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])<br><br>### Sits in the temple of God<br><br>Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	2	1	r36t	checking/headings		0	General Information:	In verses 1–12, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 2TH	2	1	q1uq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 2TH	2	1	uy4z	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1		The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 2TH	2	1	sx2f	figs-activepassive	ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1		If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	1	cvg5	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-2TH	2	2	b8b2	figs-doublenegatives	εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς	1	for you not to be quickly shaken in your mind nor to be troubled	The phrase **shaken in {your} mind** refers to a person’s thoughts being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “for you to remain firm in your thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+2TH	2	2	b8b2	figs-doublenegatives	εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς	1	for you not to be quickly shaken in your mind nor to be troubled	The phrase **shaken in your mind** refers to a person’s thoughts being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “for you to remain firm in your thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 2TH	2	2	fj52	figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι	1		The phrase **to be troubled** refers to a person’s emotions being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “and remain peaceful when a message comes” or “and keep calm when you hear something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 2TH	2	2	d334	figs-ellipsis	μήτε διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν	1	by a spirit, nor by a word, nor by a letter as if from us	Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “when you receive a message either by means of a spirit or by means of a spoken word or by means of a written letter that pretends to be coming from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2TH	2	2	ll80	figs-ellipsis	ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν	1		Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that claims to have come from us” or “trying to deceive you that it is from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	4	sk8t	figs-pastforfuture	αὐτὸν…καθίσαι	1		Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 2TH	2	4	wj33		ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός	1	showing that he himself is God	Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he himself is God”
 2TH	2	5	rsz1	figs-rquestion	οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν	1	Do you not remember … these things?	Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-2TH	2	5	lkk7	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these {things}** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2TH	2	5	lkk7	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2TH	2	6	hph0		καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε	1		There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **the one restraining {him}**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him”
 2TH	2	6	ask4	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ	1	he is revealed in his time	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	7	faa5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	13	l7a8	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth	Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers were **firstfruits**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “to be some of the first people whom God was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	2	13	bpqn	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας	1	as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth	If it would be clearer in your language, you could change the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth** into verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	2	14	e0gy	figs-ellipsis	διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἡμῶν	1		Here, the phrase **through our gospel** does not mean that the gospel belongs to Paul and his companions. It refers to the gospel about Jesus that Paul and his companions preached. Alternate translation: “through the gospel that we preached to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-2TH	2	14	thmh	figs-explicit	εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		The phrase **to {the} acquiring of {the} glory of our Lord Jesus Christ** does not mean that we will take over or divide up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christ’s glory. Alternate translation: “so that you might share in the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “in order that you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TH	2	14	thmh	figs-explicit	εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		The phrase **to the acquiring of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ** does not mean that we will take over or divide up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christ’s glory. Alternate translation: “so that you might share in the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “in order that you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	2	14	pke7	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “so that you might become glorious like our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	2	15	holv	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα οὖν	1		The words **So then** connect this verse with verses 13 and 14 as their logical conclusion. Because God did the wonderful things in those verses, the Thessalonians should do what verse 15 says. Use a natural way to introduce a conclusion in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because God did all of that for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2TH	2	15	pa9j	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

en_tn_55-1TI.tsv

@@ -12,7 +12,6 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	1	3	k4tm		καθὼς παρεκάλεσά σε	1	As I urged you	Alternate translation: “As I told you”
 1TI	1	3	k35a	figs-yousingular	σε	1	you	In this letter, with one exception, the words **you**, “your,” and “yourself” refer to Timothy and so are singular. A note will discuss the one exception in [6:21](../06/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1TI	1	3	amp4		προσμεῖναι ἐν Ἐφέσῳ	1	remain in Ephesus	Alternate translation: “wait for me there in the city of Ephesus”
-1TI	1	3	t112	translate-names	Ἐφέσῳ	1	Ephesus	**Ephesus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1TI	1	3	t113		τισὶν	1	certain ones	Alternate translation: “certain people”
 1TI	1	3	v4g2	figs-explicit	ἑτεροδιδασκαλεῖν	1	teach differently	The implication is that these people were not teaching in a different way, but teaching different things than what Paul and Timothy taught. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a different doctrine from what we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	1	4	pw2h		μύθοις	1	fables	These **myths** were fanciful stories of some kind, perhaps about the supposed exploits of various spiritual beings. But since we no longer know exactly what these stories were about, it would probably be best to use a general term for them. Alternate translation: “made-up stories”
@@ -23,7 +22,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	1	4	p2sr	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐν πίστει	1	which is by faith	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the word **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translations: “which we learn by believing in God” or “which we do by trusting in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	1	5	myi5		δὲ	1	Now	Paul here uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help Timothy understand the purpose of what he is commanding him. You can translate it with a word or phrase in your language that introduces background information.
 1TI	1	5	iwnk	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τὸ δὲ τέλος τῆς παραγγελίας ἐστὶν	1	Now the goal of this command is	Here Paul is expressing to Timothy the **goal** or the outcome that he desires from the commands that Paul gave him. Alternate translation: “I am commanding these things in order to get this result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-1TI	1	5	l7un		τῆς παραγγελίας	1	command	Here, **{this} command** refers to the instructions that Paul has given Timothy in [1:3](../01/03.md) and [1:4](../01/04.md).
+1TI	1	5	l7un		τῆς παραγγελίας	1	command	Here, **this command** refers to the instructions that Paul has given Timothy in [1:3](../01/03.md) and [1:4](../01/04.md).
 1TI	1	5	i9rs	figs-explicit	ἐστὶν ἀγάπη	1	is love	That God’s people would show **love** is the goal of the command. If it is necessary to include the object of “love,” you could state “each other” or “others.” This may also include love for God. Alternate translation: “is that God’s people would love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	1	5	t123	figs-metaphor	ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας	1	from a pure heart	Here the **heart** represents a person’s thoughts and inclinations. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	5	mbe6	figs-metonymy	ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας	1	from a pure heart	Here, **pure** indicates that the person wants only good things and does not have mixed motives that also include some bad ones. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -109,7 +108,6 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	2	7	yllf		ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	I am speaking the truth in Christ, I am not lying	In order to emphasize what he is saying, Paul says the same thing twice, first positively and then negatively. If this is confusing in your language, you can express this once. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the truth as a follower of Christ”
 1TI	2	7	h18q		διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	a teacher of the nations in faith and truth	Here, **faith and truth** could mean: (1) the content of what Paul teaches. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles the message of faith and truth” (2) Paul’s character as a teacher. Alternate translation: “a true and faithful teacher of the Gentiles”
 1TI	2	7	t201	figs-hendiadys	διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	a teacher of the nations in faith and truth	If this phrase has the second meaning that the previous note discusses, Paul may be using the two terms **faith** and **truth** together to express one idea. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles about the true faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-1TI	2	7	t202	translate-names	ἐθνῶν	1	the Gentiles	This word **Gentiles** is the name for people groups that are not Jewish. Alternate translation: “of non-Jewish people groups” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1TI	2	8	a841	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1	the men in every place	Here the word **men** refers specifically to males. The term is not generic, since Paul addresses women next. Alternate translations: “the males in all places” or “men everywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TI	2	8	unw6	translate-symaction	ἐπαίροντας ὁσίους χεῖρας	1	to pray, lifting up holy hands	It was the customary posture in this culture for people to raise their **hands** while praying. You could translate this in a way that would make that clear. Alternate translation: “reverently lifting up their hands in the customary way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 1TI	2	8	yzg3	figs-synecdoche	προσεύχεσθαι…ἐπαίροντας ὁσίους χεῖρας	1	to pray, lifting up holy hands	Paul describes one part of the person, the **hands**, as holy to indicate that the entire person is to be holy. Alternate translation: “to lift up their hands to pray in holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -177,7 +175,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	3	14	zzzu	figs-go	ἐλθεῖν	1	to come	In some languages it is more natural to say “go” here, rather than **come**. Alternate translation: “to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1TI	3	15	z9z8		ἐὰν δὲ βραδύνω	1	but if I delay	This phrase does not imply that Paul might choose to take his time rather than hurrying. Alternate translations: “but in case I cannot get there soon” or “but if something prevents me from getting there soon”
 1TI	3	15	p9u4		ἵνα εἰδῇς πῶς δεῖ ἐν οἴκῳ Θεοῦ ἀναστρέφεσθαι	1	so that you may know how one ought to behave in the household of God	Paul speaks of the group of believers as a family because God adopts each believer as a son or daughter through Christ. This could refer to: (1) the believers in general. Alternate translation: “so that you all may know how to conduct yourselves as members of God’s family” (2) Timothy’s behavior in the church. Alternate translation: “so that you may know how to conduct yourself as a member of God’s family”
-1TI	3	15	wzk3	figs-distinguish	οἴκῳ Θεοῦ…ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐκκλησία Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	the household of God, which is the church of the living God	This phrase gives us further information about **{the} household of God**. It is not making a distinction between a household of God that is the church and one that is not the church. Alternate translation: “household of God, by which I mean the community of people who believe in the living God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+1TI	3	15	wzk3	figs-distinguish	οἴκῳ Θεοῦ…ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐκκλησία Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	the household of God, which is the church of the living God	This phrase gives us further information about **the household of God**. It is not making a distinction between a household of God that is the church and one that is not the church. Alternate translation: “household of God, by which I mean the community of people who believe in the living God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TI	3	15	cd5r	figs-metaphor	στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα τῆς ἀληθείας	1	a pillar and support of the truth	Paul speaks of the truth as if it were a building and of the community of believers as if they were helping to hold up that building. Alternate translation: “which helps to proclaim God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	3	15	t267	figs-doublet	στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα	1	a pillar and support	The terms **pillar** and **support** mean basically the same thing. They are architectural features that hold up parts of buildings. Paul uses the terms together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them into an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “which helps promote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TI	3	15	sg64	figs-idiom	Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	the living God	Alternate translations: “the God who is genuinely alive” or “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -245,7 +243,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	4	14	hdd9	figs-explicit	μὴ ἀμέλει τοῦ ἐν σοὶ χαρίσματος	1	Do not neglect the gift in you	The implication is that this **gift** is the ability that God has given Timothy for ministry. Alternate translation: “do not neglect the ability that God has given you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	4	14	xp1k	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἐδόθη σοι διὰ προφητείας	1	which was given to you through prophecy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “which you received when leaders of the church prophesied about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	4	14	rr8f	translate-symaction	ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν τοῦ πρεσβυτερίου	1	with the imposition of the hands of the elders	Paul is speaking of a ceremony during which the church leaders put their **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would enable him to do the work he had commanded him to do. Alternate translation: “when the elders all laid their hands on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-1TI	4	15	sbcg	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	these things	If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit what **these {things}** are. Alternate translation: “these things that I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TI	4	15	sbcg	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	these things	If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit what **these things** are. Alternate translation: “these things that I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	4	15	m65m	figs-metaphor	ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι	1	Study these things, be in them	Paul is speaking as if Timothy could physically be inside the instructions he has just given him. Alternate translation: “and follow them consistently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	4	15	merc	figs-explicit	σου ἡ προκοπὴ	1	your progress	If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit in what way Timothy is to make **progress**. Alternate translation: “your increasing ability to live the way that Jesus wants you to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	4	16	uq6c		ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	Pay attention to yourself and to the teaching	Alternate translation: “Pay attention to how you live and to what you teach”
@@ -306,7 +304,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	5	16	d35m		ὄντως χήραις	1	genuine widows	Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them”
 1TI	5	17	u93q	figs-activepassive	οἱ καλῶς προεστῶτες πρεσβύτεροι…ἀξιούσθωσαν	1	The elders having ruled well, let them be considered worthy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “All believers should consider elders who are good leaders to be deserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	5	17	wp9d	figs-abstractnouns	διπλῆς τιμῆς	1	of double honor	Here, **double honor** could mean: (1) the congregation should honor the elders in two ways. Alternate translation: “of both respect and payment for their work” (2) they should honor them twice as much as others. Since Paul quotes two Scriptures in the next verse that support the idea of church leaders being paid for their work, the first possibility is more likely. Alternate translation: “of more respect than others receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TI	5	17	t389	figs-hendiadys	ἐν λόγῳ καὶ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	in the word and in teaching	This phrase may be expressing a single idea by using two phrases (which are actually just two words in Greek) connected with **and**. The phrase **in {the} word** would be identifying the content of the **teaching**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “at teaching from the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+1TI	5	17	t389	figs-hendiadys	ἐν λόγῳ καὶ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	in the word and in teaching	This phrase may be expressing a single idea by using two phrases (which are actually just two words in Greek) connected with **and**. The phrase **in the word** would be identifying the content of the **teaching**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “at teaching from the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TI	5	17	t390	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	the word	Paul may be using the term **word** here to describe the Scriptures, which God inspired people to put into words. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TI	5	18	kh55	figs-personification	λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή	1	For the Scripture says	Paul describes **Scripture** as if it could speak for itself. Alternate translations: “for it is written in the Scriptures” or “for we read in the Scriptures that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1TI	5	18	t392	figs-declarative	βοῦν ἀλοῶντα οὐ φιμώσεις	1	You will not muzzle a threshing ox	Here the Scriptures use a statement in order to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must not muzzle an ox while it is treading on grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])

en_tn_56-2TI.tsv

@@ -1,12 +1,10 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 2TI	front	intro	s7fk			0		# Introduction to 2 Timothy<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy<br><br>1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1–2:13).<br>2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).<br>3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1–4:8).<br>4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9–22).<br><br>### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.<br><br>### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?<br><br>Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?<br><br>As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.<br><br>### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?<br><br>God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”<br><br>In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.<br>* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”<br>* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 2TI	1	intro	p5lf			0		# 2 Timothy 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Spiritual children<br><br>Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Persecution<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
-2TI	1	1	p001	translate-names	Παῦλος	1	Paul	**Paul** is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	1	ha4l		Παῦλος	1	Paul	This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
 2TI	1	1	vl2g		διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1	through the will of God	Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so”
 2TI	1	1	e1lg		κατ’	1	according to	This could mean: (1) God appointed Paul to tell others about the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of announcing” (2) Paul became an apostle because he himself received the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a result of receiving”
 2TI	1	1	m9kv	figs-metaphor	ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	of life that is in Christ Jesus	Paul speaks of **life** as if it were an object inside of Jesus. This refers to the life people receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “of the life that we receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	1	2	p002	translate-names	Τιμοθέῳ	1	to Timothy	**Timothy** is the name of a man, the person to whom this letter is written. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	2	rp5u		Τιμοθέῳ	1	to Timothy	Your language may have a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you, Timothy”
 2TI	1	2	ey7g	figs-metaphor	ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ	1	my beloved child	Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	1	2	w43q	translate-blessing	χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ	1	Grace, mercy, and peace from	After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
@@ -57,7 +55,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	1	11	p014	translate-unknown	κῆρυξ	1	a herald	A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 2TI	1	11	p015	figs-metaphor	κῆρυξ	1	a herald	Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	1	12	j37g		δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν	1	for which reason	Paul provides the **reason** for his suffering by referring back to his status as an apostle. Alternate translation: “because I am an apostle”
-2TI	1	12	y8l4	figs-explicit	καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω	1	I also suffer also these things	Paul does not mention the specific **{things}** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TI	1	12	y8l4	figs-explicit	καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω	1	I also suffer also these things	Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	1	12	td39		πέπεισμαι	1	I am certain	Paul expresses that he is **certain** that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure”
 2TI	1	12	p6pi	figs-metaphor	τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι	1	to guard my deposit	Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	1	12	hhu5	figs-possession	τὴν παραθήκην μου	1	my deposit	The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -71,7 +69,6 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	1	14	cb5q	figs-explicit	τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον	1	Guard the good deposit	Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	1	14	a3v2		διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	through the Holy Spirit	Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit”
 2TI	1	15	p018	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	all who are in Asia	The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-2TI	1	15	p019	translate-names	Ἀσίᾳ	1	Asia	**Asia** here refers to a Roman province, Asia Minor, which had its capital at Ephesus, which is where Timothy was living at the time of this letter. It is now a region in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	15	p6f4	figs-metaphor	ἀπεστράφησάν με	1	turned away from me	This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	1	15	p020	figs-explicit	ἀπεστράφησάν με	1	turned away from me	Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	1	15	x6cc	translate-names	Φύγελος…Ἑρμογένης	1	Phygelus	**Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -80,13 +77,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	1	16	zz44	figs-metonymy	τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ	1	to the household of Onesiphorus	The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	1	16	td1q	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἅλυσίν μου οὐκ ἐπησχύνθη	1	was not ashamed of my chain	The word **chain** refers to being in prison. Onesiphorus was not ashamed that Paul was in prison but came to visit him frequently. Alternate translation: “was not ashamed of my imprisonment” or “was not ashamed of my being in prison” or “was not ashamed of me, even though I was in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	1	17	xfg1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	but	Here, **but** indicates a contrast between the previous verse and this verse. Instead of being ashamed that Paul was in prison, Onesiphorus searched for Paul and found him there. Use whatever form is most natural in your language to show this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-2TI	1	17	p022	translate-names	Ῥώμῃ	1	Rome	**Rome** is the name of a city, the capital of the Roman Empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	18	p3di	translate-blessing	δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου	1	May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord	Paul is again asking for the Lord to **grant mercy** to Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. See how you translated this in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be merciful to Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord have mercy on Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 2TI	1	18	x0eo	grammar-connect-logic-result	(δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ), καὶ ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις	1	May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord in that day. And how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the action that the first sentence describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2TI	1	18	r54t	writing-pronouns	δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου	1	May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternate translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2TI	1	18	x2dk	figs-metaphor	εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου	1	to find mercy from the Lord	Paul speaks of **mercy** as if it were an object that could be found. Paul is expressing his desire that God show **mercy** to Onesiphorus on the day of judgment. Alternate translation: “to receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	1	18	f3ep	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	in that day	The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2TI	1	18	p024	translate-names	Ἐφέσῳ	1	Ephesus	**Ephesus** is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	18	p025	figs-explicit	ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις	1	how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well	Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, **in Ephesus**. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	2	intro	k3zn			0		# 2 Timothy 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### We will reign with him<br><br>Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Analogies<br><br>In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
 2TI	2	1	bll5	figs-metaphor	τέκνον μου	1	my child	Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -115,9 +110,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	7	bdk9	figs-explicit	νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν	1	Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding	Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	2	7	p036	figs-metonymy	ὃ λέγω	1	what I am saying	Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	7	a22q	figs-explicit	ἐν πᾶσιν	1	in everything	Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2TI	2	8	mh1k	figs-metaphor	ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ	1	from the seed of David	The phrase **from {the} seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	2	8	p037	translate-names	Δαυείδ	1	of David	**David** is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-2TI	2	8	wt31	figs-idiom	ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	raised from the dead	The expression **raised from {the} dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2TI	2	8	mh1k	figs-metaphor	ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ	1	from the seed of David	The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	8	wt31	figs-idiom	ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	raised from the dead	The expression **raised from the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TI	2	8	p038	figs-activepassive	ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	raised from the dead	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “whom God raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	2	8	s4vh	figs-possession	κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου	1	according to my gospel	The term **my** conveys the idea that it is the gospel associated with Paul because he preaches it. Alternate translation: “according to the gospel message that I preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2TI	2	9	t2ax	figs-metonymy	μέχρι δεσμῶν	1	unto chains	Paul uses the expression **unto chains** to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -166,7 +160,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	19	ir1z	figs-metaphor	ὁ…στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν	1	the firm foundation of God stands	Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	19	p058	figs-metonymy	ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην	1	having this seal	Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	19	p059	figs-quotemarks	ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην	1	having this seal	Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-2TI	2	19	nd7t	figs-idiom	ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	who names the name of the Lord	The expression **names the name of {the} Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2TI	2	19	nd7t	figs-idiom	ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	who names the name of the Lord	The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TI	2	19	y3bc	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποστήτω ἀπὸ ἀδικίας	1	must abstain from unrighteousness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “must stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	2	20	p060	figs-metaphor	ἐν μεγάλῃ δὲ οἰκίᾳ, οὐκ ἔστιν μόνον σκεύη χρυσᾶ καὶ ἀργυρᾶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα	1	Now in a great house, there are not only gold and silver containers, but also wood and clay	To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor that compares the **containers** that are in the home of a wealthy person with people in the church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this is a metaphor or illustration. Alternate translation: “Consider this illustration: in the home of a wealthy person, there are containers made of gold and silver, and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	20	p061	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα	1	but also wood and clay	Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -192,7 +186,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	23	p069	figs-doublet	μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις	1	foolish and ignorant questions	Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2TI	2	23	kh6p	figs-metaphor	γεννῶσι μάχας	1	they give birth to battles	Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	23	p070	figs-metaphor	μάχας	1	battles	Paul uses the term **battles** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	2	24	p071	figs-metaphor	δοῦλον…Κυρίου	1	the slave of the Lord	Paul is using the expression **slave of {the} Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	24	p071	figs-metaphor	δοῦλον…Κυρίου	1	the slave of the Lord	Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	24	p072	figs-metaphor	οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι	1	must not battle	Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	25	un9l	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πραΰτητι	1	in meekness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	2	25	u6rp		παιδεύοντα	1	educating	Paul presents **educating** as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting”
@@ -246,7 +240,6 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	3	10	p091	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ μακροθυμίᾳ	1	patience	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **patience** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I am patient with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	3	10	p090	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀγάπῃ	1	love	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	3	10	l4pp	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὑπομονῇ	1	longsuffering	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I endure when I suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TI	3	11	p092	translate-names	ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ, ἐν Λύστροις	1	in Antioch, in Iconium, in Lystra	**Antioch**, **Iconium**, and **Lystra** are the names of three cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	3	11	p093		οἵους διωγμοὺς ὑπήνεγκα	1	what kind of persecutions I endured	Paul is reminding Timothy that he knows of the various ways in which Paul suffered and how he endured until God rescued him. Alternate translation: “how I endured various persecutions”
 2TI	3	11	r9vk	figs-metaphor	ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος	1	the Lord rescued me from them all	Paul speaks as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	3	12	ke7f		ζῆν εὐσεβῶς	1	to live piously	The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way”
@@ -274,7 +267,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	intro	k2xa			0		# 2 Timothy 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1–8)<br>2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9–18)<br>3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19–22)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “I adjure you”<br><br>With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.<br><br>### Crown<br><br>Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
 2TI	4	1	eh3x		διαμαρτύρομαι	1	I adjure you	The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
 2TI	4	1	cb15	figs-explicit	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	before God and Christ Jesus	Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2TI	4	1	u32g	figs-merism	ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς	1	the living and the dead	Paul refers to **{the} living** and **{the} dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+2TI	4	1	u32g	figs-merism	ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς	1	the living and the dead	Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 2TI	4	1	p100	figs-nominaladj	ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς	1	the living and the dead	The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 2TI	4	1	lwt2	figs-metonymy	καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ	1	and by his appearing and his kingdom	Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the **kingdom** that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	4	1	anqh		καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ	1	and by his appearing and his kingdom	This can be understood in two different ways, depending on if Paul is placing Timothy under an oath or giving Timothy a command. (1) If Paul is placing Timothy under an oath, then he is saying that these are the things that Timothy would be denying if he fails to fulfill the oath. Alternate translation: “with an oath as strong as your desire for Christ’s return and for his rule as king” (2) If Paul is introducing a command in this verse, then Paul is appealing to these things to strengthen his command. Alternate translation: “and as surely as Christ will return and rule as king”
@@ -316,13 +309,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	10	ji2l	figs-metonymy	τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα	1	the present age	The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	4	10	u2qb	figs-ellipsis	Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν	1	Crescens to Galatia, Titus to Dalmatia	Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, **Crescens** and **Titus** have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2TI	4	10	gs61	translate-names	Γαλατίαν…Δαλματίαν	1	Galatia … Dalmatia	This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-2TI	4	11	p110	translate-names	Λουκᾶς…Μᾶρκον	1	Luke … Mark	**Luke** and **Mark** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	11	w21u		μοι εὔχρηστος εἰς διακονίαν	1	he is useful to me for service	This could mean: (1) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul to take care of his personal needs. Alternate translation: “he can help take care of my needs” (2) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul minister to others, especially by preaching and teaching. Alternate translation: “he is helpful to me in my ministry”
-2TI	4	12	p111	translate-names	Τυχικὸν	1	Tychicus	**Tychicus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	12	y60r		ἀπέστειλα	1	I sent	Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending”
-2TI	4	12	p112	translate-names	Ἔφεσον	1	Ephesus	**Ephesus** is the name of a city. This is the city where Timothy is as he receives this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	13	d5rw	translate-unknown	φελόνην	1	cloak	The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-2TI	4	13	x1jb	translate-names	Τρῳάδι	1		**Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	13	v9b6	translate-names	Κάρπῳ	1	Carpus	**Carpus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	13	k6tj	translate-unknown	τὰ βιβλία	1	the books	The term **books** refers to scrolls. A scroll was a type of book made of a long sheet of papyrus or leather. After writing on a scroll or reading it, people would roll it up using rods on the ends. Alternate translation: “the scrolls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 2TI	4	13	e395	translate-unknown	μάλιστα τὰς μεμβράνας	1	especially the parchments	The term **parchments** may refer to a specific type of scroll. Alternate translation: “especially those made from animal skins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -339,11 +328,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	17	gsr8	figs-metaphor	ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος	1	I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion	Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a **lion** at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	4	17	p114	figs-activepassive	ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος	1	I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	4	18	p115	figs-idiom	εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων	1	to the ages of the ages	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-2TI	4	19	p116	translate-names	Πρίσκαν	1	Priscilla	**Priscilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-2TI	4	19	p117	translate-names	Ἀκύλαν	1	Aquila	**Aquila** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	19	n4zc	figs-metonymy	τὸν Ὀνησιφόρου οἶκον	1	the household of Onesiphorus	See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	4	19	mef8	translate-names	Ὀνησιφόρου	1	of Onesiphorus	**Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-2TI	4	20	p118	translate-names	Κορίνθῳ	1	Corinth	**Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	20	lie9	translate-names	Ἔραστος…Τρόφιμον	1	Erastus … Trophimus	**Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	20	wp9h	translate-names	Μιλήτῳ	1	Miletus	**Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	21	cvc7		σπούδασον…ἐλθεῖν	1	Hasten to come	Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come”

en_tn_57-TIT.tsv

@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ TIT	3	6	xy23	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus,
 TIT	3	7	di3g	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1	having been justified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since God has declared us to be without sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 TIT	3	7	q1cm	figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι γενηθῶμεν, κατ’ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου	1	we might become heirs according to the certain hope of everlasting life	The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit the things promised, just as a person inherits property or possessions from a family member. Alternate translation: “we might expect to receive the eternal life that God has promised us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 TIT	3	8	j8md		ὁ λόγος	1	This message	This **message** is the one just expressed in verses 4–7, that God freely gives the Holy Spirit and eternal life to believers through Jesus.
-TIT	3	8	xy29		τούτων	1	these things	Here, **{these} things** refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1–7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about”
+TIT	3	8	xy29		τούτων	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1–7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about”
 TIT	3	8	kqm6		φροντίζωσιν καλῶν ἔργων, προΐστασθαι	1	may be careful to engage themselves in good works	Alternate translation: “may seek to do good works”
 TIT	3	9	tzh9			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains what Titus should avoid and how to treat those who cause contention among the believers.
 TIT	3	9	j1hf		δὲ…περιΐστασο	1	But avoid	Alternate translation: “So avoid” or “Therefore, avoid”
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ TIT	3	12	c32w	translate-names	Ἀρτεμᾶν…Τυχικόν	1	Artemas … Ty
 TIT	3	12	knt1		σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν	1	hurry to come	Alternate translation: “come quickly”
 TIT	3	12	xy30		σπούδασον	1	hurry	The verb **hurry** is singular and directed at Titus alone. Artemas or Tychicus would stay in Crete, probably to take Titus’ place.
 TIT	3	12	gdw9		παραχειμάσαι	1	to spend the winter	Alternate translation: “to stay for the winter”
-TIT	3	13	a46f	translate-names	Ζηνᾶν…Ἀπολλῶν	1	Zenas … Appollos	**Zenos** and **Apollos** are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+TIT	3	13	a46f	translate-names	Ζηνᾶν…Ἀπολλῶν	1	Zenas	**Zenos** is a man's name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 TIT	3	13	s757		καὶ Ἀπολλῶν	1	and Apollos	Alternate translation: “and also Apollos”
 TIT	3	13	j496		σπουδαίως πρόπεμψον	1	Diligently send on their way	Alternate translation: “Do not delay in sending”
 TIT	3	13	xy31	figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μηδὲν αὐτοῖς λείπῃ	1	so that they lack nothing	You can state this positively: “so that they have everything that they need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])

en_tn_58-PHM.tsv

@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@ PHM	front	intro	sz2w			0		# Introduction to Philemon<br><br>## Part 1: General I
 PHM	1	1	ne8k	figs-123person	Παῦλος	1		Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translations: “From me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
 PHM	1	1	cgs4		δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	a prisoner of Christ Jesus	Paul was in prison because people in authority did not want him to preach about Jesus. They put him there in order to stop him and to punish him. This does not mean that Jesus had put Paul in prison. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for the sake of Christ Jesus”
 PHM	1	1	sv3p		ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1	our brother	Paul is using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our companion in the faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
-PHM	1	1	y9zu	figs-exclusive	ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1		Here, the word **{our}** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **{our}** would be inclusive, relating Timothy to Paul and the readers as a brother in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could follow the original wording, which says, “the brother.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+PHM	1	1	y9zu	figs-exclusive	ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1		Here, the word **our** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **our** would be inclusive, relating Timothy to Paul and the readers as a brother in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could follow the original wording, which says, “the brother.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHM	1	1	gvmy	translate-names	Φιλήμονι	1		**Philemon** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 PHM	1	1	q84z	figs-explicit	Φιλήμονι	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could include the information that this is a letter in which Paul is speaking directly to **Philemon**, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHM	1	1	r3l9	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHM	1	1	ww3l		καὶ συνεργῷ ἡμῶν	1	and our fellow worker	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how Philemon worked with Paul. Alternate translation: “who, like us, works to spread the gospel” or “who works as we do to serve Jesus”
 PHM	1	2	b37l	translate-names	Ἀπφίᾳ	1		**Apphia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-PHM	1	2	bb1s	figs-exclusive	τῇ ἀδελφῇ	1		Here, the word **{our}** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **{our}** would be inclusive, relating Apphia to Paul and the readers as a sister in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could do the same as the original, which says, “the sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+PHM	1	2	bb1s	figs-exclusive	τῇ ἀδελφῇ	1		Here, the word **our** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **our** would be inclusive, relating Apphia to Paul and the readers as a sister in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could do the same as the original, which says, “the sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHM	1	2	hhpc	figs-metaphor	τῇ ἀδελφῇ	1		Paul is using the term **sister** to mean a woman who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our spiritual sister” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 PHM	1	2	e8su	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHM	1	2	kyzo		Ἀπφίᾳ…Ἀρχίππῳ…τῇ…ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		The letter is predominantly addressed to Philemon. It could be misleading to suggest Paul is writing to **Apphia**, **Archippus**, and **the church** in Philemon’s house, on the same level as he is writing to Philemon.
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ PHM	1	10	hnhz	figs-explicit	Ὀνήσιμον	1		The name **Onesimus** means “
 PHM	1	10	mui3	figs-metaphor	ὃν ἐγέννησα	1	whom I have fathered in my chains	Here, **fathered** is a metaphor that means that Onesimus became a believer as Paul taught him about Christ. Alternate translation: “who received new life and became my spiritual son when I taught him about Christ” or “who became a spiritual son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHM	1	10	nx1p	figs-metonymy	ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς	1	in my chains	Prisoners were often bound in **chains**. Paul was in prison when he taught Onesimus and was still in prison when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “here in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 PHM	1	12	t1kp		ὃν ἀνέπεμψά σοι	1	I sent him back to you	Paul was probably sending Onesimus with another believer who carried this letter.
-PHM	1	12	fdwn	figs-metaphor	τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα	1	my inward parts	The phrase **{this} one is my inward parts** is a metaphor for deep feelings about someone. Paul was saying this about Onesimus. Alternate translation: “this is a person whom I love dearly” or “this person is very special to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+PHM	1	12	fdwn	figs-metaphor	τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα	1	my inward parts	The phrase **this one is my inward parts** is a metaphor for deep feelings about someone. Paul was saying this about Onesimus. Alternate translation: “this is a person whom I love dearly” or “this person is very special to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHM	1	12	yn1d	figs-metonymy	τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα	1		Here, ** inward parts** is figurative for the place of a person’s emotions. If your language has a similar figure, then use that. If not, use plain language. Alternate translation: “my heart” or “my liver” or “my deepest feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 PHM	1	13	t4xl		ἵνα ὑπὲρ σοῦ μοι διακονῇ	1	so that he might serve me on behalf of you	Paul knows that Philemon wants to help him, and so he suggests that a way to do that would be to allow Onesimus to serve Paul in prison. Alternate translation: “so that, since you could not be here, he might help me” or “so that he could help me in your place”
 PHM	1	13	bb3t	figs-metonymy	ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς	1	in the chains	Prisoners were often bound in **chains**. Paul was in prison when he told Onesimus about the Messiah, and he was still in prison when he wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ PHM	1	19	wb53		ἐγὼ Παῦλος ἔγραψα τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί	1
 PHM	1	19	gn6c	figs-irony	ἵνα μὴ λέγω σοι	1	in order not to say to you	Paul says that he will not say something to Philemon while saying it. This is a polite way of emphasizing the truth of what Paul is telling him. If your language would not use irony like this, then use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “I do not need to remind you” or “You already know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 PHM	1	19	st7e	figs-explicit	καὶ σεαυτόν μοι προσοφείλεις	1	you also owe me your own self	Paul was implying that whatever Onesimus or Paul owed to Philemon was canceled by the larger amount that Philemon owed to Paul, which was Philemon’s own life. The reason that Philemon owed Paul his life can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “you even owe me your own life” or “you owe me much more because I saved your life” or “you owe me your own life because I told you about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHM	1	20	mw03	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφέ	1		Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “spiritual brother” or “brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHM	1	20	cqd0	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		See how you translated **in {the} Lord** in verse 16. This metaphor refers to being a believer in Jesus and means the same as **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “as you serve the Lord” or “because we are fellow believers in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+PHM	1	20	cqd0	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		See how you translated **in the Lord** in verse 16. This metaphor refers to being a believer in Jesus and means the same as **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “as you serve the Lord” or “because we are fellow believers in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHM	1	20	xp0b	figs-explicit	ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα ἐν Χριστῷ	1	refresh my inward parts in Christ	How Paul wanted Philemon to refresh him can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “refresh my inward parts in Christ by accepting Onesimus kindly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHM	1	20	j8lh	figs-metaphor	ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα	1	refresh my inward parts	Here, **refresh** is a metaphor for comfort or encourage. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHM	1	20	kmpp	figs-metonymy	ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα	1	refresh my inward parts	Here, **inward parts** is a metonym for a person’s feelings, thoughts, or inner being. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

en_tn_61-1PE.tsv

@@ -2,7 +2,6 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	front	intro	c1uv			0		# Introduction to 1 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of 1 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1–2)<br><br>1. Peter reminds the believers of their identity in Christ (1:3–2:10)<br><br>    * Praise to God for saving the believers (1:3–12)<br>    * Command to be holy (1:13–21)<br>    * Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)<br><br>1. Peter tells the believers how they should behave (2:11–4:11)<br><br>    * How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)<br>    * How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)<br>    * How believers should act because the end is near (4:7–11)<br><br>1. Peter encourages the believers to persevere when suffering (4:12–5:11)<br><br>    * How believers should respond to trials (4:12–19)<br>    * How believers should interact with one another (5:1–11)<br><br>1. Conclusion (5:12–14)<br><br>### Who wrote the book of 1 Peter?<br><br>The author identified himself as Peter, who was also called Simon Peter. He was an apostle, and he also wrote the book of 2 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter in Rome. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/peter]])<br><br>### What is the book of 1 Peter about?<br><br>Peter wrote this letter to encourage Gentile Christians who were being persecuted and to exhort them to stand firm in “the true grace of God” ([5:12](../05/12.md)). Peter told his readers how they should act in the midst of a society that hated them. He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they were suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus would return soon. Peter also instructed Christians about submitting to people in authority over them.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter, ” or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How were Christians treated in Rome?<br><br>Peter was probably in Rome when he wrote this letter. In [5:13](../05/13.md) Peter referred to Rome symbolically as “Babylon.” It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were severely persecuting Christians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except in two places: [1:16](../01/16.md) and [2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. Sometimes it refers to a specific group of people within Peter’s audience, such as wives, husbands, church leaders, or other groups. These groups are indicated in the notes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 1 Peter?<br><br>“Having purified your souls by obedience to the truth for sincere brotherly love, love one another earnestly from a pure heart” ([1:22](../01/22.md)). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “Having purified your souls by obedience to the truth *through the Spirit* for sincere brotherly love, love one another earnestly from the heart.” Translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1PE	1	intro	ql4i			0		# 1 Peter 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1–2)<br>2. Praise to God for saving the believers (1:3–12)<br>3. Command to be holy (1:13–21)<br>4. Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)<br><br>Peter begins this letter in [1:1–2](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at that time.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [1:24–25](../01/24.md).<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### What God reveals<br><br>When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were because they had faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.<br><br>### Holiness<br><br>God wants his people to be holy because God is holy ([1:15](../01/15.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Eternity<br><br>Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are also glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1:5](../01/05.md))
 1PE	1	1	g6b4	figs-123person	Πέτρος	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that. Alternate translation: “I, Peter, am writing this letter” or “From Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1PE	1	1	p0pd	translate-names	Πέτρος	1		**Peter** is the name of a man, a disciple of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to 1 Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1PE	1	1	h6om	figs-distinguish	ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		This phrase gives further information about Simon Peter. He describes himself as being someone given the position and authority of being Christ’s apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1PE	1	1	owrg	figs-123person	ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις	1		In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then state to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you elect exiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1PE	1	1	g3n3	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **elect** and **dispersion**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to those whom God has elected and exiled among those whom God has dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -43,7 +42,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	5	ymh2	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς σωτηρίαν	1		Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a purpose for which God is protecting believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of giving us a salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1PE	1	5	gj5s	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν ἑτοίμην ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for the time when God saves you, which is ready to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	5	g4rb	figs-activepassive	ἑτοίμην ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	that is ready to be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God is ready to reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	1	5	xsp2	figs-explicit	ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ	1		Here, **{the} last time** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when Jesus returns to the world to judge everyone and vindicate those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the last time, when Jesus returns and judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	1	5	xsp2	figs-explicit	ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ	1		Here, **the last time** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when Jesus returns to the world to judge everyone and vindicate those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the last time, when Jesus returns and judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	6	p1ta	writing-pronouns	ἐν ᾧ	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the “last time” referred to at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “About this last time” (2) everything described in [verses 3–5](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “In all of this that I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1PE	1	6	hy8d	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ᾧ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε	1	In this you greatly rejoice	**In** here introduces the reason why Peter’s readers rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of this you greatly rejoice” or “Because of this you greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1PE	1	6	dtvb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
@@ -62,16 +61,16 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	9	uk4a	figs-synecdoche	σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν	1	the salvation of your souls	Here, **souls** refers to the individual Christians to whom Peter is writing this letter. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “your salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1PE	1	10	yyz4	figs-doublet	ἐξεζήτησαν καὶ ἐξηραύνησαν	1	searched and inquired carefully	The phrases **searched** and **inquired carefully** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard the prophets tried to understand this salvation. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “examined very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	1	10	gmcy	figs-abstractnouns	ἧς σωτηρίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	1	10	wx95	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εἰς ὑμᾶς χάριτος	1		Here, **{this} grace** refers to **{this} salvation**, mentioned earlier in this verse. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God being gracious to you by saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1PE	1	10	wx95	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εἰς ὑμᾶς χάριτος	1		Here, **this grace** refers to **this salvation**, mentioned earlier in this verse. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God being gracious to you by saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	11	j917	figs-explicit	εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον καιρὸν	1		The word translated **whom** could also be translated “what.” In that case, “what” would refer to the time when salvation would take place and **what time** would then refer to the specific circumstances. However, most translations agree with the ULT’s use of **whom**. Alternate translation: “into what time or what circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	11	w3n8	figs-possession	τὸ…Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ	1	the Spirit of Christ	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as being **the Spirit** that is associated with **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, associated with Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	1	11	hjq5		προμαρτυρόμενον	1		This could indicate: (1) the time when **the Spirit of Christ was revealing** information to the prophets. Alternate translation: “when testifying beforehand” (2) the means by which **the Spirit of Christ was revealing** information to the prophets. Alternate translation: “by means of testifying beforehand”
 1PE	1	11	x5x8	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ εἰς Χριστὸν παθήματα, καὶ τὰς μετὰ ταῦτα δόξας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings** and **glories**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about how Christ would suffer, and glorious things would happen afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	12	x4b1	figs-activepassive	οἷς ἀπεκαλύφθη	1	It was revealed to them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God revealed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	1	12	hi9u	figs-activepassive	ἃ νῦν ἀνηγγέλη ὑμῖν, διὰ τῶν εὐαγγελισαμένων ὑμᾶς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which those who proclaimed the gospel to you have now declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	1	12	c7jz	figs-explicit	Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ	1		This phrase indicates the means by which the evangelists proclaimed the gospel to Peter’s readers. Peter uses **{the} Holy Spirit** here to refer specifically to the Holy Spirit’s work of giving those evangelists the ability or power to proclaim the gospel effectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit sent from heaven enabling them to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	1	12	c7jz	figs-explicit	Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ	1		This phrase indicates the means by which the evangelists proclaimed the gospel to Peter’s readers. Peter uses **the Holy Spirit** here to refer specifically to the Holy Spirit’s work of giving those evangelists the ability or power to proclaim the gospel effectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit sent from heaven enabling them to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	12	yzqk	figs-activepassive	ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	1	12	lyzl	figs-explicit	εἰς ἃ	1		Here, **{things}** refers to what God had revealed to the prophets and some evangelists had proclaimed to Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into which things God revealed to the prophets and which were declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	1	12	lyzl	figs-explicit	εἰς ἃ	1		Here, **things** refers to what God had revealed to the prophets and some evangelists had proclaimed to Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into which things God revealed to the prophets and which were declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	12	xi4d	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἃ ἐπιθυμοῦσιν ἄγγελοι παρακύψαι	1	into which things angels long to look	Peter uses **look** to refer to getting a clearer understanding of what God has revealed about salvation. This does not mean that the angels do not understand salvation at all. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which angels desire to understand more clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	13	bjg9	grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὸ	1	So	**Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has written in [verses 1–12](../01/01.md). If it might be helpful to your readers, you could state this concisely. Alternate translation: “Since all these things I have just written are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1PE	1	13	zvgh	figs-declarative	ἀναζωσάμενοι τὰς ὀσφύας τῆς διανοίας ὑμῶν, νήφοντες, τελείως ἐλπίσατε	1		The clauses **having girded up the loins of your mind** and **being sober** could indicate: (1) two commands in addition to the command to **hope fully** that occurs in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “gird up the loins of your mind, be sober, hope fully” (2) two actions that are means by which Peter wants his readers to obey the command to **hope fully**. Alternate translation: “hope fully, by having girded up the loins of your mind and by being sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
@@ -100,7 +99,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	18	git3	figs-metaphor	ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου	1		Here, **handed down** refers to one generation teaching **futile behavior** to another generation, as if that behavior were an object that could be passed by hand from one person to another. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from your futile behavior taught to you by your fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	18	ctgm	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from behaving in futile ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	18	b5qa	figs-activepassive	πατροπαραδότου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that your fathers handed down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	1	19	s4jd	figs-metonymy	τιμίῳ αἵματι…Χριστοῦ	1	with the precious blood of Christ	Peter uses **{the} precious blood of Christ** to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1PE	1	19	s4jd	figs-metonymy	τιμίῳ αἵματι…Χριστοῦ	1	with the precious blood of Christ	Peter uses **the precious blood of Christ** to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	1	19	gk6a	figs-simile	ὡς ἀμνοῦ ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου	1	as an unblemished and spotless lamb	Peter compares Jesus’ blood to the blood of the lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God because of the people’s sins. The point of this comparison is that Jesus died as a sacrifice so that God would forgive people’s sins. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like that of the unblemished and spotless lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God for sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	1	19	smu8	figs-doublet	ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου	1	unblemished and spotless	The words **unblemished** and **spotless** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that Christ was completely perfect and sinless. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “completely perfect” or “with no imperfections at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	1	20	msw5	figs-activepassive	προεγνωσμένου	1	He has been chosen	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having foreknown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -108,7 +107,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	20	ky7a	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου	1	before the foundation of the world	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foundation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “before God founded the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	20	dkk2	figs-activepassive	φανερωθέντος	1	he has been revealed … for your sake	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having revealed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	1	20	pmf2	figs-explicit	φανερωθέντος	1		Here, **having been revealed** refers to the first time Jesus came to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “having been revealed when he came to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	1	20	kzi0	figs-explicit	ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων	1		Here, **{the} last of the times** refers to the final period of history which began when Jesus came to the earth for the first time. This period will end when Jesus returns to earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in this final time period of history” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	1	20	kzi0	figs-explicit	ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων	1		Here, **the last of the times** refers to the final period of history which began when Jesus came to the earth for the first time. This period will end when Jesus returns to earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in this final time period of history” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	21	lt5u	figs-idiom	τὸν ἐγείραντα αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	who has raised him from the dead	Here, to **raise him** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who caused him to live again so that he was no longer among the dead people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1PE	1	21	f7mn	figs-abstractnouns	δόξαν αὐτῷ δόντα	1	has given him glory	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has glorified him” or “has shown that he is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	21	k85r	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν καὶ ἐλπίδα, εἶναι εἰς Θεόν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “you would believe and hope in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -223,7 +222,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	17	gwy8	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀδελφότητα	1	the brotherhood	Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	18	w2nc			0	General Information:	Peter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in people’s houses.
 1PE	2	18	xgk8	figs-doublet	τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν	1	the good and gentle	The words **good** and **gentle** mean similar things. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that such masters treat their servants very kindly. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to the very kind ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1PE	2	18	mueb	figs-metaphor	τοῖς σκολιοῖς	1		Here, **crooked {ones}** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	2	18	mueb	figs-metaphor	τοῖς σκολιοῖς	1		Here, **crooked ones** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	19	r1h1	figs-explicit	τοῦτο…χάρις	1	this is praiseworthy	Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of God’s favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	2	19	zm8e	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ	1	because of awareness of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **consciousness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because one is aware of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	2	19	rjyf	figs-possession	διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **consciousness** that is about or concerning **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of having consciousness about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -270,13 +269,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	4	oav8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin this verse as a new sentence. If you do so, then you will need to repeat the subject and verb from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Rather, let your adornment be the inner man of the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1PE	3	4	m2n3	figs-metonymy	ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος	1		Here, **hidden man** and **heart** both refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	4	l2yq	figs-possession	ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος	1	the inner person of the heart	Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **hidden man** is the same thing as **the heart**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the hidden man, which is the heart” or “the hidden man, namely, the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1PE	3	4	l1js	figs-possession	ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος	1		Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **imperishable {thing}** is the same thing as **a gentle and quiet spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the imperishable thing, which is a gentle and quiet spirit” or “in the imperishable thing, namely, a gentle and quiet spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1PE	3	4	l1js	figs-possession	ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος	1		Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **imperishable thing** is the same thing as **a gentle and quiet spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the imperishable thing, which is a gentle and quiet spirit” or “in the imperishable thing, namely, a gentle and quiet spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	3	4	spi6	figs-metonymy	τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος	1		Here,**quiet** means “peaceful” or “calm.” It does not mean the opposite of loud. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	4	gbw9	figs-metonymy	τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος	1	of a gentle and quiet spirit	Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or temperament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and quiet attitude.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	4	j5bu	figs-metaphor	ὅ ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ πολυτελές	1	which is precious before God	Peter refers to God’s opinion as if it were a person standing directly in front of him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which God considers to be very precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	5	dq60	figs-metaphor	ἐκόσμουν ἑαυτάς	1		Peter speaks of the attitude of the holy women as if it were something with which they **adorned themselves**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “made themselves beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	5	jbuf		ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν	1		See how you translated the similar clause in [verse 1](../03/01.md).
-1PE	3	6	kpnl	translate-names	Σάρρα…τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1		**Sarah** is the name of a woman and **Abraham** is the name of her husband. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1PE	3	6	t3xl	figs-idiom	ἧς ἐγενήθητε τέκνα	1	whose children you have become	Peter uses a Hebrew idiom here in which people are said to be the **children** of someone who has qualities similar to theirs. Women who believe and who act like Sarah acted are thought of as if they were her actual **children**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “who resemble her as if you were her children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1PE	3	6	v2so	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ φοβούμεναι μηδεμίαν πτόησιν	1		The phrase **not being afraid of any** translates two negative words in Greek. Peter uses them together to emphasize that believing women should not fear anything at all. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1PE	3	7	lbc2			0	General Information:	In this verse Peter gives instructions specifically to men who are husbands.
@@ -284,7 +282,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	7	lulz	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ γνῶσιν	1	live with your wife according to understanding, as with a weaker container	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a knowledgeable way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	7	eq1z	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει	1	as with a weaker container	Here Peter refers to women as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	7	a88w	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπονέμοντες τιμήν ὡς καὶ συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς	1	assigning her honor as also fellow heirs of the grace of life	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **heirs**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “honor them as also those who will inherit with you the grace of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	3	7	n4rf	figs-metaphor	συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς	1	fellow heirs of the grace of life	Peter speaks of **{the} grace of life** as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	3	7	n4rf	figs-metaphor	συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς	1	fellow heirs of the grace of life	Peter speaks of **the grace of life** as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	7	quba	figs-possession	χάριτος ζωῆς	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is **life**. The word **grace** refers to a gracious gift and **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gracious gift, namely, eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	3	7	dwm6	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐνκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν	1	so that your prayers will not be hindered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that nothing will hinder your prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	3	8	nk97			0	General Information:	In [verses 8–12](../03/08.md) Peter writes instructions to all believers.
@@ -309,7 +307,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	12	tytz	figs-explicit	ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν	1	his ears are upon their requests	The idea that the Lord listens to the requests of righteous people also implies that he responds to those requests. If this might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he listens to and grants their request” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	12	p2vi	figs-genericnoun	δέησιν αὐτῶν	1	his ears are upon their requests	Here, **request** refers to requests in general, not to one particular **request**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1PE	3	12	es9n	figs-synecdoche	πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ	1	But the face of the Lord is against	Here, **face** refers to the Lord himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But the Lord is against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1PE	3	12	t22b	figs-idiom	πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ	1	But the face of the Lord is against	Here, **{the} face** being **against** someone is an idiom that refers to one person opposing another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “but the Lord opposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1PE	3	12	t22b	figs-idiom	πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ	1	But the face of the Lord is against	Here, **the face** being **against** someone is an idiom that refers to one person opposing another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “but the Lord opposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1PE	3	12	gw7w	figs-quotemarks	ποιοῦντας κακά	1		After this phrase, Peter also ends his quotation from the book of Psalms. If you decided in [verse 10](../03/10.md) to mark this as a quotation, indicate that ending here with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	3	13	wkw4			0	Connecting Statement:	In [verses 13–22](../03/13.md) Peter teaches the believers how to behave when unbelievers persecute them.
 1PE	3	13	e1ma	figs-rquestion	τίς ὁ κακώσων ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ζηλωταὶ γένησθε?	1	who is the one who will harm you if you are a zealot of what is good?	Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that it is unlikely that someone would harm them if they did good things. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “no one will harm you if you become zealous ones of the good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -319,7 +317,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	14	j8ds	figs-quotemarks	τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 8:12](../isa/08/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	3	14	f9u8	figs-parallelism	τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε	1	But do not fear their fear, nor be troubled	These two phrases mean the same thing. Peter states the same idea twice in order to emphasize that believers should not be afraid of people who persecute them. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “But you should not fear at all what people might do to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1PE	3	14	yz6y	figs-possession	τὸν…φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε	1	their fear	This could refer to: (1) the fear that unbelievers have. Alternate translation: “you should not fear what they fear” or “you should not fear the same things that they fear” (2) the fear that righteous people have for unbelievers. Alternate translation: “you should not fear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1PE	3	15	vgv7	figs-metaphor	Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts	Peter uses **sanctify {the} Lord Christ** to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	3	15	vgv7	figs-metaphor	Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts	Peter uses **sanctify the Lord Christ** to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	15	qjg3	figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	in your hearts	Here, **hearts** refers to the thoughts or emotions of Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “within yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	15	d69e	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἀπολογίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **defense**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to defend your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	15	q8i1	figs-metonymy	τῷ αἰτοῦντι ὑμᾶς λόγον	1		Peter uses **word** to refer to an answer or explanation spoken by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who asks you for a statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -352,7 +350,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	21	owi3	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **removal** and **appeal**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it does not remove dirt from the flesh, but appeals to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	21	hmp9	figs-metonymy	σαρκὸς	1		Here, Peter uses **flesh** to refer to a person’s physical body that is made of **flesh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	21	uz0u	figs-explicit	συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν	1		Here the phrase **a good conscience** means Peter’s readers do not feel guilty because they know that God has forgiven their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “an appeal to God to know that your sins have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	3	21	jti3	figs-infostructure	καὶ ὑμᾶς…νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,	1	through the resurrection of Jesus Christ	Here, **through {the} resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1PE	3	21	jti3	figs-infostructure	καὶ ὑμᾶς…νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,	1	through the resurrection of Jesus Christ	Here, **through the resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1PE	3	21	rixf	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through God raising Jesus Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	22	p5ij	figs-infostructure	ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ, πορευθεὶς εἰς οὐρανὸν, ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων	1		The phrases **having gone** and **having been subjected** indicate that those two clauses describe events that occurred before the event in the first clause in this verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases so that they appear in chronological order. Alternate translation: “after having gone into heaven, with angels and authorities and powers having been subjected to him, he is at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1PE	3	22	g4qh	figs-metonymy	ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ	1	who is at the right hand of God	Here, Peter uses **right hand** to refer to the place located at the right side of God in heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who is at God’s right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -366,7 +364,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	1	yxs5	figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν	1		Here Peter uses **the same way of thinking** to refer to Jesus’ **way of thinking** when he suffered. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with the same way of thinking about suffering that Christ had when he suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	1	d66g	figs-explicit	πέπαυται ἁμαρτίας	1	has ceased from sin	Here, **ceased from sin** means “no longer living with a sinful mindset.” The idea is that suffering because of one’s faith indicates that a person is not living sinfully. Christians are often persecuted by unbelievers because they refuse to act sinfully. This phrase does not mean that Christians who suffer never sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has stopped living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	2	tjdq	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς	1		Here, **in order to** introduces a purpose clause. This could mean: (1) this verse states the purpose for ceasing from sin mentioned at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he will” (2) this verse states the purpose for the command to “arm yourselves” in the previous verse. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “Arm yourselves in order to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-1PE	4	2	d49a	figs-metonymy	τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ…χρόνον	1		Peter uses **time in {the} flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1PE	4	2	d49a	figs-metonymy	τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ…χρόνον	1		Peter uses **time in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	4	2	fsvk	figs-explicit	ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις	1		Here, **desires** refers specifically to sinful **desires**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sinful desires of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	2	gbb6	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις	1	for the desires of men	Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense to refer to humans in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for human desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1PE	4	3	anhj		ἀρκετὸς…ὁ παρεληλυθὼς χρόνος	1		Alternate translation: “enough time has passed”
@@ -384,10 +382,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	6	ql11	figs-activepassive	εὐηγγελίσθη	1	the gospel was preached	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) people preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “people preached the gospel” (2) Christ preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “Christ preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	4	6	hsg6	figs-activepassive	κριθῶσι μὲν κατὰ ἀνθρώπους σαρκὶ	1	they were judged in the flesh according to men	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) men judged and persecuted them during their lives according to human standards. Alternate translation: “men judged them in the flesh by human standards” (2) God judged them as humans during their lives. Alternate translation: “God indeed judged them in the flesh as humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	4	6	gm1m	figs-gendernotations	κατὰ ἀνθρώπους	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “according to people” or “as people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1PE	4	6	s72f	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ	1	they were judged in the flesh according to men	Here Peter uses **in {the} flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1PE	4	6	s72f	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ	1	they were judged in the flesh according to men	Here Peter uses **in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	4	6	encm	figs-explicit	ζῶσι	1		Here, **live** refers to experiencing eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might experience eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	4	6	h154	figs-explicit	ζῶσι…πνεύματι	1		Here, **{the} spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	4	7	e445	figs-explicit	πάντων…τὸ τέλος	1	the end of all things	Here, **the end of all {things}** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	4	6	h154	figs-explicit	ζῶσι…πνεύματι	1		Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	4	7	e445	figs-explicit	πάντων…τὸ τέλος	1	the end of all things	Here, **the end of all things** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	7	qs1t	figs-metaphor	ἤγγικεν	1	has come near	Peter uses **has come near** to refer to something that will happen soon. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	4	7	ubd4	figs-doublet	σωφρονήσατε…καὶ νήψατε	1	be of sound mind, and be sober	The words translated as **sound mind** and **sober** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize the need to think clearly since the end of the world is near. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “be completely clearheaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	4	7	k5hh	figs-metaphor	νήψατε	1	be sober	See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -469,7 +467,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	5	7	c1uu	figs-metaphor	πᾶσαν τὴν μέριμναν ὑμῶν ἐπιρίψαντες ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	having cast all your anxiety on him	Here Peter speaks of **anxiety** as if it were a heavy burden that a person can take off of his back and **cast** onto God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “trusting him with everything that worries you” or “letting him take care of all the things that trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	5	8	wbb5	figs-doublet	νήψατε, γρηγορήσατε	1	Be sober	The words translated as **sober** and **watchful** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize that believers need to be alert since the devil wants to destroy them. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Be completely alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	5	8	k9nt	figs-metaphor	νήψατε	1	Be sober	See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	5	8	tl7i	figs-simile	ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν	1	the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour	Peter speaks of **{the} devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+1PE	5	8	tl7i	figs-simile	ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν	1	the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour	Peter speaks of **the devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	5	9	v4t5	figs-ellipsis	στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	5	9	vwtc	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1		Here, **the faith** could refer to: (1) a person’s trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in the faith that you have” (2) the Christian faith in general. Alternate translation: “in the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	5	9	tusy	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων…ἐπιτελεῖσθαι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufferings**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people are suffering in the same ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -494,7 +492,6 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	5	13	rpf5	figs-activepassive	συνεκλεκτὴ	1	chosen together with you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “one whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	5	13	kc8s		ἀσπάζεται	1	chosen together with you	As was customary in this culture, Peter concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “asks to be remembered by” or “says hello to”
 1PE	5	13	ws2x	figs-metaphor	ὁ υἱός μου	1	my son	Peter refers to Mark as if he were his **son**, because he taught him about Christianity and loved him like a **son**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is like my son” or “my spiritual son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	5	13	d9hx	translate-names	Μᾶρκος	1		**Mark** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1PE	5	14	jqd8	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		**Greet** here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Make it your habit to greet” or “Make it your practice to greet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1PE	5	14	fc7b	translate-symaction	ἐν φιλήματι ἀγάπης	1	a kiss of love	A **kiss** was an action that expressed Christian affection in this culture. It showed the unity of those who belong to Christ. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “with a loving kiss” or “a kiss to show your love for each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 1PE	5	14	i08w	translate-blessing	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν πᾶσιν, τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1		As was customary in his culture, Peter closes his letter with a blessing for his readers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May all you who are in Christ experience peace within yourselves” or “I pray that you all who are in Christ will have peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])

en_tn_62-2PE.tsv

@@ -66,14 +66,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	7	h713	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀγάπην	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “loving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	8	tlhv	grammar-connect-logic-result	ταῦτα γὰρ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχοντα καὶ πλεονάζοντα	1		The word **For** here indicates that Peter is giving a reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Because these things existing and increasing in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	1	8	ecc5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ταῦτα γὰρ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχοντα καὶ πλεονάζοντα, οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν	1		Peter is describing a conditional situation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “For if these things are existing and increasing in you, then they will cause you to be neither barren nor unfruitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-2PE	1	8	jz77	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these {things}** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2PE	1	8	jz77	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	1	8	l7yj	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν	1		Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if he were a field that will not produce a crop. If that is confusing in your language, you could use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “cause you to be neither unproductive nor useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	8	qcav	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in positive terms. Alternate translation: “cause you to produce and bear fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 2PE	1	8	f9qm	figs-doublet	οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους	1		The words **barren** and **unfruitful** mean basically the same thing. In combination with the negatives **neither** and **nor**, they are used together to emphasize that this person will not be unproductive but will experience great benefits from knowing Jesus. If it is confusing in your language to use two words together that mean the same thing, you could just use one word with that meaning. Alternate translation: “not unproductive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2PE	1	8	ppd8	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἐπίγνωσιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in your knowing our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	9	k6lv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that Peter is giving another reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Peter gave a positive reason in [1:8](../01/08.md) and gives a negative reason here. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	1	9	gg2c	figs-genericnoun	ᾧ…μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα, τυφλός ἐστιν	1	he in whom these things are not present	Here, **he** does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does not have these things. Alternate translation: “anyone who does not have these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-2PE	1	9	vycf	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		The phrase **these {things}** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2PE	1	9	vycf	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		The phrase **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	1	9	h6fn	figs-metaphor	τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων	1	is blind, nearsighted	In this metaphor, Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if the person were **blind** or **nearsighted**. He means this in a spiritual sense, that this person cannot see what is spiritually important. If that is confusing in your language, you could use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he … is like a blind or shortsighted person who cannot see their importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	9	xenf	figs-hendiadys	τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων	1		Although the words **blind** and **nearsighted** have similar meanings, **blind** is more extreme than **nearsighted,** and a person cannot be both at the same time. If it is confusing in your language to describe someone using both of these words in this way, you could use a word like “or” between them or show how they might work together. Alternate translation: “he … is blind or nearsighted” or “he … is blindly nearsighted” or “he … is so nearsighted that he is blind to what is spiritually important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 2PE	1	9	i0hq	figs-abstractnouns	λήθην λαβὼν τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **forgetfulness** in this phrase with a verb. Alternate translation: “having forgotten the cleansing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	10	xfdb	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1		Peter is using the term **brothers** as a way to directly address his fellow believers in Jesus. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	10	ot7y	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Peter is using the term **brothers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Be sure that this is clear in your translation so that your readers do not get the impression that Peter is addressing only men. If you use a non-figurative word such as “believers” to translate the metaphor **brothers**, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you retain the metaphor, you could state “my brothers and sisters.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2PE	1	10	raa1	figs-doublet	βεβαίαν ὑμῶν τὴν κλῆσιν καὶ ἐκλογὴν ποιεῖσθαι	1	to make your calling and election sure	The words **calling** and **election** share similar meanings and both refer to God choosing believers to belong to him. Peter uses them together to emphasize this idea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use just one word and provide the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make sure that God has really chosen you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-2PE	1	10	pm78	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες	1		Here, **these {things}** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	1	10	pm78	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες	1		Here, **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	1	10	xx39	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε	1		Peter is describing a conditional situation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “For if you do these things, then you will certainly not ever stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 2PE	1	10	kd2t		οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε	1		The combination of the words **certainly not ever** here expresses strong emphatic negation. Alternate translation: “you will most certainly never stumble”
 2PE	1	10	jcv9	figs-metaphor	οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε	1	you will not ever stumble	Here, **stumble** could mean: (1) abandoning faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “you will certainly not abandon faith in Christ” (2) committing sin. Alternate translation: “you will certainly not practice sinful behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	11	f45v	figs-activepassive	πλουσίως ἐπιχορηγηθήσεται ὑμῖν ἡ εἴσοδος εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον βασιλείαν	1	will be richly provided to you the entry into the eternal kingdom	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God will richly provide to you the entrance into the eternal kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	1	11	k1e4	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον βασιλείαν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verbal phrase, such as “where our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ rules.” Alternate translation: “into the eternal place where our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	12	du69	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Connecting Statement:	Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce the purpose of his letter. In order to encourage his readers to do everything he has said in [1:5–10](../01/05.md), and especially because of the promise in [1:11](../01/11.md), he wants to keep reminding them about these things. Use a natural form in your language to show that this introduces a result or purpose for saying what came before. Alternate translation: “Because these things are very important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	1	12	xxjq	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1		Here, **these {things}** refers back to what Peter has stated in the previous verses, specifically to faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	1	12	xxjq	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1		Here, **these things** refers back to what Peter has stated in the previous verses, specifically to faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	1	12	onqh	figs-activepassive	ἐστηριγμένους ἐν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you learned well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	1	12	l2kh	figs-metaphor	ἐστηριγμένους ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ	1	you are strong in the present truth	Here, **established** is used to refer to one being firmly committed to something. Alternate translation: “you strongly believe the truth that you now have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	12	jys8		ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ	1		Here, **in** has the meaning of “in reference to” or “with regard to.” Alternate translation: “in reference to the present truth”
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	14	yzag		καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, ἐδήλωσέν μοι	1		Suggested footnote: “Peter may be referring here to what Jesus told him, as recorded in John 21:18–19.”
 2PE	1	15	aau5	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ καὶ	1		**Likewise** here could mean that: (1) this statement is in addition to what Peter just said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Moreover” (2) this statement is contrasting what he just said in the previous verse with what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 2PE	1	15	xz8d	figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστοτε, ἔχειν ὑμᾶς…τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	1	15	c2iw	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1	of these things	Here, **these {things}** refers to what Peter has said in the previous verses, specifically the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	1	15	c2iw	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1	of these things	Here, **these things** refers to what Peter has said in the previous verses, specifically the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	1	15	ivw6	figs-euphemism	μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν ἔξοδον	1	after my departure	Peter uses the word **departure** as a nice way to speak of his death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more common euphemism in your language, or state it directly. Alternate translation: “after my passing” or “after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 2PE	1	16	k3rm	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	**For** indicates that in [1:16–21](../01/16.md) Peter explains to the believers why they should remember “these things,” which were mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	1	16	vc99	figs-exclusive	οὐ…ἐγνωρίσαμεν	1	we have not followed	Here, **we** refers to Peter and the other apostles. It does not refer to his readers. Alternate translation: “we apostles did not follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -203,23 +203,20 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	5	f000		οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1		As in [2:4](../02/04.md), the word **spare** here means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing”
 2PE	2	5	t2w9	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1		Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not spare” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	5	iw5v	figs-idiom	ὄγδοον, Νῶε	1		Here, **eighth** is an idiom used to refer to a group of eight people. It means that Noah was one of only eight people in the ancient world whom God did not destroy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the literal meaning of the idiom. Alternate translation: “eight people, including Noah” or “with seven others, Noah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-2PE	2	5	xrsw	translate-names	Νῶε	1		**Noah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2PE	2	5	llfu	figs-distinguish	Νῶε, δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα	1		This phrase gives us more information about Noah. It tells us that Noah proclaimed **righteousness** to the ungodly people of the ancient world. It does not distinguish this Noah from any other person named Noah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2PE	2	5	kro6	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. In this context, the term refers righteous deeds. Alternate translation: “a preacher of righteous deeds” or “a preacher of how to act rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	5	xy9u	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα	1		Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) a preacher who is characterized by righteousness. Alternate translation: “a preacher who is righteous” (2) a preacher who tells others to live righteously. Alternate translation: “one who urged others to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-2PE	2	5	enbs		κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας	1		This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, when he **brought a flood upon {the} world**, as it is translated in the UST.
+2PE	2	5	enbs		κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας	1		This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, when he **brought a flood upon the world**, as it is translated in the UST.
 2PE	2	5	z814	figs-possession	κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν	1		Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) the human content of the ancient world. Alternate translation: “the world that contained ungodly people” (2) the world as being characterized by ungodliness. Alternate translation: “the ungodly world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	6	xhcb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1		Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	6	ap1j	figs-infostructure	καὶ πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and he condemned the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to destruction, having reduced them to ashes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 2PE	2	6	gp3e		πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας	1	having reduced the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes	This phrase indicates the means by which God destroyed **Sodom and Gomorrah**. Alternate translation: “by means of reducing the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes”
-2PE	2	6	xi0n	translate-names	Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας	1		**Sodom** and **Gomorrah** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2PE	2	6	xfyx	writing-pronouns	καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν	1		Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God condemned them to destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	6	w1b9	figs-abstractnouns	καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **destruction** by translating the idea behind it with an verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “he condemned them to be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	6	hgt7	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὑπόδειγμα μελλόντων ἀσεβέσιν τεθεικώς	1	an example of what is going to happen to the ungodly	This clause indicates the result of what happened in the previous clauses of the verse. God’s destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah resulted in them being an **example** and a warning of what happens to others who disobey God. Alternate translation: “with the result that God set them as an example of the things that will happen to the ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	2	6	eocy	figs-genericnoun	ἀσεβέσιν	1		Here, **ungodly** refers to wicked people in general, not to one specific wicked person. Alternate translation: “to an ungodly person” or “to ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 2PE	2	7	fm1p	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	7	zif8	writing-pronouns	ἐρύσατο	1	the behavior of the lawless in their sensuality	Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God rescued” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-2PE	2	7	xjq6	translate-names	Λὼτ	1	Connecting Statement:	**Lot** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2PE	2	7	uknf	figs-distinguish	καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1	Connecting Statement:	This clause is giving more information about **Lot**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “He was being oppressed by the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2PE	2	7	mort	figs-activepassive	καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness oppressed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	7	x8vy	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1		Here, **by** could refer to: (1) the thing that was oppressing Lot, as in the ULT. (2) the reason why Lot was oppressed. Alternate translation: “because of the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -266,7 +263,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	12	x14h	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν	1		This is a purpose clause. The word **for** here indicates that what follows it is the purpose for which these animals have been born. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of capture and destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2PE	2	12	erfh	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **capture** and **destruction** by stating the ideas behind them with verbs. Alternate translation: “in order to capture and destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	12	ipd4		ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν βλασφημοῦντες	1		This clause could refer to: (1) more information about the false teachers. Alternate translation: “who slander those things in which they are ignorant” (2) the reason the false teachers will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “because they slander those things in which they are ignorant”
-2PE	2	12	c4b8		ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν	1		Here, **those {things}** could refer to: (1) the “glorious ones” of [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “who slander those of whom they are ignorant” (2) the Christian teachings that these false teachers are rejecting. Alternate translation: “who slander the teachings of which they are ignorant”
+2PE	2	12	c4b8		ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν	1		Here, **those things** could refer to: (1) the “glorious ones” of [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “who slander those of whom they are ignorant” (2) the Christian teachings that these false teachers are rejecting. Alternate translation: “who slander the teachings of which they are ignorant”
 2PE	2	12	xzcp	writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν καὶ φθαρήσονται	1		Here, the pronouns **they** and **their** refer to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers will also be destroyed in their destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	12	jw8d	figs-activepassive	καὶ φθαρήσονται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will also destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	12	h4v8		καὶ φθαρήσονται	1		Here, **also** is used for emphasis and may be translated as “indeed” or “surely.” Alternate translation: “they will indeed be destroyed” or “they will surely be destroyed”
@@ -291,13 +288,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	14	sbp2	figs-abstractnouns	καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **covetousness** with a verb. Alternate translation: “having training their hearts to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	14	sv4r	figs-idiom	κατάρας τέκνα	1		Peter is using a Hebrew idiom in which a person is said to be a “child” of the thing that characterizes that person. Here, **children of cursing** refers to people who are cursed by God. He is not speaking of people who curse others. Alternate translation: “accursed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2PE	2	14	c7cc	figs-exclamations	κατάρας τέκνα	1		These words are an exclamation that emphasizes the wickedness of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are such cursed children!” or “What cursed children they are!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-2PE	2	15	et62	figs-metaphor	καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν	1	abandoning the right way, led astray, having followed	Peter uses the metaphor **Abandoning {the} straight way** to give an image of walkers leaving a certain pathway. He speaks of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on the Lord’s path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	2	15	ky5q	figs-idiom	εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν	1	the right way	Here, **{the} straight way** refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the right way of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2PE	2	15	et62	figs-metaphor	καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν	1	abandoning the right way, led astray, having followed	Peter uses the metaphor **Abandoning the straight way** to give an image of walkers leaving a certain pathway. He speaks of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on the Lord’s path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	2	15	ky5q	figs-idiom	εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν	1	the right way	Here, **the straight way** refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the right way of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2PE	2	15	x3k9	figs-metaphor	ἐπλανήθησαν	1		Here, Peter continues the path metaphor from the previous clause. He describes the wicked lifestyles of the false teachers as if they had been **led astray** from the straight path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “they have been behaving wickedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	15	b39g	figs-activepassive	ἐπλανήθησαν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they went astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	15	xkt6	figs-explicit	ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ, ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν	1		In this verse, Peter compares the false teachers to **Balaam**. Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, Balaam was hired by wicked kings to curse the Israelites. When God did not allow Balaam to do so, he used wicked women to seduce the Israelites into sexual immorality and idol worship so that God would punish them for their disobedience. Balaam did these wicked things because he wanted to be paid by the wicked kings, but he was eventually killed by the Israelites when they conquered the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation, as a statement: “following the way of Balaam son of Bosor, who loved the wages of unrighteousness so much that he led the Israelites into immorality and idolatry in order to receive money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	2	15	xi4q	figs-metaphor	ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ	1		Here, Peter uses the word **followed** to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “having imitated the way of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	2	15	v9lx	translate-names	Βαλαὰμ…Βοσὸρ	1	the right way	**Balaam** and **Bosor** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+2PE	2	15	v9lx	translate-names	Βαλαὰμ…Βοσὸρ	1	the right way	**Bosor** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2PE	2	15	alxl	figs-metaphor	τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ	1		Here, Peter uses **the way of Balaam** to refer to how Balaam lived his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “the manner of living of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	15	v3wn	writing-pronouns	ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν	1		Here, the pronoun**who** refers to Balaam. It does not refer to Bosor, nor to the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this directly. If you begin a new sentence, you will have to replace the comma with a period. Alternate translation: “Balaam loved the wages of unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	15	befr	figs-possession	ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **wages** that are characterized by **unrighteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “who loved the unrighteous wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -339,9 +336,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	20	zxcf	figs-possession	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction **and** indicates that **our** also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” Alternate translation: “of the person who rules over us and saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	20	ih4w	figs-activepassive	τούτοις…πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can supply the doer of the action from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “these things having entangled them again; these things have overcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	20	ygag	figs-metaphor	πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες	1		Here, Peter speaks of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	2	20	noa9	writing-pronouns	τούτοις	1		Here, the pronoun **these {things}** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	2	20	noa9	writing-pronouns	τούτοις	1		Here, the pronoun **these things** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	20	d6ra	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](../02/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-2PE	2	20	d42g	figs-nominaladj	γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων	1	the last has become worse for them than the first	Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **{things}** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+2PE	2	20	d42g	figs-nominaladj	γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων	1	the last has become worse for them than the first	Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 2PE	2	21	x7gd	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** indicates the reason why the last condition of the false teachers was worse than their first condition, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	2	21	e3dv	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	21	xg05	figs-possession	τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the righteous way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -351,7 +348,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	21	j7s6	figs-genericnoun	τῆς…ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	2		Peter uses **the holy commandment** to speak of the commands of God in general. He is not referring to one specific **commandment**. These commands were **delivered** by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the holy commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 2PE	2	21	xwid	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς…ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	2		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **commandment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	21	blr5	figs-activepassive	τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	1	the holy commandment delivered to them	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that the apostles delivered to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2PE	2	22	hqr3	writing-pronouns	συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας	1	This has happened to them according to the true proverb	Here, **{This}** refers to the **proverb** Peter states later in this verse. It does not refer back to a statement from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “What this true proverb says has happened to them” or “This true proverb describes what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	2	22	hqr3	writing-pronouns	συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας	1	This has happened to them according to the true proverb	Here, **This** refers to the **proverb** Peter states later in this verse. It does not refer back to a statement from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “What this true proverb says has happened to them” or “This true proverb describes what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	22	pc36	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	This has happened to them according to the true proverb	Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	22	h42r	writing-proverbs	κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου	1	A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud	Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate what the false teachers have done. These proverbs make a figurative comparison: Just as a dog returns to eat its own vomit and a washed pig rolls in the mud again, so these false teachers, who once stopped living a sinful life, have now gone back to living sinfully. Although they knew “the way of righteousness,” they went back to doing the things that defile them morally and spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by translating these proverbs as similes. Alternate translation: “They are like dogs that eat their own vomit or like clean pigs that go back to rolling in the mud.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
 2PE	2	22	xgjp	translate-unknown	κύων	1		A **dog** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **dog** was an insult. If dogs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -386,7 +383,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	4	u54w	figs-explicit	τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **his coming** refers to the return of the Lord Jesus to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the return of Jesus to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	3	4	xfkr	figs-metaphor	ἀφ’ ἧς γὰρ οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν	1		Here, **the fathers** is used. It could refer to: (1) the Old Testament ancestors of the Israelites, often called “the patriarchs.” Alternate translation: “For since Israel’s patriarchs fell asleep” (2) those leaders of the first generation of Christians who had died by the time Peter wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “For since the first Christian leaders fell asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	4	t6hl	figs-euphemism	οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν	1	the fathers fell asleep	Here, **fell asleep** is a euphemism meaning they died. You could either use a similar euphemism for death in your language or say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the fathers died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-2PE	3	4	c2en	figs-hyperbole	πάντα οὕτως διαμένει ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως	1	all things continue in the same way from the beginning of creation	Here, **all {things}** is an exaggeration the mockers use to argue that nothing in the world has ever changed, so it cannot be true that Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+2PE	3	4	c2en	figs-hyperbole	πάντα οὕτως διαμένει ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως	1	all things continue in the same way from the beginning of creation	Here, **all things** is an exaggeration the mockers use to argue that nothing in the world has ever changed, so it cannot be true that Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2PE	3	4	yue7	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως	1	from the beginning of creation	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **creation** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “since God created the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	5	g2ph	figs-activepassive	λανθάνει γὰρ αὐτοὺς τοῦτο, θέλοντας	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For they willingly hide this from themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	5	xgsy	figs-ellipsis	θέλοντας ὅτι οὐρανοὶ ἦσαν ἔκπαλαι	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “that the heavens existed long ago by the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -407,7 +404,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	7	y3gg	figs-abstractnouns	ἡμέραν κρίσεως καὶ ἀπωλείας τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **judgment** and **destruction** by stating the ideas behind them with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “the day when God judges mankind and destroys the ungodly men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	7	zxxk	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of the ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2PE	3	8	s5cy		ἓν…τοῦτο μὴ λανθανέτω ὑμᾶς	1		Alternate translation: “do not fail to understand this one fact” or “do not ignore this one thing”
-2PE	3	8	enh9		ὅτι μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη	1	that one day with the Lord is like a thousand years	Here, **with {the} Lord** means “in the judgment of the Lord.” Alternate translation: “that from the Lord’s point of view, one day is like a thousand years”
+2PE	3	8	enh9		ὅτι μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη	1	that one day with the Lord is like a thousand years	Here, **with the Lord** means “in the judgment of the Lord.” Alternate translation: “that from the Lord’s point of view, one day is like a thousand years”
 2PE	3	8	o1wc	figs-doublet	μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη, καὶ χίλια ἔτη ὡς ἡμέρα μία	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God does not perceive of time the same way that humans do. What might seem to be a short or long time for people would not seem so for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “one day and 1,000 years are alike for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2PE	3	9	zv9m	figs-metonymy	οὐ βραδύνει Κύριος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1		Here, **promise** refers to the fulfillment of the **promise** that Jesus will return. See how you translated it in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “The Lord does not delay to fulfill his promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2PE	3	9	dzq8	figs-explicit	ὥς τινες βραδύτητα ἡγοῦνται	1	as some consider slowness	Here, **some** refers to the “mockers” introduced in [3:3](../03/03.md) and anyone else who believed that the Lord is slow to fulfill his promises, because Jesus had not yet returned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as some, such as these mockers, consider slowness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -426,7 +423,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	10	z9f6		γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται	1		Here, **found** indicates that the removal of the heavens and elements will leave the earth and what has been done on it exposed for God to see and judge. Alternate translation: “the earth and the deeds in it will be exposed” or “the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed”
 2PE	3	11	buq4	grammar-connect-logic-result	τούτων οὕτως πάντων λυομένων	1		This clause indicates the reason for the expected result that follows in the rest of the verse. Peter tells his readers that God’s future destruction of heaven and earth should result in them living holy and godly lives. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things being thus destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	3	11	nq63	figs-activepassive	τούτων οὕτως πάντων λυομένων	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Since God will thus destroy all of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2PE	3	11	tpfg	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1		Here, **these {things}** refers to the heavens, the elements, and the earth mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	3	11	tpfg	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1		Here, **these things** refers to the heavens, the elements, and the earth mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	3	11	t8wx	figs-rquestion	ποταποὺς δεῖ ὑπάρχειν ὑμᾶς?	1		Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this emphasis by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. If it you translate these words as a statement, then you will need to change the question mark at the end of the next verse into a period. Alternate translation: “it is certainly necessary for you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 2PE	3	11	qoui	figs-ellipsis	ἐν ἁγίαις ἀναστροφαῖς καὶ εὐσεβείαις	1		Peter is leaving out words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “living with holy behaviors and godly acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	3	12	bqnn		προσδοκῶντας καὶ σπεύδοντας	1		Here, **waiting for and hastening** are two things Peter wanted his readers to do while also living holy and godly lives, as stated in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “while expecting and hastening”
@@ -442,7 +439,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	13	r5qo	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ	1	in which righteousness dwells	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **righteousness** by translating the idea behind it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “in which everyone is righteous” or “in which everyone does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	14	d178	grammar-connect-logic-result	διό	1		Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said. He is referring specifically to the discussion of the coming day of the Lord given in [3:10–13](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “Because of these reasons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	3	14	qjca	figs-explicit	ἀγαπητοί	1		Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2PE	3	14	ndxd	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these {things}** refers back to the events related to the coming day of the Lord, which Peter described in [3:10–13](../03/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	3	14	ndxd	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers back to the events related to the coming day of the Lord, which Peter described in [3:10–13](../03/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	3	14	fj1l	figs-activepassive	σπουδάσατε ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι αὐτῷ εὑρεθῆναι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “be diligent so that God will find you spotless and blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	14	s141	figs-doublet	ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι	1	spotless and blameless	The words **spotless** and **blameless** share similar meanings. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “completely pure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2PE	3	14	byr8	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronoun **him** could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “by Jesus” (2) God. Alternate translation: “by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -454,7 +451,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	15	nnd7	figs-activepassive	κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν	1	according to the wisdom having been given to him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “according to the wisdom that God gave to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	15	esr7	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **wisdom** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective, such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “according to the wise words having been given to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	16	zzko	figs-explicit	ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐπιστολαῖς	1		Here, the context suggests that Paul is the author of **the letters**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in all Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2PE	3	16	wil1	writing-pronouns	λαλῶν ἐν αὐταῖς περὶ τούτων	1		Here, **these {things}** could refer to: (1) the events related to the day of the Lord discussed in [3:10–13](../03/10.md) and called “these things” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (2) the need to live godly lives and consider that God’s patience is for saving people, as discussed in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things I have just said about living blamelessly and about God’s patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	3	16	wil1	writing-pronouns	λαλῶν ἐν αὐταῖς περὶ τούτων	1		Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) the events related to the day of the Lord discussed in [3:10–13](../03/10.md) and called “these things” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (2) the need to live godly lives and consider that God’s patience is for saving people, as discussed in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things I have just said about living blamelessly and about God’s patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	3	16	z4cj	writing-pronouns	ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν	1		Here, **which** refers to the things in Paul’s letters that are difficult to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The ignorant and unstable ones distort these difficult things found in Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	3	16	weh2	figs-metaphor	ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν	1		Here, **distort** is used to describe changing the meaning of a statement in order to give a false meaning like twisting something so that it changes shape. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “which the ignorant and unstable ones interpret falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	16	sg60	figs-explicit	ὡς καὶ τὰς λοιπὰς Γραφὰς	1		Here, **the other scriptures** refers to both the entire Old Testament and the New Testament texts that had been written by the time Peter wrote this letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as also the other authoritative scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -475,4 +472,4 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	18	qlbc	figs-abstractnouns	γνώσει	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **knowledge** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	18	z13o	figs-possession	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction and indicates that our also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” If you include both of these phrases in your translation, then you will also need to put a comma at the end of the second phrase. Alternate translation: “of the person who rules over us and saves us,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	3	18	bpnr	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **glory** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “May everyone glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	3	18	u1g9	figs-idiom	εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος	1		Here, **to {the} day of {the} age** is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” or “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2PE	3	18	u1g9	figs-idiom	εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος	1		Here, **to the day of the age** is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” or “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

en_tn_63-1JN.tsv

@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	intro	zjj9			0		# 1 John 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (2:1–17, continuing from 1:5)<br>2. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)<br>3. Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–29, continues through 3:10)<br><br>In order to show that John is writing something like poetry in [2:12–14](../02/12.md), some translations set the statements in those verses farther to the right than the rest of the text, and they begin a new line at the start of each statement.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Antichrist<br><br>In [2:18](../02/18.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md), John writes both about a specific person called the Antichrist and about many people who will be “antichrists.” The word “antichrist” means “opposed to Christ.” The Antichrist is a person who will come just before the return of Jesus and imitate Jesus’ work, but he will do that for evil purposes. Before that person comes, there will be many other people who work against Christ. They too are called “antichrists,” but as a description rather than as a name. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])<br><br>## Important textual issues in this chapter<br><br>In [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts read “you all know,” and that is the reading that ULT follows. However, other ancient manuscripts read “you know all things.” It seems more likely, based on everything else in the letter, that “you all know” is the correct original reading, since John is countering the claim of false teachers to know more than other believers. The reading “you know all things” seems to have arisen because copyists felt a need to have an object for the verb “know.” Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1JN	2	1	j043		τεκνία μου	1	My little children	Here and in several other places in the book, John uses the diminutive form of the word **children** as an affectionate form of address. Alternate translation: “My dear children”
 1JN	2	1	v57g	figs-metaphor	τεκνία μου	1	My little children	John is using the word **children** to describe the believers to whom he is writing. They are under his spiritual care, and so he regards them in that sense as if they were his own children. You could translate this in a non-figurative way, or you could represent the metaphor as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	2	1	p49e		ταῦτα γράφω	1	I am writing these things	Here, **these {things}** refers generally to everything that John has written about in the letter so far. Alternate translation: “I am writing this letter”
+1JN	2	1	p49e		ταῦτα γράφω	1	I am writing these things	Here, **these things** refers generally to everything that John has written about in the letter so far. Alternate translation: “I am writing this letter”
 1JN	2	1	j044	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	And	The word **And** here introduces a contrast between what John hopes to achieve by writing, that these believers will not sin, and what might happen, that one of them might sin. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1JN	2	1	bi4g	figs-hypo	ἐάν τις ἁμάρτῃ, Παράκλητον ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα	1	if anyone should sin, we have an advocate with the Father	John is describing a hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “suppose someone does sin. Then we have an advocate with the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	2	1	stj2	figs-explicit	Παράκλητον ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν	1	we have an advocate with the Father, Jesus Christ	John assumes that his readers will know that an **advocate** is someone who takes a person’s side and pleads on his behalf. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ will take our side and ask God the Father to forgive us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	21	j126		πᾶν ψεῦδος ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἔστιν	1	every lie is not from the truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by clarifying it by making the subject negative and the verb positive. Alternate translation: “no lie is from the truth”
 1JN	2	21	nruw		ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας	1		This second occurrence of **the truth** could refer to: (1) The same as the first occurrence. Alternate translation: “part of God’s true message” (2) God, who is the source of all truth. Alternate translation: “from God, the One who is true”
 1JN	2	22	d71l	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν ὁ ψεύστης, εἰ μὴ ὁ ἀρνούμενος ὅτι Ἰησοῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ Χριστός?	1	Who is the liar, if not the one who denies that Jesus is the Christ?	John is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “Anyone who denies that Jesus is the Messiah is certainly a liar!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1JN	2	22	d4u7	figs-doublenegatives	ὁ ἀρνούμενος ὅτι Ἰησοῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ Χριστός	1	the one who denies that Jesus is the Christ	For emphasis, John is using a double negative in Greek, specifically, a negative verb (**denies**) with a negative particle, “not.” In English, it would come out as, “the one who denies that Jesus is not the Christ.” In Greek, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. But in English, the meaning would inaccurately be positive, which is why ULT uses only one negative. It leaves out “not” and says **the one who denies that Jesus is the Christ**. However, if your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1JN	2	22	d4u7	figs-doublenegatives	ὁ ἀρνούμενος ὅτι Ἰησοῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ Χριστός	1	the one who denies that Jesus is the Christ	For emphasis, John is using a double negative in Greek, specifically, a negative verb (**denies**) with a negative particle, “not.” In English, it would come out as, “the one who denies that Jesus is not the Christ.” In Greek, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. But in English, the meaning would inaccurately be positive, which is why ULT uses only one negative. It leaves out “not” and says **the one denying that Jesus is the Christ**. However, if your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1JN	2	22	j128	figs-genericnoun	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἀντίχριστος	1	This one is the antichrist	John is not referring here to the ultimate **antichrist** who will appear at the end of earthly history. John does not have a specific person in view here. Rather, he is speaking generally of all people who oppose Christ. See how you translated the term **antichrist** in [2:18](../02/18.md). Alternate translation: “Such a person is the enemy of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1JN	2	22	z4t1	figs-explicit	ὁ ἀρνούμενος τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱόν	1	the one who denies the Father and the Son	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly why John says this about these people. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By denying that Jesus is the Messiah, he is denying both God the Father, who sent Jesus to be the Messiah, and Jesus his Son, whom he sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	2	22	pth9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱόν	1	the Father and the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -334,7 +334,6 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	11	j183	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	1	from the beginning	John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the time when the people to whom he is writing first heard about or first believed in Jesus. See how you translated this phrase in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “ever since you first heard about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	3	12	frz9	figs-ellipsis	οὐ καθὼς Κάϊν	1	not like Cain	John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and we should not be like Cain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1JN	3	12	w83v	figs-explicit	Κάϊν…ἔσφαξεν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Cain, who … killed his brother	John assumes that his readers will know that **Cain** was a son of the first man and woman, Adam and Eve. As the book of Genesis describes, Cain was jealous of his younger **brother** Abel and murdered him. If your readers might not know this, you could express this explicitly in a footnote or by putting the names of his parents and brother in the text. Alternate translation: “Cain, the son of the first man and woman, Adam and Eve, … murdered his younger brother Abel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1JN	3	12	j184	translate-names	Κάϊν	1	Cain	**Cain** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1JN	3	12	j185		ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ ἦν	1	who was from the evil one	This is similar to the phrase “from the devil” in [3:8](../03/08.md). See how you translated that phrase. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the evil one” or “who was influenced by the evil one”
 1JN	3	12	j186	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	the evil one	John is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1JN	3	12	j187	figs-metonymy	τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	the evil one	John is speaking of the devil by association with the way that he is **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -399,7 +398,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	21	j221	figs-abstractnouns	παρρησίαν ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Θεόν	1	we have confidence toward God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **confidence** with an adverb such as “confidently.” Alternate translation: “we can pray to God confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	3	22	j222	figs-explicit	ὅτι τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηροῦμεν, καὶ τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ ποιοῦμεν	1	because we keep his commandments and we do the pleasing things before him	John is not saying that we **receive** **whatever we ask** in return for obeying God’s commandments and doing what pleases him. Our obedience does not obligate God to give us what we ask for. Our obedience is simply what God has a right to expect from us. Rather, the word **because** reaches back to the statement earlier in this sentence, in the previous verse, that “we have confidence toward God,” that is, we can pray to God confidently. Living in obedience and doing what pleases God gives us confidence to ask for things according to his will. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly by starting a new sentence here that refers back to that statement and explains how John’s statement in this verse relates to it. Alternate translation: “We can pray confidently like this because we obey God’s commandments and do what pleases him, and that assures us that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	3	22	j223	figs-idiom	τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηροῦμεν	1	we keep his commandments	As in [2:3](../02/03.md), the word **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “we obey his commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	3	22	j224	figs-nominaladj	τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1	we do the pleasing things before him	John is using the adjective **pleasing** as a noun. ULT adds **{things}** to show this. (The word is plural.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1JN	3	22	j224	figs-nominaladj	τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1	we do the pleasing things before him	John is using the adjective **pleasing** as a noun. ULT adds **things** to show this. (The word is plural.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1JN	3	22	p3ga	figs-metaphor	τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1	the pleasing things before him	The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person. In this case, **before him** indicates “in God’s sight.” Seeing, for its part, represents attention and judgment. So this means the things that God regards as pleasing. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” or “what God considers to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	23	irb3	writing-pronouns	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ	1	this is his commandment … as he gave us commandment	The pronoun **his** refers to God in this verse. Alternate translation: “this is what God has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	3	23	j225	figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of his Son Jesus Christ	As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “in Jesus Christ his Son and what he has done for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -599,7 +598,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	5	12	j329	figs-metaphor	ἔχει τὴν ζωήν…τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει	1	has life … does not have life	Since both groups of people are physically alive, John means this in a spiritual sense. As in [4:9](../04/09.md), he is likely referring to what he calls “eternal life” in [3:15](../03/15.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). See how you translated that term in those verses. Alternate translation: “has power from God to live as a new person now and will live forever in God’s presence after death … does not have power from God to live as a new person now and will not live forever in God’s presence after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	5	12	j330	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν…τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son … the Son of God	**Son** and **Son of God** are important titles for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	5	13	rr7y	checking/headings		0		If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Eternal Life with the True God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
-1JN	5	13	ezl8	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these {things}** refers back to everything that John has written so far in the letter. Alternate translation: “all of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	5	13	ezl8	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers back to everything that John has written so far in the letter. Alternate translation: “all of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	5	13	wns6	figs-metonymy	τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	you, the ones believing in the name of the Son of God	As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “who believe in the Son of God and what he has done for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	5	13	gg32	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	5	13	j331	figs-metaphor	ὅτι ζωὴν ἔχετε αἰώνιον	1	that you have eternal life	The emphasis in this verse seems to be more on the future aspect of the expression **eternal life**. Alternate translation: “that you will live forever in God’s presence after you die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

en_tn_66-JUD.tsv

@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ JUD	1	4	tmju	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀσέλγειαν	1		If it would be he
 JUD	1	4	ws1b		τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, ἀρνούμενοι	1	denying our only Master and Lord, Jesus Christ	Alternate translation: “teaching that Jesus Christ is not our Master and Lord”
 JUD	1	4	p7g6	figs-possession	τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν	1		Here, **Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction **and** indicates that **our** also applies back to **only Master**, meaning “the person who owns us.” Alternate translation: “the only person who owns us and rules over us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JUD	1	5	pg0e	figs-infostructure	ὑπομνῆσαι…ὑμᾶς βούλομαι, εἰδότας ὑμᾶς ἅπαξ πάντα	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of the first two clauses. Alternate translation: “you knowing all things once for all, I want to remind you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JUD	1	5	fa5e	figs-explicit	πάντα	1		Here, **all {things}** refers specifically to all the information of which Jude is going to remind his readers. It does not mean everything there is to know about God or everything in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these things of which I am reminding you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JUD	1	5	fa5e	figs-explicit	πάντα	1		Here, **all things** refers specifically to all the information of which Jude is going to remind his readers. It does not mean everything there is to know about God or everything in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these things of which I am reminding you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JUD	1	5	xiss	translate-textvariants	ὅτι Ἰησοῦς	1		Here, some ancient manuscripts have, “that the Lord.” See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the Introduction to Jude to decide which phrase to use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 JUD	1	5	z1h9		λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας	1		This could mean that: (1) Jude is indicating the timing of the event described in this clause, in which case the timing is made clear by the occurrence of “afterward” in the next clause. (2) Jude is making a contrast between what Jesus did in this clause and what he did in the next. Alternate translation: “although he saved a people out of the land of Egypt”
 JUD	1	5	f4mm	figs-explicit	λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας	1		If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly who the people were that he **saved**. Alternate translation: “having saved the people of Israel out of the land of Egypt” or “having saved the Israelites out of the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ JUD	1	9	lxf3	figs-possession	κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημ
 JUD	1	10	h6sq	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1		Here, **these ones** refers to the false teachers introduced in verse [4](../01/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	10	fjm5		ὅσα…οὐκ οἴδασιν	1	what they do not understand	This word **what** could refer to: (1) the spiritual realm referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the spiritual realm, which they do not understand” (2) the glorious ones mentioned in verse [8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the glorious ones, which they do not understand”
 JUD	1	10	q640	figs-simile	ὅσα…φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται	2		This clause refers to the sexual immorality of the false teachers, who thoughtlessly live according to their natural sexual desires, the way animals do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this simile by translating the simile in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “what they naturally understand, unrestrained sexual desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-JUD	1	10	x35l	writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτοις	1		Here, **these {things}** refers back to “what they understand by instinct,” which is sexually immoral acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by these sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JUD	1	10	x35l	writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτοις	1		Here, **these things** refers back to “what they understand by instinct,” which is sexually immoral acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by these sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	10	z0n7	figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται	1		If your language does not use the passive form **are being destroyed**, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “these things are destroying them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JUD	1	11	b33e	figs-idiom	οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς	1		The phrase **Woe to them** is the opposite of “blessed are you.” It indicates that bad things are going to happen to the people being addressed, because they have displeased God. Alternate translation: “How terrible it is for them” or “Trouble will come to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JUD	1	11	j3g9	figs-metaphor	τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν	1		Here, **have gone in the way** is a metaphor for “have lived in the same way as.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “they have lived the same way Cain lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -94,9 +94,7 @@ JUD	1	13	djm4	figs-activepassive	οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους
 JUD	1	13	n4oc	writing-pronouns	οἷς	1		Here, **whom** refers to the false teachers that Jude called “wandering stars” in the previous phrase. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that this refers to the false teachers. Alternate translation: “false teachers for whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	13	iast		ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους	1		Here, **gloom of darkness** could mean: (1) the gloom is characterized by darkness. Alternate translation: “the dark gloom” (2) the gloom is identical to the darkness. Alternate translation: “the gloom, which is darkness.”
 JUD	1	13	oey6	figs-metaphor	ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους	1		Here Jude uses **gloom** and **darkness** to refer to hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor directly. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JUD	1	14	crwg	translate-names	Ἑνὼχ	1		**Enoch** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JUD	1	14	e5wv		ἕβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ	1		Since **Adam** is considered to be the first generation of mankind, Enoch is the seventh generation.
-JUD	1	14	br8e	translate-names	Ἀδὰμ	1		**Adam** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JUD	1	14	marg	writing-pronouns	τούτοις	1		Here, **these ones** refers to the false teachers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “about these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	14	yenq	writing-quotations	λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JUD	1	14	lu2y	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I have to say!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -108,7 +106,7 @@ JUD	1	15	moys	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ποιῆσαι κρίσιν…καὶ
 JUD	1	15	bl4q	figs-abstractnouns	ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **judgment** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	15	qeei	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσαν ψυχὴν	1		Here, **soul** refers to a person. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JUD	1	15	twxy	figs-possession	τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν	1		Here Jude is using the possessive form to describe **works** that are characterized by **ungodliness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “ungodly works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JUD	1	15	y4y5		τῶν σκληρῶν	1		Here, **harsh {things}** refers to harsh statements that sinners speak slanderously against the Lord. Alternate translation: “the harsh words” or “the offensive statements”
+JUD	1	15	y4y5		τῶν σκληρῶν	1		Here, **harsh things** refers to harsh statements that sinners speak slanderously against the Lord. Alternate translation: “the harsh words” or “the offensive statements”
 JUD	1	15	d6hy	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here the pronoun **him** could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “Jesus” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God” The option you choose must agree with your choice for the meaning of “Lord” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	16	a4le	writing-pronouns	οὗτοί	1		Here, **These ones** refers to the false teachers that Jude first introduced in verse [4](../01/04.md) and has discussed throughout the letter. Since Jude shifted in the previous verse to describing the judgment of everyone who does wicked deeds, it may be helpful for you to inform your readers that this verse returns to specifically focusing on the false teachers. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	16	zs28		εἰσιν γογγυσταί μεμψίμοιροι	1		Here the terms **murmurers** and **complainers** refer to two different ways of expressing discontent or unhappiness. While **grumblers** are people who speak their complaints quietly, **complainers** speak them openly. When the Israelites were traveling in the wilderness after leaving Egypt, they were often punished by God for grumbling and complaining against him and their leaders, which is evidently what these false teachers were doing in Jude’s day. Alternate translation: “grumble quietly to themselves and complain loudly”
@@ -116,7 +114,7 @@ JUD	1	16	z5bn	figs-metaphor	πορευόμενοι	1		Here Jude uses **going** t
 JUD	1	16	jhrq		τὰς ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν	1		Here, **lusts** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “their sinful desires”
 JUD	1	16	xum2		τὸ στόμα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ	1		Here Jude uses the singular **mouth** in a distributive way. If this would be confusing to your readers, you could express this explicitly or use a plural noun and verb. Alternate translation: “the mouth of each of them speaks” or “their mouths speak”
 JUD	1	16	xuf0	figs-metonymy	τὸ στόμα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ	1	their mouth speaks	Here, **mouth** represents the person who is speaking. Alternate translation: “they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JUD	1	16	eaf2		λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα	1	speaks boastful things	Here, **boastful {things}** refers to arrogant statements about themselves that these false teachers were making. Alternate translation: “boasts about themselves” or “speaks boastful statements”
+JUD	1	16	eaf2		λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα	1	speaks boastful things	Here, **boastful things** refers to arrogant statements about themselves that these false teachers were making. Alternate translation: “boasts about themselves” or “speaks boastful statements”
 JUD	1	16	w3ma	figs-idiom	θαυμάζοντες πρόσωπα	1		This is an idiom that means to show favoritism toward someone or to flatter someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “favoring people” or “flattering people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JUD	1	16	j8rh	figs-metonymy	θαυμάζοντες πρόσωπα	1		Here, **faces** refers to the people they are flattering. Alternate translation: “admiring people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JUD	1	17	vpgz	figs-explicit	ἀγαπητοί	1		Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Jude is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. See how you translated this in verse [3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])